Micom P631, P632, P633, P634: Transformer Differential Protection

MiCOM
P631, P632, P633,

P634
Transformer Differential
Protection
Software Version -610
Hardware Suffix -305
Technical Manual
Regional English
Language Version -800

P63x/UK M/A54
Terminology Note
The P63x menu texts (“data model”) referred to throughout this manual are regional texts which have been
customized for the UK/US and similar markets. Diagrams contained in this manual use this terminology. It is
commonly referred to as the “English (English)” data model and is denoted by -800 in the model number and
product documentation.
Refer to the Getting Started (GS) section for information on device and software setup to allow viewing of either
the Reference (English) or Regional (English) menu texts.
The original documentation for this product is still applicable and may be consulted for further reference; however
this manual is intended to provide the required information for setting, commissioning and maintaining the product
using this customized data model.
Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed
information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action
without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request
the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA
including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is
not affected by the contents of the technical manual.
This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of
AREVA, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The AREVA logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of AREVA.
MiCOM is a registered trademark of AREVA. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered
or not, are the property of their owners.
This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
© 2006, AREVA. All rights reserved.

CONTENTS
Safety Section P63x/EN SS/D11 SS

Update Documentation P63x/UK AD/xxx
N/A
Section 1 Introduction P63x/UK IT/A54 IT
Section 2 Technical Data P63x/UK TD/A54 TD
Section 3 Getting Started P63x/UK GS/A54
GS
Section 4 Settings P63x/UK ST/A54
ST
Section 5 Operation P63x/UK OP/A54
OP
Section 6 Application Notes P63x/UK AP/A54
AP
Section 7 Measurements and Recording P63x/UK MR/A54
MR
Section 8 Firmware Design P63x/UK FD/A54
FD
Section 9 Commissioning P63x/UK CM/A54
CM
Section 10 Maintenance P63x/UK MT/A54
MT
Section 11 Troubleshooting P63x/UK TS/A54
TS
Section 12 SCADA Communications P63x/UK SC/A54
SC
Section 13 Symbols and Glossary P63x/UK SG/A54
SG
Section 14 Installation P63x/UK IN/A54 IN
Section 15 Firmware and Service Manual Version History P63x/UK VH/A54
VH
Index Index
Safety Section P63x/EN SS/D11
SS
SAFETY SECTION
P63x/EN SS/D11 Safety Section
SS
(SS) - 1
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 3 SS
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3
3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4
5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

6.1 Protective fuse rating 7
6.2 Protective class 7
6.3 Installation category 7
6.4 Environment 7
(SS) - 2
SS
(SS) - 3
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION

FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT
1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on SS
safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment also includes reference to typical
equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating
label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section, or the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M).
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of
the system to which it is being connected;
• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
(SS) - 4
3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to
in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or
commissioned.
SS
3.1 Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL

MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH
AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp
terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate
the health of the device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these contacts
are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
(SS) - 5
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment SS
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA listed or recognized equipment
To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL
and/or CSA listed or recognized parts of the following type: connection cables,
protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and
replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
(SS) - 6
Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
SS Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety,
the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to
it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal
of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted
to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the
equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may
be accessible on the extender card.
External test blocks and test plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making
them safe.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
(SS) - 7
5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
SS
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
6.1 Protective fuse rating

The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise
stated in the Technical Data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.
6.2 Protective class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) connection
to ensure user safety.
6.3 Installation category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 60255-27: 2006 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.
6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
(SS) - 8
SS
Introduction P63x/UK IT/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IT
INTRODUCTION
Date: 16th June 2006

Hardware Suffix: -305
Software Version: -610
Connection Diagrams: -404 (P631, P632, P634)
-406 (P633)
P63x/UK IT/A54 Introduction
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IT
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-1
CONTENTS
(IT) 1-
1. MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE 3
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM 5
IT
3. PRODUCT SCOPE 6
3.1 Functional overview 6
3.2 Ordering options 9
FIGURES
Figure 1: Functional diagram 8

(IT) 1-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IT
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-3
1. MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE

The manual provides a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay
and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
The section contents are summarized below:
P63x/UK IT Introduction
A guide to the MiCOM range of relays and the documentation structure. General safety
aspects of handling Electronic Equipment is discussed with particular reference to relay
safety symbols. Also a general functional overview of the relay and brief application
summary is given. IT
P63x/UK TD Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions,
ratings and performance data. Compliance with norms and international standards is quoted
where appropriate.
P63x/UK GS Getting Started
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using it.
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the
relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database stored within
the relay.
P63x/UK ST Settings
List of all relay settings, including ranges, step sizes and defaults, together with a brief
explanation of each setting.
P63x/UK OP Operation
A comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protection and non-protection
functions.
P63x/UK AP Application Notes
This section includes a description of common power system applications of the relay,
calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings
to the relay.
P63x/UK MR Measurements and Recording
Detailed description of the relays recording and measurements functions including the
configuration of the event and disturbance recorder and measurement functions.
P63x/UK FD Firmware Design
Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This section includes
information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
P63x/UK CM Commissioning
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and
functionality of the relay.
P63x/UK MT Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.
P63x/UK TS Troubleshooting
Advice on how to recognize failure modes and the recommended course of action. Includes
guidance on whom within AREVA T&D to contact for advice.
(IT) 1-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK SC SCADA Communications

This section provides an overview regarding the SCADA communication interfaces of the
relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics, profiles and interoperability tables are not
provided within this manual. Separate documents are available per protocol, available for
download from our website.
P63x/UK SG Symbols and Glossary
List of common technical abbreviations found within the product documentation.
P63x/UK IN Installation
IT Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to

the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided, incorporating earthing
recommendations. All external wiring connections to the relay are indicated.
P63x/UK VH Firmware and Service Manual Version History
History of all hardware and software releases for the product.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-5
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements.
It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
− P range protection relays;

IT
− C range control products;
− M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
− S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.

MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behavior of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide
measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control center enabling remote
monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com
www.areva-td.com/protectionrelays
(IT) 1-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
3. PRODUCT SCOPE
The P63x differential protection devices are designed for the fast and selective short-circuit
protection of transformers, motors and generators and of other two-, three- or four-winding
arrangements from distribution to transmission voltage levels. Four models are available.
The P631 and P632 are designed for the protection of two-winding arrangements, the P633
and P634 for the protection of three- or four-winding arrangements, respectively. The relay
also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system
diagnosis and fault analysis.
3.1 Functional overview

IT The P63x differential protection devices contain a wide variety of protection functions. The
protection features are summarized below:
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW P631 P632 P633 P634

BC_1 Broken conductor detection 1 9 9 9 9
BC_2 Broken conductor detection 2 9 9 9 9
BC_3 Broken conductor detection 3 - - 9 9
BC_4 Broken conductor detection 4 - - - 9
CHECK Self testing and diagnostics 9 9 9 9
COMM1 Rear port communication * * * *
COMM2 Second rear port communication * * * *
CTS Current transformer supervision 9 9 9 9
DIFF Differential protection 9 9 9 9
DTOC1 Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 9 9 9 9
DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 9 9 9 9
DTOC3 Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 - - 9 9
DVICE Device identification 9 9 9 9
f<> Frequency protection - 9 9 9
FT_DA Fault data acquisition 9 9 9 9
GROUP Setting group selection 9 9 9 9
HMI Local control panel 9 9 9 9
IDMT1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 9 9 9 9
IDMT2 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 9 9 9 9
IDMT3 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 - - 9 9
INP Opto inputs 4 4 to 34 4 to 40 4 to 34
IRIGB IRIG-B time synchronization 9 9 9 9
LED LEDs 9 9 9 9
LIM_1 Phase current monitoring 1 9 9 9 9
LIM_2 Phase current monitoring 2 9 9 9 9
LIM_3 Phase current monitoring 3 - - 9 9
LIMIT Temperature and DC monitoring limits 9 9 9 9
LOGIC Programmable logic 9 9 9 9
mA_OP Analog output channel 9 9 9 9
MAIN Main functions 9 9 9 9
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-7
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW P631 P632 P633 P634

MT_RC Monitoring signal recording 9 9 9 9
OL_DA Overload data acquisition 9 9 9 9
OL_RC Overload recording 9 9 9 9
OP_RC Operating data recording 9 9 9 9
OSCIL Fault recording 9 9 9 9
OUTP Output relays 8 to 14 8 to 22 8 to 30 8 to 22
PC Local front port communication 9 9 9 9 IT
REF_1 Restricted earth fault protection 1 - 9 9 9
REF_2 Restricted earth fault protection 2 - 9 9 9
REF_3 Restricted earth fault protection 3 - - 9 9
RTDmA Temperature and DC monitoring inputs 9 9 9 9
THRM1 Thermal overload protection 1 9 9 9 9
THRM2 Thermal overload protection 2 - - 9 9
IEC Ethernet communication * * * *
V/f Overfluxing protection - 9 9 9
V<> Under/overvoltage protection - 9 9 9
* - Optional communications items specified at time of order.

In addition to the features listed above, the P63x models provide comprehensive
self-monitoring as well as the following global functions:
• Setting group selection
• Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging)
• Overload data acquisition
• Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)
• Fault data acquisition
• Fault signal recording (time-tagged signal logging with fault value recording of the phase
currents for each winding)
• Extended fault recording (fault recording of the neutral-point current for each winding as
well as the voltage)
(IT) 1-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Application overview
Functions overview P631 P632 P633 P634

87 DIFF Differential protection 2 wind. 2 wind. 3 wind. 4 wind.
87G REF_x Restricted earth fault protection - 2 3 3
50 DTOC_x Definite-time O/C protection 2 2 3 3
51 IDMT_x Inverse-time O/C protection 2 2 3 3
49 THRMx Thermal overload protection 1 1 2 2
27/ 59 V<> Over/undervoltage protection - 1 1 1
81 O/U f<> Over/underfrequency protection - 1 1 1
IT 24 V/f Overexcitation protection - 1 1 1

CTS Current transformer supervision Option Option Option Option
MCM_x Measuring circuit monitoring 2 2 3 4
LIMIT / LIM_x Limit value monitoring 2 2 3 3
LOGIC Programmable logic 1 1 1 1
COMMx 2 Communication interfaces, IRIG-B Option Option Option Option
INP/OUTP Binary inputs and outputs 4 / 14 34 / 22 40 / 30 34 / 22
(max. number)
MEASI/ Analogue inputs and outputs - Option Option Option
MEASO (2 x 20 mA outputs, 20 mA input
and RDT input)
Measuring inputs
Phase currents 2x3 2x3 4x3 4x3
Residual current or star-point current - 2 3 3
Inter
Communication COMM1 COMM2 IEC MiCOM
IRIG-B Self Recording
Monitoring and
to SCADA / Substation control / RTU / Modem ... Data
via RS485 or Optical Fibre Acquisition Overload rec.
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
Iph resp.
via RJ45 or Fibre Optics using IEC 61850 LOGIC LIM-3 LIM-2 LIM-1 Metering
Fault rec.
V
27, 59 81 24
IY,a V<> f<> V/f
IY,b
87G 50 51
BC_4
REF_3 DTOC-3 IDMT-3
87G 50 51 49
BC _3
REF_2 DTOC-2 IDMT--2 THRM2
87G 50 51 49
Iph 87
REF_1 DTOC-1 IDMT--1 THRM1 BC_2
DIFF
BC_1
IY,c
Σ Σ Σ Σ Σ
Iph
Ivirtual
Iph
RTD,mA mA_OP always available Transformer Differential
optional or specific Protection P63x
Figure 1: Functional diagram

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-9
3.2 Ordering options

Information Required with Order - P631
MiCOM P631
Name Order number
Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. P631- 9 0 0 0 0 -305 -4xx -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -403
Basic device 40TE, ring-terminal connection, 4 -404
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
Mounting option and display:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display
3
4 IT
Processor extension and Current transformer:
2) 8
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23)
2) 9
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23)
Power supply and additional outputs:
VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
Switching threshold on binary inputs:
>18 V (standard variant) (without order extension no.)
8) -461
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8) -462
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8) -463
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) -464
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
With communication / information interface:
Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 -91
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC 61850: -94
For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45 6
Language:
4) (without order extension no.)
English (German)
4) -800
Px40 English (English)
4) -801
German (English)
4) (on request) -802
French (English)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
4)
Russian (English) 7) (on request) -805
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
(IT) 1-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

MiCOM P632
Name Order number
Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. P632- 9 0 1 -305 -4xx -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
Basic device:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
2) 8
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23)
IT Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2)
Voltage transformer:
9
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1

Additional binary I/O options:
Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
Further add. options:
Without 0
With analogue module 2
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
8) -461
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8) -462
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8) -463
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) -464
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 -91
Language:
English (German) 4) (without order extension no.)
Px40 English (English) 4) -800
German (English) 4) -801
French (English)
Spanish (English) 4) (on request) -803
Polish (English) 4) (on request) -804
4)
Russian (English) 7) (on request) -805
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-11

MiCOM P633
Name Order number
Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. P633- 9 9 1 -305 -4xx -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 0 0 -404
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) 2)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2)
8
9
IT
2) 9
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34)
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
Without 0
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
Without 0
With analogue and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 6
8) -461
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8) -462
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8) -463
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) -464
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 -91
Language:
English (German)
4) -800
French (English) 4) (on request) -802
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
Russian (English) 4) 7) (on request) -805
(IT) 1-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

MiCOM P634
Name Order number
Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. P634- 9 9 1 -305 -4xx -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
Basic device:
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) 2) 8
IT Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2)

Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34 / T41...43) 2)
9
9
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
Without 0
VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
Without 0
With analogue and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 6
8) -461
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8) -462
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8) -463
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) -464
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 -91
Language:
English (German)
4) -800
French (English)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English) 4) (on request) -804
Russian (English) 4) 7) (on request) -805
Technical Data P63x/UK TD/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TD
TECHNICAL DATA

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK TD/A54 Technical Data
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TD
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-1
Technical Data Other Inputs and Outputs

Threaded terminals for pin-terminal
connection:
General Data Threaded terminal ends M3, self-centering with
wire protection for conductor cross sections of
Design 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall or
installation or flush mounted case for 19" Threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal
cabinets and for control panels. connection
Installation Position
Vertical ±30°
Tests
Type Test
Degree of Protection Tests according to EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6
Per EN 60529 or IEC 529 TD
IP 52; IP 20 for the rear connection area of the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
flush-mounted case
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A
Weight
Case 40 TE: approx. 7 kg
Case 84 TE: approx. 11 kg 1MHz-Burst Disturbance Test
Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1,
Class III,
Dimensions
Common-mode test voltage: 2,5 kV,
See “Installation - IN, Section 7.”
Differential test voltage: 1,0 kV,
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Ω
Terminal Connection Diagrams
See “Installation - IN, Section 8.”
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2,
Terminals Level 3,
Contact discharge, single discharges : > 10,
PC Interface (X6) Holding time: > 5 s, Test voltage: 6 kV,
DIN 41652 connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin Test generator: 50...100 MΩ, 150 pF/330 Ω
Communication Interface Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic

Optical fibers (X7, X8): Energy
F-SMA-interface per DIN 47258 Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, Level 3,
or IEC 874-2 per plastic fibers Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all
or BFOC-(ST®)-interface 2.5 per DIN 47254-1 sides,
or IEC 874-10 per glass fiber Test field strength, freq. band 80...1000 MHz:
or 10 V/m,
Leads (X9, X10, X33): Test using AM: 1 kHz/80 %,
Threaded terminal ends M2 for wire Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz/100 %
cross-sections up to 1.5 mm2
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst
IRIG-B Interface (X11) Requirements
BNC plug Per IEC 60255-22-4 Test severity Level 4,
Rise time of one pulse t: 5 ns,
Current-Measuring Inputs (conventional) Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns,
Threaded terminals for pin-terminal Amplitude: 4 kV / 2 kV, resp.,
connection: Burst duration: 15 ms, Burst period: 300 ms,
Threaded terminal ends M5, self-centering with Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz, Source impedance:
wire protection for conductor cross sections of 50 Ω
≤ 4 mm2
or
Threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal
connection
(TD) 2-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Surge immunity Test Seismic Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, Level 4, Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 255-21-3,
Testing of power supply circuits, Test procedure A, Class 1,
unsymmetrically/symmetrically operated lines, Frequency range:
Open-circuit voltage front time/time to 5...8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm,
2
half-value: 1.2/50 μs, 8...35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s
Short-circuit current front time/time to 3 × 1 cycle
half-value: 8/20 μs,
Amplitude: 4/2 kV, Pulse frequency: > 5/min, Routine Test
Source impedance: 12/42 Ω Test per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Voltage Test

Induced by Radio Frequency Fields Per IEC 255-5, 2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Per EN 61000-4-6 or IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3, For the voltage test of the power supply inputs,
TD Disturbing test voltage: 10 V direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used
The PC Interface must not be subjected to the
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity voltage test
Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, Level 4,
Frequency: 50 Hz, Test field strength: 30 A/m Additional Thermal Test
100 % controlled thermal endurance test,
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC inputs loaded.
Auxiliary Energizing Quantity
Per IEC 255-11, 12 %
EU Directives
Insulation EMC Compliance
Voltage Test Per 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC:
Per IEC 255-5 or DIN EN 61010, 2 kV~, 60 s Compliance to the European Commission
For the voltage test of the power supply inputs, Directive on EMC is claimed via the Technical
direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used. The Construction File route. Product Specific
PC Interface must not be subjected to the Standards were used to establish conformity:
voltage test. EN50263: 2000
Product Safety
Creepage Distance and Clearance Per 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC:
Per IEC 60255-27: 2005 and IEC 664-1, Compliance with European Commission Low
pollution degree 3, Voltage Directive. Compliance is
working voltage 250 V, demonstrated by reference to generic safety
overvoltage category III, standards:
impulse test voltage 5 kV EN60255-27: 2006
EN60255-5: 2001
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per IEC 255-5,
Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs, 73/23/EEC
Peak value: 5 kV, Source impedance: 500 Ω
R&TTE Compliance
Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
Mechanical Robustness
Equipment (R&TTE) directive 99/5/EC.
Vibration Test
Compliance demonstrated by compliance to
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, Test
the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC
severity class 1,
amended by 93/68/EEC, down to zero volts by
Frequency range in operation:
reference to safety standards.
10..60 Hz, 0.035 mm,
Applicable to rear communications ports.
60..150 Hz, 0.5 g,
Frequency range during transport: ATEX Compliance
10...150 Hz, 1 g ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
directive 94/9/EC, for equipment.
Shock Response and Withstand Test, The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of
Bump Test European directive 94/9/EC.
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, It is approved for operation outside an ATEX
Test severity class 1, hazardous area. It is however approved for
Acceleration: 5 g/15 g, Pulse duration 11 ms connection to Increased Safety, “Ex e”, motors
with rated ATEX protection, Equipment
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-3
Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in Switching threshold (as per order option)
gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas. Standard variant: 18V (VA,nom: 24 ... 250 V DC):
Switching threshold range: 14 V ... 19 V DC
CAUTION - Equipment with this marking is not Special variant with switching thresholds from
itself suitable for operation within a potentially 58 ... 72 % of the nominal supply voltage
explosive atmosphere. (VA,nom)
Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body (definitively "low" at VA < 58 % of the nominal
certificates of compliance. supply voltage,
definitively "high" at VA > 72 % of the nominal
supply voltage):
"Special variant 73 V": nominal supply voltage
II (2) G 110 V DC
"Special variant 90 V": nominal supply voltage
127 V DC
"Special variant 146 V": nominal supply
Environmental Conditions
voltage 220 V DC TD
"Special variant 155 V": nominal supply
Ambient Temperature Range voltage 250 V DC
Recommended temperature range:
-5 °C...+55 °C, or +23 °F...+131 °F Power Consumption (as per order option):
Limit temperature range: Standard variant:
-25 °C...+70 °C, or -13 °F...+158 °F VA = 19...110V DC : 0.5 W ±30%
VA > 110V DC : VA × 5 mA ±30 %
Ambient Humidity Range Special variants:
≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean), VA > switching threshold: VA × 5mA ±30 %
up to 56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and
40 °C, condensation not permissible Analog Inputs and Outputs
Direct Current Input
Solar Radiation Input current: 0...26 mA
Avoid exposure of the front panel to direct Value range: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20
solar radiation mA)
Max. permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Ratings Input load: 100 Ω
Measurement Inputs Open-circuit monitoring: 0...10 mA (adjustable)
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
(settable) Zero suppression:
Operating range: 0.95...1.05 fnom 0.000...0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable)
Over/Underfrequency Protection: 40…70 Hz
Overexcitation Protection: 0.5…1.5 fnom Resistance Temperature Detector
For analog module only PT 100 permitted,
Current Value range: -40...+215 °C
Nominal current Inom: 1 A and 5 A (settable) 3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor
Nominal consumption / phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom open and short-circuit input permitted
Load rating: Open circuit monitoring:
continuous: 4 Inom Θ > +215 °C (or Θ > +419 °F) and
for 10 s: 30 Inom Θ < -40 °C (or Θ > -40 °F)
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom Direct Current Output
Output current: 0 … 20 mA
Voltage Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50...130 V AC (settable) Maximum output voltage: 15 V
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at
Vnom = 130 V AC IRIG-B Interface
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC Min./max. input voltage level (peak-peak): 100
mVpp/20 Vpp
Binary Signal Inputs Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz
Max. permissible voltage: 300 V DC Galvanic isolation: 2 kV
(TD) 2-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Output Relays Plastic Fiber Connection

Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC Optical wavelength: typ. 660 nm
Continuous current: 5 A Optical output: min. - 7.5 dBm
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s Optical sensitivity: min. - 20 dBm
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms Optical input: max. - 5 dBm
1)
Breaking capacity: Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cos ϕ = 0.4 Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Optical wavelength: typ. 820 nm
Power Supply Optical output: min. - 19,8 dBm
Nominal Auxiliary Voltage Optical sensitivity: min. - 24 dBm
VA,nom: 48…250 V DC and 100...230 V AC or Optical input: max. - 10 dBm
VA,nom: 24 V DC (depends on ordering) Distance to be bridged: max. 400 m 1)
TD Operating Range Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

For direct voltage: 0.8…1.1 VA,nom Optical wavelength: typ. 820 nm
with a residual of up to 12 % of VA,nom Optical output: min. - 16 dBm
for alternating current: 0.9…1.1 VA,nom Optical sensitivity: min. - 24 dBm
Optical input: max. - 10 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 1400 m 1)
Nominal Consumption
At VA = 220 V DC and maximum number of
modules fitted IRIG-B Interface
in case 40TE: Format B122, Amplitude modulated
Initial position approx.: 13 W 1 kHz carrier signal, BCD time-of-year code
Active position approx.: 29 W
1)
in case 84TE: Distance to be bridged for optical outputs
Initial position approx.: 13 W and inputs that are equal on both ends,
Active position approx.: 37 W taking into account a system reserve of 3 dB
and typical fiber attenuation.
Start-Up Peak Current
< 3 A, duration 0.25 ms Communication Interface
IEC 61850:
Ethernet communication, 100 Mbit/s.
Stored-Energy Time
GSSE and GOOSE supported.
≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
PC-Interface Typical Characteristic Data

Transmission rate: 300...115200 Baud
Main Function
(settable)
Minimum output pulse for a trip command:
0.1 … 10 s (settable)
Communication Interface
Communication Interface COMM1:
Differential Protection
Protocol per order either IEC 60870-5-103
Tripping time:
or can be switched between
≤ 16 ms w/o inrush stabilization or
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101,
(Idiff) > (Idiff>>)
MODBUS, DNP 3.0 (Option)
≤ 32 ms with inrush stabilization
Transmission speed: 300...64000 bit/s
(settable)
Definite Time and Inverse Time Overcurrent
Protection
Communication Interface COMM2: Operate time inclusive of output relay
Protocol per IEC 60870-5-103
(measured variable from 0 to 2× operate
Transmission speed: 300...57600 bit/s
value):
(settable)
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 0 to 2×
Wire Leads operate value):
Per EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)422, 2 kV-isolation ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Distance to be bridged: Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
peer to peer link: max. 1200 m
multi-endpoint link: max. 100 m
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-5
Over/Undervoltage Protection Deviations of the Timer Stages

Operate time inclusive of output relay
(measured variable from nominal value to 1.2× “Reference Conditions”
operate value or measured variable Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom,
from nominal value to 0.8× operate value): total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms ambient temperature 20°C and
Reset time (measured variable from nominal nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
value to 1.2× operate value or measured
variable from nominal value to 0.8× operate “Deviation”
value): Deviation relative to the set value under
≤ 45 ms, approx. 30 ms reference conditions.
Starting resetting ratio: settable hysteresis
1...10 % Definite-Time Stages
± 1% + 20...40 ms
Overexcitation Protection TD
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95 Inverse-Time Stages
± 5 % + 10...25 ms (measured variable greater
Deviations of the Operate Values than 2 Iref)
for IEC characteristic‚ extremely inverse and
“Reference Conditions” for thermal overload protection and V/f
Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom, characteristic:
total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ± 7.5 % + 10...20 ms
ambient temperature 20°C and for frequency protection:
nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. ± 1% + up to 80 ms (depending on evaluation
time setting)
“Deviation”
Deviation relative to the set value under Deviations in Measured Data
reference conditions.
Acquisition
Differential Protection “Reference Conditions”
Measuring system Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom,
at Id ≥ 0.2 Iref: ± 5 % total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
Harmonic restraint: ± 10 % ambient temperature 20°C and
nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Measuring system “Deviation”
at Id ≥ 0.2 Iref: ± 5 % Deviation relative to the relevant nominal value
under reference conditions.
Overcurrent-Time Protection
Operate Values: ± 5 % Operating Data
Currents/measuring inputs: ±1%
Voltages/measuring inputs: ± 0.5 %
Thermal Overload Protection
Currents/internally calculated: ± 2 %
Operate Value Θ: ± 5 %
Voltages/internally calculated: ± 2 %
Frequency: ± 10 mHz
Over/Underfrequency Protection
Operate Values f<>: ± 30mHz (fnom = 50 Hz) Fault Data
± 40mHz (fnom = 60 Hz) Phase and neutral/starpoint currents: ± 3 %
Operate Values df/dt: ± 0.1Hz/s (fnom = 50 or Restraining and differential currents: ± 5 %
60 Hz)
Internal Clock
Over/Undervoltage Protection With free running internal clock: < 1 min./
Operate Values V<>: ± 1 % (setting 0.6…1.4 month
Vnom) With external synchronization
via protocol, synch. interval ≤ 1 min: < 10 ms
Overexcitation Protection via IRIG-B signal input: ± 1 ms
Operate Values: ± 3 %
(TD) 2-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Resolution in Fault Data Acquisition

Time Resolution
20 sampled values per period
Currents
Dynamic range: 33 Inom
Amplitude resolution
at Inom = 1 A: 2.0 mAr.m.s.
at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mAr.m.s.
Voltage
Dynamic range: 150 V
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVr.m.s.
TD
Mechanical Robustness
Vibration Test
Per IEC 60255-21-1: 1996:
Response Class 2
Endurance Class 2
Shock and Bump
Per IEC 60255-21-2: 1996:
Shock response Class 2
Shock withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic Test
Per IEC 60255-21-3: 1995:
Class 2
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-7
Address List Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 1: see selection table

Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 2: see selection table
Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 3: see selection table
Function Settings Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 4: see selection table
tDWELL Trip Cmd 1: 0.10...10.00 s
Global tDWELL Trip Cmd 2: 0.10...10.00 s
PC Link (PC): tDWELL Trip Cmd 3: 0.10...10.00 s
Command Blocking: No/Yes tDWELL Trip Cmd 4: 0.10...10.00 s
Sig./meas. val. Block.: No/Yes Latching trip cmd. 1: No/Yes
Latching trip cmd. 2: No/Yes
Communication Link 1 (COMM1): Latching trip cmd. 3: No/Yes
USER Command Block: No/Yes Latching trip cmd. 4: No/Yes
USER Sig/meas Block: No/Yes Fct Assign Fault: see function table
Communication Link 2 (COMM2):

USER Command Block: No/Yes
Setting Group Selection (GROUP):
Control via USER: No/Yes
TD
USER Sig/meas Block: No/Yes Setting Grp Sel USER:
Setting Group SG1
Setting Group SG2
Binary and Analog Output (OUTP):
Setting Group SG3
USER Outp rel Block: No/Yes
Setting Group SG4
Hold Timer: 0.000...65.000 s/Blocked
Main Function (MAIN):
Protection Enabled:
Self-Monitoring (CHECK):
No (Disabled)/Yes (Enabled)
Fct Assign. Alarm: see selection table
USER Test Mode: No/Yes
Mon.Sig. Retention: 0...240 h/Blocked
Frequency fn: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Phase Rotation: A - B - C/A - C - B
In CT. prim.,end a: 1...50000 A Fault Recording (OSCIL):
In CT. prim.,end b: 1...50000 A Fct Assig. Trigger: see selection table
In CT. prim.,end c: 1...50000 A Id>: 0.01...30.00 Iref/Blocked
In CT. prim.,end d: 1...50000 A IR>: 0.01...30.00 Iref/Blocked
In CT. Y prim,end a: 1...50000 A Pre-Fault Time: 1...50 Cycles
In CT. Y prim,end b: 1...50000 A Post-Fault Time: 1...50 Cycles
In CT. Y prim,end c: 1...50000 A Max Record Time: 5...300 Cycles
Vn V.T. prim.: 0.1...1500.0 kV
In Device, end a: 1.0 A/5.0 A Common Settings
In Device, end b: 1.0 A/5.0 A Main Function (MAIN):
In Device, end c: 1.0 A/5.0 A Vn prim., end a: 0.1...1500.0 kV
In Device, end d: 1.0 A/5.0 A Vn prim., end b: 0.1...1500.0 kV
IY,nom device, end a: 1.0 A/5.0 A Vn prim., end c: 0.1...1500.0 kV
IY,nom device, end b: 1.0 A/5.0 A Vn prim., end d: 0.1...1500.0 kV
IY,nom device, end c: 1.0 A/5.0 A Evaluation IN, end a: Calculated/Measured
Vn VT. Sec.: 50...130 V Evaluation IN, end b: Calculated/Measured
CT Orientation Iph,a: Standard/Reversed Evaluation IN, end c: Calculated/Measured
CT Orientation Iph,b: Standard/Reversed Current summation:
CT Orientation Iph,c: Standard/Reversed Disabled
CT Orientation Iph,d: Standard/Reversed End (a) + end (b)
CT Orientation IY,a: Standard/Reversed End (a) + end (c)
CT Orientation Iy,b: Standard/Reversed End (a) + end (d)
CT Orientation IY,c: Standard/Reversed End (b) + end (c)
Minimum Iph Meas’mt: 0.00...0.20 In End (b) + end (d)
Minimum I2 Meas’mt: 0.000…0.200 In End (c) + end (d)
Minimum I1 Meas’mt: 0.000…0.200 In End (a) + end (b) + end (c)
Minimum IN Meas’mt: 0.000...0.200 In End (a) + end (b) + end (d)
Minimum IY Meas’mt: 0.000...0.200 IN,n End (a) + end (c) + end (d)
Minimum V Meas’mt: 0.00...0.20 Vn End (b) + end (c) + end (d)
Time Const Iph Dem.: 0.1...60.0 min End (a) – end (b)
Fct. Assign. Block 1: see selection table End (a) – end (c)
Fct. Assign. Block 2: see selection table End (a) – end (d)
Fct. Assign. Block 3: see selection table End (b) – end (c)
Fct. Assign. Block 4: see selection table End (b) – end (d)
Trip Cmd.Block USER: No/Yes End (c) – end (d)
(TD) 2-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Hold Time Dyn.Settg.: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Current Transformer Supervision (CTS):

General Enable USER: No/Yes
Differential Protection (DIFF):
General Enable USER: No/Yes Broken Conductor Detection
Rated Ref Power Sref: 0.1...5000.0 MVA (BC_1, BC_2, BC_3, BC_4):
Ref. Curr. Iref,a: 0.000...50.000 kA General Enable USER: No/Yes
Ref. Curr. Iref,b: 0.000...50.000 kA Select CT input:
Ref. Curr. Iref,c: 0.000...50.000 kA End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation
Ref. Curr. Iref,d: 0.000...50.000 kA
Matching fact. kam,a: 0.000...5.000 Limit Value Monitoring (LIMIT):
Matching fact. kam,b: 0.000...5.000 General Enable USER: No/Yes
Matching fact. kam,c: 0.000...5.000 IDC,lin>: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked
Matching fact. kam,d: 0.000...5.000 IDC,lin>>: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked
Minimum Id Meas’mt: 0.000...0.200 Iref tIDC,lin>: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked
TD Minimum IR Meas’mt: 0.000...0.200 Iref tIDC,lin>>: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked
IDC,lin<: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked
Restricted Earth Fault Protection IDC,lin<<: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked
(REF_1, REF_2, REF_3): tIDC,lin<: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked
General Enable USER: No/Yes tIDC,lin<<: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked
Select CT Input : End a/End b/End c T>: -20...200 °C
Rated Ref Power Sref: 0.1...5000.0 MVA T>>: -20...200 °C
Ref. Curr. Iref: 0.000...50.000 kA tT>: 0...1000 s/Blocked
Matching Fact. kam,N: 0.000...50.000 tT>>: 0...1000 s/Blocked
Matching Fact. kam,Y: 0.000...50.000 T<: -20...200 °C
Minimum Id Meas’mt: 0.00...0.20 Iref T<<: -20...200 °C
Minimum IR Meas’mt: 0.00...0.20 Iref tT<: 0...1000 s/Blocked
tT<<: 0...1000 s/Blocked
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
(DTOC1, DTOC2, DTOC3): Limit Value Monitoring
General Enable USER: No/Yes (LIM_1, LIM_2, LIM_3):
Select CT Input: General Enable USER: No/Yes
End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation Select CT Input:
End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection I>: 0.20...4.00 Inom/Blocked
(IDMT1, IDMT2, IDMT3): I>>: 0.20...4.00 Inom/Blocked
General Enable USER: No/Yes tI>: 0...100 s/Blocked
Select CT Input: tI>>: 0...100 s/Blocked
End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation I<: 0.00…4.00 Inom
I<<: 0.00…4.00 Inom
tI<: 0...100 s/Blocked
Thermal Overload Protection tI<<: 0...100 s/Blocked
(THRM1, THRM2):
Select CT Input: Programmable Logic (LOGIC):
End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation General Enable USER: No/Yes
Operating Mode: Absolute Replica/Relative Valid for y = 1 to 8: Set y USER: No/Yes
Replica Valid for y = 1 to 32:
O/T f Iref Persist x: -40…300 °C Fct.Assignm. Outp. y: see selection table
Op. Mode t Output y:
Disabled Timer Stage
Over/Undervoltage Protection (V<>): PickUp & Reset Delay
General Enable USER: No/Yes Pulse Delayed PickUp
PickUp & Rst.Retrig
Over/Underfrequency Protection (f<>): Delayed Pulse Retrig
General Enable USER: No/Yes Minimum Dwell
Evaluation time : 3...6 Cycles Time t1 Output y: 0.00...600.00 s
Undervolt. Block. V<: 0.20...1.00 Vn Time t2 Output y: 0.00...600.00 s
Sig. Assig Outp. y: see selection table
Sig.Assig.Outp. y(t): see selection table
Overfluxing Protection (V/f):
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-9
Setting Groups INy dynamic: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked

(valid for Setting Groups x = 1 to 4:) tINy: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
Differential Protection (DIFF): Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

Enable SGx: No/Yes (IDMT1, IDMT2, IDMT3):
Vector Grp. ends b-a: 0...11 Enable SGx: No/Yes
Vector Grp. ends c-a: 0...11 Block Tim. st IN SGx:
Vector Grp. ends d-a: 0...11 Disabled
Idiff> SGx: 0.10...2.50 Iref For Single-Ph. Start
Idiff>> SGx: 2.5...30 Iref For Multi-Ph. Start.
Idiff>>> SGx: 2.5...30 Iref Gen.Starting Mode SGx:
Idiff>(CTS) SGx: 0.10...30.00 Iref W/o Start. IN/I2
m1 SGx: 0.10...1.50 With Start. IN/I2
m2 SGx: 0.10...1.50 tGS SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
IR,m2 SGx: 1.5...10.0 Iref Inrush Restr Enab SGx: No/Yes TD
Op. Mode Inrush SGx: Valid for y = “Ph”, “2” & “N”:
Disabled Iref,y SGx: 0.10...4.00 In/Blocked
Not Phase-Selective Iref,y dynamic SGx: 0.10...4.00 In/Blocked
Phase Selective Iy Charac SGx:
nd
Inrush 2 Harmon SGx: 10...50 % Definite Time/IEC Standard Inverse/IEC Very
I0 filt a Enab SGx: No/Yes Inverse/IEC Extr. Inverse/IEC Long Time
I0 filt b Enab SGx: No/Yes Inv./IEEE Moderately Inv./IEEE Very
I0 filt c Enab SGx: No/Yes Inverse/IEEE Extremely Inv./ANSI Normally
I0 filt d Enab SGx: No/Yes Inv./ANSI Short Time Inv./ANSI Long Time
O/Flux Blk Enab SGx: No/Yes Inv./RI-Type Inverse/RXIDG-Type Inverse
O/Flux 5th HarmonSGx: 10...80 % kt Time Dial/TMS SGx: 0.05...10.00
Op.del.,trip sig.SGx: 0.00…100 s Min. Trip t Iy SGx: 0.00…10 s
Hyst. Effective SGx: No/Yes Hold Time Iy SGx: 0.00...600.00 s
Release y SGx: Instantaneous/Delayed as per
Restricted Earth Fault Protection Char.
(REF_1, REF_2, REF_3):
Enable SGx: No/Yes Thermal Overload Protection
Operating Mode SGx: (THRM1, THRM2):
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias Enable SGx: No/Yes
Low-Z Iph Max. Bias Iref Rating SGx: 0.10...4.00 Inom
High Impedance Start Fact.OL_RC SGx: 1.05...1.50
CTS Effective SGx: No/Yes Tim.const. 1 (heat) SGx: 1.0...1000.0 min
Idiff> SGx: 0.10...1.00 Iref Tim.const. 2 (cool) SGx: 1.0...1000.0 min
Idiff>>> SGx: 2.5...30.0 Iref Max perm obj tmp. SGx: 0...300 °C
m1 SGx: 0.00…1.00 Max perm cool tmp SGx: 0...70 °C
m2 SGx: 0.15…1.50 Select CT Ambient SGx:
IR,m2 SGx: 0.10…1.50 Iref Default Temp. Value/From PT100/From 20 mA
Input
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Default CT Amb SGx: -40...70 °C
(DTOC1, DTOC2, DTOC3): Blk for CTA Fail SGx: No/Yes
Enable SGx: No/Yes T> Alarm Reset,% SGx: 50…200 %
Block Tim. st. IN SGx: T> Trip Reset,% SGx: 50…200 %
Disabled Trip Hysteresis SGx: 2…30 %
For Single-Ph. Start Pre-Trip Alarm SGx: 0.0...1000.0 min/Blocked
For Multi-Ph. Start.
Gen.Starting Mode SGx: Over/Undervoltage Protection (U<>):
W/o Start. IN/I2 Enable SGx: No/Yes
With Start. IN/I2 V> SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked
tGS SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked V>> SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked
Inrush Restr Enab SGx: No/Yes tV> SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
Valid for y = “>”, “>>” & “>>>”: tV>> SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
Iy SGx: 0.10...30.00 In/Blocked V< SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked
Iy dynamic SGx: 0.10...30.00 In/Blocked V<< SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked
tIy SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Vmin> SGx: 0.00…0.60 Vnom/Blocked
I2 y SGx: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked tV< SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
I2 y dynamic SGx: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked tV<< SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
tI2 y: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked tTransient SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked
INy: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx: 1...10 %
(TD) 2-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Over/Underfrequency Protection (f<>): Main Function (MAIN):

Enable SGx: No/Yes Date: 01.01.1997...31.12.2096 dd.mm.yy
Valid for y = 1 to 4: Time of day: 00:00:00...23:59:59 hh:mm:ss
Oper. Mode fy SGx: f/f with df/dt/f + Delta Time Switching: Standard Time/Daylight
f/Delta t Saving Time
fy SGx: 40.00...70.00 Hz/Blocked Frequency f: 40.00...70.00 Hz
tfy SGx: 0.00...10.00 s/Blocked Valid for y = “a” to “d”:
dfy/dt SGx: 0.1...10.0 Hz/s/Blocked Iph, Max now, y prim.: 0...25000 A
Delta fy SGx: 0.01...5.00 Hz/Blocked Iph Therm dem y prim: 0...25000 A
Delta ty SGx: 0.04...3.00 s Iph Therm pk y prim: 0...25000 A
Current Imin, y prim: 0...25000 A
Overfluxing Protection (V/f): Current IA,y prim.: 0...25000 A
Enable SGx: No/Yes Current IB,y prim.: 0...25000 A
V/f> (Alarm) SGx: 1.00...1.20 Vn/fn/Blocked Current IC y prim.: 0...25000 A
V/f(t)> SGx: 1.05...1.50 Vn/fn/Blocked Current I2 y prim.: 0…25000 A
TD V/f>> SGx: 1.05...1.60 Vn/fn/Blocked Current I1 y prim.: 0…25000 A
tV/f> SGx: 0...10000 s/Blocked Current IN,y prim.: 0...25000 A
t at V/f=1.05 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IY, a prim.:0…25000 A
t at V/f=1.10 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IY, b prim.:0…25000 A
t at V/f=1.15 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IY, c prim.:0…25000 A
t at V/f=1.20 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Voltage V prim.: 0,0...2500.0 kV
t at V/f=1.25 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Valid for y = “a” to “d”:
t at V/f=1.30 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Curr Iph,Max now,y pu.: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.35 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Iph pu Thermal dem.y: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.40 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Iph pu Thermal peaky: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.45 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current Imin,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.50 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IA,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.55 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IB,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In
t at V/f=1.60 SGx: 1.0…1000.0 s Current IC,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In
Reset Time SGx: 0…10000 s Current I2 y p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
tV/f>> SGx: 0…10000 s/Blocked Current I1 y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In
Current IN,y p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In
Current IY,a p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In
Current Transformer Supervision (CTS): Current IY,b p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In
Enable SGx: No/Yes Current IY,c p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In
I1> SGx: 0.05…4.00 Iref Iph,max,add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
I2/I1> SGx: 0.05…1.00 Iph,min,add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
I2/I1>> SGx: 0.05…1.00 Current IA,add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
t(Alarm) SGx: 0.00…10.00 s Current IB,add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
t(Latch) SGx: 0.00…10.00 s Current IC,add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
Curr. I2, add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
Broken Conductor Detection Curr. I1, add p.u.: 0.00…25.00 In
(BC_1, BC_2, BC_3, BC_4): Current IN,add p.u.: 0.000…25.000 In
Enable SGx: No/Yes Voltage V p.u.: 0.00...25.00 Vn
I2/I1> SGx: 0.20…1.00 Valid for y = “a” to “d”:
Operate Delay SGx: 0.10…100.00 s Angle phi AB, end y: -180...180 °
Angle phi BC, end y: -180...180 °
Angle phi CA, end y: -180...180 °
Measurements Angle phi A, end b-a: -180...180 °
Angle phi B, end b-a: -180...180 °
Measured Data Input (RTDmA):
Angle phi C, end b-a: -180...180 °
Current IDC: 0.00...24.00 mA
Angle phi A, end c-a: -180...180 °
Current IDC p.u.: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom
Angle phi B, end c-a: -180...180 °
Curr. IDC, lin. p.u.: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom
Angle phi C, end c-a: -180...180 °
Scaled Value IDC, lin: -32000...32000
Angle phi A, end d-a: -180...180 °
Temperature: -40.0...215.0 °C
Angle phi B, end d-a: -180...180 °
Temperature p.u.: -0.40...2.15 (100 °C)
Angle phi C, end d-a: -180...180 °
Angle phi NY, end a: -180...180 °
Measured Data Output (mA_OP): Angle phi NY, end b: -180...180 °
Current A-1: 0.00...20.00 mA Angle phi NY, end c: -180...180 °
Current A-2: 0.00...20.00 mA
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TD) 2-11
Differential Protection (DIFF)

Diff Current 1: 0.000...40.000 Iref
Restrain Current 1: 0.000...40.000 Iref
Restricted Earth Fault Protection

(REF_1, REF_2, REF_3):
Valid for x = 1 to 3:
Diff. Current, REF_x: 0.00...20.00 Iref
Restrain Curr., REF_x: 0.00...20.00 Iref
Thermal Overload Protection TD

(THRM1, THRM2)
Valid for x = 1 to 2:
Status Replica, THx: -25000...25000 %
Object Temperat., THx: -40...300 °C
Coolant Temp. THx: -40...200 °C
Pre-Trip t. Left, THx: 0.0...1000.0 min
Therm. Repl. p.u.THx: -25.00...25.00
Object Temp. p.u. x .: -0.04...0.30 100 °C
Coolant Temp. p.u. x: -0.04...0.20 100 °C
Temp. Offset Repl. x: -25000...25000 %
Overfluxing Protection (V/f)

Excitation V/f p.u.: 0.00…10.00
Status Replica in %: 0…100 %
Status Replica p.u.: 0.00…1.00
(TD) 2-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TD
Getting Started P63x/UK GS/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
GS
GETTING STARTED

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK GS/A54 Getting Started
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
GS
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-1
CONTENTS
(GS) 3-
1. GETTING STARTED 3
1.1 User interfaces and menu structure 3
1.2 Introduction to the relay 3
1.2.1 Front panel 3
1.2.1.1 LED indications 4
1.2.2 Relay rear panel 5
1.3 Relay connection and power-up 7

GS
1.4 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 8
1.5 HMI 8
1.5.1 Local control panel 8
1.5.2 Display and keypad 8
1.5.3 Display levels 9
1.5.4 Display panels 10
1.5.5 Menu tree and data points 10
1.5.6 List data points 10
1.5.7 Keys 11
1.6 Actions via the HMI 12
1.6.1 Changing between display levels 12
1.6.2 Control at the panel level 13
1.7 Password protected control actions 22
1.8 Front communication port user interface 25
1.8.1 Front IEC 60870-5-103 port 26
1.9 MiCOM S1 relay communications basics 26
1.9.1 PC requirements 26
1.9.2 Connecting to the P63x relay using MiCOM S1 26
1.9.3 Open communication link with relay 28
1.9.4 Off-line use of MiCOM S1 30
1.9.5 Viewing “regional language” english setting files in MiCOM S1 30

(GS) 3-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Relay front view 3

Figure 2: Relay rear view for 40TE variant 6
Figure 3: Relay rear view for 84TE variant 7
Figure 4: Example P63x relay label 7
Figure 5: View of the front panel 9
Figure 6: Display panels and the menu tree 10
Figure 7: Basic menu tree structure 14
Figure 8: Relay keypad 23
Figure 9: Front port connection 25
GS
Figure 10: PC - relay signal connection 26
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-3
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 User interfaces and menu structure

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the
front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on
each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
1.2 Introduction to the relay
1.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and
bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be
provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to
the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental
withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access
to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be
unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is GS
secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the
transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the
seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from
their recesses in the front panel.
Figure 1: Relay front view

(GS) 3-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
− A 20-character by 4-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)
− A 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (, , and ), an enter key
(), a clear key () and a read key ()
− 17 LEDs; 5 fixed function LEDs and 12 programmable function LEDs on the right hand
side
− Under the top hinged cover:
− The relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information
− Under the bottom hinged cover:
− A 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay
(up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection
1.2.1.1 LED indications

GS
Fixed Function
The 5 fixed function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the
following conditions:
LED Number Color Description Default Signals

H4 Red TRIP MAIN: Gen Trip Signal
H3 Yellow ALARM CHECK: Alarm (LED)
H2 Yellow OUT OF SERVICE MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
H1 Green HEALTHY Internal fixed
H17 Red EDIT MODE Internal fixed
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated
fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to
be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have
been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will
extinguish, when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all
times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with
the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog
contact at the back of the relay.
Edit Mode (Red) indicates the fact that the user is in the “Edit Mode”. In this mode, settings
can be changed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-5
Programmable LEDs
The 12 programmable LEDs on the right hand side are suitable for programming alarm
indications.
LED Number Color Description Default Signals

H5 Red
H6 Red
H7 Red
H8 Red
H9 Red
No default signals.
H10 Red
User programmable Signals from selection table
H11 Red dependent upon relay
configuration.
H12 Red
H13 Red
GS
H14 Red
H15 Red
H16 Red
1.2.2 Relay rear panel

The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3 for two variants of the P63x
relay. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are
connected at the rear of the relay.
(GS) 3-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
GS
P1925ENa
Figure 2: Relay rear view for 40TE variant

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-7
GS
P1926ENa
Figure 3: Relay rear view for 84TE variant

Refer to the wiring diagram in the Installation section for complete connection details.
1.3 Relay connection and power-up

Before powering-up the relay, confirm that the relay auxiliary power supply voltage (Vx) and
nominal ac signal magnitudes (In, Vn) are appropriate for your application. The relay serial
number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information can be viewed under the top
hinged cover.
Model P6348481040NF00E09 Made in Europe 48-250

Vx
Variant P634-84881040-304-404-606-921-800 100-230 ~
DIAG No.P634.404 In 1\5 A 50/60 Hz
SER No. 01591083/11/05 F 2.159108.3 Vn 50-130 V ~
Figure 4: Example P63x relay label
(GS) 3-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The P63x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in the Introduction - IT section of this manual and in the Supporting
Documents supplied with the unit.
Once the ratings have been verified for the application, connect external power capable of
delivering the requirements specified on the label to perform the relay familiarization
procedures. Figure 2 and 3 indicates the location of the power supply terminals but please
refer to the wiring diagrams in the Installation - IN section for complete installation details
ensuring that the correct polarities are observed in the case of dc supply.
1.4 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

The relay has the following user interfaces:
− The front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad
− The front port which supports IEC 60870-5-103 communication
− An optional rear communications module which supports one protocol of either

GS Courier, MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port is
selected via settings. This module may also include a second rear port supporting
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol only.
− An optional rear Ethernet communications module supporting IEC 61850 protocol
1.5 HMI
1.5.1 Local control panel

All data required for operation of the protection device are entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management are read out there as well. The
following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
• Readout and modification of settings
• Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic state signals
• Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
• Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short-circuits in the
power system
• Resetting of the device and triggering of additional control functions designed to support
testing and commissioning tasks
In addition, control via the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and the
operating program S&R-103 for Windows.
1.5.2 Display and keypad

Control and display elements
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric
characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-9
G
GS
Figure 5: View of the front panel
1.5.3 Display levels

All data relevant for operation as well as the device settings are displayed on two levels. At
the Panel level, data such as measured operating data are displayed in display Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the
Panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables,
etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either
the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key, .
(GS) 3-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MiCOM P63x
MiCOM P63x MiCOM P63x MiCOM P63x

Settings Measurements + Tests Fault + Event Record
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Device ID Measurements Fault,Event Counters
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Configuration Control and Testing Fault, Oload Records
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Function Settings Operating Data Rec. Disturbance Oscillo.
Set/Func/ M+T/Meas/
Global Analogue Readings
GS Set/Func/
Common Settings
M+T/Meas/
I.O. Status Monitor
Set/Func/ M+T/Meas/
Setting Group SG1 Log. State Signals
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG2
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG3
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG4
Figure 6: Display panels and the menu tree
1.5.4 Display panels

The P63x can display ‘Measured Value Panels’ that can be called up at any given time, as
appropriate.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and the
Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of the given
unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation Panel is
always available.
1.5.5 Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu
tree. As the user navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The data
points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are displayed either
with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected by the user. The
value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are
displayed in the line below.
1.5.6 List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category includes
tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol ‘↓’ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD display, indicating that
there is another level below the displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list setting, the individual value elements
are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-11
1.5.7 Keys
Up  and Down  Keys 
Panel Level:
By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can switch between the Measured Value
Panels.
Menu Tree Level:
By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can navigate up and down through the
menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the Up and Down keys
have a different function.
Input mode:
Setting values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
labeled EDIT MODE. By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can then change
the setting value. With list settings, the user can change the logic operator of the
value element by pressing the Up and Down keys. GS
Left  and Right  Keys
Menu Tree Level:

By pressing the Left and Right keys, the user can navigate through the menu tree in a
horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the Left and Right keys have a
different function.
Input mode:
Setting values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the Left and Right keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves to the next digit
to the right or left.
In the case of a list setting, the user can navigate through the list of items available for
selection by pressing the Left and Right keys.
Enter  Key
Panel Level:
By pressing the ENTER key at the Panel level, the user can go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
To enter the input mode, press the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and leave the input mode. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
Clear  Key
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
(GS) 3-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Input mode:
Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and leave the input mode.
Read  Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
1.6 Actions via the HMI

The following, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that can be
changed by pressing specific keys. In these charts, a small black square to the right of the
ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples
shown here merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
1.6.1 Changing between display levels

After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
GS Going from the menu tree level to the Panel level
Step Description Action Display

0 From the menu tree level, the  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
user can go to the Panel level Protection Enabled
from any position within the menu Yes (Enabled)
tree.
1 First press the Up key and hold it  Current IA,a prim. 350 A
down while pressing the CLEAR Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
key. and
Note: It is important to press the 

Up key first and release it
last to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
Going from the Panel level to the menu tree level

0 Example of a Measured Value  Current IA,a prim. 350 A
Panel. Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
1 By pressing the ENTER key the  MiCOM P634

user can go from the Panel level
to the menu tree level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Set/Conf/HMI), the display will
automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been configured.
Illumination of the Display
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
return time has elapsed (‘return time illumination’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Set/Conf/HMI’).
The display illumination is turned on again by pressing one of the control keys. In this case
the control action that is normally triggered by the key will not be Executed. Reactivation of
display illumination is also possible by way of a binary input.
If continuous illumination is desired, the user can set the ‘return time illumination’ function to
‘blocked’.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-13
1.6.2 Control at the panel level

The measured values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be selected at
‘Set/Conf/HMI’ in the menu tree. The user can select different sets of measured values for
the Measurements + Tests Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel, and the
Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of the given
unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Measurements + Tests
Panel can be selected at any time. Please see ‘Setting a List Setting’ for instructions
regarding selection. If the user has selected MAIN: Disabled for a Panel, then this Panel
will be inactive.
The Measured Value Panels are called up in accordance with system conditions. If, for
example, the unit detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding Measured
Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. If the
unit detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured
fault values are reset - by pressing the CLEAR  key, for example.

0 Up to 6 selected measured values  Current IA,a prim. 350 A GS
can be displayed sequentially on Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
the LCD display.
1 If more than two measured values  Current IA,c prim. 350 A
have been selected, the user can Frequency f 50.00 Hz
scroll through the measured or
values page by page by pressing 
the Up or Down keys. Likewise,
the next page will be displayed
after the set ‘Panel Hold-Time’
has elapsed.
Control at the Menu Tree Level

Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups
All data points are grouped in function groups according to the function they are associated
with and are also organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
The menu tree begins with the device type at the top and then branches out below into the
three main folders entitled Settings, Measurements + Tests, and Fault + Event Record,
which form the first folder level. Below the first folder level are two more folder levels, so that
the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder
levels.
At the bottom of each branch of folders, below the folder levels, are the various function
groups in which the individual data points are combined.
(GS) 3-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MiCOM P63x
MiCOM P63x MiCOM P63x MiCOM P63x

Settings Measurements + Tests Fault + Event Record
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Device ID Measurements Fault,Event Counters
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Configuration Control and Testing Fault, Oload Records
Set/ M+T/ Flt+Ev/

Function Settings Operating Data Rec. Disturbance Oscillo.
Set/Func/ M+T/Meas/
Global Analogue Readings
GS Set/Func/
Common Settings
M+T/Meas/
I.O. Status Monitor
Set/Func/ M+T/Meas/
Setting Group SG1 Log. State Signals
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG2
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG3
Set/Func/
Setting Group SG4
Figure 7: Basic menu tree structure

Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain text
mode. In the address mode the display shows setting settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the setting
settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions.
In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in only
plain text mode.

0 In this example the user switches  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
from text mode to address mode. Protection Enabled
Yes (Enabled)
1 Press the CLEAR key and either +  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
the Left or Right key 003.030
simultaneously. This may be or 1
done at any point in the menu + 
tree.
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-15
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global Change-Enabling Function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. Change Enabl.’
setting to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘M+T/C+Test/HMI’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes - with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) - are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective Change-Enabling Function
Password input prior to any setting change.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a
specific time interval. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If
the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled ‘Changing the
Password’), the following description (next page) will apply analogously.
GS
0 In the menu tree  M+T/C+Test/HMI
‘M+T/C+Test/HMI’ select the Param. Change Enabl.
‘Param. Change Enabl.’ Setting. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight  M+T/C+Test/HMI
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth Param. Change Enabl.
line. No
********
2 Press the following keys in 
sequence:
Left 
Right 
Up 
Down  M+T/C+Test/HMI
Param. Change Enabl.
The display will change as shown No
in the column on the right. *
Now press the ENTER key. The  M+T/C+Test/HMI
EDIT MODE LED will light up. Param. Change Enabl.
This indicates that the setting can No
now be changed by pressing the
Up or Down keys.
If an invalid password has been
entered, the display shown in
step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.  M+T/C+Test/HMI
or Yes

4 Press the ENTER key again. The  M+T/C+Test/HMI
LED will go out. The device is Param. Change Enabl.
enabled for further setting Yes
changes.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change only.
If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is preferable.
In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been activated.
(GS) 3-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Automatic Return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated,
and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system
condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
Forced Return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing the
Up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the Up key first and release it last in order to
avoid unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed. For
some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN, “Protection Enabled”). Such settings include the configuration
GS settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The
following entries in the ”Change” column of the address list (see appendix) indicate whether
values can be changed or not:
"on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
"off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled.
"-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protection functions are disabled.
Changing Settings
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can be
entered.

0 Example of a display.  M+T/C+Test/HMI
In this example the change- Yes
enabling function is activated and
the protection is disabled, if
necessary.
1 Select the desired setting by  Set/Conf/HMI
pressing the arrow keys. Auto Return Time
 60 s

2 Press the ENTER key. The EDIT  Set/Conf/HMI
MODE LED will light up. The last Auto Return Time
digit of the value is highlighted by 60 s
a cursor (underlined).
3 Press the Left or Right keys to  Set/Conf/HMI
move the cursor to the left or Auto Return Time
or
right. 60 s

4 Change the value highlighted by  Set/Conf/HMI
the cursor by pressing the Up and Auto Return Time
Down keys. In the meantime the or 70 s
device will continue to operate 
with the old value.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-17

5 Press the ENTER key. The EDIT  Set/Conf/HMI
MODE LED will go out and the Auto Return Time
device will now operate with the 70 s
new value. Press the keys to
select another setting for a value
change.
6 If you wish to reject the new  Set/Conf/HMI
setting while entering it (EDIT Auto Return Time
MODE LED is on), press the 60 s
CLEAR key. The LED indicator
will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old
value. A further setting can be
selected for a value change by
pressing the arrow keys.
Setting a List Setting GS

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform
tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measured values that will be displayed
on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number ’m’ that can be selected out of
the total number ’n’ of the set is given in the address list in the ’Remarks’ column. As a rule,
the selected elements are linked by an ‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND,
NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected
list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean
equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the
user defines the class of a setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip
command shall be used here as an example to illustrate the setting of a list setting.

0 Select a list setting (in this  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
example, the setting 'Fct.Assig Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
Trip Cmd.1' at ‘Set/Func/Glob/
MAIN’ in the menu tree). The ↓
down arrow (↓) indicates that a
list setting has been selected.
1 Press the Down key. The first  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
function and the first selected Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
signal will appear in the third and #01 DIFF
fourth lines, respectively. The Trip Signal
symbol ‘#01’ in the display
indicates the first item of the
selection. If ‘MAIN: Disabled’
appears for the first item, then this
means that no function
assignment has been made yet.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
functions by pressing the Left and Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
Right keys. OR #02 REF_1
Trip Signal
Once the end of the list is  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
reached, the display shown on Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
the right will appear. #03 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
position in the list. The EDIT Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
MODE LED will light up. #03 MAIN
Disabled
(GS) 3-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

4 Scroll through the assignable  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
functions by pressing the Left and Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
Right keys in the input mode. #03 MAIN
Manual Trip Signal
5 Select the operator or the class  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
using the Up and Down keys. In Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
this particular case, only the ‘OR’  OR #03 MAIN
operator can be selected. There Manual Trip Signal
is no limitation on the selection of
classes.
6 Press the ENTER key. The LED  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
indicator will go out. The Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
assignment has been made. The OR #03 MAIN
device will now operate with the Manual Trip Signal
new settings.
GS
If no operator has been selected,
the ‘OR’ operator is always
assigned automatically when the
ENTER key is pressed. There is
no automatic assignment of
classes.
7 Press the Up key to exit the list at  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
any point in the list. Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
↓
8 If you wish to reject the new  Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
setting while you are still entering Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
it (EDIT MODE LED is on), press #03 MAIN
the CLEAR key. The LED ?????
indicator will go out.
Deleting a List Setting

If ‘MAIN: Disabled’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are deleted. If this
occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
Memory Readout
After a memory is entered, the memory can be read out at the entry point. It is not
necessary to activate the change-enabling function or even to disable the protective function.
Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory
In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL’: Fault Recording 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Oscil/OL_RC’: Overload Recording 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit. A given unit may contain only
some of them or even none at all, depending on the device type.
Readout of the Operating Data Memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation,
such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100 entries is
possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-19

0 Select the entry point for the  M+T/Rec/OP_RC
operating data memory. Operat. Data Record.
↓
1 Press the Down key to enter the  Operat. Data Record.
operating data memory. The 01.01.97 12:05 MAIN
latest entry is displayed. Manual Trip Signal
End
2 Press the Left key repeatedly to  Operat. Data Record.
display the entries one after the 01.01.97 12:05 MAIN
other in chronological order. Manual Trip Signal
Once the end of the operating Start
data memory has been reached,
pressing the Left key again will
have no effect.
GS
3 Press the Right key to display the  Operat. Data Record.
previous entry. 01.01.97 12:05 MAIN
Manual Trip Signal
End
4 Press the Up key at any point  M+T/Rec/OP_RC
within the operating data memory Operat. Data Record.
to return to the entry point.
↓
Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory

If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines, or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an entry is
made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible. After that an
‘Overflow’ signal is issued.

0 Select the entry point for the  M+T/Rec/MT_RC
monitoring signal memory. Mon. Signal Record.
1 Press the Down key to enter the  Mon. Signal Record.

monitoring signal memory. The 01.01.97 12:05 CHECK
oldest entry is displayed. Cold Rest /SW Update
2 Press the Right key repeatedly to  Mon. Signal Record.

display the entries one after the 01.01.97 12:04 CHECK
other in chronological order. If Checksum error param
more than 30 monitoring signals
have been entered since the last
reset, the ‘overflow’ signal is
displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the Left key to display the  Mon. Signal Record.
previous entry. 01.01.97 12:05 CHECK
Cold Rest /SW Update
(GS) 3-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

4 If the Down key is held down  Mon. Signal Record.
while a monitoring signal is being 01.01.97 12:05 CHECK
displayed, the following additional Cold Rest/SW Update
information will be displayed:
First: Time when the signal  First 12:05:59.744
first occurred Active Yes
Active: The fault is still being Cancel No
detected (Yes) or is no Number 1
longer detected (No) by
the self-monitoring
function.
Reset: The fault was no longer
detected by the self-
monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
GS Number: The signal occurred x
times.
5 Press the Up key at any point  M+T/Rec/MT_RC
within the monitoring signal Mon. Signal Record.
memory to return to the entry
point. ↓
Readout of the Event Memories

There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in event
memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

0 Select the entry point for the first  Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL
fault memory, for example. If the Fault Recording 1
memory contains entries, the third 01.01.99 10:00:33
line of the display will show the ↓
date and time the fault began. If
the third line is blank, then there
are no entries in the fault
memory.
1 Press the Down key to enter the  Fault Recording 1
fault memory. First, the fault OSCIL
number is shown. In this example Event
it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the Right key repeatedly to  Fault Recording 1
see first the measured fault data 200 ms FT_DA
and then the binary signals in Running Time
chronological order. The time 0.17 s
shown in the second line is the
relative time, measured from the  Fault Recording 1
onset of the fault, at which the 0 ms OSCIL
value was measured or the binary Record. in Progress
signal started or ended. Start
Once the end of the fault has  Fault Recording 1
been reached (after the Right key 241 ms OSCIL
has been pressed repeatedly), Record. in Progress
pressing the Right key again will End
have no effect.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-21

3 Press the Left key to see the  Fault Recording 1
previous measured value or the 0 ms OSCIL
previous signal. Record. in Progress
Start
4 Press the Up key at any point  Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL
within the fault memory to return Fault Recording 1
to the entry point. 01.01.99 10:00:33
↓
Resetting
All information memories - including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory -
and also the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED indicators are
automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault - provided that the
appropriate operating mode has been selected - so that they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is always GS
possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an
LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that inadvertent
deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive events
are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in principle. If
the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be the case after
functional testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting. The resetting
procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In this example the
global change-enabling function has already been activated.

0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of  M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
the display shows the number of Reset Recording
faults since the last reset, 10 in 10
this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The EDIT  M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
MODE LED will light up. Reset Recording
10
Don’t Execute
2 Press the Up or Down keys to  M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
change the setting to ‘Execute’. Reset Recording
or
10
 Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The EDIT  M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
MODE LED will go out. The Reset Recording
value in line 3 is reset to ‘0’. 0
4 To cancel the intended clearing of  M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
the fault recordings after leaving Reset Recording
the standard control mode (the 10
EDIT MODE LED is on), press
the CLEAR key. The LED will go
out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device
unchanged. Any setting can be
selected again for a value change
by pressing the keys.
(GS) 3-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.7 Password protected control actions

Certain actions from the local HMI (such as a manual trip command for testing purposes)
can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to prevent accidental
output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific
time interval. The following example illustrates the password-protected output of a manual
trip command using the factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the
user (see the section entitled ‘Changing the Password’), the following description will apply
analogously.

0 In the menu tree  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
‘M+T/C+Test/MAIN’ select setting Man. Trip Cmd. USER
‘Man. Trip Cmd. USER’ Don’t Execute
1 Press the Enter key. Eight  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
GS asterisks (*) appear in the fourth Man. Trip Cmd. USER
line of the display. Don’t Execute
********
sequence:
Left 
Right 
Up 
Down  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man. Trip Cmd. USER
Don’t Execute
The display will change as shown *
in the column on the right.
Now press the Enter key. The  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
LED indicator labeled EDIT Man. Trip Cmd. USER
MODE will light up. This indicates Don’t Execute
that the setting can now be
changed by pressing the Up or
Down keys.
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man. Trip Cmd. USER
or
Execute

4 Press the Enter key again. The  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
LED indicator will go out and the Man. Trip Cmd. USER
unit will execute the command. Don’t Execute
5 As long as the EDIT MODE LED  M+T/C+Test/MAIN
is on, the control action can be Man. Trip Cmd. USER
terminated by pressing the Don’t Execute
CLEAR key. The LED will go out.
Changing the Password

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a
specific time interval. The Left, Right, Up and Down keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-23
GS
Figure 8: Relay keypad
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

0 In the menu tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’  Set/Conf/HMI
select setting ‘Password’ Password
********
1 Press the Enter key. Eight  Set/Conf/HMI
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth Password
line of the display. ********
********
sequence:
Left 
Right 
Up 
Down  Set/Conf/HMI
Password
********
The display will change as shown *
in the column on the right.
3 Now press the Enter key. The  Set/Conf/HMI
EDIT MODE LED will light up. Password
The third line shows a cursor (_) _
as the prompt for entering a new
password.
4 Enter the new password, which in  Set/Conf/HMI
this example is done by pressing Password
then
the Up followed by the Down key. **

(GS) 3-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

5 Press the Enter key again.  Set/Conf/HMI
Asterisks appear in the third line Password
and a cursor in the fourth prompts **
the user to enter the new _
password again.
6 Re-enter the password.  Set/Conf/HMI
Password
then
**
 **
7a Press the ENTER key again. If  Set/Conf/HMI
the password has been entered Password
correctly, the EDIT MODE LED ********
goes out and the display appears
on the right as shown. The new
password is now valid.
GS 7b If the password is re-entered  Set/Conf/HMI
incorrectly, the EDIT MODE LED Password
then
remains on and display at right is **
shown. The password needs to  _
be re-entered. It is also possible
to cancel the change in password
by pressing the CLEAR key (see
step 8).
8 The change in password can be  Set/Conf/HMI
canceled at any time before step Password
7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If ********
this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 without
entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without password
protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global
change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ‘Change-Enabling
Function’).
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

0 Turn off the device. 
1 Turn the device on. At the  TEST
beginning of device startup, press >>>
the 4 arrow keys and hold them 
down.

2 When this condition is detected  Password
during startup, the password is 1234
displayed. 

3 After the 4 keys are released,  TEST
startup will continue. >>>>>>>>>>>>
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-25
1.8 Front communication port user interface

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under
the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended
for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 7. This port
supports the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol only. The front port is particularly
designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 that is a Windows 98, Windows
NT4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
GS
SK2
25 pin
SK1
download/monitor port
9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
P0107ENb
Figure 9: Front port connection

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of
the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the
serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check
your PC manual):
25 Way 9 Way
Pin no. 2 3 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 3 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 5 7 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin
on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown
in Figure 7. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above,
a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to
pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data
communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’
serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC
has the same pin configuration as the relay.
(GS) 3-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
PC
MiCOM relay
DCE Serial data connector DTE

Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ENc
Figure 10: PC - relay signal connection

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s communication
settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s communication settings
for the front port are set via the settings in menu tree “Set/Conf/PC”. Refer to Settings - ST
GS section for details of these settings.
1.8.1 Front IEC 60870-5-103 port

The front EIA(RS)232 1 9 pin port supports the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol for one to one
communication. It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/maintenance
and is not suitable for permanent connection.
1.9 MiCOM S1 relay communications basics

The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 that
is a Windows 98, Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP based software package.
MiCOM S1 is the universal MiCOM IED Support Software and provides users a direct and
convenient access to all stored data in any MiCOM IED using the EIA(RS)232 front
communication port.
MiCOM S1 provides full access to:
• MiCOM Px20, Px30, Px40 relays
• MiCOM Mx20 measurements units
1.9.1 PC requirements
The following minimum requirements must be met for the MiCOM S1 software to properly
work on a PC.
• IBM PC or 100% compatible
• Windows® 98, Windows® NT 4.0, Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP operating

system
• 64MB RAM
• Intel Pentium II 300MHz
• 1.60GB free hard disk for the full installation, with 30MB minimum free on C:\
• CD-ROM drive or network connection
1.9.2 Connecting to the P63x relay using MiCOM S1

Before starting, verify that the EIA(RS)232 serial cable is properly connected to the
EIA(RS)232 port on the front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions in section 1.8
to ensure a proper connection is made between the PC and the relay before attempting to
communicate with the relay.
1 This port is actually compliant to EIA(RS)574; the 9-pin version of EIA(RS)232, see www.tiaonline.org.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-27
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 and assumes you have a
copy of MiCOM S1 installed on your PC. Please refer to the MiCOM S1 User Manual for
more detailed information.
To start MiCOM S1, click on the icon:
In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1" then "MiCOM S1 Start-up".
GS
WARNING: CLICKING ON "UNINSTALL MICOM S1", WILL UNINSTALL MiCOM S1,

AND ALL DATA AND RECORDS USED IN MiCOM S1.
You access the MiCOM S1 launcher screen.
(GS) 3-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The MiCOM S1 launcher is the software that gives access to the different application
programs:
• MiCOM S1 for MiCOM M/Px20 IEDs
• MiCOM S1 for MiCOM Px30 IEDs
• MiCOM S1 for MiCOM Px40 IEDs
• MiCOM S1 disturbance record viewer for COMTRADE files
To access these different programs, use the blue arrows,
Click on the desired type of access
GS
and click on the required MiCOM Px30 series
1.9.3 Open communication link with relay

To open the communications link from S1 to the P63x relay the following procedure must be
followed:
Choose Identify Device... from the Communication menu.
Select the ranges for baud rate and device address, select the parity and click the Identify
button. These settings can be checked and modified in the device in the menu tree
“Set/Conf/PC”. The default settings are Baud Rate: 19200, Bay Address: 1, Parity: Even.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-29
If a device is identified, the Device dialog box with information on this device is displayed.
GS
Click the Settings File button. This creates a new default settings file suitable for the data
model of the identified device.
To read out the current settings of the device, click Yes in the dialogue shown above. This
will update the default file with the device information and current settings.
Note: The default file will contain all possible hardware and software options
for the device. Reading out the active settings will configure the file to
show only those options available in the currently connected device.
Highlight the folder in the left part of the setting data window or highlight the setting you want
to read out and choose Read Value... from the Communication menu. If the first entry is
highlighted in the left part of the setting data window, that is the name of the IED, the
complete setting will be read out e.g.
(GS) 3-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.9.4 Off-line use of MiCOM S1

As well as being used for the on-line editing of settings, MiCOM S1 can also be used as an
off-line tool to prepare settings without access to the relay.
In order to open a default setting file for modification, in the “File” menu, select “New…” and
then “Settings File”.
Select the relay type and firmware version required. e.g. a P634 relay, with firmware version
606 in the figure shown below. The language (in brackets) indicates the “Regional
GS Language” variant of the file. The customized English version on which this documentation
is based is indicated by (English), also as shown in figure below.
1.9.5 Viewing “regional language” english setting files in MiCOM S1

The MiCOM S&R-103 editor allows viewing of setting files in either the “Reference
Language” or the “Regional Language” of the data model. To view the “Regional Language”
English settings and text:
Select “Program Settings…” from the “Tools” menu.
In the dialogue box, select Regional Language as shown below.

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (GS) 3-31
GS
To set the relay to display the “Regional Language” English on the HMI, go to
“Par/Conf/LOC: Language” (003.020) and set to “2nd language”. This setting will then be
displayed as “Set/Conf/HMI: Language” in the “Regional Language” English.
Refer to the MiCOM S1 Technical Guide section S1V23/EN HI/A21 for more information on
using the S1 S&R-103 setting software.
(GS) 3-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
GS
Settings P63x/UK ST/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
ST
SETTINGS

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK ST/A54 Getting Started
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
ST
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-1
CONTENTS
(ST) 4-
1. SETTINGS 5
1.1 Device ID 5
1.1.1 Device identification (DVICE) 5
1.2 Configuration 9
1.2.1 Local control panel configuration (HMI) 9
1.2.2 Local front port communication configuration (PC) 10
1.2.3 Rear port communication configuration (COMM1) 12
1.2.4 2nd rear port communication configuration (COMM2) 21
1.2.5 Communication interface IEC 61850 (IEC) 23 ST

1.2.6 Communication interface GOOSE 26
1.2.7 Communication interface GSSE 31
1.2.8 Enabling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB) 34
1.2.9 Opto input assignment and operating mode configuration (INP) 35
1.2.10 Temperature & DC monitoring inputs configuration (RTDmA) 37
1.2.11 Output relay assignment and operating mode configuration (OUTP) 38
1.2.12 Analog output channel configuration (mA_OP) 40
1.2.13 LED assignment and operating mode configuration (LED) 43
1.2.14 Communication and time synchronization channel assignment (MAIN) 45
1.2.15 Disturbance recorder channel configuration (OSCIL) 46
1.2.16 Cancelling a protection function 47
1.2.17 Enabling differential protection (DIFF) 47
1.2.18 Enabling restricted earth fault protection (REF_) 48
1.2.19 Enabling definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) 48
1.2.20 Enabling inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) 48
1.2.21 Enabling thermal overload protection (THRM) 49
1.2.22 Enabling under/overvoltage protection (V<>) 49
1.2.23 Enabling frequency protection (f<>) 49
1.2.24 Enabling overfluxing protection (V/f) 50
1.2.25 Enabling current transformer supervision (CTS) 50
1.2.26 Enabling broken conductor detection (BC_) 50
1.2.27 Enabling temperature & DC monitoring (LIMIT) 51

P63x/UK ST/A54 Settings
(ST) 4-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.28 Enabling phase current monitoring (LIM_) 51
1.2.29 Enabling programmable logic (LOGIC) 51
1.3 Function settings 52
1.3.1 Global 52
1.3.1.1 Front port communication blocking (PC) 52
1.3.1.2 Rear port communication blocking (COMM1) 52
1.3.1.3 Rear port communication blocking (COMM2) 52
1.3.1.4 Output relay blocking (OUTP) 53
1.3.1.5 Main global settings (MAIN) 53
1.3.1.6 Setting group selection (GROUP) 59
1.3.1.7 Self testing & diagnostics (CHECK) 59
1.3.1.8 Disturbance recorder settings (OSCIL) 60

ST 1.3.2 Common settings 61
1.3.2.1 Main common settings (MAIN) 61
1.3.2.2 Differential protection common settings (DIFF) 62
1.3.2.3 Restricted earth fault protection common settings (REF_) 63
1.3.2.4 Definite time overcurrent protection common settings (DTOC) 66
1.3.2.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection common settings (IDMT) 66
1.3.2.6 Thermal overload protection common settings (THRM) 67
1.3.2.7 Under/overvoltage protection common settings (V<>) 68
1.3.2.8 Frequency protection common settings (f<>) 68
1.3.2.9 Overfluxing protection common settings (V/f) 69
1.3.2.10 Current transformer supervision common settings (CTS) 69
1.3.2.11 Broken conductor detection common settings (BC_) 69
1.3.2.12 Temperature & DC monitoring settings (LIMIT) 70
1.3.2.13 Phase current monitoring settings (LIM_) 72
1.3.2.14 Programmable logic settings (LOGIC) 74
1.3.3 Setting group SGx (x = 1 to 4) 77
1.3.3.1 Phase reversal logic (MAIN) 78
1.3.3.2 Differential protection (DIFF) 78
1.3.3.3 Restricted earth fault protection (REF_) 81
1.3.3.4 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) 83
1.3.3.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) 90
1.3.3.6 Thermal overload protection (THRM) 97
1.3.3.7 Under/overvoltage protection (V<>) 100

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-3
1.3.3.8 Frequency protection (f<>) 101
1.3.3.9 Overfluxing protection (V/f) 103
1.3.3.10 Current transformer supervision (CTS) 105
1.3.3.11 Broken conductor detection (BC_) 106
ST
(ST) 4-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
ST
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-5
1. SETTINGS
1.1 Device ID
1.1.1 Device identification (DVICE)
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min. Max.
Settings\Device ID
DVICE: Device Type As per relay 631 762 1
000 000 Read only
The device type is displayed.
Not
DVICE: 655.35/
As per relay Measured/ 0.01
Software Version Overflow
0.00
002 120 Read only
Firmware version of the device. ST
DVICE: SW Date As per relay 01.01.97 - dd.mm.yy
002 122 Read only
Release date of the firmware.
Not
DVICE: SW Version 655.35/
As per relay Measured/ 0.01
Communic. Overflow
0.00
002 103 Read only
Firmware version of the communication module.
DVICE:
As per relay 0.0 899.9 0.1
Language Version
002 123 Read only
Language version of the device.
DVICE: Text Vers
As per relay 0 255 1
Data Model
002 121 Read only
Using the text replacement feature of S&R-103, the user can change the setting names
and descriptions contained within the data model and download them into the device. The
customized data models have a numeric “Text Version” field that can be updated to
indicate a customized data model. Standard data models have a factory-set default value
of 0.
DVICE:
As per relay 0.000000.0 - -
Serial Number
002 124 Read only
Serial number of the device.
DVICE: Order No. As per relay 00000000 - -
000 001 Read only
Order number of the device
(ST) 4-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DVICE: Order ext.
0 0 999 1
No. 1 (… 27)
See table below for setting addresses.
Order extension numbers of the device. These settings can be modified by sending each
value to the device individually or via the front panel display.
Setting Address Setting Address Setting Address
Order ext. No. 1 000 003 Order ext. No. 10 000 012 Order ext. No. 19 000 021
ST Order ext. No. 8 000 010 Order ext. No. 17 000 019 Order ext. No. 26 000 028
Module A:
Module B:
Module L:
Module N:
DVICE: Module var. slot 1 Module P:
As per relay -
(… 21) Module T:
Module V:
Module X:
Module Y:
Not fitted
See table below for setting addresses. Read only
Stock number of the module fitted in the respective slot.
Module var. slot 1 086 050 Module var. slot 8 086 057 Module var. slot 15 086 064
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-7
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Version A
DVICE: Module vers. …
As per relay -
Slot 1 (… 21) Version Z
Not Fitted
See table below for setting addresses. Read only
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
Module vers. Slot 1 086 193 Module vers. Slot 8 086 200 Module vers. Slot 15 086 207
DVICE:
ST
As per relay Not fitted Module A: -
Variant of Module A
086 047 Read only
Stock number of Module A in this design version.
DVICE:
As per relay Not fitted Module L: -
Variant of Module L
086 048 Read only
Stock number of Module L in this design version.
Version A
DVICE: …
As per relay -
Version of Module A Version Z
Not Fitted
086 190 Read only
Index letter specifying the version of Module A.
Version A
DVICE: …
As per relay -
Version of Module L Version Z
Not Fitted
086 191 Read only
Index letter specifying the version of Module L.
DVICE:
As per relay Not fitted Module B: -
Variant of Module B
086 049 Read only
Item number of digital bus Module B in this design version.
Version A
DVICE: …
As per relay -
Version of Module B Version Z
Not Fitted
086 192 Read only
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus Module B.
(ST) 4-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DVICE: Variant of
As per relay Not fitted Module B: -
Module B (a)
086 046 Read only
Stock number of the analog bus Module B in this design version.
Version A
DVICE: Version of …
As per relay -
Module B (a) Version Z
Not Fitted
086 189 Read only
Index letter specifying the version of the analog bus Module B.
DVICE: MAC
As per relay -
Address Module A
104 061 Read only
MAC address for Ethernet module, where fitted.
ST DVICE: Customer ID
0.00 0.00 99.99 0.01
Data 1 (… 8)
Customer configurable fields.
Customer ID Data 1 000 040 Customer ID Data 4 000 043 Customer ID Data 7 000 046
Customer ID Data 2 000 041 Customer ID Data 5 000 044 Customer ID Data 8 000 047
Customer ID Data 3 000 042 Customer ID Data 6 000 045
DVICE: Device ID 0 0 9999 1

000 035
DVICE: Substation ID 0 0 9999 1
000 036
DVICE: Feeder ID 0 0 9999 1
000 037
DVICE:
0 0 9999 1
Password Level 1
000 048
DVICE:
0 0 9999 1
Password Level 2
000 049
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-9
1.2 Configuration
1.2.1 Local control panel configuration (HMI)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Settings\Configuration
Reference English
HMI: Language -
Language Reference Language
003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.
Note: This Technical Manual is based on the 2nd Language or English setting of
this field. Relays with this data model will have a -800 order code in the
model number.
HMI: Decimal Point
Decimal Point -
Decimal Separator Comma
003 021
ST
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the HMI.
HMI: Password - -
003 035 Displayed on HMI only (not in setting file).
The password to be used for changing settings from the HMI can be defined here. Refer to
Getting Started - GS for more information on entering/changing the password from the
HMI.
Signals from selection table
HMI: Read Key
Disabled dependent upon relay -
Assignment
configuration.
080 110
Selection of the event recording to be displayed when the read c key is pressed.
HMI:
Operation Panel fct
configuration.
053 007 OP Fig. 83
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel referred to as the
Operation Panel. This panel will be displayed during normal operation i.e. during normal
load conditions.
HMI:
Overload Panel fct
configuration.
053 005 OP Fig. 85
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel. This panel will be
displayed during overload conditions.
HMI: Fault Panel fct Disabled dependent upon relay -
configuration.
053 003 OP Fig. 84
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel. This panel will be displayed
during and after fault conditions.
(ST) 4-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
HMI:
5s 1s 10 s 1s
Panel Hold-Time
031 075 OP Fig. 83
Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit switches to the
next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected for display than can be
shown on the LCD display at one time.
HMI:
60 s 60 s 60000 s 1s
Auto Return Time
003 014 OP Fig. 83
If the user does not press a key on the HMI during this set time period, the
change-enabling function is deactivated and the Operation Panel is called up provided that
values have been assigned to the Operation Panel and that there is no other event.
Blocked/
HMI: Backlight Time 60 s 60000 s 1s
60 s
ST 003 023
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period, then
the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
1.2.2 Local front port communication configuration (PC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
ALSTOM
PC: Manufacturer ALSTOM D AEG -
ALSTOM D
003 183 OP Fig. 86
Setting for the name of the device manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
PC: Bay Address 1 0 254 1
003 068 OP Fig. 86
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC
(local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface. An identical setting must be selected for both
addresses.
PC: Relay Address 1 0 255 1
003 069 OP Fig. 86
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC
(local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface. An identical setting must be selected for both
addresses.
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
PC: Baud Rate 19.2 kBaud -
9600 Baud
19.2 kBaud
38.4 kBaud
57.6 kBaud
115.2 kBaud
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-11
Setting Range
Min. Max.
003 081 OP Fig. 86
Baud rate of the PC (local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface.
Disabled
PC: Parity Bit Even -
Even
003 181 OP Fig. 86
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P63x.
None
PC: VDEW Only
None -
Spontan. Sig. Enable VDEW + Selected Sig.
All
003 187 OP Fig. 86
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
PC:
Select. Spontan.Sig.
configuration. ST
003 189 OP Fig. 86
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the PC interface.
Disabled
ASDU 3.1 per IEC
ASDU 3.2 per IEC
ASDU 3.3 per IEC
ASDU 3.4 per IEC
PC: Transm Enab ASDU 9 per IEC
Disabled -
Cycl Dat ILS Message
ASDU 3.1 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 3.2 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 3.3 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 9 & 3.4 per IEC
ASDU 9 & ILS telegr.
003 084 OP Fig. 86
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC:
Disabled -
Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
003 185 OP Fig. 86
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined message via the
PC interface.
PC: Delta V 3.0 %Vn 0.0 %Vn 15.0 %Vn 0.1 %Vn
003 055 OP Fig. 86
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta I 3.0 %In 0.0 %In 15.0 %In 0.1 %In
003 056 OP Fig. 86
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
(ST) 4-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
PC: Delta f 2.0 %fn 0.0 %fn 2.0 %fn 0.1 %fn
003 057 OP Fig. 86
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC:
3.0 0.0 15.0 0.1
Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel
003 155 OP Fig. 86
The message is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the
last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 1 min 0 min 15 min 1 min
003 058 OP Fig. 86
All measured data are transmitted again through the PC interface after this time period has
elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
ST PC: Time-Out 1 min 1 min 60 min 1 min

003 188 OP Fig. 86
Time-out setting for the PC interface.
1.2.3 Rear port communication configuration (COMM1)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1: Remote
Disabled Disabled Enabled -
Comms Port1
056 026
Enabling the COMM1 function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is
disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
COMM1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
OP Fig. 88,
003 170 89, 90, 91,
92
Disabling or enabling the communication interface.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
IEC870-5 Enabled
003 215 OP Fig. 87
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
Addit. -101 Enable
003 216 OP Fig. 87
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
Addit. ILS Enable
003 217 OP Fig. 87
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-13
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
MODBUS Enable
003 220 OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
DNP3 Enable
003 231 OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
COURIER Enable
103 040 OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the Courier protocol.
COMM1:
Communicat Protocol
Disabled dependent upon relay
configuration.
- ST
003 167 OP Fig. 87
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface.
COMM1: ALSTOM
ALSTOM -
MODBUS Variant ALSTOM D
MODBUS protocol only OP Fig. 91
Select between the ALSTOM D and the ALSTOM variant of the MODBUS protocol.
COMM1: Light Off / Low
Light On / High -
Line Idle State Light On / High
003 165 OP Fig. 88,
89, 90, 91,
92
Setting for the line idle state indication.
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
COMM1: Baud Rate 19.2 kBaud -
9600 Baud
19.2 kBaud
38.4 kBaud
57.6 kBaud
64.0 kBaud
OP Fig. 88,
003 071 89, 90, 91,
92
Baud rate of the communication interface.
Disabled
COMM1: Parity Bit Even Odd -
Even
003 171 OP Fig. 88,
89, 90, 91,
92
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control unit connected to the P63x.
(ST) 4-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1: Dead Time
Yes No Yes -
Monitoring
003 176 OP Fig. 88,
89, 90, 91,
92
The P63x monitors message transmission to make sure that no pause within a message
exceeds 33 bits. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. This setting
is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Blocked/
25 s 254 s 1s
Mon. Time Polling 3s
003 202 OP Fig. 88,
89, 90, 91,
92
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the
time set here.
ST COMM1: Octet
Comm. Address
1 0 254 1
003 072 OP Fig. 88,

89, 90, 92
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in
communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
COMM1: Octet 2
0 0 255 1
Com.Add DNP3
DNP3 protocol only
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16 bit address is used to identify the devices. The address set
here is the higher-order octet. The address set under COMM1: Octet Comm. Address is
the lower-order octet of the DNP address.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
Test Monitor On
OP Fig. 88,
003 166 89, 90, 91,
92
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
ALSTOM
COMM1:
ALSTOM D AEG -
Manufacturer
ALSTOM D
003 161 IEC 870-5 protocol only OP Fig. 88,
89, 90
COMM1:
1 0 255 1
Octet Address ASDU
89, 90
None
COMM1: VDEW Only
All -
All
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-15
Setting Range
Min. Max.
89, 90
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface.
COMM1:
configuration.
003 179 IEC 870-5 protocol only OP Fig. 88
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the COMM1 interface.
COMM1: Transm Disabled
Disabled -
Enab Cycl Dat ILS Message
89, 90
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface.
COMM1:
Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
Disabled dependent upon relay - ST
configuration.
89, 90
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined message via the
communication interface.
COMM1: Delta V 3.0 %Vn 0.0 %Vn 15.0 %Vn 0.1 %Vn
89, 90
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM1: Delta I 3.0 %In 0.0 %In 15.0 %In 0.1 %In
89, 90
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the
COMM1: Delta f 2.0 %fn 0.0 %fn 2.0 %fn 0.1 %fn
89, 90
The measured frequency is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the
COMM1:
3.0 0.0 15.0 0.1
Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel
89, 90
COMM1: Delta t 1 min 0 min 15 min 1 min
89, 90
All measured data are transmitted again through the communication interface after this
time period has elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other
delta conditions.
(ST) 4-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1: Blocked/
Blocked 9000 s 1s
Contin. General Scan 10 s
89, 90
A continuous or background general scan means that the P63x transmits all settings,
signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods
when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a
connected control system. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference
between two messages.
COMM1: Comm.
1 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte
Address Length
003 201 IEC 870-5-101 protocol only OP Fig. 89
Setting for the communication address length.
COMM1:
0 0 255 1
Octet 2 Comm. Addr.
ST 003 200 IEC 870-5-101 protocol only OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
COMM1: Cause W/o Source Address
W/o Source Address -
Transm. Length With Source Address
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
COMM1: Address
Length ASDU
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of message structures.
COMM1:
0 0 255 1
Octet 2 Addr. ASDU
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of message
structures.
COMM1:
Addr. Length Inf.Obj
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
COMM1:
0 0 255 1
Oct.3 Addr. Inf.Obj.
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
Inf.No.<-> Funct.Type
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the
object address.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-17
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1:
Time Tag Length
Setting for the time tag length.
COMM1:
Single Channel
ASDU1/ASDU20 Single Channel -
Dual Channel
Conv.
Setting specifying whether message structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a single signal
or double signal.
Single Channel
COMM1:
Single Channel Dual Channel -
ASDU2 Conversion
Protection Event
Setting specifying whether message structure 2 shall be converted as a single signal or ST
double signal.
COMM1:
Yes No Yes -
Initializ Signal
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
COMM1:
No No Yes -
Balanced Operation
Setting specifying whether communication shall be operated in full duplex mode
(simultaneous transmission and reception).
COMM1: Direction Bit 0 0 1 1
Setting for the control direction. As a rule, this value should be set to ‘1’ in the control
center and to ‘0’ in the substation.
COMM1:
0.40 s 0.10 s 2.55 s 0.01 s
Time-out Interval
Setting for the maximum time before the status signal is issued for the acknowledge
command.
COMM1: Reg.asg.
Selec. Cmds
configuration.
003 210 MODBUS protocol only OP Fig. 91
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected commands.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first command is given
the register no. 00301, the second the register no. 00302, etc.
(ST) 4-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1:
Reg.asg. Selec. Sig.
configuration.
MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected signals.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first signal is given the
register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
COMM1:
Reg.asg. Sel. m.val.
configuration.
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected measured
values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured
value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register no. 30302, etc.
ST COMM1:
Reg.asg. Sel. Param.
configuration.
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected parameters.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is
given the register no. 40301, the second the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1:
5s 1s 120 s 1s
Delta t (MODBUS)
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication interface after this
time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom
Event Confirm.
Setting as to whether an event confirmation by the master is necessary to delete an event
from the “event queue“.
COMM1:
0 Bit 0 Bit 254 Bit 1 Bit
Phys. Charact. Delay
003 241 DNP3 protocol only OP Fig. 92
Number of bits to be awaited from receiving the "Requests" to sending the "Response".
COMM1:
40 Bit 0 Bit 254 Bit 1 Bit
Phys. Char. Timeout
Number of bits that can be missing in the message without receive interrupt.
Never
COMM1: Multi-Frame
Multi-Frame Fragment -
Link Confirm. Mode Fragment
All Frames
Setting for the acknowledgement mode for confirmation within the link layer.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-19
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1:
0.10 s 0.05 s 2.54 s 0.01 s
Link Confirm.Timeout
Setting for the link layer timeout period. Within the link layer, the master needs to
acknowledge (confirm) within this period.
COMM1:
2 1 10 1
Link Max. Retries
Number of repetitions performed within the link layer after the occurrence of errors during
transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1:
5.0 s 0.5 s 25.4 s 0.1 s
Appl Confirm.Timeout
Setting for the application layer timeout period. Within the application layer, the master
needs to acknowledge (confirm) within this period. ST
COMM1:
60 s 5s 254 s 1s
Appl Need Time Del.
Within the time interval set here, the slave cyclically issues a clock synchronization request
to the master.
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. Inputs
configuration.
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 - binary inputs. Indices are assigned
in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0.
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin.Outputs
configuration.
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 - binary outputs. Indices are
assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0.
COMM1:
Ind./cl. Analog Inp.
configuration.
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 - analog inputs. Indices are
COMM1:
Ind./cl. Analog Outp
configuration.
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 - analog outputs. Indices are
(ST) 4-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1: Ph-Ph
16 0 255 1
Meas v. (DNP3)
Initialization value of the thresholds for the transmission of measured data in object 30.
The threshold values may be changed separately by the master for each measured value
by writing to object 34, "Analog Input Reporting Deadband".
COMM1: Phase
5s 1s 120 s 1s
Phase t (DNP3)
Cycle time of updating the DNP objects 30 (analog inputs).
COMM1:
Command Selection
configuration.
103 042 Courier protocol only OP Fig. 93
ST This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary commands
(read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ’Device online’).
COMM1:
Signal Selection
configuration.
This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary signals (read
only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ’Starting I>’).
COMM1:
Meas. val. Selection
configuration.
This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the analog
measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g.
’Running time’).
COMM1:
Parameter Selection
configuration.
This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the analog settings
(read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ’tI>’).
COMM1:
5s 1s 120 s 1s
Delta t (COURIER)
All Courier registers are transmitted again through the communication interface after this
time has elapsed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-21
1.2.4 2nd rear port communication configuration (COMM2)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Settings/Configuration
COMM2: Remote
Comms Port2
056 057
Enabling the COMM2 function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is
disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
COMM2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
103 170 OP Fig. 95
COMM2: Light Off/Low
Light On/High -
Line Idle State Light On/High ST
103 165 OP Fig. 95
Setting for the line idle state indication.
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
COMM2: Baud Rate 19.2 kBaud 4800 Baud -
9600 Baud
19.2 kBaud
38.4 kBaud
57.6 kBaud
103 071 OP Fig. 95
Baud rate of the communication interface.
Disabled
COMM2: Parity Bit Even Odd -
Even
103 171 OP Fig. 95
COMM2: Dead Time
Yes No Yes -
Monitoring
103 176 OP Fig. 95
The P63x monitors message transmission to make sure that no pause within a message
exceeds 33 bits. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. This setting
is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2:
25 s Blocked/3 s 254 s 1s
Mon. Time Polling
103 202 OP Fig. 95
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the
time set here.
(ST) 4-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM2: Octet
1 0 254 1
Comm. Address
103 072 OP Fig. 95
ALSTOM
COMM2:
ALSTOM D AEG -
Manufacturer
ALSTOM D
103 161 OP Fig. 95
COMM2:
1 0 255 1
Octet Address ASDU
103 073 OP Fig. 95
ST communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
None
COMM2: VDEW Only
All -
All
103 177 OP Fig. 95
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface.
COMM2:
configuration.
103 179 OP Fig. 95
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the COMM1 interface.
Disabled
ASDU 3.1 per IEC
ASDU 3.2 per IEC
ASDU 3.3 per IEC
ASDU 3.4 per IEC
COMM2: Transm ASDU 9 per IEC
Disabled -
Enab Cycl Dat ILS Message
ASDU 3.1 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 3.2 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 3.3 & 3.4 IEC
ASDU 9 & 3.4 per IEC
ASDU 9 & ILS telegr.
103 074 OP Fig. 95
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the COMM2 interface.
COMM2:
Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
configuration.
103 175 OP Fig. 95
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined message via the
COMM2 interface.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-23
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM2: Delta V 3.0 %Vn 0.0 %Vn 15.0 %Vn 0.1 %Vn
103 050 OP Fig. 95
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta I 3.0 %In 0.0 %In 15.0 %In 0.1 %In
103 051 OP Fig. 95
A measured current value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta f 2.0 %fn 0.0 %fn 2.0 %fn 0.1 %fn
103 052 OP Fig. 95
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the
set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2:
3.0 0.0 15.0 0.1
Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel ST
103 150 OP Fig. 95
COMM2: Delta t 1 min 0 min 15 min 1 min
103 053 OP Fig. 95
All measured data are transmitted again through the COMM2 interface after this time
period has elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta
conditions.
1.2.5 Communication interface IEC 61850 (IEC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IEC: IEC
Communication
056 059
Enabling or disabling Ethernet IEC 61850 communication. If the function is disabled, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
IEC: General Enable
No No Yes -
USER
104 000
Enabling and disabling IEC 61850.
IEC: Don’t Execute
Don’t Execute -
Enable Configuration Execute
104 058
This setting can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency of all settings in
the function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are all enabled mutually by this
parameter.
(ST) 4-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IEC: Inactivity Timer 15 min 1 min 30 min 1 min
104 050
Additional communication monitor for Ethernet. Should a logged-on client issue no further
request message, after this time period has elapsed that client will automatically be
logged-off, i.e. no further reports will be issued to it. To re-establish communication the
client is required to perform a new log-on procedure with the device (IED).
IEC: Ethernet Media Copper

Copper -
Fiber
104 056
Selecting the physical communication channel from either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber
(ST/SC connector depending on ordering option).
IEC: IED Name Text string up to 20

Template -
characters
104 057
ST Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as device
identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical Device Name in the IEC
data model and must therefore be unambiguous. All devices logged-on to the network
should have non-recurring IED names.
255.255.255
IEC: IP Address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
.255
104 001
IP address for the device (IED has server function).
255.255.255
IEC: Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
.255
104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network
and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
IEC:
0 0 4 1
Number of Routes
104 010
Number of network routes, that can be contacted outside of the sub-network, between the
device (IED) and a client or server, communicating with this device, and situated in an
exterior target network.
Such a configuration is required only then when this device must contact an external
client/server direct without having its own network router to convert an IP address.
Addressing of the router and the target network however are always necessary.
Up to four such external target networks can be contacted.
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
Router Address 1 .255
104 011
IP address of network router # 1.
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
Target Network 1 .255
104 015
IP address of target network # 1.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-25
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
104 019
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
104 023
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
104 027
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
Target Network 3 .255 ST
104 031
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
104 035
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
104 039
IEC: SNTP Operating Request from Request from Server
-
Mode Server Broadcast
104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to Broadcast
synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server transmitting a broadcast signal and,
when set to Request from Server each device (IED has client function) individually
requests a synchronization signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP Poll Cycle
60 s 20 s 600 s 1s
Time
104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode is set to
Request from Server.
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
SNTP Server 1 IP .255
104 202
IP address of the first synchronizing clock server.
IEC: 255.255.255
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 -
SNTP Server 2 IP .255
104 202
IP address of the second synchronizing clock server.
(ST) 4-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IEC: Diff. Local Time 0 -1440 min + 1440 min 1 min
104 206
Time difference between UTC (Coordinated Universal Time/GMT) and local time at
installation site.
IEC:
60 min -1440 min + 1440 min 1 min
Diff. Dayl. Sav. Time
104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.
IEC: Deadband Value 100 0 10000 1
104 051
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB)
except the measured value for energy. Should a change occur in one of the measured
values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
ST IEC:
Update Cycle Energy
Blocked 10 3600 1
104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB transmission
with setting to blocked!
1.2.6 Communication interface GOOSE
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE:
Disabled Enabled/Disabled -
Gen.Obj.Or.SubstEvent
056 068
The parameters of this function group are only active if function group IEC has been
configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been
activated through the parameter IEC: Enable configuration or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General
No No/Yes -
Enable USER
106 001
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
GOOSE:
01-0C-CD-01-00-00 - -
Multic. MAC Address
106 003
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving clients (IED).
The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard according to IEC 61850.
The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE may be modified so as to increase
transmission security or to reduce the number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by
receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE:
12288 0…16383 1
Application ID
106 004
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-27
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE: GOOSE ID - - -
106 002
GOOSE ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with 32 binary and
configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the maximum of 10 monitored
external devices.
GOOSE:
0 0…4094 1
VLAN Identifier
106 006
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN identifier makes it
possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a
function. Because so-called multicast MAC addresses are applied, switches are unable to
filter messages in the network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE:
4 0…7 1
VLAN Priority
106 007
ST
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN priority makes it
possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a
function.
GOOSE: GOOSE Signals from selection table
Out 1 (… 32) Disabled dependent upon relay -
fct.assig. configuration.
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. The
signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured Dataset of GOOSE.
GOOSE Out 1 GOOSE Out 12 GOOSE Out 23
106 011 106 033 106 055
Fct.assig. Fct.assig. Fct.assig.
106 013 106 035 106 057
106 015 106 037 106 059
106 017 106 039 106 061
106 019 106 041 106 063
106 021 106 043 106 065
106 023 106 045 106 067
106 025 106 047 106 069
106 027 106 049 106 071
106 029 106 051 106 073
GOOSE Out 11 GOOSE Out 22
106 031 106 053
Fct.assig. Fct.assig.
(ST) 4-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
Blocked dependent upon relay -
1 (… 16) Applic. ID
configuration.
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary
GOOSE input.
Setting Address Setting Address
GOOSE Inp 1 Applic. ID 107 000 GOOSE Inp 12Applic. ID 107 110
GOOSE Inp 2 Applic. ID 107 010 GOOSE Inp 13Applic. ID 107 120
GOOSE Inp 3 Applic. ID 107 020 GOOSE Inp 14 Applic. ID 107 130
GOOSE Inp 6 Applic. ID 107 050
ST GOOSE Inp 8 Applic. ID 107 070

GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) GOOSE ID
configuration.
GOOSE ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary
GOOSE input.
GOOSE Inp 1 GOOSE ID 107 001 GOOSE Inp 12 GOOSE ID 107 111
GOOSE Inp 6 GOOSE ID 107 051
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-29
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) DataSetRef
configuration.
'DataSetReference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual
binary GOOSE input. 'DataSetReference' consists of a chain of characters including the
full path of the state value from the device (IED) with which the P63x corresponds with the
logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20
characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE Inp 1 DataSetRef 107 002 GOOSE Inp 12 DataSetRef 107 112
GOOSE Inp 6 DataSetRef 107 052
ST

GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) DataObj Ind
configuration.
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for
the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index indicates which data object element in
the Dataset is to be evaluated.
GOOSE Inp 1 DataObj Ind 107 003 GOOSE Inp 12 DataObj Ind 107 113
GOOSE Inp 6 DataObj Ind 107 053
(ST) 4-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) DatAttr Ind
configuration.
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)
for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute
element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE Inp 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004 GOOSE Inp 12 DatAttr Ind 107 114
GOOSE Inp 6 DatAttr Ind 107 054
ST GOOSE Inp 7 DatAttr Ind 107 064


GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) default
configuration.
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual binary GOOSE input will
revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared
altogether.
GOOSE Inp 1 default 107 005 GOOSE Inp 12 default 107 115
GOOSE Inp 6 default 107 055
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-31
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp
1 (… 16) fct.assig.
configuration.
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state signal on
the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic
functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the data attribute, as
configured above, and which was received with the Dataset of GOOSE.
GOOSE Inp 1 fct.assig. 107 006 GOOSE Inp 12 fct.assig. 107 116
GOOSE Inp 6 fct.assig. 107 056
ST
1.2.7 Communication interface GSSE
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GSSE:
Disabled Enabled/Disabled -
Gen.Subst.Stat.Event
056 060
GSSE:
No No/Yes -
General Enable User
104 049
GSSE:
10 ms 1 ms 60 ms 1 ms
GSSE Min. Cycle
104 052
GSSE:
1s 1s 60 s 1s
GSSE Max. Cycle
104 053
GSSE:
900 0 999 1
GSSE Increment
104 054
GSSE: Promiscuous
Promiscuous -
GSSE Startup Broadcast
104 055
(ST) 4-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
No selection/
GSSE: IED 0
IED 0 -
GSSE IED Name …
IED 32
104 057
No selection/
GSSE: GSSE Out 1 User Bit Pair 01
No selection -
(… 32) BitPair …
User Bit Pair 96
GSSE Out 1 BitPair 104 101 GSSE Out 12 BitPair 104 134 GSSE Out 23 BitPair 104 167
ST GSSE Out 4 BitPair

GSSE Out 5 BitPair
104 110
104 113
GSSE Out 15 BitPair
GSSE Out 16 BitPair
104 143
104 146
GSSE Out 26 BitPair
GSSE Out 27 BitPair
104 176
104 179
GSSE Out 11 BitPair 104 131 GSSE Out 22 BitPair 104 164

GSSE: GSSE Out 1
(… 32) fct.assig.
configuration.
GSSE Out 1 GSSE Out 12 GSSE Out 23
104 102 104 135 104 168
fct.assig. fct.assig. fct.assig.
104 105 104 138 104 171
104 108 104 141 104 174
104 111 104 144 104 177
104 114 104 147 104 180
104 117 104 150 104 183
104 120 104 153 104 186
104 123 104 156 104 189
104 126 104 159 104 192
104 129 104 162 104 195
GSSE Out 11 GSSE Out 22
104 132 104 165
fct.assig. fct.assig.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-33
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1
No selection
(… 32) bit pair
GSSE Inp 1 bit pair 105 001 GSSE Inp 12 bit pair 105 056 GSSE Inp 23 bit pair 105 111
ST
GSSE Inp 11 bit pair 105 051 GSSE Inp 22 bit pair 105 106
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1

No selection
(… 32) IED name
GSSE Inp 1 GSSE Inp 12 GSSE Inp 23
105 002 105 057 105 112
IED name IED name IED name
105 007 105 062 105 117
105 012 105 067 105 122
105 017 105 072 105 127
105 022 105 077 105 132
105 027 105 082 105 137
105 032 105 087 105 142
105 037 105 092 105 147
105 042 105 097 105 152
105 047 105 102 105 157
GSSE Inp 11 GSSE Inp 22
105 052 105 107
IED name IED name
(ST) 4-34 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1
0
(… 32) default
GSSE Inp 1 default 105 003 GSSE Inp 12 default 105 058 GSSE Inp 23 default 105 113
ST GSSE Inp 10 default 105 048 GSSE Inp 21 default 105 103 GSSE Inp 32 default 105 158
GSSE Inp 11 default 105 053 GSSE Inp 22 default 105 108
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1

Disabled
(… 32) fct.assig.
Addres
Setting Address Setting Setting Address
s
GSSE Inp 1 fct.assig. 105 004 GSSE Inp 12 fct.assig. 105 059 GSSE Inp 23 fct.assig. 105 114
GSSE Inp 11 fct.assig. 105 054 GSSE Inp 22 fct.assig. 105 109
1.2.8 Enabling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IRIGB:
IRIG-B Time Synch
056 072
Enabling the IRIGB function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
IRIGB: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
023 200 OP Fig. 97
Disabling and enabling the IRIG-B interface function.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-35
1.2.9 Opto input assignment and operating mode configuration (INP)

The P63x has optical coupler (opto) inputs for processing binary signals from the system.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams in the Installation - IN section.
The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not
fitted or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot, then
the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in
the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs one should keep in mind the fact that the same function can
be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals must
persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall
be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting
Min. Max.
Step Size ST
INP: Fct. U 701
(… 2004) Assign
configuration.
See table below for setting addresses. OP Fig. 98
Assignment of opto inputs to internal relay signals. Any of the available signals can be
configured to any of the opto inputs. The addresses for opto input function assignment are
displayed in the following table:
Fct. U 701 Assign 152 109 Fct. U 821 Assign 184 082 Fct. U 1409 Assign 190 034
(ST) 4-36 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
INP: Oper. Mode U Active Low

Active High -
701 (… 2004) Active High
Selection of the operating mode for the opto inputs. The addresses for opto input
operating mode are displayed in the following table:
Oper. Mode U 701 152 110 Oper. Mode U 821 184 083 Oper. Mode U 1409 190 035
ST Oper. Mode U 703

Oper. Mode U 704
152 116
152 119
Oper. Mode U 823
Oper. Mode U 824
184 091
184 095
Oper. Mode U 1411
Oper. Mode U 1412
190 043
190 047
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-37
1.2.10 Temperature & DC monitoring inputs configuration (RTDmA)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
RTDmA: RTD, Curr.
Loop mA IN
056 030
Enabling the RTDmA function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
RTDmA: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
011 100 OP Fig. 99
Disabling or enabling temperature and DC monitoring inputs.
RTDmA: 0.000 IDC, 0.200 IDC, 0.001 IDC,
0.000 IDC, nom
Enable IDC p.u. nom nom nom
037 190 OP Fig. ST
101, 102
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P63x to display a measured
value > 0 (zero suppression).
RTDmA: Blocked/
3.0mA 10.0 mA 0.1 mA
IDC< Open Circuit 0.0 mA
037 191 OP Fig.
102
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P63x will issue an ‘open circuit’ signal.
IDC 1 =
0.000 IDC, nom
Blocked/
RTDmA: IDC 1 IDC 2 … 19 = 0.200 IDC, 0.001 IDC,
0.000 IDC,
(… 20) Blocked nom nom
nom
IDC 20 =
1.200 IDC, nom
See table below for setting addresses. OP Fig.
100, 101,
102
Setting for the input currents IDC xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC, lin xx to
form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current
inputs.
Note: IDC 1 and IDC 20 are the two end points of the characteristic and can not
be blocked.
RTDmA: IDC 1 037 150 RTDmA: IDC 8 037 164 RTDmA: IDC 15 037 178
RTDmA: IDC 7 037 162 RTDmA: IDC 14 037 176
(ST) 4-38 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDC, lin 1 =
0.000 IDC, nom
Blocked/
RTDmA: IDC, lin 1 IDC, lin 2 … 19 = 0.200 0.001
0.000
(… 20) Blocked IDC, nom IDC, nom
IDC, nom
IDC, lin 20 =
1.200 IDC, nom
100, 101,
102
Setting for the input currents IDC, lin xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC xx to
form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current
inputs.
Note: IDC, lin 1 and IDC, lin 20 are the two end points of the characteristic and
can not be blocked.
RTDmA: IDC, lin 1 037 151 RTDmA: IDC, lin 8 037 165 RTDmA: IDC, lin 15 037 179
ST RTDmA: IDC, lin 2 037 153 RTDmA: IDC, lin 9 037 167 RTDmA: IDC, lin 16 037 181
RTDmA: IDC, lin 7 037 163 RTDmA: IDC, lin 14 037 177
RTDmA:
0 -32768 32767 1
Scaled val. IDC, lin1
037 192 OP Fig.
102, 103
Setting for the scaled value of IDC, lin 1.
RTDmA:
1200 -32768 32767 1
Scaled val. IDC, lin20
037 193 OP Fig.
102, 103
Setting for the scaled value of IDC, lin 20.
1.2.11 Output relay assignment and operating mode configuration (OUTP)

The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams in the
Installation - IN section.
The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not
fitted or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot, then the
configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu
tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command
relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned to several output relays
simultaneously for the purpose of contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either follower mode or an inverted mode
and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-39
Note: For relays with make contacts, the “Follower” mode corresponds to
normally-open operation. The “Inverted” mode means that the polarity
of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the
relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts, these
more common descriptions are not applicable.
Setting Range
Min. Max.
OUTP: Fct. Assignm.
K 701 (… 2008)
configuration.
105
Assignment of functions to output relays.
Fct. Assignm. K 701 150 145 Fct. Assignm. K 908 150 214 Fct. Assignm. K 1607 171 026
Fct. Assignm. K 702 150 148 Fct. Assignm. K 1001 150 217 Fct. Assignm. K 1608 171 030 ST
Fct. Assignm. K 907 150 211 Fct. Assignm. K 1606 171 022
Follower
Follower Latching
OUTP: Oper. Mode Follower Rst on Flt
Follower -
K 701 (… 2008) Follower Rst onStart
Inverted
Inverted Latching
105
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
Oper. Mode K 701 150 146 Oper. Mode K 908 150 215 Oper. Mode K 1607 171 027
(ST) 4-40 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Oper. Mode K 907 150 212 Oper. Mode K 1606 171 023
1.2.12 Analog output channel configuration (mA_OP)
Setting Range
ST Menu Text Default Setting
Min. Max.
Step Size
mA_OP: Current
Loop mA outp
056 020
Enabling the mA_OP function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
mA_OP: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 074 OP Fig.
107
Disabling and enabling the measured data output function.
mA_OP:
Fct. Assignm. BCD
configuration.
053 002 OP Fig.
110
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form.
mA_OP: Hold Time Blocked/
0.10 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Output BCD 0.10 s
010 010 OP Fig.
110
Setting for the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in BCD-coded
form.
mA_OP: Scale BCD 1.00 0.01 100.00 0.01
016 082 OP Fig.
110
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-41
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form. The
scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,max
scaling factor =
M x,scal
Where:
M x,scal : Scaled measured value
M x,max : Maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value

mA_OP:
Fct. Assignm. A-1
configuration.
053 000 OP Fig.
112
mA_OP:
Fct. Assignm. A-2
configuration. ST
053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
mA_OP: Blocked/
0.1 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Output A-1 0.10 s
010 114 OP Fig.
112
mA_OP: Blocked/
0.1 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Output A-2 0.10 s
010 115
Setting for the time period for output of the selected measured value.
mA_OP:
0.000 0.000 1.000 0.001
Scaled Min. val. A-1
037 104 OP Fig.
112
mA_OP:
0.000 0.000 1.000 0.001
Scaled Min. val. A-2
037 110 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is
calculated according to the following formula:
M x,min
M x,scal,min =
M x,RL
Where:
Mx,min : Minimum transmitted value of the selected measured value
M x,RL : Range limit of the selected measured value
mA_OP: Blocked/
Blocked 1.000 0.001
Scaled Knee val. A-1 0.000
037 105 OP Fig.
112
(ST) 4-42 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
mA_OP: Blocked/
Blocked 1.000 0.001
Scaled Knee val. A-2 0.000
037 111 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point of the
characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,knee
M x,scal,knee =
M x,RL
Where:
M x,knee : Knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value
M x,RL : Range limit value of selected measured value
mA_OP:
1.000 0.000 1.000 0.001
Scaled Max. val. A-1
ST 037 106 OP Fig.

112
mA_OP:
1.000 0.000 1.000 0.001
Scaled Max. val. A-2
037 112 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the maximum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is
calculated according to the following formula:
M x,max
M x,scal,max =
M x,RL
Where:
Mx,max : Maximum value to be transmitted for selected measured value
M x,RL : Range limit value of selected measured value
mA_OP:
0.00 mA 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
AnOut Min. val. A-1
037 107 OP Fig.
112
mA_OP:
0.00 mA 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
AnOut Min. val. A-2
037 113 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values less than or equal to the
minimum measured value to be transmitted.
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Blocked/
Blocked 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
Point A-1 0.00 mA
037 108 OP Fig.
112
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-43
Setting Range
Min. Max.
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Blocked/
Blocked 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
Point A-2 0.00 mA
037 114 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the knee point of the
characteristic.
mA_OP:
20.00 mA 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
AnOut Max. val. A-1
037 109 OP Fig.
112
mA_OP:
20.00 mA 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
AnOut Max. val. A-2
037 115 OP Fig.
112
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller than or equal to
the maximum measured value to be transmitted. ST
mA_OP:
0.00 % 0.00 % 100.00 % 0.01 %
Output Value 1
037 120 OP Fig.
110, 112
mA_OP:
0.00 % 0.00 % 100.00 % 0.01 %
Output Value 2
037 121 OP Fig.
110, 112
mA_OP:
0.00 % 0.00 % 100.00 % 0.01 %
Output Value 3
037 122 OP Fig.
110, 112
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be output.
1.2.13 LED assignment and operating mode configuration (LED)

The P63x has a total of 17 LED indicators for display of binary signals. The following table
provides an overview of the operation of the LEDs.
LED Label Configuration

Not configurable. H 1 signals the operational readiness
H1 HEALTHY
of the device (supply voltage present).
Not configurable. H 17 signals the fact that the user is
H 17 EDIT MODE in the ‘EDIT MODE’. In this mode, parameter values
can be changed.
Permanently assigned to the function MAIN:
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
Blocked/Faulty.
Permanently assigned to the function CHECK: Alarm
H3 ALARM
(LED).
Default assignment to the function MAIN: Gen Trip
H4 TRIP
Signal.
The user has the option of assigning functions to these
H 5 to H 16
LED indicators.
The arrangement of the LED indicators on the HMI panel is illustrated in the dimensional
drawings of the Installation - IN section.
(ST) 4-44 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the LED will operate in either “Follower” mode or “Inverted” mode as either
latching or non-latching indicators. For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the
operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LED: MAIN
MAIN Blocked/Faulty -
Fct. Assignm. H 2 Blocked/Faulty
085 001 Read only OP Fig.
113
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2 (‘OUT OF SERVICE’).
The MAIN: Blocked/Faulty function is permanently assigned to this LED.
LED: CHECK Alarm
CHECK Alarm (LED) -
Fct. Assignm. H 3 (LED)
113
ST Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3 (‘ALARM’). The CHECK: Alarm
(LED) function is permanently assigned to this LED.
LED: MAIN Gen Trip
dependent upon relay -
Fct. Assignm. H 4 Signal
configuration.
085 007 OP Fig.
113
Default assignment to the function MAIN: Gen Trip Signal.
LED: Fct. Assignm. Disabled dependent upon relay -
H 5 (… 16) configuration.
113
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
Fct. Assignm. H 5 085 010 Fct. Assignm. H 9 085 022 Fct. Assignm. H 13 085 034
LED:
Follower Follower -
Operating Mode H 2
113
LED:
Follower Follower -
Operating Mode H 3
113
Follower
Follower Latching
LED: Follower Rst on Flt
Follower Rst on Flt -
Operating Mode H 4 Follower Rst onStart
Inverted
Inverted Latching
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-45
Setting Range
Min. Max.
085 008
The TRIP LED may be set as a “Follower” or “Inverted” mode of operation. It can also be
set for latching. Reset of latching may be performed either via a user command,
automatically at the onset of the next fault or at the start of a system disturbance (any
protection element start).
LED: Operating Mode As per ‘LED: Operating
Follower -
H 5 (… 16) Mode H 4’
113
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Operating Mode H 5 085 011 Operating Mode H 9 085 023 Operating Mode H 13 085 035
Operating Mode H 8 085 020 Operating Mode H 12 085 032 Operating Mode H 16 085 044 ST
1.2.14 Communication and time synchronization channel assignment (MAIN)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN: Chann Assign. COMM1->Chann.1, COMM1->Chann.1, (2-2)
-
Comm1/2 (2-2) COMM1->Chann.2, (2-1)
OP Fig.
003 169
137
Assignment of “logical” communications function groups COMM1 and COMM2 to physical
rear communications ports. This setting allows the main rear SCADA port (COMM1) to be
selected as either fiber or EIA(RS)485, with COMM2 assigned to the other physical port
where the two rear port -922 or -924 order options are present.
COMM1
MAIN: Prim.Source COMM2/PC
COMM1 -
TimeSync IRIG-B
Minute-pulse input
103 210
Selection of the primary time synchronization source. The source is monitored for valid
time synchronization commands and will be used whenever available.
MAIN: BackupSource As per ‘MAIN: Prim.Source
COMM2/PC -
TimeSync TimeSync’
103 211
Selection of a backup time synchronization source. This source will be used when the
primary source above is not available.
MAIN: Blocked /
Blocked 60 min 1 min
Time Sync. Time-Out 1 min
103 212
Time out setting for valid time synchronization commands. If set to “Blocked”, primary
source only will be used.
(ST) 4-46 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.15 Disturbance recorder channel configuration (OSCIL)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
OSCIL:
Current IA, end a Current IA, end a -
Dist Rec Analog Ch1
157
OSCIL:
Current IB, end a Current IB, end a -
Dist Rec Analog Ch2
157
OSCIL:
Current IC, end a Current IC, end a -
Dist Rec Analog Ch3
157
ST OSCIL: Current IN, end a
Current IY, end a -
Dist Rec Analog Ch4 Current IY, end a
035 163 OP Fig.
157
OSCIL:
Current IA, end b Current IA, end b -
Dist Rec Analog Ch5
157
OSCIL:
Current IB, end b Current IB, end b -
Dist Rec Analog Ch6
157
OSCIL:
Current IC, end b Current IC, end b -
Dist Rec Analog Ch7
157
OSCIL: Current IN, end b
Current IY, end b -
Dist Rec Analog Ch8 Current IY, end b
035 167 OP Fig.
157
OSCIL:
Voltage V Voltage V -
Dist Rec Analog Ch9
157
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IA, end c Current IA, end c -
Analog Ch10
157
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IB, end c Current IB, end c -
Analog Ch11
157
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-47
Setting Range
Min. Max.
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IC, end c Current IC, end c -
Analog Ch12
157
OSCIL: Dist Rec Current IN, end c
Current IY, end c -
Analog Ch13 Current IY, end c
035 172 OP Fig.
157
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IA, end d Current IA, end d -
Analog Ch14
157
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IB, end d Current IB, end d -
Analog Ch15
157 ST
OSCIL: Dist Rec
Current IC, end d Current IC, end d -
Analog Ch16
157
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
1.2.16 Cancelling a protection function

The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by
including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all others
(removing them from the device configuration).
The following conditions must be met before canceling a protection function:
• The protection function in question must be disabled
• None of the functions of the protection function to be cancelled may be assigned to a

binary input
• None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an
LED indicator
• None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals by way of an
‘m out of n’ parameter
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined
by the function group designation (example: ‘LIMIT’).
1.2.17 Enabling differential protection (DIFF)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF:
Differential PR (87)
056 027 OP Fig. 1
Enabling the DIFF function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
(ST) 4-48 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.18 Enabling restricted earth fault protection (REF_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_1:
Restricted EF_1 (64)
056 037 OP Fig. 14
REF_2:
056 038 OP Fig. 14
REF_3:
056 039 OP Fig. 14
Enabling the REF_1 to REF_3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a
function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
ST Note: Restricted earth fault protection is not available in the P631. Function
group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
1.2.19 Enabling definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DTOC1:
I> Winding 1 (50/51)
056 031 OP Fig. 22
DTOC2:
056 032 OP Fig. 22
DTOC3:
056 053 OP Fig. 22
Enabling the DTOC1 to DTOC3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a
Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
1.2.20 Enabling inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT1:
IDMT Winding 1 (51)
056 051 OP Fig. 29
IDMT2:
IDMT Winding 2 (51)
056 061 OP Fig. 29
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-49
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT3:
IDMT Winding 3 (51)
056 071 OP Fig. 29
Enabling the IDMT1 to IDMT3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function
group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of
this setting.
Note: Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
1.2.21 Enabling thermal overload protection (THRM)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1:
Thermal Oload 1 (49)
056 054 OP Fig. 41
ST
THRM2:
Thermal Oload 2 (49)
056 055 OP Fig. 41
Enabling the THRM1 to THRM2 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a
Note: Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
1.2.22 Enabling under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V<>: Under Over
Volts V<>
056 010 OP Fig. 47
Enabling the V<> function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
Note: Time-voltage protection is not available in the P631.
1.2.23 Enabling frequency protection (f<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
f<>:
Frequency Prot. (81)
056 033 OP Fig. 50
Enabling the f<> function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then
Note: Over/underfrequency is not available in the P631.
(ST) 4-50 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.24 Enabling overfluxing protection (V/f)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V/f:
Overfluxing V/f (24)
056 056 OP Fig. 54
Enabling the V/f function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then
Note: Overfluxing protection is not available in the P631.
1.2.25 Enabling current transformer supervision (CTS)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
ST CTS: CT Supervision Disabled Disabled Enabled -
056 077 OP Fig. 64
Enabling the CTS function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
Note: CTS is only available if the DSP coprocessor is selected as an order option.
1.2.26 Enabling broken conductor detection (BC_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
BC_1:
Broken Conductor 1
056 073 OP Fig. 62
BC_2:
Broken Conductor 2
056 074 OP Fig. 62
BC_3:
Broken Conductor 3
056 075 OP Fig. 62
BC_4:
Broken Conductor 4
056 076 OP Fig. 62
Enabling the broken conductor detection function or disabling it in the configuration. If the
function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception
of this setting.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-51
1.2.27 Enabling temperature & DC monitoring (LIMIT)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LIMIT:
Limit Thresholds I<>
056 025
Enabling the LIMIT function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
1.2.28 Enabling phase current monitoring (LIM_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LIM_1:
Limits I<> Winding 1
Disabled Disabled Enabled - ST
056 042
LIM_2:
056 043
LIM_3:
056 050
Enabling the LIM_1 to LIM_3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function
group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of
this setting.
Note: Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
1.2.29 Enabling programmable logic (LOGIC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LOGIC:
Programmable Disabled Disabled Enabled -
LOGIC
056 017
Enabling the LOGIC function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled,
(ST) 4-52 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.3 Function settings
1.3.1 Global
1.3.1.1 Front port communication blocking (PC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Settings\Function Settings\Global
PC:
No No Yes -
Command Blocking
003 182 OP Fig. 86
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC interface.
PC:
No No Yes -
Sig/meas. val. Block
003 086 OP Fig. 86
ST When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are
transmitted through the PC interface.
1.3.1.2 Rear port communication blocking (COMM1)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM1: USER
Yes No Yes -
Command Block
003 172 OP Fig. 87
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the communication
interface.
COMM1: USER
No No Yes -
Sig/meas Block
003 076 OP Fig. 88,
89, 90
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are
transmitted through the communication interface.
1.3.1.3 Rear port communication blocking (COMM2)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM2: USER
Yes No Yes -
Command Block
103 172
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the communication
interface.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-53
Setting Range
Min. Max.
COMM2: USER
No No Yes -
Sig/meas Block
103 076
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are
transmitted through the communication interface.
1.3.1.4 Output relay blocking (OUTP)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
OUTP:
USER Outp Rel No No Yes -
Block
021 014 OP Fig.
105 ST
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
1.3.1.5 Main global settings (MAIN)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN: No Yes
No (Disabled) -
Protection Enabled (Disabled) (Enabled)
003 030 OP Fig.
129
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked ‘off’ in the Address List can
only be changed when the device is off-line.
MAIN:
No No Yes -
USER Test Mode
003 012 OP Fig.
141
When the test mode is activated, signals or measured data for PC and communication
interfaces are labeled ‘test mode’.
50 Hz
MAIN: Frequency fn 50 Hz -
60 Hz
010 030 OP Fig. 53
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: A–B–C
A–B–C -
Phase Rotation A–C–B
010 049 OP Fig. 5
Setting for the phase rotation of the protection system, either A-B-C (standard) or A-C-B
(reverse).
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT. prim., end a
019 020 OP Fig.
119
(ST) 4-54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT. prim., end b
019 021 OP Fig.
119
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT. prim., end c
019 022 OP Fig.
119
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT. prim., end d
019 026 OP Fig.
119
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase currents) of
end a, b, c or d.
MAIN:
ST In CT.Y prim, end a
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
019 027 OP Fig.

121
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT.Y prim, end b
019 028 OP Fig.
121
MAIN:
200 A 1A 50000 A 1A
In CT.Y prim, end c
019 029 OP Fig.
121
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the
neutral-point-to-earth connection.
MAIN: Vn V.T. prim. 100.0 kV 0.1 kV 1500.0 kV 0.1 kV
010 002 OP Fig.
124
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer.
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
In Device, end a
010 024 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
In Device, end b
010 025 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
In Device, end c
010 029 OP Fig.
115, 116
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-55
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
In Device, end d
010 047 OP Fig.
115, 116
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of
the phase currents of ends a, b, c and d. This current corresponds to the nominal current
of the device.
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
IY, nom device, end a
010 142 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
IY, nom device, end b
010 143 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN:
1A 1A 5A 4A
ST
IY, nom device, end c
010 144 OP Fig.
115, 116
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of
the neutral-point-to-earth connection current of ends a, b, and c.
MAIN: Vn VT. Sec. 100 V 50 V 130 V 1V
010 009 OP Fig.
124
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage
measurement.
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation Iph, a Reversed
010 140 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation Iph, b Reversed
010 150 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation Iph, c Reversed
010 160 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation Iph, d Reversed
010 170 OP Fig.
115, 116
Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings for DIFF:
Vector Grp. ends z1-z2 (where z1-z2 stands for b-a, c-a or d-a), it is possible to account for
it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the
neutral/point current circuits, ends a to d, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the
connection scheme shown in the Installation - IN section, else as Reversed.
(ST) 4-56 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation IY, a Reversed
010 141 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation IY, b Reversed
010 151 OP Fig.
115, 116
MAIN: Standard
Standard -
CT Orientation IY, c Reversed
010 161 OP Fig.
115, 116
Connection reversal applied to one end is accounted for it in the settings for connection of
the measuring circuits. The connection of the wye/neutral current circuits, ends a to c, is
set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme shown in the Installation
ST - IN section, else as Reversed.
MAIN: Minimum Iph
0.00 In 0.00 In 0.20 In 0.01 In
Meas’mt
011 030 OP Fig.
119, 123
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating
values of the phase currents to be displayed.
MAIN:
0.000 In 0.000 In 0.200 In 0.001 In
Minimum I2 Meas’mt
011 048
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the calculated values of
the negative sequence currents to be displayed.
MAIN:
0.000 In 0.000 In 0.200 In 0.001 In
Minimum I1 Meas’mt
011 058
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the calculated values of
the positive sequence currents to be displayed.
MAIN:
0.000 In 0.000 In 0.200 In 0.001 In
Minimum IN Meas’mt
011 031 OP Fig.
121, 122,
123
value of the residual current to be displayed.
MAIN: 0.000 0.200 0.001
0.000 IN, nom
Minimum IY Meas’mt IN, nom IN, nom IN, nom
011 036 OP Fig.
121
values of the currents in the neutral-point-to-earth connection to be displayed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-57
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN:
0.00 Vn 0.00 Vn 0.20 Vn 0.01 Vn
Minimum V Meas’mt
011 032 OP Fig.
124
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the measured
operating values of the voltage to be displayed.
MAIN:
15.0 min 0.1 min 60.0 min 0.1 min
Time Const Iph Dem.
010 113 OP Fig.
119, 120
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall reach 95% of
the maximum current IP, max.
MAIN:
Fct.Assign. Block 1
configuration.
021 021 OP Fig. ST
131
MAIN:
Fct.Assign. Block 2
configuration.
021 022 OP Fig.
131
MAIN:
Fct.Assign. Block 3
configuration.
021 048 OP Fig.
131
MAIN:
Fct.Assign. Block 4
configuration.
021 049 OP Fig.
131
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is
activated e.g. for blocking input 1 (MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT).
MAIN: Trip Cmd.
No No Yes -
Block USER
021 012 OP Fig.
135
Blocking of the trip commands from the local control panel.
MAIN:
Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
configuration.
021 001 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
configuration.
021 002 OP Fig.
135
(ST) 4-58 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN:
configuration.
021 046 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
configuration.
021 047 OP Fig.
135
Assignment of the signals that trigger Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MAIN:
0.25 s 0.10 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
tDWELL Trip Cmd 1
021 003 OP Fig.
135
ST MAIN:
0.25 s 0.10 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
tDWELL Trip Cmd 2
021 004 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
0.25 s 0.10 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
tDWELL Trip Cmd 3
021 032 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
0.25 s 0.10 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
tDWELL Trip Cmd 4
021 033 OP Fig.
135
Setting for the minimum duration of Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MAIN:
No No Yes -
Latching trip cmd. 1
021 023 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
No No Yes -
021 024 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
No No Yes -
021 025 OP Fig.
135
MAIN:
No No Yes -
021 026 OP Fig.
135
Specification as to whether Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4 should latch.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-59
Setting Range
Min. Max.
MAIN:
Fct Assign Fault
configuration.
021 031 OP Fig.
132
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in a ‘Blocked/Faulty’ indication.
Signals that lead to blocking of the device are not configurable and always result in a
‘Blocked/Faulty’ indication.
1.3.1.6 Setting group selection (GROUP)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
GROUP:
No No Yes -
Control via USER
ST
003 100 OP Fig.
142
If setting group selection is to be handled from the integrated local control panel rather
than via the binary signal inputs, choose the ‘Yes’ setting.
Setting Group SG1
GROUP: Setting Grp Setting Group SG2
Setting Group SG1 -
Sel USER Setting Group SG3
Setting Group SG4
003 060 OP Fig.
142
Selection of the setting group from the local control panel.
Blocked /
GROUP: Hold Timer Blocked 65.000 s 0.001 s
0.000 s
003 063 OP Fig.
142
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if setting group selection is carried out via
the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur during selection is
bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary signal input has yet been set, then
the setting group selected from the local control panel shall apply.
1.3.1.7 Self testing & diagnostics (CHECK)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
CHECK:
Fct Assign. Alarm
configuration.
021 030 OP Fig.
143
This setting defines the monitoring signals that will be entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Signals resulting from internal device faults are not configurable and always
result in a warning.
(ST) 4-60 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
CHECK: Blocked /
Blocked 240 hrs 1 hrs
Mon.Sig. Retention 0 hrs
021 018
Retention time of monitoring signals in the memory. After this time has elapsed any
recurrence of the signal will be processed in the same way as if it were a first occurrence.
1.3.1.8 Disturbance recorder settings (OSCIL)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
OSCIL:
Fct Assig. Trigger
configuration.
003 085 OP Fig.
ST 155
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
Blocked/
OSCIL: Id> Blocked 30.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
0.01 Iref
016 018 OP Fig.
155
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will trigger fault
recording.
Blocked/
OSCIL: IR> Blocked 30.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
0.01 Iref
016 019 OP Fig.
155
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will trigger fault
recording.
OSCIL:
5 Cycles 1 Cycles 50 Cycles 1 Cycles
Pre-Fault Time
003 078 OP Fig.
157
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a fault (pre-fault
recording time).
OSCIL:
Post-Fault Time
003 079 OP Fig.
157
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault (post-fault
recording time).
OSCIL:
Max Record Time
003 075 OP Fig.
157
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and post-fault
recording times.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-61
1.3.2 Common settings
1.3.2.1 Main common settings (MAIN)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings
MAIN:
110.0 kV 0.1 kV 1500.0 kV 0.1 kV
Vn prim., end a
019 017 OP Fig. 2,
15
MAIN:
110.0 kV 0.1 kV 1500.0 kV 0.1 kV
Vn prim., end b
019 018 OP Fig. 2
MAIN:
110.0 kV 0.1 kV 1500.0 kV 0.1 kV
Vn prim., end c
019 019 OP Fig. 2
ST
MAIN:
110.0 kV 0.1 kV 1500.0 kV 0.1 kV
Vn prim., end d
019 037 OP Fig. 2
Setting for the primary nominal voltage (phase to phase = line) for each end of the
protected transformer.
MAIN: Calculated (Derived)
Calculated (Derived) -
Evaluation IN, end a Measured
016 096 OP Fig.
117
Evaluation IN, end b Measured
016 097 OP Fig.
117
Evaluation IN, end c Measured
016 098 OP Fig.
117
This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either
the calculated residual current based on the sum of the phase currents or the residual
current measured at the neutral transformer input.
(ST) 4-62 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Without
End(a) +end(b)
End(a) +end(c)
End(a) +end(d)
End(b) +end(c)
End(b) +end(d)
End(c) +end(d)
End(a) +end(b) +end(c)
MAIN:
Without End(a) +end(b) +end(d) -
Current Summation
End(a) +end(c) +end(d)
End(b) +end(c) +end(d)
End(a) -end(b)
End(a) -end(c)
End(a) -end(d)
End(b) -end(c)
End(b) -end(d)
End(c) -end(d)
019 099 OP Fig.
ST 118
Where a transformer winding is energized from two or three infeeds, such as is the case in
mesh, ring-bus, or breaker and a half feeding, the relay can summate currents to obtain the
total current for that winding. The currents for each phase and the residual currents can be
combined. This setting specifies the CT ends to be involved.
Note: This setting is available for the P633 and P634 only.
MAIN: Blocked/
Blocked 100.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Dyn.Settg 0.00 s
018 009 OP Fig.
130
Setting for the hold time of the “dynamic settings”. During this period, the “dynamic”
thresholds are active in place of the “normal” thresholds.
1.3.2.2 Differential protection common settings (DIFF)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
019 080 OP Fig. 1
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function.
DIFF: Rated Ref
38.1 MVA 0.1 MVA 5000.0 MVA 0.1 MVA
Power Sref
019 016 OP Fig. 2
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,a Not Measured 0.000 kA 50.000 kA 0.001 kA
019 023 Read only OP Fig. 2
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,b Not Measured 0.000 kA 50.000 kA 0.001 kA
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,c Not Measured 0.000 kA 50.000 kA 0.001 kA
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-63
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,d Not Measured 0.000 kA 50.000 kA 0.001 kA
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for each end.
Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an
off-line setting file the value is not updated.
DIFF:
Not Measured 0.000 50.000 0.001
Matching fact. Kam, a
DIFF:
Not Measured 0.000 50.000 0.001
Matching fact. Kam, b
DIFF:
Not Measured 0.000 50.000 0.001
Matching fact. Kam, c
ST
DIFF:
Not Measured 0.000 50.000 0.001
Matching fact. Kam, d
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for each end.
DIFF:
0.000 Iref 0.000 Iref 0.200 Iref 0.001 Iref
Minimum Id Meas’mt
011 037 OP Fig. 13
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to
display the differential currents as measured operating data.
DIFF:
Minimum IR Meas’mt
011 038 OP Fig. 13
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to
display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
1.3.2.3 Restricted earth fault protection common settings (REF_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
019 050 OP Fig. 14
REF_2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
019 150 OP Fig. 14
(ST) 4-64 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_3: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
019 250 OP Fig. 14
Disabling and enabling the ground differential protection function.
Note: Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
REF_1:
End a End a -
Select CT Input
019 100 Read only
REF_2:
End b End b -
Select CT Input
019 101 Read only
REF_3:
End c End c -
Select CT Input
ST 019 102 Read only

Display of the measuring input that provides the measured variables evaluated by the
ground differential protection function.
REF_1: Rated Ref
38.1 MVA 0.1 MVA 5000.0 MVA 0.1 MVA
Power Sref
019 031 OP Fig. 15
REF_2: Rated Ref
38.1 MVA 0.1 MVA 5000.0 MVA 0.1 MVA
Power Sref
019 032 OP Fig. 15
REF_3: Rated Ref
38.1 MVA 0.1 MVA 5000.0 MVA 0.1 MVA
Power Sref
019 033 OP Fig. 15
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the relevant
transformer end.
Not
REF_1: 50.000 kA/
Not Measured Measured/ 0.001 kA
Ref. Curr. Iref Overflow
0.000 kA
Not
REF_2: 50.000 kA/
0.000 kA
Not
REF_3: 50.000 kA/
0.000 kA
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x.
Not
REF_1: Matching 50.000/
Not Measured Measured/ 0.001
Fact. kam, N Overflow
0.000
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-65
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Not
0.000
Not
0.000
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the vector sum of the phase
currents.
Not
Fact.kam, Y Overflow
0.000
ST
Not
0.000
Not
0.000
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the neutral-point current.
REF_1:
011 039 OP Fig. 20
REF_2:
011 044 OP Fig. 20
REF_3:
011 045 OP Fig. 20
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to
display the differential currents as measured operating data.
REF_1:
011 040 OP Fig. 20
REF_2:
011 046 OP Fig. 20
(ST) 4-66 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_3:
011 047 OP Fig. 20
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to
display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
1.3.2.4 Definite time overcurrent protection common settings (DTOC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DTOC1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 135 OP Fig. 22
DTOC2: General
ST Enable USER
No No Yes -
031 136 OP Fig. 22

DTOC3: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 139 OP Fig. 22
Disabling and enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
End a
End b
DTOC1:
End a End c -
Select CT Input
End d
Current Summation
019 103 OP Fig. 21
DTOC2: As per ‘DTOC1: Select
End b -
Select CT Input CT Input’
019 104 OP Fig. 21
DTOC3: As per ‘DTOC1: Select
End c -
019 105 OP Fig. 21
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the
definite-time overcurrent protection function.
1.3.2.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection common settings (IDMT)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 141 OP Fig. 29
IDMT2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 142 OP Fig. 29
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-67
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT3: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 143 OP Fig. 29
Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Note: Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
End a
End b
IDMT1:
End a End c -
Select CT Input
End d
Current Summation
019 106 OP Fig. 28
IDMT2: As per ‘IDMT1: Select
End b -
019 116 OP Fig. 28
IDMT3:
End c
As per ‘IDMT1: Select
-
ST
019 126 OP Fig. 28
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the
inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
1.3.2.6 Thermal overload protection common settings (THRM)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 144 OP Fig. 41
THRM2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 145 OP Fig. 41
Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function.
Note: Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
End a
End b
THRM1:
End b End c -
Select CT Input
End d
Current Summation
019 109 OP Fig. 40
THRM2: As per ‘THRM1: Select
End c -
019 110 OP Fig. 40
Selection of the current relevant for thermal overload protection. Select from the currents
measured at the measuring input for end a, b, c, d. For the P633 and the P634, there is an
additional option, namely the selection of the value obtained according to the setting at
MAIN: Current summation.
(ST) 4-68 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1: Absolute Replica
Relative Replica -
Operating Mode Relative Replica
039 121 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Absolute Replica
Relative Replica -
Operating Mode Relative Replica
039 181 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select between Absolute
replica and Relative replica.
Not
THRM1: 300 °C/
Not Measured Measured/ 1 °C
O/T f Iref Persist 1 Overflow
-40 °C
004 152 Read only
Not
THRM2: 300 °C/
Not Measured Measured/ 1 °C
O/T f Iref Persist 2 Overflow
ST -40 °C
004 172 Read only
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures
of the protected object and the coolant.
1.3.2.7 Under/overvoltage protection common settings (V<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V<>: General Enable
No No Yes -
USER
023 030 OP Fig. 47
Disabling and enabling the time-voltage protection function.
Note: Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631.
1.3.2.8 Frequency protection common settings (f<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
f<>: General Enable
No No Yes -
USER
023 031 OP Fig. 50
Disabling and enabling the over/underfrequency protection function.
Note: Over/underfrequency protection is not available with the P631.
f<>: Evaluation Time 4 Cycles 3 Cycles 6 Cycles 1 Cycles
018 201 OP Fig. 51
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for this length of time
for a signal to be issued.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-69
Setting Range
Min. Max.
f<>:
0.90 Vn 0.20 Vn 1.00 Vn 0.01 Vn
Undervolt. Block. V<
018 200 OP Fig. 51
Setting for the threshold of the undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
1.3.2.9 Overfluxing protection common settings (V/f)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V/f: General Enable
No No Yes -
USER
019 097 OP Fig. 54
Disabling and enabling the overfluxing protection function.
ST
Note: Overfluxing protection is not available with the P631.
1.3.2.10 Current transformer supervision common settings (CTS)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
CTS: General Enable
No No Yes -
USER
031 085 OP Fig. 64
Disabling and enabling the CT supervision function.
Note: CT Supervision is only available with DSP coprocessor order option.
1.3.2.11 Broken conductor detection common settings (BC_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
BC_1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 146 OP Fig. 62
BC_2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 147 OP Fig. 62
BC_3: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 148 OP Fig. 62
BC_4: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 149 OP Fig. 62
Disabling and enabling the broken conductor detection function.
(ST) 4-70 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
BC_1:
End a End a -
Select CT Input
031 150 Read only
BC_2:
End b End b -
Select CT Input
031 151 Read only
BC_3:
End c End c -
Select CT Input
031 152 Read only
BC_4:
End d End d -
Select CT Input
031 153 Read only
Indication of the CT set monitored by the broken conductor detection function.
ST 1.3.2.12 Temperature & DC monitoring settings (LIMIT)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LIMIT: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
014 010 OP Fig. 71
Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring.
Blocked/
1.100 0.001
LIMIT: IDC, lin> Blocked 0.100
IDC, nom IDC, nom
IDC, nom
014 110 OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin> for monitoring the linearized direct current.
Blocked/
1.100 0.001
LIMIT: IDC, lin>> Blocked 0.100
IDC, nom IDC, nom
IDC, nom
014 111 OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin>> for monitoring the linearized direct current.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tIDC, lin> Blocked 20.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
014 112 OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tIDC, lin>> Blocked 20.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
014 113 OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>>.
Blocked/
1.100 0.001
LIMIT: IDC, lin< Blocked 0.100
IDC, nom IDC, nom
IDC, nom
014 114 OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin< for monitoring the linearized direct current.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-71
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
1.100 0.001
LIMIT: IDC, lin<< Blocked 0.100
IDC, nom IDC, nom
IDC, nom
014 115 OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin<< for monitoring the linearized direct current.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tIDC, lin< Blocked 20.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
014 116 OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDClin<.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tIDC, lin<< Blocked 20.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
014 117 OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of the undercurrent stage IDClin<<.
LIMIT: T> 200 °C -20 °C 200 °C 1 °C ST
014 100 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
LIMIT: T>> 200 °C -20 °C 200 °C 1 °C
014 101 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tT> Blocked 1000 s 1s
0s
014 103 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tT>> Blocked 1000 s 1s
0s
014 104 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
LIMIT: T< -20 °C -20 °C 200 °C 1 °C
014 105 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
LIMIT: T<< -20 °C -20 °C 200 °C 1 °C
014 106 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tT< Blocked 1000 s 1s
0s
014 107 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
Blocked/
LIMIT: tT<< Blocked 1000 s 1s
0s
014 108 OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
(ST) 4-72 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.3.2.13 Phase current monitoring settings (LIM_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LIM_1: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
014 014 OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
014 015 OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
014 017 OP Fig. 74
Disabling and enabling the limit value monitoring function.
Note: Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
ST
End a
End b
LIM_1:
End a End c -
Select CT Input
End d
Current Summation
019 111 OP Fig. 73
LIM_2: As per ‘LIM_1: Select
End b -
019 112 OP Fig. 73
LIM_3: As per ‘LIM_1: Select
End c -
019 113 OP Fig. 73
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by limit
value monitoring function 1, 2 or 3, respectively.
Blocked/
LIM_1: I> 1.20 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.20 In
015 116 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_2: I> 1.20 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.20 In
016 116 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_3: I> 1.20 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.20 In
017 114 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I>.
Blocked/
LIM_1: I>> Blocked 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.20 In
015 117 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
0.20 In
016 117 OP Fig. 74
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-73
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
0.20 In
017 117 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I>>.
Blocked/
LIM_1: tI> 5s 100 s 1s
0s
015 120 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_2: tI> 5s 100 s 1s
0s
016 120 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_3: tI> 5s 100 s 1s
0s
017 120 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I>.
ST
Blocked/
LIM_1: tI>> Blocked 100 s 1s
0s
015 121 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
0s
016 121 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
0s
017 121 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I>>.
Blocked/
LIM_1: I< 0.10 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.00 In
015 118 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_2: I< 0.10 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.00 In
016 118 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_3: I< 0.10 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.00 In
017 118 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I<.
Blocked/
LIM_1: I<< Blocked 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.00 In
015 119 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
0.00 In
016 119 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
0.00 In
017 119 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I<<.
(ST) 4-74 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
LIM_1: tI< 5s 100 s 1s
0s
015 122 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_2: tI< 5s 100 s 1s
0s
016 122 OP Fig. 74
Blocked/
LIM_3: tI< 5s 100 s 1s
0s
017 122 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I<.
Blocked/
LIM_1: tI<< Blocked 100 s 1s
0s
015 123 OP Fig. 74
ST LIM_2: tI<< Blocked

Blocked/
0s
100 s 1s
016 123 OP Fig. 74

Blocked/
LIM_3: tI<< Blocked 100 s 1s
0s
017 123 OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
1.3.2.14 Programmable logic settings (LOGIC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LOGIC: General
No No Yes -
Enable USER
031 099 OP Fig. 76
Disabling or enabling the logic function.
LOGIC: Set 1 (… 8)
No No Yes -
USER
See table below for setting addresses. OP Fig. 75,
76
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
Set 1 USER 034 030 Set 4 USER 034 033 Set 7 USER 034 036
Set 2 USER 034 031 Set 5 USER 034 034 Set 8 USER 034 037
Set 3 USER 034 032 Set 6 USER 034 035
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-75
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm.
Outp. 1 (… 32)
configuration.
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
Fct.Assignm. Outp. 1 030 000 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 12 030 044 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 23 030 088
ST
Fct.Assignm. Outp. 11 030 040 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 22 030 084
Without Timer Stage

PickUp & Reset Delay
LOGIC: Op. Mode t Pulse Delayed PickUp
Without Timer Stage -
Output 1 (… 32) PickUp & Rst.Retrig
Delayed Pulse Retrig
Minimum Dwell
77, 78, 79,
80, 81
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
Op. Mode t Output 1 030 001 Op. Mode t Output 12 030 045 Op. Mode t Output 23 030 089
Op. Mode t Output 11 030 041 Op. Mode t Output 22 030 085
(ST) 4-76 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LOGIC: Time t1
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Output 1 (… 32)
77, 78, 79,
80, 81
Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.
Time t1 Output 1 030 002 Time t1 Output 12 030 046 Time t1 Output 23 030 090
ST Time t1 Output 8 030 030 Time t1 Output 19 030 074 Time t1 Output 30 031 018
Time t1 Output 11 030 042 Time t1 Output 22 030 086
LOGIC: Time t2
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Output 1 (… 32)
77, 78, 79,
80, 81
Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘Minimum Dwell’ operating mode.
Time t2 Output 11 030 043 Time t2 Output 22 030 087
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-77
Setting Range
Min. Max.
LOGIC: Sig. Assig
Outp. 1 (… 32)
configuration.
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic
equation.
Sig. Assig Outp. 1 044 000 Sig. Assig Outp. 12 044 022 Sig. Assig Outp. 23 044 044
Sig. Assig Outp. 8 044 014 Sig. Assig Outp. 19 044 036 Sig. Assig Outp. 30 044 058 ST
Sig. Assig Outp. 11 044 020 Sig. Assig Outp. 22 044 042

LOGIC: Sig. Assig
Outp. 1 (… 32) (t)
configuration.
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic
equation.
Sig. Assig Outp. 1 (t) 044 001 Sig. Assig Outp. 12 (t) 044 023 Sig. Assig Outp. 23 (t) 044 045
Sig. Assig Outp. 11 (t) 044 021 Sig. Assig Outp. 22 (t) 044 043
1.3.3 Setting group SGx (x = 1 to 4)

The device provides four setting groups containing identical settings that may be enabled
and configured independently.
The setting address for each setting differs between the groups and is displayed in the line
below the setting in the order SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4. As an example, for the DIFF: Enable
SGx setting immediately below the addresses are read as:
Address: 072 152 DIFF: Enable SG1
(ST) 4-78 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.3.3.1 Phase reversal logic (MAIN)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx
No Swap
MAIN: A-B Swapped
No Swap -
Reversal end a SGx B-C Swapped
C-A Swapped
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203
Setting to determine if CT input phase-swapping shall apply in pumped storage
applications, when in motoring (pump) mode. Setting available for each CT set, in this
case for end a.
No Swap
MAIN: A-B Swapped
No Swap -
Reversal end b SGx B-C Swapped
ST C-A Swapped
010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207
No Swap
MAIN: A-B Swapped
No Swap -
Reversal end c SGx B-C Swapped
C-A Swapped
010 208 010 209 010 210 010 211
No Swap
MAIN: A-B Swapped
No Swap -
Reversal end d SGx B-C Swapped
C-A Swapped
010 212 010 213 010 214 010 215
1.3.3.2 Differential protection (DIFF)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF: Enable SGx No No Yes -
072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152 OP Fig. 1
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for differential protection.
DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends
0 0 11 1
b-a SGx
019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042 OP Fig. 5
DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends
0 0 11 1
c-a SGx
019 011 019 043 019 044 019 045 OP Fig. 5
DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends
0 0 11 1
d-a SGx
019 014 019 046 019 047 019 048 OP Fig. 6
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-79
Setting Range
Min. Max.
The vector group is read from the transformer rating plate, taking end "a" as the HV
reference. In the case of a Yd1 transformer, with end "b" as the delta winding the clock
notation setting required will be 1 for end b-a.
If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged or if the connection
of the measuring circuits is not accounted for by the settings at MAIN: CT Orientation
IPh, z (where z is end a, b, c or d) then the algorithm is:
Setting = 12 - ID
If a reverse phase rotation is present (phase sequence A-C-B) then this should be entered
as a setting at the P63x. In this case, the P63x will automatically form the complementary
value of the set vector group ID to the number 12
(vector group ID = 12 - set ID).
For application of the P63x as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6 depending on
the current transformer connection.
DIFF: Idiff> SGx 0.20 Iref 0.10 Iref 2.50 Iref 0.01 Iref
072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142 OP Fig. 9
Minimum pickup value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference
ST
current of the relevant transformer end.
DIFF: Idiff>> SGx 15.0 Iref 2.5 Iref 30.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143 OP Fig. 9
Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush stabilization
function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Note: If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P63x not to trip in the
presence of internal faults with transformer saturation.
Blocked/
DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx 30.0 Iref 30.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
2.5 Iref
072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144 OP Fig. 9
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the differential protection function
independent of restraining variable, harmonic restraint, overfluxing restraint and saturation
detector.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P63x can trip in the presence of external
faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF:
Idiff> (CTS) SGx
080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000 OP Fig. 68
Low set threshold of differential protection when a CTS condition is detected.
DIFF: m1 SGx 0.30 0.10 1.50 0.01
072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145 OP Fig. 9
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range:
0.5 ⋅ Idiff >< IR ≤ IR,m2
DIFF: m2 SGx 0.70 0.10 1.50 0.01

072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146 OP Fig. 9
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range:
IR > IR,m2
(ST) 4-80 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF: IR, m2 SGx 4.0 Iref 1.5 Iref 10.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147 OP Fig. 9
This setting defines the second knee of the tripping characteristic. Above this knee, the
gradient is m2.
Disabled
DIFF:
Not Phase-Selective Not Phase-Selective -
Op. Mode Inrush SGx
Phase-Selective
072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148 OP Fig. 9
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic blocking or
harmonic restraint).
For application of the P63x as machine protection, the harmonic restraint can be
deactivated by way of this setting.
For application of the P63x as transformer protection, the user can select whether the
harmonic restraint should operate in cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring
system.
ST
DIFF: Inrush 2nd
20 % 10 % 50 % 1%
Harmon SGx
072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159 OP Fig. 10
Operate value of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection, as ratio of the second harmonic component to the fundamental for the
differential current, in percent.
DIFF:
Yes No Yes -
I0 filt a Enab SGx
072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155 OP Fig. 5
DIFF:
Yes No Yes -
I0 filt b Enab SGx
072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156 OP Fig. 5
DIFF:
Yes No Yes -
I0 filt c Enab SGx
072 157 073 157 074 157 075 157 OP Fig. 5
DIFF:
Yes No Yes -
I0 filt d Enab SGx
072 154 073 154 074 154 075 154 OP Fig. 6
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a, b, c or d.
DIFF:
No No Yes -
O/Flux Blk Enab SGx
072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158 OP Fig. 12
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint.
DIFF: O/Flux 5th
20 % 10 % 80 % 1%
Harmon SGx
072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160 OP Fig. 12
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the fifth
harmonic component to the fundamental for the differential current, in percent.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-81
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DIFF: Op.del., trip
0.00 s 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
sig. SGx
010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165
Tripping of the restraint differential protection may be delayed via a settable timer stage.
DIFF: Hyst. Effective
Yes No Yes -
SGx
072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006
Hysteresis of the tripping characteristic at the rate of 10% be disabled.
1.3.3.3 Restricted earth fault protection (REF_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_1: Enable SGx No No Yes - ST
072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141 OP Fig. 14
REF_2: Enable SGx No No Yes -
072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161 OP Fig. 14
REF_3: Enable SGx No No Yes -
072 031 073 031 074 031 075 031 OP Fig. 14
This setting allows restricted earth fault protection to be enabled or disabled on the
associated winding for each setting group.
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias
REF_1:
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias Low-Z Iph Max. Bias -
Operating Mode SGx
High Impedance
072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149 OP Fig. 16,
18, 19
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias
REF_2:
Operating Mode SGx
High Impedance
072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169 OP Fig. 16,
18, 19
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias
REF_3:
Operating Mode SGx
High Impedance
072 049 073 049 074 049 075 049 OP Fig. 16,
18, 19
This setting specifies the mode of operation for the restricted earth fault protection. The
protection may be biased by residual current or the maximum phase current. Alternatively,
operation as a high impedance element may be selected.
REF_1:
No No Yes -
CTS Effective SGx
080 003 081 003 082 003 083 003
REF_2:
No No Yes -
CTS Effective SGx
080 004 081 004 082 004 083 004
(ST) 4-82 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
REF_3:
No No Yes -
CTS Effective SGx
080 005 081 005 082 005 083 005
Blocking of REF protection when a CTS condition is detected.
REF_1: Idiff> SGx 0.20 Iref 0.10 Iref 1.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150 OP Fig. 17
072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170 OP Fig. 17
072 040 073 040 074 040 075 040 OP Fig. 17
Pickup value of the restricted earth fault protection as referred to the reference current of
the relevant transformer end.
Blocked/
ST REF_1: Idiff>>> SGx 10.0 Iref
2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151 OP Fig. 17

Blocked/
REF_2: Idiff>>> SGx 10.0 Iref 30.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
2.5 Iref
072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171 OP Fig. 17
Blocked/
REF_3: Idiff>>> SGx 10.0 Iref 30.0 Iref 0.1 Iref
2.5 Iref
072 041 073 041 074 041 075 041 OP Fig. 17
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the restricted earth fault protection
independent of restraint current.
REF_1: m1 SGx 0.20 0.00 1.00 0.01
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162 OP Fig. 18
REF_2: m1 SGx 0.20 0.00 1.00 0.01
072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172 OP Fig. 18
REF_3: m1 SGx 0.20 0.00 1.00 0.01
072 192 073 192 074 192 075 192 OP Fig. 18
Lower slope gradient of tripping characteristic for restricted earth fault protection when
operating in a low impedance biased mode.
REF_1: m2 SGx 1.50 0.15 1.50 0.01
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163 OP Fig. 18
REF_2: m2 SGx 1.50 0.15 1.50 0.01
072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165 OP Fig. 18
REF_3: m2 SGx 1.50 0.15 1.50 0.01
072 193 073 193 074 193 075 193 OP Fig. 18
Upper slope gradient of tripping characteristic for restricted earth fault protection when
operating in a low impedance biased mode.
REF_1: IR, m2 SGx 1.00 Iref 0.10 Iref 1.50 Iref 0.01 Iref
072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164 OP Fig. 18
072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166 OP Fig. 18
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-83
Setting Range
Min. Max.
072 194 073 194 074 194 075 194 OP Fig. 18
Bias current threshold setting above which the gradient of the tripping characteristic is m2
for restricted earth fault protection when operating in a low impedance biased mode.
1.3.3.4 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Enable SGx No No Yes -
076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050
076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
ST
076 180 077 180 078 180 079 180
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for definite-time overcurrent
protection.
Disabled
DTOC1:
Disabled For Single-Ph. Start -
Block Tim. st IN SGx
076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067 OP Fig. 25
Disabled
DTOC2:
076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087 OP Fig. 25
Disabled
DTOC3:
076 108 077 108 078 108 079 108 OP Fig. 25
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for
single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
DTOC1: Gen.Starting W/o Start. IN/I2
With Start. IN/I2 -
Mode SGx With Start. IN/I2
076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066 OP Fig. 26
With Start. IN/I2 -
076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086 OP Fig. 26
With Start. IN/I2 -
076 106 077 106 078 106 079 106 OP Fig. 26
This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages
will be included in the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065 OP Fig. 26
(ST) 4-84 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
DTOC2: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085 OP Fig. 26
Blocked/
DTOC3: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 107 077 107 078 107 079 107 OP Fig. 26
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
DTOC1: Inrush Restr
No No Yes -
Enab SGx
076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063 OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: Inrush Restr
No No Yes -
Enab SGx
076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083 OP Fig. 24
ST DTOC3: Inrush Restr

Enab SGx
No No Yes -
076 193 077 193 078 193 079 193 OP Fig. 24

Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I> SGx 1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC2: I> SGx 1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC3: I> SGx 1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 081 077 081 078 081 079 081 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I>> SGx 4.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC2: I>> SGx 4.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC3: I>> SGx 4.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 082 077 082 078 082 079 082 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I>>> SGx Blocked 30.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163 OP Fig. 23
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-85
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 183 077 183 078 183 079 183 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>>.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
I> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151 OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161 OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 181 077 181 078 181 079 181 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while
the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
ST
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
I>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152 OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162 OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 182 077 182 078 182 079 182 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective
while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
I>>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153 OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173 OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 30.00 In 0.01 In
076 109 077 109 078 109 079 109 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective
while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tI> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC2: tI> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077 OP Fig. 23
(ST) 4-86 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
DTOC3: tI> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 187 077 187 078 187 079 187 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tI>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC2: tI>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC3: tI>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 188 077 188 078 188 079 188 OP Fig. 23
ST Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage.

Blocked/
DTOC1: tI>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC2: tI>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169 OP Fig. 23
Blocked/
DTOC3: tI>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 189 077 189 078 189 079 189 OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I2> SGx 0.25 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC2: I2> SGx 0.25 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC3: I2> SGx 0.25 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2> stage for negative sequence current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I2>> SGx Blocked 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-87
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
DTOC1: I2>>> SGx Blocked 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
I2> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 OP Fig. 24
DTOC2:
I2> dynamic SGx
1.00 In
Blocked/
0.10 In
8.00 In 0.01 In ST
076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210 OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
I2> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic
mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is
elapsing.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
I2>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211 OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic
elapsing.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
I2>>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212 OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic
elapsing.
(ST) 4-88 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tI2> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC2: tI2> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC3: tI2> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2> stage for negative sequence current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tI2>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204 OP Fig. 24
ST DTOC2: tI2>> SGx 0.50 s

Blocked/
0.00 s
100.00 s 0.01 s
076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214 OP Fig. 24

Blocked/
DTOC3: tI2>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tI2>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC2: tI2>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215 OP Fig. 24
Blocked/
DTOC3: tI2>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225 OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: IN> SGx 0.25 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 184 077 184 078 184 079 184 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN> for residual current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: IN>> SGx Blocked 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055 OP Fig. 25
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-89
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
0.10 In
076 185 077 185 078 185 079 185 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>> for residual current.
Blocked/
DTOC1: IN>>> SGx Blocked 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC2: IN>>> SGx Blocked 8.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166 OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN>>> SGx Blocked

Blocked/
0.10 In
8.00 In 0.01 In ST
076 186 077 186 078 186 079 186 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>>> for residual current.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
IN> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154 OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174 OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 194 077 194 078 194 079 194 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate value
is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
IN>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155 OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175 OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 195 077 195 078 195 079 195 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate
value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
DTOC1: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
IN>>> dynamic SGx 0.10 In
076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156 OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176 OP Fig. 25
(ST) 4-90 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
DTOC3: Blocked/
1.00 In 8.00 In 0.01 In
076 196 077 196 078 196 079 196 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>>> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate
Blocked/
DTOC1: tIN> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC2: tIN> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC3: tIN> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 190 077 190 078 190 079 190 OP Fig. 25
ST Setting for the operate delay of the IN> for residual current stage.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tIN>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC2: tIN>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC3: tIN>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 191 077 191 078 191 079 191 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> for residual current stage.
Blocked/
DTOC1: tIN>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC2: tIN>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172 OP Fig. 25
Blocked/
DTOC3: tIN>>> SGx 0.50 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 192 077 192 078 192 079 192 OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> for residual current stage.
1.3.3.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Enable SGx No No Yes -
081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050 OP Fig. 29
081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170 OP Fig. 29
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-91
Setting Range
Min. Max.
081 190 082 190 083 190 084 190 OP Fig. 29
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for inverse-time overcurrent
protection.
Disabled
IDMT1:
081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068 OP Fig. 36
Disabled
IDMT2:
081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188 OP Fig. 36
Disabled
IDMT3:
ST
081 208 082 208 083 208 084 208 OP Fig. 36
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for
single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
IDMT1: Gen.Starting W/o Start. IN/I2
With Start. IN/I2 -
081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059 OP Fig. 35,
36, 38
With Start. IN/I2 -
081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179 OP Fig. 35,
36, 38
With Start. IN/I2 -
081 199 082 199 083 199 084 199 OP Fig. 35,
36, 38
This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages
will be included in the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
Blocked/
IDMT1: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058 OP Fig. 38
Blocked/
IDMT2: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178 OP Fig. 38
Blocked/
IDMT3: tGS SGx 0.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
081 198 082 198 083 198 084 198 OP Fig. 38
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
IDMT1: Inrush Restr
No No Yes -
Enab SGx
081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060 OP Fig. 34,
35
(ST) 4-92 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT2: Inrush Restr
No No Yes -
Enab SGx
081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180 OP Fig. 34,
35
IDMT3: Inrush Restr
No No Yes -
Enab SGx
081 200 082 200 083 200 084 200 OP Fig. 34,
35
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able to block the
inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Blocked/
IDMT1: Iref, Ph SGx 1.00 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
0.10 In
081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051 OP Fig. 34
Blocked/
0.10 In
ST
081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171 OP Fig. 34
Blocked/
0.10 In
081 191 082 191 083 191 084 191 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the reference current (phase overcurrent pickup).
IDMT1: Blocked/
1.00 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
Iref, Ph dynamic SGx 0.10 In
081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052 OP Fig. 34

IDMT2: Blocked/
1.00 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172 OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Blocked/
1.00 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
081 192 082 192 083 192 084 192 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the reference current (phase overcurrent pickup) in dynamic mode. This
threshold value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
Definite Time
IEC Standard Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Extr. Inverse
IEC Long Time Inv.
IEEE Moderately Inv.
IDMT1:
Definite Time IEEE Very Inverse -
Phase Charac SGx
IEEE Extr. Inverse
ANSI Normally Inv.
ANSI Short Time Inv.
ANSI Long Time Inv.
RI-Type Inverse
RXIDG-Type Inverse
081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053 OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: As per ‘IDMT1: Phase
Definite Time -
Phase Charac SGx Charac SGx’
081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173 OP Fig. 34
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-93
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT3: As per ‘IDMT1: Phase
Definite Time -
Phase Charac SGx Charac SGx’
081 193 082 193 083 193 084 193 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT1: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054 OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174 OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 194 082 194 083 194 084 194 OP Fig. 34
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
ST
IDMT1:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t Ph SGx
081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057 OP Fig. 34
IDMT2:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t Ph SGx
081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177 OP Fig. 34
IDMT3:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t Ph SGx
081 197 082 197 083 197 084 197 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).
IDMT1:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Ph SGx
081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055 OP Fig. 34
IDMT2:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Ph SGx
081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175 OP Fig. 34
IDMT3:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time Ph SGx
081 195 082 195 083 195 084 195 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out
(phase current system).
IDMT1: Instantaneous
Instantaneous -
Release Ph SGx Delayed as per Char.
081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056 OP Fig. 34
Instantaneous -
081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176 OP Fig. 34
Instantaneous -
081 196 082 196 083 196 084 196 OP Fig. 34
Setting for the release characteristic (phase current system).
(ST) 4-94 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
IDMT1: Iref, I2 SGx Blocked 0.80 In 0.01 In
0.01 In
081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111 OP Fig. 35
Blocked/
0.01 In
081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121 OP Fig. 35
Blocked/
0.01 In
081 131 082 131 083 131 084 131 OP Fig. 35
Setting for the pickup current (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT1: Blocked/
Blocked 0.80 In 0.01 In
Iref, I2 dynamic SGx 0.01 In
081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112 OP Fig. 35
ST IDMT2:
Iref, I2 dynamic SGx
Blocked
Blocked/
0.01 In
0.80 In 0.01 In
081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122 OP Fig. 35

IDMT3: Blocked/
Iref, I2 dynamic SGx 0.01 In
081 132 082 132 083 132 084 132 OP Fig. 35
Setting for the pickup current (negative-sequence current system). This value is only
effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
Definite Time
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Extr. Inverse
IEC Long Time Inv.
IDMT1:
Definite Time IEEE Very Inverse -
I2 Charac SGx
IEEE Extr. Inverse
ANSI Normally Inv.
ANSI Long Time Inv.
RI-Type Inverse
RXIDG-Type Inverse
081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113 OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: As per ‘IDMT1:
Definite Time -
I2 Charac SGx I2 Charac SGx’
081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123 OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: As per ‘IDMT1:
Definite Time -
I2 Charac SGx I2 Charac SGx’
081 133 082 133 083 133 084 133 OP Fig. 35
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT1: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114 OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124 OP Fig. 35
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-95
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT3: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 134 082 134 083 134 084 134 OP Fig. 35
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT1:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t I2 SGx
081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117 OP Fig. 35
IDMT2:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t I2 SGx
081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127 OP Fig. 35
IDMT3:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t I2 SGx
081 137 082 137 083 137 084 137 OP Fig. 35
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
ST
IDMT1:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time I2 SGx
081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115 OP Fig. 35
IDMT2:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time I2 SGx
081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125 OP Fig. 35
IDMT3:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time I2 SGx
081 135 082 135 083 135 084 135 OP Fig. 35
characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
Instantaneous -
Release I2 SGx Delayed as per Char.
081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116 OP Fig. 35
Instantaneous -
081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126 OP Fig. 35
Instantaneous -
081 136 082 136 083 136 084 136 OP Fig. 35
Setting for the release characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
Blocked/
IDMT1: Iref, N SGx Blocked 0.80 In 0.01 In
0.01 In
081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061 OP Fig. 36
Blocked/
0.01 In
081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181 OP Fig. 36
Blocked/
0.01 In
081 201 082 201 083 201 084 201 OP Fig. 36
Setting for the pickup current (residual current system).
(ST) 4-96 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Blocked/
Iref, N dynamic SGx 0.01 In
081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062 OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: Blocked/
081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182 OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: Blocked/
081 202 082 202 083 202 084 202 OP Fig. 36
Setting for the pickup current (residual current system) in dynamic mode. This operate
Definite Time
IEC Very Inverse
ST IEC Extr. Inverse
IEC Long Time Inv.
IDMT1: IEC Standard
IEEE Very Inverse -
N Charac SGx Inverse
IEEE Extr. Inverse
ANSI Normally Inv.
ANSI Long Time Inv.
RI-Type Inverse
RXIDG-Type Inverse
081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063 OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: IEC Standard As per ‘IDMT1:
-
N Charac SGx Inverse N Charac SGx’
081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183 OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: IEC Standard As per ‘IDMT1:
-
N Charac SGx Inverse N Charac SGx’
081 203 082 203 083 203 084 203 OP Fig. 36
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT1: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064 OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184 OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: kt Time
1.00 0.05 10.00 0.01
Dial/TMS SGx
081 204 082 204 083 204 084 204 OP Fig. 36
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT1:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t N SGx
081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067 OP Fig. 36
IDMT2:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t N SGx
081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187 OP Fig. 36
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-97
Setting Range
Min. Max.
IDMT3:
1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
Min. Trip t N SGx
081 207 082 207 083 207 084 207 OP Fig. 36
Setting for the minimum trip time (residual current system).
IDMT1:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time N SGx
081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065 OP Fig. 36
IDMT2:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time N SGx
081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185 OP Fig. 36
IDMT3:
0.00 s 0.00 s 600.00 s 0.01 s
Hold Time N SGx
081 205 082 205 083 205 084 205 OP Fig. 36
(residual current system).
ST
Instantaneous -
Release N SGx Delayed as per Char.
081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066 OP Fig. 36
Instantaneous -
081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186 OP Fig. 36
Instantaneous -
081 206 082 206 083 206 084 206 OP Fig. 36
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).
1.3.3.6 Thermal overload protection (THRM)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1:
No No Yes -
Enable SGx
081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070 OP Fig. 41
THRM2:
No No Yes -
Enable SGx
081 090 082 090 083 090 084 090 OP Fig. 41
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for thermal overload protection.
THRM1:
1.00 In 0.10 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
Iref Rating SGx
081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074 OP Fig. 45
THRM2:
1.00 In 0.10 In 4.00 In 0.01 In
Iref Rating SGx
081 094 082 094 083 094 084 094 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the reference current.
(ST) 4-98 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1: Start
1.15 1.05 1.50 0.01
Fact.OL_RC SGx
081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Start
1.15 1.05 1.50 0.01
Fact.OL_RC SGx
081 095 082 095 083 095 084 095 OP Fig. 45
The starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible continuous
thermal current of the protected object:
I therm,prot.object
k=
Inom,prot.object
THRM1: Tim.const
30.0 min 1.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
1(heat) SGx
081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Tim.const
ST 1(heat) SGx
30.0 min 1.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
081 102 082 102 083 102 084 102 OP Fig. 45

Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow (heating).
THRM1: Tim.const
30.0 min 1.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
2(cool) SGx
081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Tim.const
30.0 min 1.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
2(cool) SGx
081 103 082 103 083 103 084 103 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current flow. This
setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other cases time constant
2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THRM1: Max perm
120 °C 0 °C 300 °C 1 °C
obj tmp. SGx
081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Max perm
120 °C 0 °C 300 °C 1 °C
obj tmp. SGx
081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
THRM1: Max perm
40 °C 0 °C 70 °C 1 °C
cool tmp. SGx
081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Max perm
40 °C 0 °C 70 °C 1 °C
cool tmp. SGx
081 100 082 100 083 100 084 100 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the coolant.
Note: This setting is only effective if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT100 or the 20mA input.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-99
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Default Temp. Value
THRM1: Select CT
Default Temp. Value From PT100 -
Ambient SGx
From 20 mA Input
081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072 OP Fig. 44
Default Temp. Value
THRM2: Select CT
Default Temp. Value From PT100 -
Ambient SGx
From 20 mA Input
081 092 082 092 083 092 084 092 OP Fig. 44
Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from:
• No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead
• Data acquisition via the PT 100 input
• Data acquisition via the 20 mA input
THRM1:
40 °C -40 °C 70 °C 1 °C
Default CT Amb SGx
081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081 OP Fig. 45 ST
THRM2:
40 °C -40 °C 70 °C 1 °C
Default CT Amb SGx
081 101 082 101 083 101 084 101 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if there is no
data acquisition for the coolant temperature.
THRM1:
Yes No Yes -
Blk for CTA Fail SGx
081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073 OP Fig. 44
THRM2:
Yes No Yes -
Blk for CTA Fail SGx
081 093 082 093 083 093 084 093 OP Fig. 44
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in
the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
THRM1: T> Alarm
95 % 50 % 200 % 1%
Reset,% SGx
081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: T> Alarm
95 % 50 % 200 % 1%
Reset,% SGx
081 099 082 099 083 099 084 099 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
THRM1: T> Trip
100 % 50 % 200 % 1%
Reset,% SGx
081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: T> Trip
100 % 50 % 200 % 1%
Reset,% SGx
081 096 082 096 083 096 084 096 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute Replica, the setting here will
be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
(ST) 4-100 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
THRM1:
2% 2% 30 % 1%
Trip Hysteresis SGx
081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078 OP Fig. 45
THRM2:
2% 2% 30 % 1%
Trip Hysteresis SGx
081 098 082 098 083 098 084 098 OP Fig. 45
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
THRM1: Blocked/
30.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
Pre-Trip Alarm SGx 0.0 min
081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085 OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Blocked/
30.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
Pre-Trip Alarm SGx 0.0 min
081 105 082 105 083 105 084 105 OP Fig. 45
ST A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the warning
time and the trip time is set here.
1.3.3.7 Under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V<>: Enable SGx No No Yes -
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 OP Fig. 47
The time-voltage protection will be enabled in the setting group selected with this setting.
Blocked/
V<>: V> SGx 1.10 Vn 1.50 Vn 0.01 Vn
0.20 Vn
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate value V>.
Blocked/
V<>: V>> SGx 1.10 Vn 1.50 Vn 0.01 Vn
0.20 Vn
076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate value V>>.
Blocked/
V<>: tV> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>.
Blocked/
V<>: tV>> SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>>.
Blocked/
V<>: V< SGx 0.80 Vn 1.50 Vn 0.01 Vn
0.20 Vn
076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate value V<.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-101
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
V<>: V<< SGx 0.80 Vn 1.50 Vn 0.01 Vn
0.20 Vn
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate value V<<.
Blocked/
V<>: Vmin> SGx 0.25 Vn 0.60 Vn 0.01 Vn
0.00 Vn
076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046 OP Fig. 49
Setting for Vmin>. Can be used to prevent undervoltage stages operating when the VT is
dead, restricting operation to low voltage conditions only.
Blocked/
V<>: tV< SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<.
V<>: tV<< SGx 1.00 s

Blocked/
0.00 s
100.00 s 0.01 s ST
076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<<.
Blocked/
V<>: tTransient SGx 1.00 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the time-undervoltage stages.
V<>:
3% 1% 10 % 1%
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx
076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 OP Fig. 49
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for measured-voltage monitoring.
1.3.3.8 Frequency protection (f<>)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
f<>: Enable SGx No No Yes -
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 OP Fig. 50
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for over/underfrequency protection.
f
f<>:
f f with df/dt -
Oper. Mode f1 SGx
f + Delta f/Delta t
018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 OP Fig. 53
f
f<>:
f f with df/dt -
Oper. Mode f2 SGx
f + Delta f/Delta t
018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147 OP Fig. 53
f
f<>:
f f with df/dt -
Oper. Mode f3 SGx
f + Delta f/Delta t
018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171 OP Fig. 53
(ST) 4-102 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
f
f<>:
f f with df/dt -
Oper. Mode f4 SGx
f + Delta f/Delta t
018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195 OP Fig. 53
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over/underfrequency protection, and
whether instantaneous rate of change of frequency, or average frequency gradient shall
supervize.
Blocked/
f<>: f1 SGx 49.80 Hz 70.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
40.00 Hz
018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: f2 SGx 49.80 Hz 70.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
40.00 Hz
018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: f3 SGx 49.80 Hz 70.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
ST 40.00 Hz
018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: f4 SGx 49.80 Hz 70.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
40.00 Hz
018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175 OP Fig. 53
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over/underfrequency protection function operates
if one of the following two conditions applies:
• The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold
• The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls
below this threshold
Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further
monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
Blocked/
f<>: tf1 SGx 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: tf2 SGx 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: tf3 SGx 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
f<>: tf4 SGx 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179 OP Fig. 53
Setting for the operate delay of over/underfrequency protection.
Blocked/
f<>: df1/dt SGx 2.0 Hz/s 10.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
0.1 Hz/s
018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135 OP Fig. 53
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-103
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Blocked/
0.1 Hz/s
018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
0.1 Hz/s
018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183 OP Fig. 53
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
Blocked/
f<>: Delta f1 SGx 0.30 Hz 5.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
0.01 Hz
018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139 OP Fig. 53
ST
Blocked/
0.01 Hz
018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163 OP Fig. 53
Blocked/
0.01 Hz
018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187 OP Fig. 53
Setting for delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with Delta f/Delta t
has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1 SGx 0.30 s 0.04 s 3.00 s 0.01 s
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t2 SGx 0.30 s 0.04 s 3.00 s 0.01 s
018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143 OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t3 SGx 0.30 s 0.04 s 3.00 s 0.01 s
018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167 OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t4 SGx 0.30 s 0.04 s 3.00 s 0.01 s
018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191 OP Fig. 53
Setting for delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with Delta f/Delta t
has been selected.
1.3.3.9 Overfluxing protection (V/f)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V/f: Enable SGx No No Yes -
018 210 082 210 083 210 084 210 OP Fig. 54
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for overfluxing protection.
(ST) 4-104 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V/f: Blocked/
1.05 Vn/fn 1.20 Vn/fn 0.01 Vn/fn
V/f> (Alarm) SGx 1.00 Vn/fn
018 211 082 211 083 211 084 211 OP Fig. 56

Pickup value of definite time warning stage of overfluxing protection.
Blocked/
V/f: V/f(t)> SGx 1.10 Vn/fn 1.50 Vn/fn 0.01 Vn/fn
1.05 Vn/fn
018 212 082 212 083 212 084 212 OP Fig. 60
Pickup value of the variable time characteristic for overfluxing protection.
Blocked/
V/f: V/f>> SGx Blocked 1.60 Vn/fn 0.01 Vn/fn
1.05 Vn/fn
018 213 082 213 083 213 084 213 OP Fig. 57
Pickup value of definite time tripping stage of overfluxing protection.
V/f: tV/f> SGx 1s Blocked/1 s 10000 s 1s
ST 018 214 082 214 083 214 084 214 OP Fig. 56
Time delay for definite time warning stage of overfluxing protection.
V/f: t at V/f=1.05 SGx 72.8 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 217 082 217 083 217 084 217 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.10 SGx 18.8 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 218 082 218 083 218 084 218 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.15 SGx 8.8 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 219 082 219 083 219 084 219 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.20 SGx 5.3 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 220 082 220 083 220 084 220 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.25 SGx 3.7 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 221 082 221 083 221 084 221 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.30 SGx 2.8 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 222 082 222 083 222 084 222 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.35 SGx 2.3 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 223 082 223 083 223 084 223 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.40 SGx 1.9 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 224 082 224 083 224 084 224 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.45 SGx 1.7 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 225 082 225 083 225 084 225 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.50 SGx 1.5 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 226 082 226 083 226 084 226 OP Fig. 58,
60
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (ST) 4-105
Setting Range
Min. Max.
V/f: t at V/f=1.55 SGx 1.4 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 227 082 227 083 227 084 227 OP Fig. 58,
60
V/f: t at V/f=1.60 SGx 1.3 s 1.0 s 1000.0 s 0.1 s
018 228 082 228 083 228 084 228 OP Fig. 58,
60
Time delay settings to configure the overfluxing protection characteristic for V/f values from
1.05 to 1.60 in 0.05 V/Hz steps.
V/f: Reset Time SGx 0s 0s 10000 s 1s
018 230 082 230 083 230 084 230 OP Fig. 60
Reset delay for the variable time tripping characteristic of overfluxing protection.
V/f: tV/f>> SGx Blocked Blocked/0 s 10000 s 1s
018 229 082 229 083 229 084 229
Time delay for definite time tripping stage of overfluxing protection. ST
1.3.3.10 Current transformer supervision (CTS)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
CTS: Enable SGx No No Yes -
001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121 OP Fig. 64
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for CT supervision.
CTS: I1> SGx 0.10 Iref 0.05 Iref 4.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117 OP Fig. 66
Positive sequence current threshold to be exceeded in order to determine CTS condition.
CTS: I2/I1> SGx 0.05 0.05 1.00 0.01
001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105 OP Fig. 66
Low set negative to positive sequence current ratio that is not to be exceeded in order to
determine CTS condition.
CTS: I2/I1>> SGx 0.40 0.05 1.00 0.01
001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125 OP Fig. 66
High set negative to positive sequence current ratio to be exceeded at exactly one end in
order to determine CTS condition.
CTS: t(Alarm) SGx 1.00 s 0.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129 OP Fig. 69
Alarming delay timer for CTS indication.
Blocked/
CTS: t(Latch) SGx 1.00 s 10.00 s 0.01 s
0.00 s
001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133 OP Fig. 69
Latching alarm delay timer for CTS indication.
(ST) 4-106 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.3.3.11 Broken conductor detection (BC_)
Setting Range
Min. Max.
BC_1: Enable SGx No No Yes -
081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038 OP Fig. 62
081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039 OP Fig. 62
081 040 082 040 083 040 084 040 OP Fig. 62
081 041 082 041 083 041 084 041 OP Fig. 62
This setting specifies the end to be enabled for broken conductor detection for each setting
group.
ST BC_1: I2/I1> SGx 0.30 0.20 1.00 0.01
081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042 OP Fig. 63
BC_2: I2/I1> SGx 0.30 0.20 1.00 0.01
081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043 OP Fig. 63
BC_3: I2/I1> SGx 0.30 0.20 1.00 0.01
081 044 082 044 083 044 084 044 OP Fig. 63
BC_4: I2/I1> SGx 0.30 0.20 1.00 0.01
081 045 082 045 083 045 084 045 OP Fig. 63
Pickup level of broken conductor detection based on ratio of negative to positive sequence
current.
BC_1:
5.00 s 0.10 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
Operate Delay SGx
081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046 OP Fig. 63
BC_2:
5.00 s 0.10 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
Operate Delay SGx
081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047 OP Fig. 63
BC_3:
5.00 s 0.10 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
Operate Delay SGx
081 048 082 048 083 048 084 048 OP Fig. 63
BC_4:
5.00 s 0.10 s 100.00 s 0.01 s
Operate Delay SGx
081 049 082 049 083 049 084 049 OP Fig. 63
Operate delay for broken conductor detection.
Operation P63x/UK OP/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
OPERATION

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK OP/A54 Operation
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-1
CONTENTS
(OP) 5-
1. OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 11

1.1 Differential protection (DIFF) 11
1.1.1 Enabling or disabling differential protection 11
1.1.2 Amplitude matching 12
1.1.3 Vector group matching 15
1.1.4 Tripping characteristics 19
1.1.5 High-set differential protection function 20
1.1.6 Magnetizing inrush current blocking 22
1.1.7 Saturation discriminator 23
1.1.8 Overfluxing restraint 24
1.1.9 Measured operating data of differential protection 25

OP
1.2 Restricted earth fault protection (REF_) 26
1.2.1 Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection 26
1.2.2 Amplitude matching 27
1.2.3 Operating modes and tripping characteristics 28
1.2.4 Measured operating data of biased restricted earth fault protection 32
1.3 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) 33
1.3.1 Enabling or disabling DTOC protection 33
1.3.2 Phase current stages 34
1.3.3 Negative sequence current stages 35
1.3.4 Residual current stages 37
1.3.5 General starting 38
1.3.6 Counters of the DTOC protection function 39
1.4 Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) 39
1.4.1 Enabling or disabling IDMT protection 40
1.4.2 Time dependent characteristics 41
1.4.3 Phase current stage 45
1.4.4 Negative sequence current stage 46
1.4.5 Residual current stage 47
1.4.6 Holding time 48
1.4.7 General starting 49

(OP) 5-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.4.8 Counters of the IDMT protection function 50
1.5 Thermal overload protection (THRM) 50
1.5.1 Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection 51
1.5.2 Tripping characteristics 52
1.5.3 Coolant temperature acquisition 53
1.5.4 Warning 54
1.6 Under/overvoltage protection (V<>) 56
1.6.1 Enabling or disabling V<> protection 56
1.6.2 Voltage monitoring 56
1.7 Frequency potection (f<>) 58
1.7.1 Enabling or disabling frequency protection 58
1.7.2 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time 59
1.7.3 Operating modes of frequency protection 60
1.7.4 Frequency monitoring 60

OP
1.7.5 Frequency monitoring with instantaneous rate of change (df/dt) monitoring 60
1.7.6 Frequency monitoring with average rate of change (Δf/Δt) monitoring 60
1.8 Overfluxing protection (V/f) 62
1.8.1 Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection 62
1.8.2 Conditioning the measured variable 63
1.8.3 Fixed-time warning stage 63
1.8.4 Fixed-time tripping stage 64
1.8.5 Variable-time tripping stage 64
1.9 Broken conductor detection (BC_) 68
1.9.1 Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection 68
1.9.2 Broken conductor detection 68
2. OPERATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 70

2.1 Current transformer supervision (CTS) 70
2.1.1 Enabling or disabling CTS 70
2.1.2 CTS blocked 70
2.1.3 Operating conditions 71
2.1.4 Signaling and indication 72
2.1.5 Resetting 73
2.2 DC and temperature monitoring (LIMIT) 74
2.2.1 Enabling or disabling DC and temperature monitoring 74
2.2.2 Monitoring the linearized DC values 74

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-3
2.2.3 Monitoring the measured temperature value 75
2.3 Phase current monitoring (LIM_) 76
2.3.1 Enabling or disabling phase current monitoring 76
2.3.2 Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents 76
2.4 Programmable logic (LOGIC) 78
2.5 Local control panel (HMI) 83
2.5.1 Operation panel 84
2.5.2 Fault panel 84
2.5.3 Overload panel 85
2.6 Local front port communication (PC) 85
2.7 Rear port serial communication (COMM1) 86
2.7.1 Checking spontaneous signaling 92
2.8 2nd rear port serial communication (COMM2) 93
2.8.1 Checking spontaneous signaling 93

OP
2.9 IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB) 94
2.9.1 Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization 94
2.9.2 Ready to synchronize 94
2.10 Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs (INP) 95
2.10.1 Configuration of the opto inputs 95
2.10.2 Operating mode of the opto inputs 95
2.11 Temperature and DC monitoring inputs (RTDmA) 96
2.11.1 Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs 96
2.11.2 Direct current inputs 97
2.11.3 Zero suppression 98
2.11.4 Open circuit and overload monitoring 98
2.11.5 Input for connection of a RTD 100
2.12 Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays (OUTP) 100
2.12.1 Configuration of the output relays 100
2.12.2 Operating mode of the output relays 100
2.12.3 Blocking the output relays 101
2.12.4 Testing the output relays 102
2.13 Analog output channel (mA_OP) 103
2.13.1 Enabling or disabling the analog output channel function 103
2.13.2 Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input 103
2.13.3 Resetting the analog output channel function 104

(OP) 5-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.13.4 BCD-coded measured data output 104
2.13.5 Output of measured event values 104
2.13.6 Output of measured operating values 105
2.13.7 Scaling 105
2.13.8 Analog measured data output 106
2.13.9 Output of measured event values 106
2.13.10 Output of measured operating values 107
2.13.11 Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels 107
2.13.12 Scaling 107
2.13.13 Output of external measured data 109
2.14 Configuration and operating mode of the LED’s (LED) 110
2.14.1 Configuration of the LED’s 110
2.14.2 Operating mode of the LED’s 110
2.15 General functions of the P63x (MAIN) 110

OP
2.15.1 Conditioning of the measured variables 110
2.15.2 Selection of the residual current measurement 114
2.15.3 Phase reversal logic 115
2.15.4 Operating data measurement 116
2.15.5 Measured current values 117
2.15.6 Delayed maximum phase current display (thermal ammeter) 118
2.15.7 Stored maximum phase current display (thermal max. demand) 118
2.15.8 Measured voltage value 121
2.15.9 Frequency 121
2.15.10 Angle determination 122
2.15.11 Configuring and enabling the protection functions 124
2.15.12 Canceling a protection function 124
2.15.13 Disabling and enabling the protection function 125
2.15.14 Activation of dynamic settings 125
2.15.15 Multiple blocking 125
2.15.16 Blocked/faulty 126
2.15.17 Starting signals and starting logic 127
2.15.18 Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels 130
2.15.19 Time tag and clock synchronization 131
2.15.20 Multiple signaling of the broken conductor detection function 131
2.15.21 Resetting mechanisms 132

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-5
2.15.22 Test mode 133
2.16 Setting group selection (GROUP) 133
2.16.1 Selecting the setting group 133
2.16.2 Selecting the setting group via opto inputs 133
2.17 Self testing and diagnostics (CHECK) 134
2.17.1 Tests during startup 134
2.17.2 Cyclic tests 135
2.17.3 Signaling 135
2.17.4 Device response 135
2.18 Operating data recording (OP_RC) 136
2.18.1 Counter of signals relevant to system operation 136
2.19 Monitoring signal recording (MT_RC) 136
2.19.1 Counter of monitoring signals 137
2.20 Overload data acquisition (OL_DA) 137

OP
2.20.1 Acquisition of the overload duration 137
2.20.2 Acquisition of the measured overload data of thermal overload protection 138
2.21 Overload recording (OL_RC) 138
2.21.1 Start of overload recording 138
2.21.2 Counting overload events 138
2.21.3 Time tag 139
2.21.4 Overload logging 139
2.22 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA) 140
2.22.1 Running time and fault duration 140
2.22.2 Fault data acquisition time 140
2.22.3 Acquisition of the fault currents 142
2.22.4 Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents 143
2.22.5 Fault data reset 145
2.23 Disturbance recording (OSCIL) 145
2.23.1 Start of fault recording 145
2.23.2 Fault counting 145
2.23.3 Time tag 146
2.23.4 Fault logging 147
2.23.5 Fault data recording 148

(OP) 5-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Enabling or disabling differential protection 12

Figure 2: Calculating and checking the matching factors 14
Figure 3: Amplitude matching 15
Figure 4: Vector diagram for vector group matching with a Yd5 transformer 16
Figure 5: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c 18
Figure 6: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d 19
Figure 7: Tripping characteristic of differential protection 20
Figure 8: Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems 21
Figure 9: Measuring system of the P63x 22
Figure 10: Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) 23
Figure 11: Saturation discriminator 24
Figure 12: Overfluxing restraint 25
OP Figure 13: Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents 26
Figure 14: Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection 27
Figure 15: Calculating and monitoring the matching factors 28
Figure 16: Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by residual current 29
Figure 17: Measuring system of the P63x 30
Figure 18: Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by maximum phase current 31
Figure 19: High impedance restricted earth fault protection 32
Figure 20: Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents 32
Figure 21: Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection 33
Figure 22: Enabling or disabling DTOC protection 34
Figure 23: Phase current stages 35
Figure 24: Negative sequence current stages 37
Figure 25: Residual current stages 38
Figure 26: General starting 39
Figure 27: Counters of the DTOC protection function 39
Figure 28: Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection 40
Figure 29: Enabling or disabling IDMT protection 40
Figure 30: Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3 42
Figure 31: Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112 43
Figure 32: Tripping characteristics per ANSI 44
Figure 33: Tripping characteristics for RI and RXIDG type inverse 44
Figure 34: Phase current stage 45
Figure 35: Negative sequence current stage 47
Figure 36: Residual current stage 48
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-7
Figure 37: Example demonstrating the effect of holding time on the phase current stage 49
Figure 38: General starting 50
Figure 39: Counters of the IDMT protection function 50
Figure 40: Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection 51
Figure 41: Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection 51
Figure 42: Thermal overload protection ready 52
Figure 43: Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection 53
Figure 44: Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition 54
Figure 45: Thermal overload protection 55
Figure 46: Thermal replica reset 55
Figure 47: Enabling or disabling V<> protection 56
Figure 48: Overvoltage monitoring 57
Figure 49: Undervoltage monitoring 58
Figure 50: Enabling or disabling frequency protection 59
Figure 51: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting 59
OP
Figure 52: Operation of frequency monitoring with average rate of change (Δf/Δt) monitoring 61
Figure 53: First stage of the frequency protection function 62
Figure 54: Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function 63
Figure 55: Conditioning the measured variable 63
Figure 56: Warning stage 64
Figure 57: Fixed-time tripping stage 64
Figure 58: Tripping characteristic for default settings 65
Figure 59: Change of buffer content during an interrupted starting 66
Figure 60: Variable-time tripping stage 67
Figure 61: Resetting of the V/f replica 68
Figure 62: Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection 68
Figure 63: Broken conductor detection for end a 69
Figure 64: Enabling or disabling CTS 70
Figure 65: CTS blocking 71
Figure 66: Current evaluation per end (y = a,b,c,d) 71
Figure 67: CTS operating condition 72
Figure 68: Modification of differential characteristic during CTS condition 73
Figure 69: Overall signaling of CTS 74
Figure 70: Per end signaling of CTS 74
Figure 71: Monitoring the linearized DC values 75
Figure 72: Monitoring the measured temperature value 76
Figure 73: Selection of the measured variables for phase current monitoring (LIM_1 shown) 77
Figure 74: Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current for the selected transformer end 78
(OP) 5-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 75: Control of logic operations via settings or stored input signals 79
Figure 76: Setting options for programmable logic (output 1 shown) 80
Figure 77: Operating mode 1: pickup & reset delay 81
Figure 78: Operating mode 2: pulse delayed pickup 81
Figure 79: Operating mode 3: pickup & rst.retrig 81
Figure 80: Operating mode 4: delayed pulse retrig 82
Figure 81: Operating mode 5: minimum dwell 82
Figure 82: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean logic equations 83
Figure 83: Operation panel 84
Figure 84: Fault panel 85
Figure 85: Overload panel 85
Figure 86: PC interface settings 86
Figure 87: Selecting the serial protocol 87
Figure 88: Settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 88
Figure 89: Settings for the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol 89
OP Figure 90: Settings for the ILS_C protocol 90
Figure 91: Settings for the MODBUS protocol 91
Figure 92: Settings for the DNP3.0 protocol 91
Figure 93: Settings for the Courier protocol 92
Figure 94: Checking spontaneous signaling 92
Figure 95: Settings for COMM2 93
Figure 96: Checking spontaneous signaling 94
Figure 97: Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization 95
Figure 98: Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs 96
Figure 99: Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs 96
Figure 100: Example of the conversion of a 4-10mA input current to 0-20mA monitored current,
IDC,lin 97
Figure 101: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero
suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a dotted line) 98
Figure 102: Analog DC input 99
Figure 103: Scaling of the linearized measured value 100
Figure 104: Temperature measurement using a RTD 100
Figure 105: Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays 102
Figure 106: Testing the output relays 103
Figure 107: Enabling or disabling the analog output channel 103
Figure 108: Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input 104
Figure 109: Resetting the analog output channel function 104
Figure 110: BCD-coded measured data output 106
Figure 111: Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data 108
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-9
Figure 112: Analog measured data output 109

Figure 113: Configuration and operating mode of the LED’s 110
Figure 114: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing connection of the fourth CT
set to the transformers of the star point earth connection 112
Figure 115: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to
earth fault CT, Part 1 of 2 113
Figure 116: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to
earth fault CT, Part 2 of 2 114
Figure 117: Evaluation of residual current 115
Figure 118: Internal current summation 116
Figure 119: Measured operating data for phase currents, ends a to d 118
Figure 120: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display 119
Figure 121: Measured operating data for residual currents, ends a to c 120
Figure 122: Measured operating data for residual current, end d (P634 only) 120
Figure 123: Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual
winding (formed by current summation, P633 and P634 only) 121
Figure 124: Measured voltage value 121 OP
Figure 125: Frequency measurement 122
Figure 126: Determination of the angle between the phase currents 122
Figure 127: Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends 123
Figure 128: Determination of the angle between the calculated residual current and the current
measured at transformer - Tx4 124
Figure 129: Enabling or disabling protection 125
Figure 130: Activation of dynamic settings 125
Figure 131: Multiple blocking 126
Figure 132: ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal 127
Figure 133: P63x general start signals 127
Figure 134: Counter of general start signals 127
Figure 135: Formation of the trip commands 129
Figure 136: Counter of the trip commands 130
Figure 137: Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels 130
Figure 138: Date and time setting and clock synchronization 131
Figure 139: Signals of the broken conductor detection function 132
Figure 140: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel 132
Figure 141: Setting the test mode 133
Figure 142: Setting group activation 134
Figure 143: Monitoring signals 135
Figure 144: Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system operation 136
Figure 145: Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals 137
Figure 146: Overload duration 137
(OP) 5-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 147: Measured overload data of thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown) 138
Figure 148: Counting overload events 138
Figure 149: Overload memory 139
Figure 150: Running time and fault duration 140
Figure 151: Determination of the fault data acquisition time 142
Figure 152: Acquisition of the fault currents 143
Figure 153: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection 144
Figure 154: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of restricted earth fault protection 145
Figure 155: Start of fault recording and fault counter 146
Figure 156: Fault memory 147
Figure 157: Fault data recording 149
OP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-11
1. OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail the individual protection functions.
1.1 Differential protection (DIFF)

The P63x is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of
motors and generators and of other two-winding (P631, P632, P633, P634), three-winding
(P633, P634) or four-winding (P634) arrangements.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is
required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power generally the nominal
power of the transformer and of the primary nominal voltages for all windings of the
transformer.
Vector group matching is achieved by input of the relevant vector group identification
number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering may be deactivated. For
conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal
voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents unwanted tripping.
For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the harmonic
restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of directly switched
asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient
transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high
primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the P63x
provides stable performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator. OP
All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current transformers
are connected to the P63x in standard configuration as shown in the Installation - IN section.
In particular, the application as transformer differential protection device presupposes that
winding ‘a’ corresponds to the high voltage side of the transformer. For a non-standard
connection, the appropriate settings must be selected (see Settings - ST).
1.1.1 Enabling or disabling differential protection

Differential protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
(OP) 5-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SGx
Setting
Group SGx
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
OP P1758ENa
Figure 1: Enabling or disabling differential protection
1.1.2 Amplitude matching

In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power - identical
for all windings needs to be defined. For two-winding arrangements, the nominal power will
usually be the reference power. For three or four-winding transformers, the nominal power
of the highest-power winding should be set as the reference power. The individual reference
currents for each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the
basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
S ref S ref
Iref ,a = Iref ,b =
3 ⋅ Vnom,a 3 ⋅ Vnom,b
S ref S ref
Iref ,c = Iref ,d =
3 ⋅ Vnom,c 3 ⋅ Vnom,d
Sref: reference power

Iref, a, b, c or d: reference current of winding a, b, c or d
Vnom, a, b, c or d: nominal voltage of winding a, b, c or d
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set
primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
Inom,a Inom,b Inom,c Inom,d

k am,a = k am,b = k am,c = k am,d =
Iref ,a Iref ,b Iref ,c Iref ,d
With
Kam, a, b, c or d: amplitude-matching factor of winding a, b, c or d
Inom, a, b, c or d: primary nominal currents of the main current transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are calculated by the P63x.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-13
The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their
permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions:
• The matching factors must always be ≤ 16. i.e. k amp,z ≤ 16
• The value of the lower matching factors must be ≥ 0.5. i.e. k amp,max −1 ≥ 0.5
In three or four-winding protection, the “weakest“ end, that is the end with the smallest
primary nominal transformer current, is not associated with any restriction of the settings for
the amplitude matching.
Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above
conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are
multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing.
Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant
reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of
the device.
OP
(OP) 5-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Rated Ref
Power Sref
CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
OP CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
CHECK:
P1759ENa
Figure 2: Calculating and checking the matching factors

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-15
OP
Figure 3: Amplitude matching
1.1.3 Vector group matching

Vector group matching is performed solely by mathematical phasor operations on the
amplitude-matched phase currents of the low-voltage side in accordance with the
characteristic vector group number. This is shown in the following figure for vector group
characteristic number 5, where vector group Yd5 is used as the example:
(OP) 5-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 4: Vector diagram for vector group matching with a Yd5 transformer
No operation is carried out on the high-voltage side in connection with vector group
matching. However, one should note that the phase windings are connected in a wye
configuration, the neutral of which is operationally earthed. In the event of system faults to
earth, the zero-sequence component of the fault current would flow via the earthed neutral
that lies within the transformer differential protection zone and would thus appear in the
OP measuring systems as differential current. The consequence would be undesirable tripping.
For this reason the zero-sequence component of the three-phase system must be eliminated
from the phase currents on the high-voltage side. In accordance with its definition, the
zero-sequence current is determined as follows from the amplitude-matched phase currents:
Iamp,zero,z =
1
(
⋅I +I +I
3 amp,A,z amp,B,z amp,C,z
)
On the low-voltage side, the zero-sequence current in the example shown above is
automatically filtered out based on the mathematical phasor operations. This is not always
necessary and also not always desired, but is basically the result of any subtraction of two
phase current phasors:
Iamp,A,z = Iamp,zero,z + Iamp,pos,z + Iamp,neg,z

2
Iamp,B,z = Iamp,zero,z + a ⋅ Iamp,pos,z + a ⋅ Iamp,neg,z
2
Iamp,C,z = Iamp,zero,z + a ⋅ Iamp,pos,z + a ⋅ Iamp,neg,z
( )
Iamp,A,z − Iamp,B,z = 1 − a ⋅ Iamp,pos,z + (1 − a ) ⋅ Iamp,neg,z
2
= (a − a )⋅ I ( )
2 2
Iamp,B,z − Iamp,C,z amp,pos,z + a − a ⋅ Iamp,neg,z
( )
Iamp,C,z − Iamp,A,z = (a − 1) ⋅ Iamp,pos,z + a − 1 ⋅ Iamp,neg,z
2
The following tables show that for all odd-numbered vector group characteristics the
zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is basically always filtered out, whereas for
even-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage
side is never filtered out automatically. The latter is also true for the high-voltage side since
in that case, as explained above, no mathematical phasor operations are performed.
Vector group matching and zero-sequence current filtering must therefore always be viewed
in combination. The following tables list all the mathematical phasor operations.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-17
The indices in the formulae have the following meaning:

am: amplitude-matched
s: amplitude- and vector group-matched
x: phase A, B or C
y: measuring system 1, 2 or 3
z: winding a, b, c or d
x+1: cyclically trailing phase
x-1: cyclically leading phase
Mathematical operations on the high-voltage side:
With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering
0 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x, z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an even-numbered vector group

characteristic:
VG With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering
0 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x, z
2 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x +1,z
4 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x −1,z OP

6 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x,z
8 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z
10 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x −1,z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an odd-numbered vector group

characteristic:
1 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z ) Ivec,y,z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z
3 3
3 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x +1,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x −1, z − Iamp, x +1, z + Iamp,zero, z
3 3
5 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x −1,z − Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z
3 3
7 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x +1, z − Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z
3 3
9 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x −1,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x +1, z − Iamp, x −1, z + Iamp,zero, z
3 3
11 Ivec,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z ) Ivec,y,z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z + Iamp,zero,z
3 3
Vector group matching is via input of the vector group identification number provided that the
phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration.
For other configurations, special considerations may apply. A reverse phase rotation (phase
sequence A-C-B) needs to be taken into account by making the appropriate setting at the
(OP) 5-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x. The P63x will then automatically form the complementary value of the set vector
group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 - set ID).
OP
Figure 5: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-19
OP
Figure 6: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d
1.1.4 Tripping characteristics

The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are
calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching. The
formation of the restraining variables differs between two and three-winding protection.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b
IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a − Is,y,b
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three or four-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d
[
IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d ]
The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P63x has two knees. The first
knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value DIFF: Idiff> SGx and is on the
load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the
setting DIFF: IR,m2 SGx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 7 shows
the tripping characteristic.
Characteristic equation for the range: 0 ≤ IR ≤ 0.5 ⋅ Idiff > :
Id I >
= diff
Iref Iref
(OP) 5-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Characteristic equation for the range: :
Id I I >
= m1 ⋅ R + diff ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 )
Iref Iref Iref
IR,m2 < IR
Characteristic equation for the range: :
Id I I IR,m2
= m 2 ⋅ R + diff > ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) + ⋅ (m1 − m 2 )
Iref Iref Iref Iref
Iref: reference current

m1: gradient of characteristic in range
IR,m2 < IR
m2: gradient of characteristic in range
OP
tic
ris
fee cte
a
ar
d
ch
gle ent
de
rr
-si
for lt cu
u
sin
Fa
Figure 7: Tripping characteristic of differential protection
1.1.5 High-set differential protection function

Above the adjustable threshold DIFF: Idiff>> SGx of the differential current, the P63x will trip
without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing restraint. If the
differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx>, the restraining
current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the
P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable and the saturation discriminator.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-21
Figure 8: Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring
systems OP
(OP) 5-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 9: Measuring system of the P63x
1.1.6 Magnetizing inrush current blocking

When an unloaded transformer is energized, the inrush current at unfavorable points on
wave such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal current
several times over. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the
tripping characteristic of differential protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action
is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the
system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current.
The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental I(fn) and second harmonic
components I(2*fn) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*fn)/I(fn) exceeds
a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system, tripping is blocked optionally in
one of the following modes:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-23
• Across all three measuring systems
• Selectively for one measuring system

There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold
DIFF: Idiff>> SGx.
OP
Figure 10: Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
1.1.7 Saturation discriminator

Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the bias.
Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly pronounced for
high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents with transformer
saturation, the P63x is provided with a saturation discriminator.
After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors the
evolution of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential current
appears after a zero crossing synchronous with the restraining current. In the case of
through currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not appear
until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a blocking signal is generated on the basis
of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus
the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Blocking is restricted to the measuring system
where an external fault was detected.
DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx.
(OP) 5-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 11: Saturation discriminator
1.1.8 Overfluxing restraint

If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation effects
occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping. The fact that
the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high proportion of
OP harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization.
The P63x filters the differential current and determines the fundamental component I(fn) and
the fifth harmonic component I(5*fn). If the ratio I(5*fn)/I(fn) exceeds the set value DIFF:
Over I(5fn)/I(fn) SGx in at least one measuring system, and if the restraining current is
smaller than 4·Iref, then tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system.
DIFF: Idiff>> SGx.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-25
OP
Figure 12: Overfluxing restraint
1.1.9 Measured operating data of differential protection

The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided
that the set thresholds are exceeded.
(OP) 5-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 13: Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents
1.2 Restricted earth fault protection (REF_)

The restricted earth fault protection function is not available with the P631. For the other
design versions of the P63x, one restricted earth fault protection function per transformer
winding is available for up to three ends. The P63x display shows the winding associated
with a particular restricted earth fault protection function. Connection for and operation of the
restricted earth fault protection function will now be presented with winding ‘a’ as an
example. Equivalent considerations apply to windings ‘b’ and ‘c’.
1.2.1 Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection

Restricted earth fault protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-27
OP
Figure 14: Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection
1.2.2 Amplitude matching

In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, the nominal power of the
transformer winding should be set as the reference power. The reference current is then
calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal
voltage of the transformer winding.
S ref
Iref ,N,a =
3 ⋅ Vnom,a

Iref,N,a: reference current of the restricted earth fault protection function, end a
Vnom,a: nominal voltage, end a
The P63x calculates the matching factor on the basis of the reference current and the set
primary nominal current of the system transformer.
Inom,a Inom,Y,a
k am,N,a = k am,Y,a =
Iref ,N,a Iref ,N,a
Where:
am: amplitude-matched
In,a: primary nominal current of the main CT
In,Y,a: primary nominal current of CT in the neutral-point-to-earth connections
Reference currents and matching factors are calculated by the P63x.
The P63x checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their permissible
ranges. The following conditions apply:
• The matching factors must always be ≤ 16
i.e. k amp ,P ≤ 16 and k amp, Y ≤ 16
• The value of the smaller matching factor must be ≥ 0.5

i.e. k amp ,P ≥ 0.5 and k amp,Y ≥ 0.5
(OP) 5-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Should the P63x calculate a reference current or matching factors not satisfying the above
conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically.
The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available
for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer
back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the
nominal current of the device.
Rated
Ref Power Sref
CHECK
OP CHECK
CHECK
CHECK Min
Mtch f inv REF_1
CHECK Rat
Mtch f inv REF_1
P1770ENa
Figure 15: Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
1.2.3 Operating modes and tripping characteristics

One of three operating modes for restricted earth fault protection can be selected via
settings.
• Low impedance REF biased by residual current (Low-Z Iph Sum Bias)
• Low impedance REF biased by maximum phase current (Low-Z Iph Max. Bias)
• High impedance REF (High Impedance)

The operation of each mode is detailed below:
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-29
From the amplitude-matched resultant currents Iam,N,a and Iam,Y,a, the differential and
restraining currents are calculated as follows:
Id,N,a = Iam,N,a + Iam,Y,a
IR,N,a = Iam,N,a
Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of uniformly
defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current arrows, that is, point
either towards the protected object or away from it.
Figure 16 shows the tripping characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection function.
The characteristic equation is as follows:
Id,N,a Idiff >,N,a IR,N,a

= + 1.005 ⋅
Iref ,N,a Iref ,N,a Iref ,N,a
Where:
Idiff>,N,a: setting REF_1: Idiff> SGx
rm
er
s OP
n sfo
t ra
nt
rre
cu
in
e ma
o f th
on
r ati
5 atu
.00 nts
=1 ns
ie
m t ra
for
tic
te ris
ac
h ar
tc
rr en
cu
ult
Fa 12201e.DS4
Figure 16: Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by

residual current
If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold REF_1: Idiff>>> SGx, the
restraining variable is no longer taken into account, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the
restraining variable.
Low impedance REF biased by residual current is only applicable where the transformer
winding has neutral point earthing, and where the earth connection is fitted with a CT (IY).
This mode cannot be applied for balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
(OP) 5-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 17: Measuring system of the P63x
Low-Z Iph Max. Bias
Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are defined as
follows:
Id = k amp,P ⋅ Σ{IA ,IB ,IC } + k amp,Y ⋅ IY
IR =
1
2
( { }
⋅ k amp,P ⋅ max IA , IB , IC + k amp,Y ⋅ IY )
Regarding the definition of restraining current IR a dual slope characteristic is applicable in

comparison with operating mode, Low-Z Iph Sum Bias‘. The characteristic allows the user to
apply tripping test by shorting a phase current (for simulation of residual current) without the
need of star point current IY.
This mode has the advantage of being universally applicable for conventional star winding
REF, and also balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-31
Id /Iref Fault current characteristic for

single- end, single- phase
2 infeed
1.5
m2
0.5 m1
Idiff>
IR,m2
0.5 1 1.5 2 IR /Iref
P1845ENa
OP
Figure 18: Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by
maximum phase current
High Impedance
This operating mode offers restricted earth fault protection using the high impedance
measuring principle. Sensitivity may be set via the Idiff> setting.
This mode has the advantage of being universally applicable for conventional star winding
REF, and also balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
(OP) 5-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm Zm AG
R CT1 R CT2
IF
R L1 R L3
VS R ST
R L2 R R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

VS = IF (RCT + 2RL )
Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting)

R ST = VS R R
OP IS
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current
Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENc
Figure 19: High impedance restricted earth fault protection
1.2.4 Measured operating data of biased restricted earth fault protection

The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided
that the set thresholds are exceeded.
Figure 20: Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-33
1.3 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)

In the P631 and P632, two three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions
(DTOC1 and DTOC2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends.
In the P633 and the P634, three DTOC functions (DTOC1, DTOC2 and DTOC3) are
implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the
P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current
summation over two user-selected transformer ends.
For each DTOC function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user. The DTOC
function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual
current for the selection. DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
DTOC protection functions. Function groups DTOC2 and DTOC3 are equivalent.
Select
CT Input
OP
P1774ENa
Figure 21: Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection
1.3.1 Enabling or disabling DTOC protection

DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
(OP) 5-34 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 22: Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
1.3.2 Phase current stages

The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active.
The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see
“Activation of Dynamic Settings”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started.
Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked
by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
stabilization function of differential protection.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-35
Inrush
Restr Enab SGx
SGx
SGx
Dynam.
Setts. Active
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
OP
SGx
SGx
SGx
Setting SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx

SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Inrush
Setting SGx SGx SGx SGx Restr Enab SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1776ENa
Figure 23: Phase current stages
1.3.3 Negative sequence current stages

The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on
the formulas shown below. The phase sequence setting is taken into account.
A-B-C (standard phase rotation):
Ineg =
1
(
2
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
(OP) 5-36 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
A-C-B (reverse phase rotation):
Ineg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active.
The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see
“Activation of Dynamic Settings”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started.
Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked
by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
stabilization function of differential protection.
OP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-37
OP
Figure 24: Negative sequence current stages
1.3.4 Residual current stages

The residual current is monitored with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the
set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic”
thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see “Activation of
Dynamic Settings”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the
residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once these stages
have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general starting decision is set
to Enabled starting IN, a trip signal is issued as well.
These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Furthermore, the timer stages can, depending on the setting, be blocked automatically for
single-pole or multi-pole startings.
(OP) 5-38 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 25: Residual current stages
1.3.5 General starting

If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general
starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the
negative-sequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general
starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed,
a signal is issued.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-39
Gen.
starting mode SGx
tGS
SGx
I2
I2
Starting
I2>
General
Starting Start
I2>>
Starting
I2>>>
Setting Gen. tGS

starting mode SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1779ENa
Figure 26: General starting
1.3.6 Counters of the DTOC protection function

OP
The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Figure 27: Counters of the DTOC protection function
1.4 Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)

In the P631 and P632, two three-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection functions (IDMT1
and IDMT2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends.
In the P633 and the P634, three IDMT functions (IDMT1, IDMT2 and IDMT3) are
implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the
P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current
For each IDMT function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user. The IDMT
function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual
current for the selection. IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
IDMT protection functions. Function groups IDMT2 and IDMT3 are equivalent.
(OP) 5-40 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Select
CT Input
OP P1781ENa
Figure 28: Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection
1.4.1 Enabling or disabling IDMT protection

IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling
can be done separately for each setting group.
Figure 29: Enabling or disabling IDMT protection

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-41
1.4.2 Time dependent characteristics

The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the
negative-sequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set
separately. The user can select from a multitude of characteristics. The tripping
characteristics available for selection are shown in Figures 30 to 33.
Formula for the

Tripping Formula for the Tripping
No. Constants Release
Characteristic Characteristic
Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜I ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112

⎛ ⎞ R
⎜
⎜
⎟
⎟
tr = k ⋅
⎛ I ⎞
2 OP
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ −1
c ⎜I ⎟
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟ ⎝ ref ⎠
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI
⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c⎟ ⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜I ⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞ b
⎟ ⎝ ref ⎠
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln ⎟
⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
(OP) 5-42 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IEC 255-3, St andard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s t/s
k=1
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K1A S8Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
OP 1
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K3A S8Z50K4A
P1784ENa
Figure 30: Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-43
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K5C S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
OP
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
Characteristic No. 7
P1785ENa
Figure 31: Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112

(OP) 5-44 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1 k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K8C S8Z50K9C
ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
OP 1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
Characteristic No. 10
P1786ENa
Figure 32: Tripping characteristics per ANSI
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50KBA S8Z50KCA
P1787ENa
Figure 33: Tripping characteristics for RI and RXIDG type inverse

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-45
1.4.3 Phase current stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x to detect when they exceed the set
thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” threshold is
active for the set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see “Activation of Dynamic Settings”);
the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function
issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase.
The P63x determines the highest of the three phase currents for further processing. As a
function of this current and of the set characteristic, the P63x will determine the tripping time.
Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum
independent of the magnitude of the current.
The phase current stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the
inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
Inrush
Restr Enab SGx
Iref,Ph
OP
SGx
Dynam.
Setts. Active Iref,Ph
dynamic SGx
Starting
Iref,Ph>
Phase Charac SGx

Phase Charac SGx
Kt Time Dial/
TMS SGx
Min. Trip
t. Ph SGx
Hold Time
Ph SGx
Release Ph SGx
Definite Time Release Ph
SGx
Block.
tIref,Ph> EXT
tIref,Ph>
Elapsed
Hold Time
Ph running
Memory Ph
Clear
Setting Inrush Iref,Ph Iref,Ph

Restr Enab SGx SGx dynamic SGx Phase Charac SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting Kt Time Min. Trip Hold Time Release Ph

Dial/TMS SGx t. Ph SGx Ph SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1788ENa
Figure 34: Phase current stage

(OP) 5-46 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.4.4 Negative sequence current stage

The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on
the formulas shown below. The phase sequence setting is taken into account.
A-B-C (standard phase rotation):
Ineg =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
A-C-B (reverse phase rotation):
Ineg =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds
are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see “Activation of Dynamic
Settings”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. The IDMT
protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is
exceeded. As a function of the negative-sequence current and of the set characteristic, the
OP P63x will determine the tripping time. Moreover, a minimum trip time can be set. The trip
time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current.
The negative-sequence stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by
the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-47
Inrush
Restr Enab SGx
Iref,I2
SGx
Dynam.
Setts. Active
Iref,I2
dynamic SGx
Starting
Iref,I2>
Phase
Rotation
I2 I2 Charac
SGx
I2 Charac SGx
Kt Time Dial/
TMS SGx
Min. Trip
t. I2 SGx
Release I2 SGx
Hold Time
I2 SGx
Definite Time
SGx
Release I2
OP
Block.
tIref,I2> EXT
tIref,I2>
Elapsed
I2/Iref,I2 Hold Time

I2 Runn.
Memory I2
Gen. Clear
Starting Mode SGx
Trip Sig.
tIref,I2
I2
Setting Inrush Iref,I2 Iref,I2 I2 Charac

Restr Enab SGx SGx dynamic SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting Kt Time Min. Trip Hold Time Release I2 Gen.

Dial/TMS SGx t. I2 SGx I2 SGx SGx Starting Mode SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1789ENa
Figure 35: Negative sequence current stage
1.4.5 Residual current stage

The residual current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds.
One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the
set hold time of the “dynamic settings” (see “Activation of Dynamic Settings”); the “normal”
threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a
starting signal if the residual current exceeds a value of 1.05 times the set reference current.
As a function of the set characteristic and of the residual current, the P63x will determine the
tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below
this minimum independent of the magnitude of the residual current.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal
input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can, depending on the setting, be blocked
automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
(OP) 5-48 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Block Tim.
St. IN SGx
Definite Time
Iref,N
SGx
Dynam.
Setts. Active
Iref,N
dynamic SGx
N Charac
SGx N Charac SGx
Kt Time Dial/
TMS SGx
Min. Trip
t. N SGx
OP N
Hold Time
SGx
Release N SGx
Definite Time Release N
SGx
Gen.
Starting Mode SGx
I2
Setting Block Tim. Iref,N Iref,N
St. IN SGx SGx dynamic SGx N Charac SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting Kt Time Min. Trip Hold Time Release N Gen.

Dial/TMS SGx t. N SGx N SGx SGx Starting Mode SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1790ENa
Figure 36: Residual current stage
1.4.6 Holding time

The setting for the holding time defines the period for the IDMT starting time to be stored
after the starting has dropped out. If the starting time returns while the hold time elapses,
the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum of the starting times reaches the
tripping time determined by the P63x then the appropriate message is issued. If the starting
time does not return while the hold time elapses then the memory storing the sum of the
starting times will, in accordance with the setting, be cleared either without delay or
according to the set characteristic. The phase current stage serves as an example to
illustrate the effect of the holding time in Figure 37.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-49
Starting
Iref,Ph>
Hold Time
Ph Running
Instantaneous
tIref,Ph>
Elapsed
Starting
Iref,Ph>
Hold Time
Ph Running
Instantaneous
OP
tIref,Ph>
Elapsed
Setting Hold Time

Ph SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1791ENa
Figure 37: Example demonstrating the effect of holding time on the phase current
stage
1.4.7 General starting

If 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase, a general starting decision
is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the negative-sequence and residual
current stage should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general
starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
(OP) 5-50 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 38: General starting
1.4.8 Counters of the IDMT protection function

The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
OP
Figure 39: Counters of the IDMT protection function
1.5 Thermal overload protection (THRM)

Function THRM1 is designed for the thermal overload protection of transformers. This
function is available in all devices of the P63x product family (P631, P632, P633 and P634).
A second function with identical setting options (THRM2) is implemented in the P633 and
P634.
For each of these two functions, the protected transformer end, the measuring input for
temperature acquisition and the tripping characteristics can be selected. The selection
options for the protected transformer end comprise ends a and b (for the P631 and P632),
ends a, b, and c (for the P633) or ends a, b, c and d (for the P634), respectively. For the
P633 and P634 there is the further option of selecting the virtual transformer end formed by
current summation over two user-selected transformer ends (see Figure 40).
Device P631 P632 P633 P634

Thermal overload THRM1 THRM1 THRM1, THRM2 THRM1, THRM2
protection functions
Protected transformer End a or b End a or b End a, b or c, End a, b, c or d,
end or the virtual end or the virtual end
With the P633 or P634, the THRM2 function can be assigned to a weaker transformer end or
to a combination of two weaker transformer ends (by assigning the virtual end) with an
appropriate choice of tripping characteristics for function THRM2.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-51
THRM1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the thermal overload protection
functions; function group THRM2 is equivalent.
Select
CT Input
OP
P1794ENa
Figure 40: Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection
1.5.1 Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection

Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
Figure 41: Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection

(OP) 5-52 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1846ENa
Figure 42: Thermal overload protection ready
1.5.2 Tripping characteristics

The maximum phase current IPh,max.y of the selected transformer end serves to track a
first-order thermal image according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters govern the
tripping time:
• The set thermal time constant (τ) of the protected object THRM1: Tim.const 1(heat)SGx
• The set tripping level Θtrip set at THRM1: Θtrip SGx

OP • The accumulated thermal load ΘP (the level of pre-heating)
• The updated measured coolant temperature Θc for the protected object
• The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θc,max set at THRM1: Max perm cool
tmpSGx
• The maximum permissible object temperature Θmax set at THRM1: Max perm obj
tmp.SGx
The object temperature is calculated from the current IPh,max.y and can be displayed at
THRM1: Object Temperat., TH1. The coolant temperature is either measured via the PT
100 input or via the 20 mA input or a default temperature value is used instead. This choice
is governed by the setting at THRM1: Select CT Ambient SGx. The menu point for the
display of the resulting coolant temperature is THRM1: Coolant Temp. TH1.
The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Θ P
t = τ ⋅ ln ⎝ Iref ⎠
2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θ c − Θ c,max ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Θ trip ⋅ ⎜1 − ⎟
⎜ Θ ⎟
⎝ Iref ⎠ ⎝ max − Θ c,max ⎠
Figure 43 shows the tripping characteristics for ΘP = 0 % and with identical settings for the
maximum permissible coolant temperature and the maximum permissible object
temperature.
The setting for the operating mode selects an ‘absolute’ or ‘relative’ replica. If the setting is
for Absolute Replica, the P63x will operate with a fixed trip threshold Θtrip of 100 %.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-53
OP
Figure 43: Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection
1.5.3 Coolant temperature acquisition

To permit coolant temperature acquisition, the analog I/O module Y must be fitted. If this
module is not available in the P63x then the setting THRM1: Coolant temp. SGx is used in
the calculation of the tripping time.
The setting THRM1: Blk for CTA Fail SGx defines whether the thermal overload protection
function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition.
Typically, ambient temperature, or top-oil temperature is termed as the "coolant".
(OP) 5-54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 44: Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition
1.5.4 Warning
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the set warning level
THRM1: Θ Alarm SGx{1><1}. Moreover, a pre-trip warning time can be defined. The time
difference between the warning time and the trip time is set at THRM1: Alarm pre-trip SGx.
The time remaining until the thermal overload protection function THRM1 will reach the
tripping threshold can be displayed at OL_DA: Pre-trip t. left THRM1.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the set
time constant THRM1: Tim.const 2(cool)SGx). The thermal replica may be reset either from
the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is
effective even when the thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload
protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-55
Iref Rating Tim. Const 1

SGx (heat)SGx
Start Tim. Const 2

Fact.OL_RC SGx (cool)SGx
SGx
SGx
CT Amb SGx
T> Alarm
Reset, % SGx
T> Trip
Reset, % SGx
Trip
Hysteresis SGx
CHECK
Pre-Trip
Alarm SGx
Alarm
OP
Setting Iref Rating Start Tim. Const Tim. Const

SGx Fact.OL_RC SGx 1 (heat)SGx 2 (cool)SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting T> Alarm T> Trip Trip Pre-Trip

SGx CT Amb SGx Reset, % SGx Reset, % SGx Hysteresis SGx Alarm SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1847ENa
Figure 45: Thermal overload protection
Figure 46: Thermal replica reset

(OP) 5-56 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.6 Under/overvoltage protection (V<>)

The time-voltage protection function is not available with the P631.
The two-stage voltage-time protection function of the P63x evaluates the fundamental of the
phase voltages.
1.6.1 Enabling or disabling V<> protection

V<> protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling
can be carried out separately for each setting group.
V<> protection is ready when it is enabled and measuring circuit monitoring has not detected
a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
Enable
SGx
OP
Setting Enable
SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1799ENa
Figure 47: Enabling or disabling V<> protection
1.6.2 Voltage monitoring

The P63x checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds.
The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured
binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then it is
recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be
present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to
close the circuit breaker again.
Furthermore, voltage-time protection provides a window function for each timer stage. The
windows are defined by the setting V<>: Vmin> SGx as lower threshold for both timer
stages and by the set operate value V< or V<< of the relevant timer stage and setting group
as upper threshold. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this
provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching
operations.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-57
Hyst. V<> tV>

Meas. SGx SGx
V>
SGx
Hyst. V<>
Meas. SGx
tV>>
SGx
V>>
SGx
Setting
SG 1
SGx
V>
SGx
tV>
SGx
V>>
SGx
tV>> Hyst. V<>
Meas. SGx
OP
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1800ENa
Figure 48: Overvoltage monitoring

(OP) 5-58 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Hyst. V<>
Meas. SGx V< tV<
SGx SGx
tV<<
SGx
V<<
SGx
OP
Vmin>
SGx
tTransient
SGx
Setting V< tV< Vmin>

SGx SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting V<< tV<< tTransient Hyst. V<>

SGx SGx SGx Meas. SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1801ENa
Figure 49: Undervoltage monitoring
1.7 Frequency potection (f<>)

The over/underfrequency protection function is not available with the P631.
The P63x checks the voltage to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The
frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the
voltage. The over/underfrequency protection function has four stages. The first stage will
serve as an example to illustrate the operation of over/underfrequency protection.
1.7.1 Enabling or disabling frequency protection

Over/underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-59
Enable
SGx
Setting Enable
SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1802ENa
Figure 50: Enabling or disabling frequency protection
1.7.2 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time

OP
Over/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude.
Over/underfrequency protection will be blocked immediately if the measuring voltage falls
below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stages operating as a consequence of brief frequency
fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions need to be satisfied for the duration of the set evaluation time for a signal to be
issued.
P1803ENa
Figure 51: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting

(OP) 5-60 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.7.3 Operating modes of frequency protection

For each stage of the over/underfrequency protection function, the user can select between
the following operating modes:
• Frequency monitoring
• Frequency monitoring combined with instantaneous frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
• Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (Δf/Δt)
1.7.4 Frequency monitoring

Depending on the setting, the P63x checks the frequency to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is
set, the P63x checks whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate
threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
1.7.5 Frequency monitoring with instantaneous rate of change (df/dt) monitoring

In this operating mode of the over/underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
additionally monitored for attaining the set frequency gradient (as well as for exceeding or
OP falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started.
The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
1.7.6 Frequency monitoring with average rate of change (Δf/Δt) monitoring

The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may
vary in time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the
frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode, frequency monitoring must be set to “underfrequency monitoring”.
Monitoring of the mean value of the frequency gradient starts concurrently with
underfrequency pick-up. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within the set time Δt
then the Δf/Δt monitoring function operates without delay and generates a trip signal. If a
frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function then the
Δf/Δt monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops
out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-61
P1804ENa OP
Figure 52: Operation of frequency monitoring with average rate of change (Δf/Δt)
monitoring
(OP) 5-62 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Oper.
mode f1 SGx
f1
SGx
Frequency fn
tf1
SGx
df1/dt
SGx
OP
CHECK
Delta f1
SGx
Delta t1
SGx
Setting Oper. mode f1 f1 df1/dt Delta f1 Delta t1 tf1

SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1805ENa
Figure 53: First stage of the frequency protection function
1.8 Overfluxing protection (V/f)

The overfluxing protection function detects an inadmissibly high flux level in the iron core of
transformers as caused by a voltage increase and/or a frequency decrease.
1.8.1 Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection

The overfluxing protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-63
Figure 54: Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function
1.8.2 Conditioning the measured variable

OP
Overfluxing protection evaluates the ratio V/f of voltage to frequency referred to nominal
values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the iron core of a transformer. The
overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless the voltage and frequency are within the
limits for admissible values.
P1849ENa
Figure 55: Conditioning the measured variable
1.8.3 Fixed-time warning stage

The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the
overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this
stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
(OP) 5-64 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 56: Warning stage

OP 1.8.4 Fixed-time tripping stage
overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this
stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
Figure 57: Fixed-time tripping stage
1.8.5 Variable-time tripping stage

overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, the P63x determines the tripping time as
a function of the overfluxing value and the set characteristic.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-65
The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing values and
associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolation. The
setting of the characteristic is checked for plausibility - it must have a continuous falling
profile, with no rising points. For values of V/f > 1.6, the tripping time is limited to the value
set for
V/f = 1.6. Figure 58 shows the characteristic as calculated with the P63x default values.
100
t/s 10
OP
1
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
V/f P1852ENa
Figure 58: Tripping characteristic for default settings

After a start, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. If the starting drops out,
the buffer memory will be discharged. The discharge gradient is determined by the set
cooling time. If there is another starting, the buffer memory will be recharged. If the
accumulated starting time reaches the tripping time determined by the P63x then the trip
signal is issued. Figure 59 shows the buffer content during an interrupted starting. In case
A, the tripping time determined by the P63x is not reached by the accumulated starting time.
In case B, on the other hand, a trip signal results.
(OP) 5-66 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Setting SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1853ENa
Figure 59: Change of buffer content during an interrupted starting

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-67
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
OP
SGx
SGx
Setting
SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx

SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
Setting
SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx
SG 1
SG 2
SG 3
SG 4
P1854ENa
Figure 60: Variable-time tripping stage

(OP) 5-68 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1855ENa
Figure 61: Resetting of the V/f replica
1.9 Broken conductor detection (BC_)

The broken conductor detection function of the P63x can detect faults in the primary
conductors. The broken conductor detection functions BC_1, BC_2, BC_3 and BC_4 are
permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored by the P63x. Broken Conductor 1
will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the BC_x protection functions.
Function groups BC_2 to BC_4 are equivalent.
OP 1.9.1 Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection

The broken conductor detection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
Figure 62: Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection
1.9.2 Broken conductor detection

The ratio of negative to positive-sequence current is used as the criterion for broken
conductor detection. The broken conductor detection function is triggered if the set ratio
I2/I1 is exceeded and either the negative or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 In.
After the set operate delay period has elapsed, a warning signal is issued.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-69
BC_1 : Blocking EXT

c
[ 036 213]
BC_1 : Enabled
c
[ 036 194]
MAIN: Phase sequence

[ 010 049]
IA,a >1
IB,a 2 > 0, 02 Inom
IC,a
1 > 0, 02 Inom
BC_1 : 2/ 1 > SGx BC_1: Operate delay SGx
c c
[ * ] [ * ]
5s 0
BC_1 : CT Fail Alarm
2 1
[ 036 198]
CHECK : CT Fail Alarm

BC_1 : 2/ 1 BC_1 : Operate [ 091 026]
* Setting
SGx delay SGx
SG 1 081 042 081 046
SG 2 082 042 082 046 BC_1 : Starting
SG 3 083 042 083 046 [ 036 212]
SG 4 084 042 084 046
P1857ENa
Figure 63: Broken conductor detection for end a
OP
(OP) 5-70 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2. OPERATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following section details the operation of the non-protection functions of the P63x.
2.1 Current transformer supervision (CTS)

A new current transformer supervision method has been implemented, which is able to
prevent the differential protection from false tripping in case of a failure in the secondary
circuit of the CT.
Note: CTS function requires the new processor board with DSP
coprocessor. This is an order option.
2.1.1 Enabling or disabling CTS

The CT supervision can be disabled or enabled separately for each setting group.
CTS : General enable USER

[ 031 085 ]
0
CTS : Enabled
1 [ 036 080]
&
0 : No
1 : Yes
OP
CTS : Enable SGx
[ * ]
0 : No
1 : Yes y GROUP : SG y active * Setting CTS : Enable SGx
1 036 090 SG 1 001 118
2 036 091 SG 2 001 119
3 036 092 SG 3 001 120
GROUP : SG y active 4 036 093 SG 4 001 121
[ * ]
P1858ENa
Figure 64: Enabling or disabling CTS
2.1.2 CTS blocked

CT supervision will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
• The protection is disabled (off)
• The CTS function is not enabled
• An external blocking signal is present
• The general trip signal is present
• Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-71
Figure 65: CTS blocking
2.1.3 Operating conditions

CTS monitors the positive and negative sequence currents of all ends (2 …4, depending on
the device type). A faulty CT is determined if the following conditions are present at the
same time:
• The positive sequence current in at least two ends exceeds the set release threshold OP
I1>. This also means that CTS can only operate if minimum load current of the
protected object is present
• On exactly one end a high set ratio of negative to positive sequence current I2/I1>> is
exceeded
• On all other ends the ratio of negative to positive sequence current is less than a low set
value I2/I1> or no significant current is present (i.e. positive sequence current is below
the release threshold I1>)
Under this condition a fault in the CT secondaries of the end with high negative sequence
current is present.
Because of evaluating negative sequence currents only unsymmetrical CT failures can be
determined. In practice this is not a significant problem as the probability of symmetrical
three-phase failures is very low.
Figure 66: Current evaluation per end (y = a,b,c,d)

(OP) 5-72 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 67: CTS operating condition
2.1.4 Signaling and indication

CT failure condition signaling is provided with overall signals as well as with detail signals
per end. Signaling can be delayed by a settable delay timer to prevent signaling under
transient system conditions. The signals may be latched once the failure condition has been
present for a set minimum time, e.g. to obtain a stable signaling and permanently higher
restraint of differential protection in case of intermittent failures. Signals for each end can be
used to selectively block the restricted earth fault (REF) protection associated to that end.
Blocking or restraining of differential protection functions is based on the instantaneous
signals:
• As soon as a CTS condition is detected (036.203 CTS: Idiff>(CTS) Active is

present), the function will raise the low set threshold of the differential protection to the
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) setting:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-73
Figure 68: Modification of differential characteristic during CTS condition

The setting of this value determines the operating mode of the CTS:
− Only signaling: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx = DIFF: Idiff> SGx. Differential

protection remains unrestricted. Naturally the risk of unwanted tripping under load
current is present. OP
− Restricted operation: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx is set to exceed the maximum load
current. This provides secure operation of differential protection even during CT failure.
Differential protection will not falsely trip under any load condition, but remains
operational for any internal short-circuit with fault current above the maximum load
current.
− Blocking: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx = DIFF: Idiff>> SGx. Differential protection

is blocked during CT failure for all currents under normal operation condition (including
inrush currents).
With the signals CTS: Alarm end y, available for each end y, the restricted earth fault
protection of this end can be blocked, if setting is (REF_n: CTS effective = ‘Yes’, where
REF_n is associated to end y).
2.1.5 Resetting
Latched CTS signals can be reset via command from the HMI or any communication
interface or via an opto-input signal. They are also reset by executing the general reset
command.
(OP) 5-74 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP Figure 69: Overall signaling of CTS
Figure 70: Per end signaling of CTS
2.2 DC and temperature monitoring (LIMIT)

The limit value monitoring function LIMIT supervises the measured variables subject to data
acquisition in the analog measured data input.
2.2.1 Enabling or disabling DC and temperature monitoring

The limit value monitoring function LIMIT can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel.
2.2.2 Monitoring the linearized DC values

The direct current that is linearized by analog measured data input is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the
thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-75
OP
Figure 71: Monitoring the linearized DC values
2.2.3 Monitoring the measured temperature value

The temperature that is measured by the P63x using a resistance thermometer is monitored
by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls
below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
(OP) 5-76 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
RTDmA:
OP
P1807ENa
Figure 72: Monitoring the measured temperature value
2.3 Phase current monitoring (LIM_)

Each of the limit value monitoring functions LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3 is designed for the
monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected transformer
end.
2.3.1 Enabling or disabling phase current monitoring

The limit value monitoring functions LIM_n can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel.
2.3.2 Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents

In the P631 and P632, two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are
implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends.
In the P633 and the P634, three limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3)
are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for
the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current
For each limit value monitoring function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user.
The function will then monitor the minimum and maximum phase currents for the selection.
If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase
current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the LIM_n protection functions in
the following figures.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-77
OP
Figure 73: Selection of the measured variables for phase current monitoring (LIM_1
shown)
(OP) 5-78 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
P1809ENa
Figure 74: Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current for the selected
transformer end
2.4 Programmable logic (LOGIC)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a
framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P63x can be linked by logical ‘OR’ or ‘AND’ operations or by additional
‘NOT’ operations by setting LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. N, where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean
equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the
operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the
signals generated by the P63x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set from
the local control panel, the binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces.
Intervention in the logical operations through the binary signal inputs can occur in different
ways. The binary input signals LOGIC: Input n EXT (n = 1 to 40) have an updating function,
whereas the input signals LOGIC: Set n EXT (n = 1 to 8) are stored. The logic can only be
controlled from the binary signal inputs that are configured for LOGIC: Set n EXT if the
corresponding reset input (LOGIC: Reset n EXT) has also been configured for a binary
signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is interpreted
as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible
(such as when they both have a logic value of ‘1’), then the last plausible state remains
stored in memory.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-79
Fct.
U xxx Assign
P1810ENa OP
Figure 75: Control of logic operations via settings or stored input signals
The signal LOGIC: Trigger n is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to be
issued.
(OP) 5-80 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
INPUT 40
034 109
OP PickUp & Reset

Delay
Pulse Delayed
PickUp
PickUp & Rst.
Retrig
Delayed Pulse
Retrig
Minimum Dwell
P1811ENa
Figure 76: Setting options for programmable logic (output 1 shown)

The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another
higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of interlinked Boolean
equations.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage that has two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a freely
configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the
Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 77 to 81
show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-81
Figure 77: Operating mode 1: pickup & reset delay
OP
Figure 78: Operating mode 2: pulse delayed pickup
P1814ENa
Figure 79: Operating mode 3: pickup & rst.retrig

(OP) 5-82 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 80: Operating mode 4: delayed pulse retrig
OP
P1816ENa
Figure 81: Operating mode 5: minimum dwell

Through appropriate configuration it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal
to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the same
effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-83
Fct.
U xxx Assign
OP
Fct.
U xxx Assign
P1817ENa
Figure 82: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean logic equations
2.5 Local control panel (HMI)

The P63x offers Measured Value Panels which display the measured values relevant at a
given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel, provided that measured values
have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the display will
automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault,
the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
(OP) 5-84 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.5.1 Operation panel

The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at least
one measured value has been configured.
From the measured operating data, values may be selected via an 'm out of n' setting for
display on the Operation Panel. If more measured values are selected for display than the
HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at
intervals defined by the setting at HMI: Panel Hold-Time or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
OP
Figure 83: Operation panel
2.5.2 Fault panel

The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel remains on display
until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel by
setting an ‘m out of n’ setting. If more measured values are selected for display than the
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-85
Figure 84: Fault panel
2.5.3 Overload panel

The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is
an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Overload
Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this case the
display switches to the Fault Panel. OP
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by
setting an ‘m out of n’ setting. If more measured values are selected for display than the
Figure 85: Overload panel
2.6 Local front port communication (PC)

Local front port communication between the device P63x and a PC is through the PC
EIA(RS)232 interface. In order for data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function,
several settings must be made in the P63x.
The S&R-103 Operating Program within MiCOM S1 is available as an accessory for P63x
control.
(OP) 5-86 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 86: PC interface settings
2.7 Rear port serial communication (COMM1)

Depending on the design version of communication module A (see Technical Data), several
interface protocols are available. The protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 is supported for all
versions. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P63x:
• IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, ’first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW/ZVEI
Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level
2,”February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
• IEC 870-5-101, “Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols -

Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,”first edition 1995-11
• ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA Energietechnik GmbH
• MODBUS
• DNP3.0
• Courier (via EIA(RS)485, not K-Bus)

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
The communication interface can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a
signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-87
OP
P1866ENa
Figure 87: Selecting the serial protocol

(OP) 5-88 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 88: Settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-89
OP
P1868ENa
Figure 89: Settings for the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol

(OP) 5-90 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 90: Settings for the ILS_C protocol

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-91
P1870ENa
OP
Figure 91: Settings for the MODBUS protocol
Figure 92: Settings for the DNP3.0 protocol

(OP) 5-92 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 93: Settings for the Courier protocol
2.7.1 Checking spontaneous signaling

For interface protocols per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C, there is the option of
selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control station
as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control panel.
Figure 94: Checking spontaneous signaling

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-93
2.8 2nd rear port serial communication (COMM2)

"Logical" communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
OP
P1874ENa
Figure 95: Settings for COMM2
2.8.1 Checking spontaneous signaling

There is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal
to the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control
panel.
(OP) 5-94 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 96: Checking spontaneous signaling
2.9 IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of the
P63x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. It should
be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year).
Using this information and the year set at the P63x, the P63x calculates the current date
(DD.MM.YY).
2.9.1 Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization

The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
2.9.2 Ready to synchronize

If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P63x checks the received signal
for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P63x. If the P63x does not receive a
correct signal after an extended delay, synchronization will no longer be ready.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-95
Figure 97: Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization
2.10 Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs (INP)

The P63x has optical coupler inputs for the processing of binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the
configuration of the binary signal inputs. The trigger signal must persist for at least 30 ms in
order to be recognized by the P63x.
OP
2.10.1 Configuration of the opto inputs
To each binary signal input, a function can be assigned by configuration. The same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thereby, a function can be activated from several
control points with differing signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked “EXT” in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
2.10.2 Operating mode of the opto inputs

For each binary signal input, the operating mode can be defined by the user. The user can
specify whether the presence (active “high” mode) or the absence (active “low” mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic “1” signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input - “low” or “high” - is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
signal input.
(OP) 5-96 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 98: Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs
OP 2.11 Temperature and DC monitoring inputs (RTDmA)

The P63x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed to
the P63x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for connection of a
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDClin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds.
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and monitored
by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds.
2.11.1 Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs

The measured data input function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
P1823ENa
Figure 99: Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-97
2.11.2 Direct current inputs

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is
directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured - the temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured
quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged - provided that the measured
data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, it may be necessary for certain applications to
limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range that have a higher or
lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair RTDmA: IDC x and RTDmA: IDClin x, the user
specifies which input current (IDC) will correspond to the current that is monitored by the limit
value monitoring function (IDC,lin). The points determined in this way, which are called
‘interpolation points’, are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDClin diagram. In order to
implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are
also used as limiting values (Figure 100). Up to 20 interpolation points are available for
implementing a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising curve sense is
allowed, no peaks. If the setting differs, the signal CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC will be
generated.
OP
Figure 100: Example of the conversion of a 4-10mA input current to 0-20mA

monitored current, IDC,lin
(OP) 5-98 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IDClin/IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDClin20 0.7
0.6
IDClin4 0.5
0.4
IDClin3 0.3
IDClin2 0.2
IDClin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 IDC/IDC,nom
OP IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20
Enable IDC p.u.
P1825ENa
Figure 101: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic

with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a dotted line)
2.11.3 Zero suppression

Zero suppression is defined by setting RTDmA: Enable IDC p.u. If the direct current does
not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current IDClin will be
displayed as having a value of ‘0’.
2.11.4 Open circuit and overload monitoring

The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold, the signal RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp. is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading. If it
exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input is issued.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-99
RTDmA: RTDmA: RTDmA:
RTDmA:
OP
CHECK:
RTDmA:
CHECK:
RTDmA:
CHECK:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
P1826ENa
Figure 102: Analog DC input

Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the linearized
values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and are available
for further processing by protection functions.
(OP) 5-100 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 103: Scaling of the linearized measured value
2.11.5 Input for connection of a RTD

This input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping
curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in IEC 751. If the PT 100 is
connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required.
If there is an open measuring circuit due to wire breakage, the signal RTDmA: PT100 Faulty
is generated.
OP
Figure 104: Temperature measurement using a RTD
2.12 Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays (OUTP)
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signals to be issued
are defined by configuration.
2.12.1 Configuration of the output relays

One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.
2.12.2 Operating mode of the output relays

The user can set an operating mode for each output relay. The operating mode determines
whether the output relay will operate in a “Follower” mode or “Inverted” mode and whether it
will operate in latching mode.
Depending on the I/O module under consideration, the output relays have either make
contacts, changeover contacts or both (see the Terminal Connection Diagrams in the
Installation - IN section). For relays with make contacts, the “Follower” mode corresponds to
normally-open operation. The “Inverted” mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-101
inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with
changeover contacts, these more common descriptions are not applicable.
Latching is disabled manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input either at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new
system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected.
2.12.3 Blocking the output relays

The P63x offers the option of blocking all output relays from the local control panel or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked if
the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs.
In these cases, the relays are treated in keeping with their set operating mode. Relays in
“Inverted” mode are triggered, those in “Follower” mode are not.
This does not apply to relays with the signals CHECK: Alarm (Relay) or MAIN:
Blocked/Faulty assigned to them. Thereby the blocking is signaled correctly. (The signal
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty is coupled to the activation of the LED labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE'.)
If, on the other hand, the self-monitoring function detects a serious hardware fault (see
Troubleshooting - TS for signals leading to protection blocking), all output relays are reset
irrespective of the set operating mode or signal assignment.
OP
(OP) 5-102 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
USER Outp
rel Block
CHECK:
Follower
Follower Latching
Follower Rst on Flt
Follower Rst onStart
Inverted
OP Inverted Latching
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
P1828ENa
Figure 105: Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays
2.12.4 Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via the local control
panel. Triggering persists while the set hold time is running.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-103
P1829ENa
Figure 106: Testing the output relays
2.13 Analog output channel (mA_OP) OP

Output of the measured fault or earth fault data provided by the P63x can be in BCD-coded
form through output relays or in analog form as direct current. Output as direct current can
only occur if the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y. BCD-coded output, however,
is possible, regardless of whether the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y or not.
2.13.1 Enabling or disabling the analog output channel function

The measured data output function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1830ENa
Figure 107: Enabling or disabling the analog output channel
2.13.2 Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input

Measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the
function mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT has been configured. If the function mA_OP: Outp.
Enabled EXT has not been configured for a binary signal input, then measured data output is
always enabled.
(OP) 5-104 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 108: Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input
2.13.3 Resetting the analog output channel function

BCD-coded or analog output of measured data is terminated while the hold time elapses if
one of the following conditions is met:
• The mA_OP function is reset from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input
• There is a general reset
OP • The LED indicators have been reset
Figure 109: Resetting the analog output channel function
2.13.4 BCD-coded measured data output

The user can select a measured value for output in BCD-coded form through output relays.
The selected measured value is output in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold
time (mA_OP: Hold Time Output BCD. If the selected variable was not measured, then
there is no output of a measured value.
2.13.5 Output of measured event values

If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value
is immediately output.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-105
2.13.6 Output of measured operating values

The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time
has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has
been set to ‘blocked’, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until
the measured data output function is reset.
2.13.7 Scaling
The resolution for measured data output, is defined by setting the scaling factor. The scaling
factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the maximum measured
value to be output. If this should occur, however, or if the measured value is outside the
acceptable measuring range, then the value for ‘Overflow’ (all relays triggered) is
transmitted.
Mx,max
Mx,scal =
scaling factor
Where:
Mx,scal
: Scaled measured value
Mx,max
: Maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
OP
(OP) 5-106 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP: mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
OP
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1833ENa
Figure 110: BCD-coded measured data output
2.13.8 Analog measured data output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measured values available in the P63x for output in the form
of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for
specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. The
direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time
(mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-x). If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no
output of a measured value.
2.13.9 Output of measured event values

If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value
is immediately output.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-107
2.13.10 Output of measured operating values

The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time
has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has
been set to ‘blocked’, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until
the measured data output function is reset.
2.13.11 Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels

The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for mA_OP: Value A-x output, since
otherwise the output channels remain short-circuited (see terminal connection diagrams).
2.13.12 Scaling
The minimum and maximum values to be transmitted for the selected measured value and
one additional value for the knee point must be scaled to the range limit value of the
measured value. By setting the following parameters the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic like the one shown in Figure 111.
• mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-x
• mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-x
• mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-x
• mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-x OP

• mA_OP: AnOut Knee point A-x
• mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-x

The scaled values that need to be set can be calculated using the following formulas:
Formulas Example
Key to the Formulas:
Mx,RL Range limit value of selected Let voltage V12 be selected as the
: measured value measured value to be transmitted. Let the
measuring range be 0 to 1.5 Vn.
Mx,min Minimum value to be
: transmitted for selected When Vn = 100 V, the range limit value in
measured value the assumed example is 150 V.
Mx,knee Knee point value to be Range to be transmitted:
: transmitted for selected 0.02 to 1 Vn = 2 to 100 V
measured value
Knee point:
M x,max Maximum value to be 0.1 Vn = 10 V
: transmitted for selected
measured value
Mx,scal,min Scaled minimum value
:
M x,scal,knee Scaled knee point value
:
M x,scal,max Scaled maximum value
:
M x,min 2V
M x,scal,min = M x,scal,min = = 0.013
M x,RL 150 V
M x,knee 10 V
M x,scal,knee = M x,scal,knee = = 0.067
M x,RL 150 V
(OP) 5-108 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Formulas Example
M x,max 100 V
M x,scal,max = M x,scal,max = = 0.67
M x,RL 150 V
By setting mA_OP: AnOut Min. val A-x, the user can specify the output current that will be
output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be
transmitted. The setting at mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-x defines the output current that is
output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee point, the
user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When making this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising-rising, or falling-falling curve sense is
allowed (no peaks or vee shapes). If the wrong setting is entered, the signal CHECK: Invalid
Scaling A-x will be generated.
Note: After this setting, the new characteristics will be checked and
implemented after enabling at MAIN: Protection Enabled.
OP
Figure 111: Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-109
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
OP
CHECK:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1878ENa
Figure 112: Analog measured data output
2.13.13 Output of external measured data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled for 0-100%, can be written to
the following parameters of the P63x by way of the communications interface:
• mA_OP: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P63x either in the form of BCD-coded
data or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD-coded measured data
output function or the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured
accordingly.
(OP) 5-110 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.14 Configuration and operating mode of the LED’s (LED)

The P63x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Five of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to functions. The other LED indicators are freely
configurable. (However, LED indicator H4 has a default setting of MAIN: Gen Trip Signal
and is labeled "Trip".).
2.14.1 Configuration of the LED’s

To each of the freely configurable LED indicators, a binary signal can be assigned. The
same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators by configuration.
2.14.2 Operating mode of the LED’s

The user can set an operating mode for each LED indicator, with the exception of the first
one, that determines whether the LED indicator operates in a following arrangement or
inverted arrangement and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching is disabled either
manually from the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary signal input
(see Main Functions of the P63x), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance,
depending on the operating mode selected.
OP
Figure 113: Configuration and operating mode of the LED’s
2.15 General functions of the P63x (MAIN)
2.15.1 Conditioning of the measured variables

The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P63x. Furthermore,
there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The measured variables are,
electrically isolated, converted to normalized electronics levels. The analog quantities are
digitized and are thus available for further processing. Depending on the design version, the
P63x has the following measuring inputs:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-111
P631:
• Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of
the transformer
P632:
• Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of
the transformer
• Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see Figure 115 and
116), or for connection as high impedance REF
• One voltage input

P633 and P634:
• Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for three (P633)
or four (P634) ends of the transformer
• Current inputs for up to three neutral-point-to-earth connections (see Figure 114) or for
looping into the earth connections of the phase current transformers, or for connection as
high impedance REF
• One voltage input
OP
(OP) 5-112 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 114: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing connection of
the fourth CT set to the transformers of the star point earth connection
Note: "Dot" convention for winding polarities shown. When using P1-P2,
S1-S2 standard notation.
• Dot on CT primary signifies P1 terminal
• Dot on CT secondary signifies S1 terminal
• Dot on VT primary signifies AN, BN, CN, YN polarity
• Dot on VT secondary signifies an, bn, cn, yn polarity

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-113
OP
Figure 115: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual
connection input to earth fault CT, Part 1 of 2
(OP) 5-114 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
CT Orientation In Device,
Iph, b end b
CT Orientation
IY, b
Reversed
OP
Iph, c end c
CT Orientation
IY, c
Reversed
Iph, d end d
Reversed
P1882ENa
Figure 116: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual
connection input to earth fault CT, Part 2 of 2
2.15.2 Selection of the residual current measurement

For protection functions of the P632, P633 and P634 monitoring the residual current, the
user can select whether the device is to use the current calculated from the three phase
currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer.
Moreover, the P633 and P634 offer the option of forming the sum of the phase currents or of
the residual currents for two or three ends of the transformer.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-115
OP
Figure 117: Evaluation of residual current
2.15.3 Phase reversal logic

In pumped storage applications, it is common practice to swap two phases to facilitate the
pumping operation. P63x transformer differential devices provide the possibilty to maintain
correct operation of all protection functions even when the phase reversal switch is inside the
protected zone.
The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between physical
transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped.
The parameters are included in function group 'MAIN' because phase reversal affects not
only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also the negative sequence elements of
Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent protection functions (IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as
Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) and Broken Conductor functions (BC_x).
Using setting groups readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any control interface
(HMI, PC, COMMx) or via binary inputs.
(OP) 5-116 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 118: Internal current summation
2.15.4 Operating data measurement

The P63x has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured by the P63x during normal power system operation; quantities derived
from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured values, set
lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the
value not measured is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed:
• Phase currents of all three phases of all four ends of the transformer
• Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
• Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer
• Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-117
• Current IN calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end of
the transformer
• Current IY measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
• Phase currents of all three phases of the virtual end of the transformer. The virtual end
is formed by adding the corresponding currents of two transformer ends selected by the
user at MAIN: Current Summation
• Maximum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer
• Minimum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer
• Current IN of the virtual end of the transformer
• Voltage
• Frequency
• Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer
• Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
• Angle between calculated IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general starting
state occurs or if the self-monitoring (CHECK) function detects a hardware fault.
OP
2.15.5 Measured current values
The measured values for the current are displayed both as quantities referred to the nominal
current of the P63x and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary values, the
primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P63x needs to be set.
(OP) 5-118 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Minimum Iph
Meas’mt
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph pu
Thermal peakz
Iph pu
Thermal dem. z
Current Imin,
z p.u.
In CT.
Prim., end z In CT.
Prim., end z
Time Const Iph, Max now,

Iph Dem. z prim
Reset Iph, Iph Therm

Max Demand Dem z prim
Iph Therm
pk z prim
Current Imin,
z prim
OP
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph, Max now,

z prim
In CT.
Prim., end z
Iph pu
Thermal peakz
Iph pu
Thermal dem. z
Iph Therm
Dem z prim
Iph Therm
pk z prim
Current Imin,
z p.u.
Current Imin,
z prim
P1885ENa
Figure 119: Measured operating data for phase currents, ends a to d
2.15.6 Delayed maximum phase current display (thermal ammeter)

The P63x offers the option of delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents. The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the
maximum phase current IPh,max (see upper curve in Figure 120). At MAIN: Time Const Iph
Dem. the user can set the time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will
have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IPh,max.
2.15.7 Stored maximum phase current display (thermal max. demand)

The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 120). At MAIN: Reset IPh,Max Demand the user can set
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-119
the stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase
current (see lower curve in Figure 120).
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph pu
Thermal dem. z
Time Const Time Const

Iph Dem. Iph Dem.
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph pu
Thermal peakz

Iph Dem. Iph Dem.
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph pu
Thermal peakz OP

Iph Dem. Iph Dem.
Reset Iph,
Max Demand
Curr Iph,
Max now, zpu
Iph pu
Thermal peakz
Iph pu
Thermal dem. z
P1886ENa
Figure 120: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
(OP) 5-120 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 121: Measured operating data for residual currents, ends a to c
Figure 122: Measured operating data for residual current, end d (P634 only)
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-121
OP
Figure 123: Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current
for the virtual winding (formed by current summation, P633 and P634
only)
2.15.8 Measured voltage value

The measured voltage value is displayed both as quantity referred to the nominal voltage of
the P63x and as primary quantity. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal
voltage of the transformer connected to the P63x needs to be set.
Minimum
V Meas’mt
Vn VT. Sec.
Vn V.T. prim.
P1890ENa
Figure 124: Measured voltage value
2.15.9 Frequency
The P63x determines the frequency from the voltage. The voltage needs to exceed a
minimum threshold of 0.65 Vn in order for the frequency to be determined.
(OP) 5-122 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 125: Frequency measurement
2.15.10 Angle determination

The P63x determines the angle between the following currents if the associated currents
exceed the lower threshold of 0.033 In:
• Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer
• Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
• Angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at the
OP transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) for each end of the transformer
Figure 126: Determination of the angle between the phase currents

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-123
OP
Figure 127: Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the
transformer ends
(OP) 5-124 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 128: Determination of the angle between the calculated residual current and
the current measured at transformer - Tx4
2.15.11 Configuring and enabling the protection functions

By including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all
others, the user creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Settings, signals
and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control
panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main
functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled.
2.15.12 Canceling a protection function

The following conditions have to be met before a protection function can be canceled:
• The protection function must be disabled
• None of the functions of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to a

binary input
• None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or to
an LED indicator
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Settings/Configuration branch of the
menu tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be disabled. If you wish to
disable the LIMIT function group, for example, access the setting LIMIT: Limit Thresholds I<>
and set its value to Disabled. Should you wish to re-include the function group in the device
configuration, set the value to Enabled. The assignment of a setting, a signal or a measured
value to a protection function is defined by a function group descriptor such as ‘LIMIT’.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-125
2.15.13 Disabling and enabling the protection function

Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a function
setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary
signal inputs if the MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT and MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT functions
are both configured. When only one or neither of the two functions is configured, this is
interpreted as ‘Protection externally enabled’. If the triggering signals of the binary signal
inputs are implausible, as for example when they both have a logic value of ‘1’, then the last
plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note: If the protection device is disabled via the binary signal input
configured to MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT there will be no MAIN:
Blocked/Faulty signal.
OP
Figure 129: Enabling or disabling protection
2.15.14 Activation of dynamic settings

For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold
time to other settings, the "dynamic settings", through an appropriately configured binary
signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, the switching is effective while the binary signal
input is being triggered.
Figure 130: Activation of dynamic settings
2.15.15 Multiple blocking

Four multiple blockings may be defined via ‘m out of n’ settings. Thereby the functions
defined by the selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
(OP) 5-126 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
P1897ENa
Figure 131: Multiple blocking
2.15.16 Blocked/faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by a steady light from yellow
LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and also by a signal through the output relay
configured for MAIN: Blocked/Faulty. In addition, the user can select the functions that will
produce the MAIN: Blocked/Faulty signal by setting an ‘m out of n’ setting.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-127
CHECK:
OUTP: USER Outp

Rel Block
[ 021 014 ]
P1898ENa
Figure 132: ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal
2.15.17 Starting signals and starting logic

The trip signals of differential protection and restricted earth fault protection plus the general
startings of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection are combined into one
common general starting.
OP
Starting
[ 041 106 ]
P1899ENa
Figure 133: P63x general start signals

The starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Figure 134: Counter of general start signals

(OP) 5-128 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Trip command
The P63x has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by setting
an ‘m out of n’ setting independently for each of the four trip commands. The minimum trip
command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for
the signal are satisfied.
Manual trip command
A manual trip command may be issued via the local control panel or a signal input
configured accordingly. It is not executed, however, unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip.
Latching of the trip commands
For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate setting
whether it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip command
persists until it is reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary
signal.
Blocking of the trip commands
The trip commands may be blocked via the integrated local control panel or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The blocking is effective for all four trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by the blocking. If the trip commands are
blocked this is indicated by a steady light at yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control
panel and by an output relay configured to ‘Blocked/Faulty’.
OP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-129
tDWELL Trip
Cmd y
OP
tDWELL Trip
Cmd y
P1901ENa
Figure 135: Formation of the trip commands

The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
(OP) 5-130 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1902ENa
Figure 136: Counter of the trip commands
2.15.18 Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels

OP Optionally, there are one or two communication channels available, depending on the design
version of communication module A. The "logical" communication interfaces COMM1 and
COMM2 can be assigned to these physical communication channels.
If "logical" communication interface COMM1 is assigned to communication channel 2, then
this means that the settings for "logical" communication interface 2 (COMM2) will
automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communication with the P63x via
communication channel 2 is only possible when the PC interface is inactive. As soon as
communication occurs through the PC interface, communication channel 2 is "dead".
Channel 2 will then be re-enabled once the PC interface timeout has elapsed.
Figure 137: Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical

communication channels
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-131
2.15.19 Time tag and clock synchronization

The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the event
memories are date-and time-tagged. For correct tagging, date and time need to be set at
the P63x.
The device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock to an external master
clock:
• Time-synchronization command via communication interfaces (COMM1, COMM2/PC)
• IRIG-B signal (IRIGB)
• Minute impulse via binary input (MAIN)

Prior to -606, these interfaces were of equal priority, i.e. clock synchronization was done
irrespective of the source. As long as all sources (communication master, IRIG-B and
minute impulse signal sources) are at the same time, no conflicts have to be taken into
account. But if the sources are at different times, unwanted step changes of the internal
clock can occur. In some applications redundant time synchronization is used, e.g. to keep
time synchronization via IRIG-B interface, if and while the SCADA communication is out of
service.
For such applications the device now provides settings for primary and backup sources for
time synchronization. Clock synchronization then is done solely via the primary source as
long as time synchronization messages (or minute pulses respectively) are received within
the set time out. If the time out is set to ‘blocked’, then time synchronization is exclusively
done through the primary source. During synchronization via back up source the primary OP
source is continuously monitored to switch back immediately as soon as that source
provides time synchronization messages again.
Via an appropriately configured binary signal input, the time of different devices may be
synchronized by means of a pulse. The P63x evaluates the rising edge. This is used to set
the clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), the last edge is evaluated.
P1904ENa
Figure 138: Date and time setting and clock synchronization
2.15.20 Multiple signaling of the broken conductor detection function

The signals of the broken conductor detection function are grouped to form a multiple signal.
(OP) 5-132 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 139: Signals of the broken conductor detection function
2.15.21 Resetting mechanisms

Stored data such as event logs, fault values etc, can be cleared in a number of ways. The
following mechanisms are available:
• Automatic resetting of the event signals indicated by LED indicators (provided that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel whenever a new event occurs
• Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data on the local control panel by
OP pressing the ‘Clear’ key  located on the panel
• Selective resetting of a particular memory type (only the fault memory, for example) from
the local control panel or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs
• General Reset
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel are cleared but
not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and power
supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
Figure 140: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local
control panel
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-133
2.15.22 Test mode

If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all incoming
signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.
Figure 141: Setting the test mode
2.16 Setting group selection (GROUP)

With the P63x, four independent setting groups may be pre-set. The user may switch
between setting groups during operation without interrupting the protection functions.
OP
2.16.1 Selecting the setting group
The method of setting the active setting group may be selected via the setting
GROUP: Control via USER or via the external signal GROUP: Control Via user EXT.
Correspondingly, the setting group is selected either in accordance with the pre-set
GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER or in accordance with external signals. The setting group
actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the logic state signal
GROUP: Actual Setting Group.
2.16.2 Selecting the setting group via opto inputs

If the binary signal inputs are to be used for setting group selection, then the P63x first
checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for setting group
selection. If this is not the case, then the setting group selected via the function parameter
will be active. The P63x also checks to determine whether the signals present at the binary
signal inputs allow an unambiguous setting group selection. This is only true when just one
binary signal input is set to a logic value of ‘1’. If more than one signal input is set to a logic
value of ‘1’, then the setting group previously selected remains active. Should a dead
interval occur while switching between setting groups (this is the case if all binary signal
inputs have a logic value of ‘0’), then the stored energy time is started. While this timer
stage is running, the previously selected setting group remains active. As soon as a signal
input has a logic value of ‘1’, the associated setting group becomes active. If, after the
stored energy time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic value of ‘1’, the
setting group selected via a function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic value of ‘1’ is present at any of the binary
signal inputs selected for the setting group selection, then the setting group selected via a
function parameter will become active once the stored energy time has elapsed. The
previous setting group remains active while the stored energy timer stage is running.
Setting group selection may also occur during a starting condition. When setting group
selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately
100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally effective for
all four setting groups.
(OP) 5-134 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 142: Setting group activation
2.17 Self testing and diagnostics (CHECK)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P63x ensure that internal faults are detected and
do not lead to maloperations.
2.17.1 Tests during startup

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P63x. If the P63x detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No
control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P63x can only be initiated
by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-135
2.17.2 Cyclic tests

After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during
operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued
and stored in a non-volatile memory, the monitoring signal memory, along with the assigned
date and time.
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the battery
should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the
supply voltage should fail. The Maintenance - MT section, gives further instructions on
battery replacement.
2.17.3 Signaling
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured CHECK: Alarm. The
output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
OP
Figure 143: Monitoring signals
2.17.4 Device response

The response of the P63x to monitoring signals takes one of the following forms depending
on the signal.
• Signaling only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is issued,
and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal
data acquisition memories overflow.
• Selective blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only
the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the
communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
• Warm restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system restart, for
example a fault in the hardware, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically
initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer system is reset to a
defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in
particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be
triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the protective
functions and the communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault
is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the
protective functions remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will
usually be possible again.
(OP) 5-136 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
• Cold restart
If a corrupted setting group is diagnosed in the checksum test during self-monitoring, then a
cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the protection device cannot identify
which setting in the group is corrupt. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset
to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a
cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected
so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating setting loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
2.18 Operating data recording (OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a
non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully tagged
with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological order. The
signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function disabling and enabling
and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of events in the system that
represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, earth faults, or short-circuits
are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared.
2.18.1 Counter of signals relevant to system operation

The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP
Figure 144: Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system
operation
2.19 Monitoring signal recording (MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory depth allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If more
than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the CHECK: Overflow
MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault
in the protection device are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring
signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if
desired. The user can select this option by setting an ‘m out of n’ setting.
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the red
LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry is indicated by a flashing light.
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries in
the monitoring signal memory are not even cleared automatically if the corresponding test in
a new test cycle has a negative result. The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be
read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time
and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-137
2.19.1 Counter of monitoring signals

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals. counter.
Figure 145: Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals
2.20 Overload data acquisition (OL_DA)

In the event of an overload, the P63x determines the following measured overload data:
OP
• Overload duration
• Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal
overload protection functions THRM1 and THRM2. For each of these two functions, the
following values are determined:
• Status of the thermal replica
• Load current
• Object temperature
• Coolant temperature
• Time remaining before trip
• Offset of the thermal replica
2.20.1 Acquisition of the overload duration

The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL_RC: Record in Progress signal.
Figure 146: Overload duration

(OP) 5-138 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.20.2 Acquisition of the measured overload data of thermal overload protection

The measured overload data are derived from the measured operating data of the thermal
overload protection function. They are stored at the end of the overload event.
OP
P1913ENa
Figure 147: Measured overload data of thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown)
2.21 Overload recording (OL_RC)
2.21.1 Start of overload recording

The following description is presented for the thermal overload protection function THRM1
but is equally relevant for THRM2.
An overload exists, and therefore overload recording begins, if the signal THRM1: Starting
k*IB> is issued.
2.21.2 Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential number.
P1914ENa
Figure 148: Counting overload events

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-139
2.21.3 Time tag

The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored. An overload
event’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The
date and time assigned to the overload events when the event begins can be read out from
the overload memory at the local control panel or through the PC and ILSA interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the overload event) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
2.21.4 Overload logging

Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference
to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a maximum of 200 start
or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload memories. After eight overload
events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a
single overload event, then OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data are also entered in the overload
memory.
The overload recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
OP
Figure 149: Overload memory

(OP) 5-140 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.22 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA)

When there is a fault in the power system, the P63x collects the following measured fault
data:
• Running time
• Fault duration
• Fault currents
• Differential current of all three measuring systems
• Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current
• Restraining current of all three measuring systems
• Differential currents of restricted earth fault protection
• Restraining currents of restricted earth fault protection
2.22.1 Running time and fault duration

The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal that is generated within the P63x, and the fault duration is defined as the time
between the start and end of the OSCIL: Record in Progress signal.
OP
OSCIL:
P1916ENa
Figure 150: Running time and fault duration
2.22.2 Fault data acquisition time

The P63x determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault.
Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the
determination of the recording start time is selected by the P63x. If, for example, the
differential protection function detects a fault then the P63x determines the measured fault
data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was measured. The
measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions
detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table
below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P63x.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-141
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion

1 Differential protection function Maximum differential current
2 Restricted earth fault protection, end a Maximum differential current (REF_1)
3 Restricted earth fault protection, end b Maximum differential current (REF_2)
4 Restricted earth fault protection, end c Maximum differential current (REF_3)
Definite-time overcurrent protection or
5 Maximum restraining current
inverse-time overcurrent protection
Functions according to the selection
6 End of fault
through m out of n parameters
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is
determined by the P63x and displayed.
OP
(OP) 5-142 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OSCIL:
OP
P1917ENa
Figure 151: Determination of the fault data acquisition time
2.22.3 Acquisition of the fault currents

The P63x stores the fault current data determined at the acquisition time. The following fault
currents are stored:
• The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer
• The residual current calculated from the phase currents
• The current measured by the P63x at transformer - Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)

The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to In.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-143
OP
Figure 152: Acquisition of the fault currents
2.22.4 Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents

The P63x stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the acquisition
time by the differential protection and restricted earth fault protection functions. Moreover,
the values for the second and fifth harmonic of the differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
(OP) 5-144 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OSCIL:
I (2*fn), 1
1 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 1
1 (5*fn)
I (2*fn), 2
2 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 2
2 (5*fn)
OP
I (2*fn), 3
3 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 3
3 (5*fn)
P1919ENa
Figure 153: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential

protection
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-145
OSCIL:
P1920ENa OP
Figure 154: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of restricted earth
fault protection
2.22.5 Fault data reset

After pressing the Clear key on the local control panel, the fault data value is displayed as
‘Not Measured’. However, the values are not erased and can continue to be read out
through the PC and communication interfaces.
2.23 Disturbance recording (OSCIL)
2.23.1 Start of fault recording

A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected
through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the Id>
and IR> triggers operate. Furthermore, fault recording can also be started manually from the
local control panel or externally through a binary signal input.
2.23.2 Fault counting

Faults are counted and identified by sequential number.
(OP) 5-146 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Figure 155: Start of fault recording and fault counter
2.23.3 Time tag

The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory at the local
control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information
(relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the
fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-147
2.23.4 Fault logging

Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and
post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total
of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the
non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been logged, the oldest fault record will
be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single fault, then OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow will be
entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the
signal OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data are also entered in the fault memory.
The fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
OP
Figure 156: Fault memory

(OP) 5-148 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.23.5 Fault data recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
• The phase currents of all four ends of the transformer
• The residual current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
• The voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before and
after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz)
is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The
maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and
post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will
terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording time.
Otherwise; the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling
increment and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are
overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the last
reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication
interfaces.
OP
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults remain
stored.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (OP) 5-149
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
OP
OSCIL:
P1923ENa
Figure 157: Fault data recording

(OP) 5-150 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
OP
Application Notes P63x/UK AP/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
AP
APPLICATION NOTES

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK AP/A54 Application Notes
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
AP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-1
CONTENTS
(AP) 6-
1. INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 Protection of transformers 5
1.1.1 Introduction 5
1.1.2 Overview of existing practices 5
1.2 P63x protection relay 7
1.2.1 Protection functions 8
1.2.2 Non protection features 9
2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 10

2.1 Overall differential protection (87) 10
2.1.1 Biased elements 10
2.1.2 Ratio correction 13
2.1.3 Vector group correction and zero sequence current filtering 14 AP

2.1.4 Magnetizing inrush stabilization 18
2.1.5 High set operation 18
2.2 Restricted earth fault protection 19
2.2.1 Basic principles 19
2.2.2 REF operating modes 20
2.2.3 Stability requirements for high impedance REF 20
2.2.4 Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors 21
2.3 Overfluxing protection and blocking 24
2.3.1 Basic principles 24
2.3.2 Transformer overfluxing 24
2.3.3 Time delayed overfluxing protection 24
2.3.4 5th Harmonic blocking 25
2.3.5 Required settings 26
2.4 Auto-transformer protection 26
2.4.1 Unloaded delta tertiary 28
2.4.2 Neutral earthing with phase-segregated CTs 28
2.4.2.1 Amplitude matching 28
2.4.2.2 Vector group matching 28
2.4.2.3 Zero-sequence current filtering 28

(AP) 6-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.4.2.4 Inrush stabilization 28
2.4.3 CTs in series with delta tertiary winding 29
2.4.3.1 Amplitude matching 29
2.4.3.2 Vector group matching 29
2.4.3.3 Zero-sequence current filtering 29
2.4.3.4 Inrush stabilization 29
2.4.4 CTs outside delta tertiary winding 30
2.4.4.1 Tripping characteristic 31
2.5 Busbar/mesh corner differential protection 31
2.5.1 Busbar protection settings 32
3. SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS 33
3.1 Introduction 33
3.2 Enabling the relay 33
3.3 Enabling a protection function 33
3.4 Configuring a trip command and output contact for CB tripping 33

AP 3.5 Configuring a watchdog contact 34
3.6 HMI read key assignment 34
3.7 Operation panel configuration 34
4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 35

4.1 Knee point voltage offered by IEC “P” class CTs 36
4.2 Use of ANSI/IEEE CTs 37
5. AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING 38
FIGURES
Figure 1: Typical transformer protection package 6

Figure 2: Typical protection package for a generator transformer 7
Figure 3: P63x bias characteristic of transformer differential protection 11
Figure 4: Amplitude matching factor, kamp 14
Figure 5: Yd5 transformer example 15
Figure 6: Vector group selection 17
Figure 7: Zero sequence current filtering 18
Figure 8: Fault limitation on an impedance earthed system 19
Figure 9: Fault limitation on a solidly earthed system 19
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-3
Figure 10: High Impedance REF principle 20

Figure 11: Variable time overfluxing protection characteristic 25
Figure 12: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding 26
Figure 13: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding 27
Figure 14: Auto-transformer - unloaded delta tertiary winding 28
Figure 15: Auto-transformer - neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs 29
Figure 16: Auto-transformer - CTs in series with delta tertiary winding 30
Figure 17: Auto-transformer - CTs outside delta tertiary winding 31
Figure 18: P63x busbar differential protection scheme 31
Figure 19: P63x bias characteristic of busbar differential protection 32
AP
(AP) 6-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
AP
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-5
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Protection of transformers
1.1.1 Introduction
The development of modern power systems has been reflected in the advances in
transformer design. This has resulted in a wide range of transformers with sizes from a few
kVA to several hundred MVA being available for use in a wide variety of applications.
The considerations for transformer protection vary with the application and importance of the
transformer. To reduce the effects of thermal stress and electrodynamic forces it is
advisable for the overall protection to minimize the time that a fault is present within a
transformer.
On smaller distribution transformers effective and economically justifiable protection can be
achieved by using either fuse protection or IDMT/instantaneous overcurrent relays. Due to
the requirements of co-ordination with the downstream power system protection this results
in time delayed fault clearance for some low level faults. Time delayed clearance of major
faults is unacceptable on larger distribution, transmission and generator transformers, where
the effects on system operation and stability must be considered. High speed protection is
desirable for all faults.
Transformer faults are generally classified into four categories:
• Winding and terminal faults
• Core faults
• Abnormal operating conditions such as overvoltage, overfluxing and overload AP

• Sustained or uncleared external faults
All of the above conditions must be considered individually and the transformer protection
designed accordingly.
To provide effective protection for faults within a transformer and security for normal
operation and external faults, the design and application of transformer protection must
consider factors such as:
• Magnetizing inrush current
• Winding arrangements
• Winding connections
• Connection of protection secondary circuits

The way that the protection of larger transformers is typically achieved is best illustrated by
examining the protective devices associated with common applications.
1.1.2 Overview of existing practices

Figure 1 shows typical protection functions for a sub-transmission or large distribution
transformer.
(AP) 6-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
WT B OT
51
50N
51N
ICT
64 WT = Winding temp'
B = Buchholz
OT = Oil temp'
64 = REF
87 = Biased diff'
51N = Standby E/F
50N = Inst' earth fault
87
51 = IDMT overcurrent
24 = Overfluxing relay
AP
P1937ENa
Figure 1: Typical transformer protection package

High speed protection is provided for faults on both the HV and LV windings by biased
differential protection (87). The relay operates on the basic differential principle that HV and
LV CT secondary currents entering and leaving the zone of protection can be balanced
under load and through fault conditions, whereas under internal fault conditions balance will
be lost and a differential current will cause the relay to trip. The zone of protection is clearly
defined by the CT locations and, as the protection is stable for through faults, it can be set to
operate without any intentional time delay.
In Figure 1 the application of the P63x differential relay includes software vector group and
amplitude matching to provide phase and ratio correction of CT signals in addition to filtering
LV zero sequence current to prevent maloperation of the differential element for external LV
earth faults. Interposing CTs (ICTs) are no longer required.
More sensitive high speed earth fault protection for the LV winding is provided by restricted
earth fault protection (64). Due to the limitation of phase fault current on the HV side for LV
winding earth faults and the fact that any unrestricted earth fault protection in the transformer
earth path requires a discriminative time delay, restricted earth fault protection is widely
applied. The application of restricted earth fault protection is further discussed in section 2.2.
Earth fault protection is provided on the HV winding by the inherently restricted earth fault
element associated with the HV overcurrent protection (50N). The delta winding of the
transformer draws no HV zero sequence current for LV earth faults and passes no zero
sequence current to upstream HV earth faults, hence there is no requirement to grade this
element with other earth fault protection and it can be set to operate without any intentional
time delay.
Sustained external LV faults are cleared by the IDMT overcurrent protection on the HV
winding (51) or by the standby earth fault protection (51N) in the transformer earth
connection. The extent of backup protection employed will vary according to the transformer
installation and application.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-7
The protection scheme may be further enhanced by the use of other protective devices
associated with the transformer, such as the Buchholz, pressure relief and winding
temperature devices. These devices can act as another main protective system for large
transformers and they may also provide clearance for some faults which might be difficult to
detect by protection devices operating from line current transformers, e.g. winding inter turn
faults or core lamination faults. These devices are connected to directly trip the breaker in
addition to operating auxiliary relays for indication purposes.
WT B OT
64
24 51N
ICT
64 WT = Winding temp'
B = Buchholz
OT = Oil temp'
64 = REF
87 = Biased diff'
51N = Standby E/F
87 51 = IDMT overcurrent
24 = Overfluxing relay
P1938ENa
AP
Figure 2: Typical protection package for a generator transformer
The protection of a generator transformer is similar to that for any other large transformer.
High speed protection is provided for phase to phase faults by the provision of biased
differential protection. In addition, for large generators, the transformer is commonly
included within an overall second main differential arrangement, which incorporates the
generator and transformer within the overall zone of protection. Earth fault protection is
provided by a restricted earth fault element on the star winding.
Overfluxing protection is commonly applied to generator circuits to prevent generator or
transformer damage from prolonged overfluxing conditions.
Other protection devices will again complement the main relay protection.
Auto-transformers are commonly used to couple EHV and HV power networks if the ratio of
their voltages is moderate. The protection arrangements for an auto-transformer are similar
in most respects to the protection of a two winding transformer. Protection of all windings
can be offered by a biased differential relay such as the P63x, this is further discussed in
section 2.4.
1.2 P63x protection relay

The P63x relay has been designed to bring the latest numerical technology to the protection
of power transformers. The increased functionality of numerical relays allows enhanced
protection functions to be offered for a wide variety of applications, which, when combined
with a host of non-protective features, can provide power system control and monitoring
requirements.
(AP) 6-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.1 Protection functions

The main protection functions offered by the P63x are listed below:
• Biased differential protection (87)
• Restricted earth fault protection for individual transformer windings (64)*
• Instantaneous/time delayed phase overcurrent protection (50/51)
• Instantaneous/time delayed earth fault protection (50N/51N)
• Instantaneous/time delayed negative sequence overcurrent protection (46)
• Thermal overload protection (49)
• Under/over voltage protection (27/59)*
• Under/over frequency protection (81)*
• Overfluxing protection (24)*
• Opto-isolated inputs and programmable logic for alarm/trip indication of external devices
* These protection functions are not available in the P631.
The biased differential element has a triple slope bias characteristic to ensure sensitivity,
with load current, to internal faults and stability under heavy through fault conditions.
The differential element can be blocked for magnetizing inrush conditions based on the ratio
of second harmonic to fundamental current. In addition, the differential element can be
AP blocked during transient overfluxing conditions based on the ratio of fifth harmonic to
fundamental current. Fast operating times for heavy internal faults can be achieved by use
of the unrestrained instantaneous differential high set elements.
Restricted earth fault protection is available for up to three transformer windings to offer
increased sensitivity to low-level winding earth faults. The principle of operation is selectable
and allows either the high impedance or biased (low impedance) restricted earth fault
method to be implemented.
Both the definite-time and the inverse-time overcurrent protection operate with separate
measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative-sequence
current and the residual current. Three stages each are provided for the three measuring
systems of the definite-time overcurrent protection. The inverse-time overcurrent protection
offers a multitude of tripping characteristics for the individual measuring systems.
Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at
temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes
excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme
cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using rms
load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set
with both alarm and trip stages.
The V/f overfluxing element provides protection against transformer damage that may result
from prolonged operation at increased voltages and/or decreased frequency. Independent
alarm and trip characteristics are provided to enable corrective action to be undertaken prior
to tripping being initiated.
Use of the opto-inputs as trip repeat and alarm paths for other transformer protection
devices, (Buchholz, Oil pressure, winding temperature etc.,) allows operation of these
devices to be event-logged. Interrogation of the relay fault, event and disturbance records
offers an overall picture of an event or fault, of the transformer protection performance and
sequences of operation.
All models of the P63x are three phase units with internal phase compensation, CT ratio
correction and zero sequence filtering, thus eliminating the need for external interposing
transformers. Up to four biased inputs can be provided to cater for power transformers with
more than two windings and/or more than one set of CT’s associated with each winding, e.g.
in mesh or one-and-a-half circuit breaker substation arrangements.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-9
The variety of protective functions offered by the P63x makes it ideal not only for the
protection of power transformers but also for a variety of applications where biased
differential or high impedance protection is commonly applied, these include:
• Busbars/mesh corners
• Overall generator/transformer protection
• Generators
• Reactors
1.2.2 Non protection features

In addition to providing all of the common relaying requirements for a transformer protection
package, the P63x relay shares many common features with the other relays in the MiCOM
range.
The P63x offers this variety of additional features by virtue of its digital design and
standardization of hardware. These features are listed below:
• Electrical Instrumentation with local/remote display
• Fault records (summary of reasons for tripping etc.)
• Event records (summary of alarms and relay events)
• Disturbance records (record of analogue wave forms and operation of opto-inputs and
output relays)
• Date and time tagging of all records

AP
• Commissioning aids
• Optional remote communications
• High level of continuous self monitoring and diagnostic information
• Relay menu displayed as standard English or Regional English language variant -800
(AP) 6-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail individual protection functions in addition to where and how they
may be applied. Each section provides some worked examples on how the settings are
applied to the relay.
2.1 Overall differential protection (87)

In applying the well established principles of differential protection to transformers, a variety
of considerations have to be taken into account. These include compensation for any phase
shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either
side of windings and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In
addition to these factors, which can be compensated for by correct application of the relay,
the effects of normal system conditions on relay operation must also be considered. The
differential element must be blocked for system conditions which could result in maloperation
of the relay, such as high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions or during
transient overfluxing.
In traditional transformer differential schemes, the requirements for phase and ratio
correction were met by the application of external interposing current transformers, as a
secondary replica of the main transformer winding arrangements, or by a delta connection of
main CTs (phase correction only). Within the P63x, settings are provided to allow flexible
application of the protection to a wide variety of transformer configurations, or to other
devices where differential protection is required, without the need for external interposing
CTs or delta connection of secondary circuits.
2.1.1 Biased elements
AP The number of biased differential inputs required for an application depends upon the
transformer and its primary connections. It is recommended that, where ever possible, a set
of biased CT inputs is used per set of current transformers.
There are four basic models of the P63x relay;
• P631 Two biased differential inputs (without REF or voltage based protection)
• P632 Two biased differential inputs
• P633 Two or three biased differential inputs
• P634 Two, three or four biased differential inputs

Where a P634 or P633 is chosen they can be programmed to provide 2, 3, 4 and 2 or 3
biased windings respectively.
Table 1 shows the variety of connections which can be catered for by the range of P63x
relays.
Configuration No. of CT sets Recommended Relay

HV
2 P631, P632, P633 or P634

LV
HV
3 P633 or P634
LV1 LV2
HV
3 P633 or P634
LV
HV
3 P633 or P634
LV
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-11
Configuration No. of CT sets Recommended Relay

HV
4 P634 only
LV1 LV2
HV
LV1 LV2 4 P634 only
HV
4 P634 only
LV
Table 1: Applications of the P63x transformer differential protection relay

The P63x relay achieves stability for through faults in two ways, both of which are essential
for correct relay operation. The first consideration is the correct sizing of the current
transformers as described in section 4, the second is by providing a relay bias characteristic
as shown below:
8.00
I d / I ref
Tripping area
6.00
AP
ic t
ris
fee cte
4.00
a
ar
d
ch
.7
gle ent
=0
de
rr
m
-s i
2
for lt cu
u
sin
Fa
2.00
Blocking area
m 1
= 0.3
12200e.DS4
I R ,m2 / I ref = 4.0
I d > / I ref = 0.2
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00

I R / I ref
P1764ENa I II III
Figure 3: P63x bias characteristic of transformer differential protection

The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are
calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching (Refer to the
following sections). The formation of the restraining variables differs between two and
three-winding protection. The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current
arrows relative to the protected equipment, i.e. the current arrows of all windings point either
towards the protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b
IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a − Is,y,b

(AP) 6-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
When the infeed to an internal fault from both ends is exactly equal as regards amplitude
and angle, then both currents cancel one another out, i.e. the restraining current becomes
zero and the restraining effect disappears. Disappearance of the restraining effect when
there is an internal fault is a desirable result since in this case transformer differential
protection attains maximum sensitivity.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three or four-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d
[
IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d ]
In this case the restraining effect never disappears when there is an internal fault; the
restraining effect is even reinforced in the case of multi-end infeed. However, the restraining
current factor ½ means that the differential current Id has twice the value of the restraining
current IR so that safe and reliable tripping is also guaranteed in the case of multi-end infeed.
The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P63x has two knees. The first
knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value DIFF: Idiff> SGx and is on the
load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the
setting DIFF: IR,m2 SGx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure3: shows
the tripping characteristic.
The first section (Area I) represents the most sensitive region of the tripping characteristic in
the form of the settable basic threshold value Id>. The default setting of 0.2 takes into
account the magnetizing current of the transformer, which flows even in a no-load condition
AP and is generally less than 5% of the nominal transformer current. When protecting
generators and other items of plant, where shunt magnetizing current is not present, a lower
differential setting can be used and 0.1 would be more typical.
Characteristic equation for the range 0 ≤ I R ≤ 0 .5 ⋅ I diff > : (Area I)
Id I >
= diff
Iref Iref
The second section (Area II) of the tripping curve covers the load current range, so that in
this section we must account for not only the transformer magnetizing current, which
appears as differential current, but also with differential currents that can be attributed to the
transformation errors of the current transformer sets.
If we calculate the worst case with IEC class 10P current transformers, then the maximum
allowable amplitude error according to IEC 60044-1 is 3 % for nominal current. The
phase-angle error can be assumed to be 2° for nominal current. The maximum allowable
total error for nominal current is then obtained, in approximation, as (0.0-3 + sin 2°) ≈ 6.5 %.
If the current is increased to the nominal accuracy limit current, then the total error for
Class 10P current transformers can be 10 % maximum. Beyond the nominal accuracy limit
current, the transformation error can be of any magnitude.
The dependence of the total error of a current transformer on current is therefore non-linear.
In the operating current range, i.e., in the current range below the nominal accuracy limit
current, we can expect a worst case total error of approximately 10 % per current
transformer set.
The second section of the tripping characteristic forms a straight line, the slope of which
should correspond to the cumulative total error of the participating current transformer sets.
The curve slope m1 can be set. The default setting for m1 is defined as 0.3 with respect to
protection of three-winding transformers, i.e. 3 x 10%.
Characteristic equation for the range 0,5 ⋅ I an < I H ≤ 4 ⋅ I B : (Area II)
I >
= m1 ⋅ R + diff ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 )
Id I
Iref Iref Iref
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-13
The second knee point of the tripping characteristic determines the end of the overcurrent
zone in the direction of increasing restraining current in fault-free operation. It can be as
high as four times the nominal current in certain operating cases - such as when a parallel
transformer has failed.
Therefore, the second knee point can be set (IR,m2) for a default setting of 4·Iref. IR,m2 must be
set in accordance with the maximum possible operating current.
Restraining currents that go beyond the set knee point are then evaluated as continuous
fault currents. For truly continuous fault currents, the third section of the tripping
characteristic could therefore be given an infinitely large slope. Since, however, we also
need to take into account the possibility that a fault can occur in the transformer differential
protection zone as the result of the system fault, a finite slope m2 is provided for the third
section of the tripping curve. The default setting for m2 is 0.7.
Characteristic equation for the range 4⋅ I < I : (Area III)
B H
IR,m2
= m 2 ⋅ R + diff > ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) + ⋅ (m1 − m 2 )
Id I I
Iref Iref Iref Iref
Iref: reference current
m1: gradient of characteristic in range 0,5 ⋅ I an < I H ≤ 4 ⋅ I B

m2: gradient of characteristic in range 4⋅ IB < I H
2.1.2 Ratio correction

To ensure correct operation of the differential element it is important that under load and
through fault conditions the currents into the differential element of the relay balance. In AP
many cases, the HV and LV current transformer primary ratings will not exactly match the
transformer winding rated currents. Ratio correction factors are therefore provided. The CT
ratio correction factors are applied to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are
correct.
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power, identical
for all windings, needs to be defined at “Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF:
Rated Ref Power Sref” [019.016]. For two-winding arrangements, the nominal power will
usually be the reference power. For three or four-winding transformers, the nominal power
of the highest-power winding should be set as the reference power. The individual reference
currents for each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the
basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
S ref S ref
Iref ,a = Iref ,b =
3 ⋅ Vnom,a 3 ⋅ Vnom,b
S ref S ref
Iref ,c = Iref ,d =
3 ⋅ Vnom,c 3 ⋅ Vnom,d

Iref,a, b, c or d: reference current of winding a, b, c or d
Vn,a, b, c or d: nominal voltage of winding a, b, c or d
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set
primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
Note: Where on-load tap changing is used, the nominal voltage chosen
should be that for the middle tap position.
(AP) 6-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Winding a Winding b
C
C
B
B
A
A
k amp,a kamp,b
Figure 4: Amplitude matching factor, kamp
Inom,a Inom,b Inom,c Inom,d

k am,a = k am,b = k am,c = k am,d =
Iref ,a Iref ,b Iref ,c Iref ,d
With:
AP kam,a, b, c or d: amplitude-matching factor of winding a, b, c or d

In,a, b, c or d: primary nominal currents of the main current transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed by the P63x. The values are also
displayed in the setting file, however the setting file will not update any changes to the
matching factors as processing by the relay operating system is required to determine new
matching factors.
The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their
permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions:
• The matching factors must always be ≤ 16
• The value of the lower matching factors must be ≥ 0.5

In three or four-winding protection, the “weakest” end, that is the end with the smallest
primary nominal transformer current, is thus not associated with any restriction of the
settings for the amplitude matching.
Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above
conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be automatically blocked.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are
multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing.
Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer to the relevant
reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal
currents of the device.
2.1.3 Vector group correction and zero sequence current filtering

To compensate for any phase shift between two windings of a transformer it is necessary to
provide vector group correction. This was traditionally provided by the appropriate
connection of physical interposing current transformers, as a replica of the main transformer
winding arrangements, or by a delta connection of main CTs.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-15
Basically, this matching operation can be carried out regardless of the phase winding
connections, since the phase relation is described unambiguously by the characteristic
vector group number.
Vector group matching is therefore performed solely by mathematical phasor operations on
the amplitude-matched phase currents of the low-voltage side in accordance with the
characteristic vector group number. The vector group is the clock-face hour position of the
LV A-phase voltage, with respect to the A-phase HV voltage at 12-o’clock (zero) reference.
Phase correction is provided in the P63x via “Settings/Function Settings/Common
Settings/DIFF: Vector Grp. ends b-a” [019.010] for phase shift between windings a and b.
Similar settings are provided for phase shift between further windings in the P633 and P634
relays.
This is shown in the following figure for vector group characteristic number 5, where vector
group Yd5 is used as the example:
AP
Figure 5: Yd5 transformer example

No operation is carried out on the high-voltage side in connection with vector group
matching.
In addition to mimicking the phase shift of the protected transformer, it is also necessary to
mimic the distribution of primary zero sequence current in the protection scheme. The
necessary filtering of zero sequence current has also been traditionally provided by
appropriate connection of interposing CTs or by delta connection of main CT secondary
windings. In the P63x, zero sequence current filtering is implemented in software via
“Settings/Function Settings/Setting Group SG1/DIFF: I0 filt a Enab SG1” [072.155] for setting
group 1, winding a. Similar settings are provided for the remaining ends in each setting
group.
Where a transformer winding can pass zero sequence current to an external earth fault it is
essential that some form of zero sequence current filtering is employed. This ensures out of
zone earth faults will not cause the relay to maloperate.
(AP) 6-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
An external earth fault on the star side of a Dyn11 transformer will result in zero sequence
current flowing in the current transformers associated with the star winding but, due to the
effect of the delta winding, there will be no corresponding zero sequence current in the
current transformers associated with the delta winding.
In order to ensure stability of the protection, the LV zero sequence current must be
eliminated from the differential current. Traditionally this has been achieved by either delta
connected line CT’s or by the inclusion of a delta winding in the connection of an interposing
current transformer.
In accordance with its definition, the zero-sequence current is determined as follows from the
amplitude-matched phase currents:
Iamp,zero,z =
1
(
⋅I +I +I
3 amp,A,z amp,B,z amp,C,z
)
The following tables show that for all odd-numbered vector group characteristics the
zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is basically always filtered out, whereas for
even-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage
side is basically never filtered out automatically. The latter is also true for the high-voltage
side since in that case, as explained above, no mathematical phasor operations are
performed.
Vector group matching and zero-sequence current filtering must therefore always be viewed
in combination. The following tables list all the mathematical phasor operations.
Mathematical operations on the high-voltage side:
With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering

AP Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x,z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an even-numbered vector group

characteristic:
0 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x,z
2 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x +1,z
4 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x −1,z
6 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x,z
8 Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z
10 (
Ivec,y,z = − Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,zero,z ) Ivec,y,z = −Iamp,x −1,z
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-17
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an odd-numbered vector group

characteristic:
VG With Izero filtering Without Izero filtering

1
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z ) Ivec,y,z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z
3 3
3
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x +1,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x −1, z − Iamp, x +1, z + Iamp,zero, z
3 3
5
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x −1, z − Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z
3 3
7
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x +1, z − Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z
3 3
9
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x −1,z ) Ivec, y, z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp, x +1, z − Iamp, x −1, z + Iamp,zero, z
3 3
11
Ivec ,y,z =
1
(
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z ) Ivec,y,z =
1
( )
⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z + Iamp,zero,z
3 3
Setting the vector group matching function is very simple and does not require any
calculations. Only the characteristic vector group number needs to be set:
AP
Figure 6: Vector group selection

Other nameplate designations may be used instead of the clock notation - common
examples are:
Alternatives Equivalent Standard LV Group Setting

DAB/Y DAB - Y Dy1 1
DAC/Y DAC - Y Dy11 11
Y/Y Y0 - Y0 Yy0 0
Y/Y Y0 - Y6 Yy6 6
Setting the zero-sequence current filtering function is very simple and does not require any
calculations. Zero-sequence current filtering should only be activated for those ends where
there is operational earthing of a neutral point:
(AP) 6-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 7: Zero sequence current filtering
2.1.4 Magnetizing inrush stabilization

The magnetizing inrush phenomenon is associated with a transformer winding which is being
energized where no balancing current is present in the other winding(s). This current
appears as a large operating signal for the differential protection.
Special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs
during inrush. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having
twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush
current. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental I(fn) and second harmonic
AP components I(2*fn) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*fn)/I(fn) exceeds
a specific adjustable value (typical setting 20%) in at least one measuring system, tripping is
blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
• Across all three measuring systems
• Selectively for one measuring system

There is no blocking if the differential current exceeds the high set threshold DIFF: Idiff>>
SGx.
2.1.5 High set operation

The P63x relay incorporates an independent differential high set element, DIFF: Idiff>> SGx,
to complement the protection provided by the biased differential low set element. The
instantaneous high set offers faster clearance for heavy internal faults and it is not blocked
for magnetizing inrush or transient overfluxing conditions.
Stability is provided for heavy external faults, but the operating threshold of the high set
differential element must be set to avoid operation with inrush current.
As described in section 2.1.4 when a transformer is energized, a high magnetizing inrush
current is drawn. The magnitude and duration of this inrush current is dependant upon
several factors which include;
• Size and impedance of the transformer
• Point on wave of switching
• Remnant flux in the transformer
• Number of transformers connected in parallel

It is difficult to accurately predict the maximum anticipated level of inrush current. Typical
waveform peak values are of the order of 8 - 10x rated current. A worst-case estimation of
inrush could be made by dividing the transformer full load current by the per-unit leakage
reactance quoted by the transformer manufacturer.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-19
A setting range of 2.5 - 30Iref (RMS values) is provided on the P63x relay. The high set
setting should be set in excess of the anticipated or estimated peak value of inrush current
after ratio correction.
Note: If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold DIFF:

Idiff>>> PSx>, the restraining current and the saturation discriminator
are no longer taken into account either, that is the P63x will trip
regardless of the restraining variable and the saturation discriminator.
2.2 Restricted earth fault protection
2.2.1 Basic principles

The P63x uses biased differential protection to provide fast clearance for faults within the
protected zone. The value of earth fault current, however, may be limited by any impedance
in the earth path or by the percentage of the winding involved in the fault. The P63x offers a
restricted earth fault element for up to 3 windings of the protected transformer to provide
greater sensitivity for earth faults which will not change with load current.
The levels of fault current available for relay measurement are illustrated in below. If an
earth fault is considered on an impedance earthed star winding of a Dyn transformer (Figure
8), the value of current flowing in the fault (If) will be dependant upon two factors. These are
the value of earthing impedance and the fault point voltage, which is governed by the fault
location. The value of fault current (If) is directly proportional to the location of the fault. A
restricted earth fault element (64) is connected to measure If directly, to provide more
sensitive earth fault protection. The overall differential protection is less sensitive, since it
only measures the HV current Is. The value of Is is limited by the number of faulted
secondary turns in relation to the HV turns.
AP
87 87
If If
Source Source
Is Is
If If
64 64
1.0 10
I Current 8
I
F (x full load)
F
Current
6
(x full load)
4
0.2 IS IS
2
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

0.2 1.0 Fault position from neutral
Fault position from neutral (Solid earthing)
(Impedance earthing)
Figure 8: Fault limitation on an Figure 9: Fault limitation on a

impedance earthed system solidly earthed system
If a fault on a solidly earthed star winding (Fig 9) is considered, the fault current is limited by
the leakage reactance of the winding, any impedance in the fault and by the fault point
voltage. The value of fault current varies in a complex manner with fault location. As in the
case of the impedance earthed transformer, the value of current available as an overall
differential protection operating quantity is limited. More sensitive earth fault protection is
provided by a restricted earth fault relay (64), which is arranged to measure If directly.
Although more sensitive protection is provided by REF, the operating current for the overall
differential protection is still significant for faults over most of the winding. For this reason,
(AP) 6-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
independent REF protection may not have previously been considered necessary for a
solidly earthed winding; especially where an additional relay would have been required. With
the P63x, the REF protection is available at no extra cost if a neutral CT is available.
Restricted earth fault protection is also commonly applied to Delta windings of large power
transformers, to improve the operating speed and sensitivity of the protection package to
winding earth faults. When applied to a Delta winding this protection is commonly referred to
as “balanced earth fault protection”. It is inherently restricted in its zone of operation when it
is stabilized for CT spill current during inrush or during phase faults. The value of fault
current flowing will again be dependant upon system earthing arrangements and the fault
point voltage.
2.2.2 REF operating modes

One of three operating modes for restricted earth fault protection can be selected via
settings.
• Low impedance REF biased by residual current (Low-Z Iph Sum Bias)
• Low impedance REF biased by maximum phase current (Low-Z Iph Max. Bias)
• High impedance REF (High Impedance)

The biasing techniques operate by measuring the level of through current flowing and
altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the
relay circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur
under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the
relay.
Historically the high impedance principle has been most widely implemented and an
AP example illustrating the principle is included in the following section. Details on the
application of the low impedance REF types are not included here, however the Operation -
OP section contains details on the characteristics and principles involved. Low impedance
biased REF settings are similar to those of the biased differential protection function.
Note: The Low-Z Iph Sum Bias mode cannot be used for balanced earth
fault protection of delta windings.
2.2.3 Stability requirements for high impedance REF
Rl Rl
If(prim) If(prim)
Rct Rl
R stab'
64
Rl
Figure 10: High Impedance REF principle

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-21
The high impedance REF element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in
less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following conditions are met in determining the
CT requirements and value of associated stabilizing resistor:
Vk > 2 × Idiff > × Rs

If
Rs = 1.1× × (Rct + 2Rl )
Idiff >
For faster operation of the REF element, a larger knee-point voltage will provide reduced
operating times. Refer to the graph below showing the operating time of the REF element
for differing ratios.
45
40
35
Operating time (ms)
30
25
20
15
AP
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
Vk / (Idiff> × Rs)
Note: The diagram is the result of investigations which were carried out for
impedance ratios in the range of 5 to 120 and for fault currents in the
range of 0.5 to 40 In.
2.2.4 Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors

Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under
internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers,
relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be
produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a
function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would
be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur.
Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf - Vk )
Vf = Ι'f (Rct + 2RL + RST)

(AP) 6-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Where:
Vp = Peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions
Vk = Current transformer kneepoint voltage
Vf = Maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur
Ι'f = Maximum internal secondary fault current

Rct = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay
RST = Relay stabilizing resistor
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, Metrosils should be
applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the
secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very
high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating
characteristics follow the expression:
V = CΙ0.25
Where:
V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
C = Constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
AP I = Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52 x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
⎛ Vs (rms) x 2 ⎞ 4
Ι(rms) = 0.52 ⎜ ⎟
⎝ C ⎠
Where:
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but
appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (Metrosil), its characteristic should be
such that it complies with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be as low
as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current transformers
and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformers
2. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings,
it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher fault voltages
may have to be tolerated
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay
current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
3. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms
4. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms if possible
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-23
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT's are as shown in the
following table:
Nominal
Relay Voltage Recommended Metrosil Type
Characteristic
Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting
brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for relays with a 5 amp CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the
actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to
limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated
(indicated by *, **, ***)
3. The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole
relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary
Internal
Recommended Metrosil Type
AP
Fault Relay Voltage Setting
Current
Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C =670/800 C = 740/870*
35mA rms 40mA rms 50mA rms 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S121 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100A 7 C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C =570/670 C =620/740*
600A/S3/P/S121 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150A 9 C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C = 570/670** C =620/740***
Note: *2400V peak **2200V peak ***2600V peak
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact AREVA T&D for
detailed applications.
Note:
1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use
with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same
central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order these units please
specify "Triple pole Metrosil type", followed by the single pole type reference
2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if
required
(AP) 6-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.3 Overfluxing protection and blocking
2.3.1 Basic principles

The P63x relay offers an overfluxing protection element which can be used to raise an alarm
or initiate tripping in the event of prolonged periods of transformer overfluxing. In addition, a
differential current 5th harmonic blocking feature is also provided within the P63x, which can
be used to prevent possible maloperation of the differential element under transient
overfluxing conditions.
To make use of the time delayed overfluxing protection, the P63x relay must be supplied
with a voltage signal which is representative of the primary system voltage on the source
side of the transformer. The 5th harmonic blocking feature does not require a voltage signal.
A 5th harmonic signal is derived from the differential current wave form on each phase and
blocking is on a per phase basis.
2.3.2 Transformer overfluxing

Transformer overfluxing might arise for the following reasons:
• High system voltage

Generator full load rejection
Ferranti effect with light loading transmission lines
• Low system frequency

Generator excitation at low speed with AVR in service
AP • Geomagnetic disturbance
Low frequency earth current circulation through a transmission system
The initial effects of overfluxing will be to increase the magnetizing current for a transformer.
This current will be seen as a differential current. If it reaches a high level without a
waveshape which would cause operation of the inrush blocking system, there would be a
risk of differential protection tripping.
Persistent overfluxing may result in thermal damage or degradation of a transformer as a
result of heating caused by eddy currents that may be induced in non-laminated metalwork
of a transformer. The flux levels in such regions would normally be low, but excessive flux
may be passed during overfluxed operation of a transformer.
The following protection strategy is proposed to address potential overfluxing conditions:
• Maintain protection stability during transient overfluxing
• Ensure tripping for persistent overfluxing

In most applications, the recommended minimum differential trip threshold for P63x, its
filtering action and possible operation of the inrush detector will ensure stability of the
differential element. If more difficult situations exist, the P63x relay is offered with a 5th
harmonic differential current blocking facility. This facility could be applied with some study
of the particular problem.
To ensure tripping for persistent overfluxing, due to high system voltage or low system
frequency, the P63x is provided with time delayed Volts per Hertz protection. Where there is
any risk of persistent geomagnetic overfluxing, with normal system voltage and frequency,
the 5th harmonic differential current facility could be used to initiate tripping after a long time
delay.
2.3.3 Time delayed overfluxing protection

Two independently adjustable V/f elements are available for overfluxing protection. A
definite-time element, with a time setting range of 0 - 10,000 seconds, is provided for use as
an alarm element. The settings of this element should be such that the alarm signal can be
used to prompt automatic or manual corrective action.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-25
Protection against damage due to prolonged overfluxing is offered by a V/f protection

element with a variable time tripping characteristic. The setting flexibility of this element, by
adjustment of the time delay at various V/f values, makes it suitable for various applications.
The manufacturer of the transformer or generator should be able to supply information about
the short-time over-excitation capabilities, which can be used to determine appropriate
settings for the V/f tripping element. The variable time overfluxing protection would be used
to trip the transformer directly.
If preferred, the V/f tripping element can be set with a definite time characteristic.
AP
Figure 11: Variable time overfluxing protection characteristic
2.3.4 5th Harmonic blocking

The 5th Harmonic blocking feature is available for possible use to prevent unwanted
operation of the low set differential element under transient overfluxing conditions.
When overfluxing occurs, the transformer core becomes partially saturated and the resultant
magnetizing current waveforms increase in magnitude and become harmonically distorted.
Such waveforms have a significant 5th harmonic content, which can be extracted and used
as a means of identifying the abnormal operating condition.
The 5th harmonic blocking threshold is adjustable between 10 - 80% differential current.
The threshold should be adjusted so that blocking will be effective when the magnetizing
current rises above the chosen threshold setting of the low-set differential protection. Where
the magnetizing current is just in excess of the differential element setting, the magnetizing
inrush detection will not be effective in all applications with all types of transformers.
To offer some protection against damage due to persistent overfluxing that might be caused
by a geomagnetic disturbance, the 5th harmonic blocking element can be routed to an output
contact via an associated timer. Operation of this element could be used to give an alarm to
the network control centre. If such alarms are received from a number of transformers, they
could serve as a warning of geomagnetic disturbance so that operators could take some
action to safeguard the power system. Alternatively this element can be used to initiate
tripping in event of prolonged pick up of a 5th harmonic measuring element. It is not
expected that this type of overfluxing condition would be detected by the AC overfluxing
protection. This form of time delayed tripping should only be applied in regions where
geomagnetic disturbances are a known problem and only after proper evaluation through
simulation testing.
(AP) 6-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.3.5 Required settings

The pick up for the overfluxing elements will be dependant upon the nominal core flux
density levels.
Generator transformers are generally run at higher flux densities than transmission and
distribution transformers and hence require a pick up setting and shorter tripping times which
reflect this. Transmission transformers can also be at risk from overfluxing conditions and
withstand levels should be consulted when deciding upon the required settings.
2.4 Auto-transformer protection

Auto-transformers are designed as three-phase units or consist of a group of three
single-phase units. They are used for interconnection of solidly earthed EHV and HV
networks if the rated voltages of both networks within a factor of 2 to 3 times. Material and
weight as well as losses can be saved by autotransformers compared with separate-winding
transformers.
Auto-transformers with star connection of primary and secondary winding (serial and
common winding) are usually equipped with a delta stabilizing winding (tertiary winding)
rated about one third of the throughput rating.
AP
Figure 12: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding

Shunt reactors or capacitors for power factor correction can be connected to such a tertiary
winding. A booster transformer consisting of energizing and regulating winding for voltage
adjustment by in-phase or phase-angle regulation can be accommodated in the same tank.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-27
C C
B B
A A
Serial
Energizing
winding
winding
Common Regulating
winding winding
-60°/0°/+60°
phase-angle
Delta
Tertiary
connection
winding
C
B
A
Figure 13: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding

Depending on the application various possibilities with different features can be used for
differential protection of autotransformers:
Unloaded Delta
Neutral Earthing CTs in Series
CTs Outside Delta
AP
With Phase- With Delta
Tertiary Winding Tertiary Winding
Segregated CTs Tertiary Winding
Differential
Two-end Three-end Three-end Three-end
protection
Amplitude Vnom,a = Vnom,b
Vnom,a ≠ Vnom,b √3·Vnom,c Vnom,c
matching = Vnom,c
Vector group VGa-b = 0 VGa-b = 0 VGa-b = 0
VGa-b = 0
matching VGa-c = 0 VGa-c = 0 VGa-c = odd
Zero sequence
Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
current filtering
Inrush stabilization Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled
Phase-segregation No Yes Yes No
Affected by voltage
Yes No No Yes
adjustment
Sensitivity for earth
Low High High Low
faults
Protection against
Yes No Yes Yes
turn-to-turn faults
Protection of the
delta tertiary No No Yes Yes
winding
Individual applications are discussed below.

(AP) 6-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.4.1 Unloaded delta tertiary

A two-end differential protection may be applied in any case if the tertiary winding is used as
delta stabilizing winding only i.e. if there is no additional feeding from the tertiary winding:
C C
B B
A A
I d/I
AP Figure 14: Auto-transformer - unloaded delta tertiary winding

The setting of the differential protection corresponds to the setting of a separate-winding
transformer with neutral earthing at both ends.
2.4.2 Neutral earthing with phase-segregated CTs

In case of neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs it’s the ideal solution to apply a
three-end differential protection. The protected zone corresponds to a single winding; HV
extremity, LV tap and neutral tail CT.
2.4.2.1 Amplitude matching

Because the protection is effectively performing a Kirchoff current summation at the center
tap, the primary nominal voltages of all three ends have to be set to the same value (primary
nominal voltage of the serial or of the common winding).
2.4.2.2 Vector group matching

Both vector group numbers have to be set to ‘0’.
2.4.2.3 Zero-sequence current filtering

As zero sequence current flow will not upset the Kirchoff current summation, the
zero-sequence current filtering may be disabled for all three ends.
2.4.2.4 Inrush stabilization

Because of the galvanic connected electrical node there is no transformer coupling and
therefore inrush stabilization may be disabled.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-29
C C
B B
A A
I d/I
Figure 15: Auto-transformer - neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs
The differential protection described above operates strictly phase-segregated particularly
due to the fact that inrush stabilization is not required. Sensitivity for earth fault detection is
high. However turn-to-turn faults and faults on the tertiary winding cannot be detected in
principle. AP
2.4.3 CTs in series with delta tertiary winding
If the corresponding current through the tertiary winding is measured instead of the
neutral-to-earth current per phase a transformer coupling will be given.
2.4.3.1 Amplitude matching

Because of transformer coupling amplitude matching has to be based on the individual
primary nominal voltages of the ends. Considering that the CTs of the third end are located
in series with the delta tertiary winding √3 times of the corresponding primary nominal
voltage has to be used for amplitude matching calculation.
2.4.3.2 Vector group matching

Because of the limb related measuring systems both vector group numbers have to be set
to ‘0’.
2.4.3.3 Zero-sequence current filtering

Because of the inclusion of the neutral-to-earth current via measuring the current through the
transformer coupled tertiary winding zero-sequence current filtering may be disabled for all
three ends.
2.4.3.4 Inrush stabilization

Because of the transformer coupling within the protected zone inrush stabilization has to be
enabled.
(AP) 6-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
C C
B B
A A
I d/I
C
B
A
Figure 16: Auto-transformer - CTs in series with delta tertiary winding

The differential protection described above provides the same degree of earth fault
sensitivity in comparison to the differential protection according to chapter 2.4.2.
Furthermore turn-to-turn faults can be detected on principle due to transformer coupling of
AP the measured currents and the tertiary winding is included in the protected zone. Earth
faults on the regulating winding will be detected too whereas the differential measuring
systems are not affected by voltage adjustment. Only the requirement of inrush stabilization
is unfavorable.
2.4.4 CTs outside delta tertiary winding

If the CTs of the tertiary winding are not located in series but outside the delta winding a
three-end differential protection may be applied. This differential protection offers the largest
protection zone in comparison to all the applications described above. However the
requirement of zero-sequence current filtering leads to reduced earth fault sensitivity. The
setting of the differential protection corresponds to the setting of a separate-winding
transformer. The differential measuring systems are affected by in-phase or phase-angle
regulation.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-31
Figure 17: Auto-transformer - CTs outside delta tertiary winding
2.4.4.1 Tripping characteristic

This overall differential protection is affected by voltage adjustment. This has to be taken
into consideration for the setting of the tripping characteristic according to section xx. AP
2.5 Busbar/mesh corner differential protection
The P633 and P634 relays may be applied to simple busbar/mesh corner configurations to
provide biased differential protection of the zone. The figure below shows the basic concept
of the scheme when applied as busbar protection.
P634
BB1
P633
Figure 18: P63x busbar differential protection scheme

The maximum size of any zone is limited to 4 CT sets when the P634 relay is used.
(AP) 6-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.5.1 Busbar protection settings

The reference power setting “Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: Rated Ref
Power Sref (019.016)” is set based on the CT primary rating and the system voltage. In is
then equal to P63x reference current, Iref.
The minimum differential current pickup setting, “Idiff>”, is set above maximum load current
to prevent maloperation of the scheme if CT secondary wiring becomes open circuited,
presenting the relay with a differential current equivalent to load. In the settings shown on
the characteristic below, “Idiff>” has been set to 1.2 times the nominal current.
AP
Figure 19: P63x bias characteristic of busbar differential protection

If there is the possibility for resistive busbar faults to occur, e.g. in GIS chambers, then the
“Idiff>” setting needs to be set less than load current. As bus zone protection is generally the
most critical area where disconnection of a CT could cause problems, e.g. tripping a whole
bus zone in error, the application of CT supervision is recommended to prevent maloperation
of the biased differential protection when there is an open circuited CT secondary. The CTS
feature can be used for de-sensitizing or blocking of the biased differential protection.
De-sensitization is achieved by raising the differential current pickup setting to the value of
“Idiff> (CTS)”.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-33
3. SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS
3.1 Introduction
By default all protection, logic and I/O settings are disabled in the P63x when delivered from
the manufacturer. The following sections are intended to provide recommendations on the
setup of auxiliary functions available in all relay configurations. The settings may be
configured in the MiCOM S1 S&R-103 setting software with out the need to access the relay.
The configured file may be saved as a standard “default” and used as a starting point when
applying the P63x to specific installations requiring calculated protection and logic settings.
The relevant sections of the application notes should be cross referenced prior to applying
the settings ensuring they are correct for the application.
3.2 Enabling the relay

The relay must be enabled, switching it on-line:
(003.030) “Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: Protection Enabled” set to “Yes”.
3.3 Enabling a protection function

As an example, the following steps are required to enable differential protection in Setting
Group 1:
1. Firstly, differential protection settings must be enabled globally within the relay:
(056.027) “Settings/Configuration/DIFF: Differential PR (87)” set to “Enabled”
2. Then the differential protection must be enabled across the setting groups globally:
(019.080) “Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: General Enable USER” set to “Yes”
AP
3. Differential protection must then be enabled in the required setting group, e.g. SG1:
(072.152) “Settings/ Function Settings/Setting Group 1/DIFF: Enable SG1” set to “Yes”
The protection system settings for differential protection can then be set as required for the
particular installation with reference to the appropriate sections of this Technical Guide. The
above procedure is also required for configuring other types of protection such as
overcurrent, restricted earth fault, etc.
3.4 Configuring a trip command and output contact for CB tripping

It should be noted that the trip signals of the various protection functions are not suitable for
trip command purposes, due to their undefined timing. For command purposes, P63x
devices provide four trip commands.
The functions to effect a trip are selected from those available via the following setting, e.g.
for Trip Command 1:
(021.001) “Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1”
Having assigned the trip command, the corresponding signal may be assigned to the desired
output relay. It is recommended to use output relay 01 on the power supply module which
provides 2 N/O contacts, although any available contact in a P63x may be configured for
circuit breaker tripping.
For P632/P633/P634:
(151.201) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 2001” set to “Gen. Trip Command 1”
For P631:
(150.193) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 901” set to “Gen. Trip Command 1”
The closing pulse time of the output contact is then controlled by the setting:
(021.003) “Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: tDWELL Trip Cmd 1”
(AP) 6-34 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The logic equations should not be used for fast operating protection tripping functions, as
they may introduce a small delay in operation. Any grouping of trip commands should be
performed in the trip command described above.
3.5 Configuring a watchdog contact

It is recommended to use output relay 08 on the power supply module as the watchdog
contact:
For P632/P633/P634:
(151.222) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 2008” set to “MAIN Blocked/Faulty”
For P631:
(150.214) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 908” set to “MAIN Blocked/Faulty”
This output relay provides a C/O contact which should be programmed to changeover when
auxiliary power is applied and the relay has not detected any conditions preventing correct
operation of protection.
The operation mode for P632/P633/P634:
(151.223) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Oper. Mode K 2008” set to “Inverted”
For P631:
(150.215) “Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Oper. Mode K 908” set to “Inverted”
3.6 HMI read key assignment

The Read ckey may be assigned to display the most recent fault recordings by
AP configuring the following setting:
(080.110) “Settings/Configuration/HMI: Read Key Assignment” set to “OSCIL Fault Recording 1”
3.7 Operation panel configuration

The information displayed on the HMI LCD under normal operating conditions can be
configured via the setting:
(053.007) “Settings/Configuration/HMI: Operation Panel fct”
This enables display of e.g. load current, voltage, frequency measurements on the front
panel display during normal operation. When more than two measurements are selected the
HMI will cycle through the configured measurements at a rate set by:
(031.075) “Settings/Configuration/HMI: Panel Hold-Time”
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-35
4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

CT specification
IEC 60044-1 accuracy class 5P or equivalent.
Minimum knee-point voltage (IEC knee)
Differential protection
The required knee-point voltage must be calculated for phase fault current and also for the
earth fault current. The higher of the two calculated knee-point voltages is used.
The CT requirements are based on the default settings. For transformer differential
protection; Idiff> = 0.2 Iref, m1 = 0.3, m2 = 0.7, IR,m2 = 4 Iref, and for busbar differential
protection; Idiff> = 1.2 Iref, m1 = 0.2, m2 = 0.8, IR,m2 = 1.8 Iref.
Vk ≥ K × (Rct + Rl )
Phase fault differential protection
Earth fault differential protection

Vk ≥ K e × (Rct + 2Rl )
K is a constant depending on the maximum value of through fault current (as a multiple of In)
and the primary system X/R ratio. For phase faults, K is determined as follows:
When (If × X/R) ≤ 500 × In:
K = 0.14 × (If × X / R)
When 500 × In < (If × X/R) < 1200 × In:
K = 70 AP
For earth faults, Ke is determined as follows:
When (Ife × X/R) ≤ 500 × In:
K e = 0.14 × (Ife × X / R)
When 500 × In < (Ife × X/R) < 1200 × In:
K e = 70
Typical knee-point voltage requirement for transformer differential protection.

The through fault stability required for most transformer applications is determined by the
external through fault current and transformer X/R ratio. The through fault current in all but
ring bus or mesh fed transformers is given by the inverse of the per unit reactance of the
transformer. For most transformers, the reactance varies between 0.05 to 0.1pu, therefore
typical through fault current is given by 10 to 20In.
For conventional transformers (non-autotransformer), the X/R ratio is typically 7. This
cancels out the 0.14 multiplier, leaving only the maximum secondary through fault current (If)
to multiply with the loop resistance, giving:
Vk ≥ If × (Rct + 2Rl )
Alternatively, as a conservative estimate:
(Rct + 2Rl )
Vk ≥
Xt
Low impedance REF protection

The CT requirements for low impedance REF protection are generally lower than those for
differential protection. As the line CTs for low impedance REF protection are the same as
those used for differential protection the differential CT requirements cover both differential
and low impedance REF applications.
(AP) 6-36 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
High impedance REF protection

The high impedance REF element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in
less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following conditions are met in determining the
CT requirements and value of associated stabilizing resistor:
Vk > 2 × Idiff > × Rs

If
Rs = 1.1× × (Rct + 2Rl )
Idiff >
For faster operation of the REF element, a larger knee-point voltage will provide reduced
operating times. Refer to the graph below showing the operating time of the REF element
for differing ratios.
45
40
35
Operating time (ms)
30
25
20
AP 15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
Vk / (Idiff> × Rs)
Note: The diagram is the result of investigations which were carried out for
impedance ratios in the range of 5 to 120 and for fault currents in the
range of 0.5 to 40 In.
4.1 Knee point voltage offered by IEC “P” class CTs

Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated
can be used.
Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these
offer can be approximated from:
Vk = (VA x ALF)/In + (RCT x ALF x In)
Where:
VA = Voltampere burden rating,
ALF = Accuracy Limit Factor,
In = CT nominal secondary current.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (AP) 6-37
4.2 Use of ANSI/IEEE CTs

Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be
checked to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC). The
equivalence formula is:
Vk = [ (C rating in volts) x 1.05 ] + [ 100 x RCT ]
AP
(AP) 6-38 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
5. AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING

It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring is protected by fuses of standard ratings
between 6A and 16A. Low voltage fuse-links rated for 250V minimum and compliant with
IEC60269-1 general application type gG with high rupturing capacity are acceptable. This
gives equivalent characteristics to HRC "Red Spot" fuse types NIT/TIA often specified
historically.
Where only one or two relays are wired as a fused spur, it is acceptable to use a 6A rating.
Generally, five relays could be connected on a spur protected at 10A, and ten relays for a
15/16A fuse.
Alternatively, miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply
circuits.
AP
Measurements and Recording P63x/UK MR/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MEASUREMENTS AND MR
RECORDING

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK MR/A54 Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MR
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-1
CONTENTS
(MR) 7-
1. MEASUREMENTS + TESTS 5
1.1 Measurements 5
1.1.1 Analog readings 5
1.1.1.1 Temperature & DC monitoring measurements (RTDmA) 5
1.1.1.2 Analog output channel measurements (mA_OP) 6
1.1.1.3 General measurements (MAIN) 6
1.1.1.4 Differential protection measurements (DIFF) 15
1.1.1.5 Restricted earth fault protection measurements (REF_) 16
1.1.1.6 Thermal overload protection measurements (THRM) 16
1.1.1.7 Overfluxing protection measurements (V/f) 18
1.1.2 I.O. status monitor 18
1.1.2.1 Ethernet GOOSE I/O status signals (GOOSE) 18
1.1.2.2 Ethernet GSSE I/O status signals (GSSE) 19
1.1.2.3 Opto input status signals (INP) 21

MR
1.1.2.4 Output relay status signals (OUTP) 22
1.1.2.5 LED status signals (LED) 23
1.1.3 Log. state signals 23
1.1.3.1 Local control panel status signals (HMI) 23
1.1.3.2 Rear port communication status signals (COMM1) 23
1.1.3.3 Ethernet communication status signals (IEC/GOOSE/GSSE) 24
1.1.3.4 IRIG-B time synchronization status signals (IRIGB) 25
1.1.3.5 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (RTDmA) 25
1.1.3.6 Output relay status signals (OUTP) 25
1.1.3.7 Analog output channel status signals (mA_OP) 26
1.1.3.8 General status signals (MAIN) 27
1.1.3.9 Setting group selection status signals (GROUP) 30
1.1.3.10 Self testing and diagnostics status signals (CHECK) 32
1.1.3.11 Overload recording status signals (OL_RC) 39
1.1.3.12 Disturbance recorder status signals (OSCIL) 39
1.1.3.13 Differential protection status signals (DIFF) 40
1.1.3.14 Restricted earth fault protection status signals (REF_) 41

(MR) 7-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.3.15 Definite time overcurrent protection status signals (DTOC) 41
1.1.3.16 Inverse time overcurrent protection status signals (IDMT) 48
1.1.3.17 Thermal overload protection status signals (THRM) 51
1.1.3.18 Under/overvoltage protection status signals (V<>) 53
1.1.3.19 Frequency protection status signals (f<>) 54
1.1.3.20 Overfluxing protection status signals (V/f) 55
1.1.3.21 Current transformer supervision status signals (CTS) 56
1.1.3.22 Broken conductor detection status signals (BC_) 57
1.1.3.23 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (LIMIT) 58
1.1.3.24 Phase current monitoring status signals (LIM_) 59
1.1.3.25 Programmable logic status signals (LOGIC) 60
1.2 Control and testing 62
1.2.1 Local control panel settings enable (HMI) 62
1.2.2 Main rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM1) 63
1.2.3 2nd rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM2) 63
1.2.4 Ethernet communication control and testing commands (GSSE) 63
1.2.5 Output relay control and testing commands (OUTP) 65
MR 1.2.6 Analog output channel control and testing commands (mA_OP) 65
1.2.7 General control and testing commands (MAIN) 66
1.2.8 Operating data control and testing commands (OP_RC) 67
1.2.9 Monitoring signal control and testing commands (MT_RC) 67
1.2.10 Overload recording control and testing commands (OL_RC) 67
1.2.11 Disturbance recorder control and testing commands (OSCIL) 68
1.2.12 Thermal overload control and testing commands (THRM) 68
1.2.13 Frequency protection control and testing commands (f<>) 68
1.2.14 Overfluxing protection control and testing commands (V/f) 69
1.2.15 Current transformer supervision control and testing commands (CTS) 69
1.2.16 Programmable logic control and testing commands (LOGIC) 69
1.3 Operating data rec. 69
1.3.1 Operating data record no. (OP_RC) 69
1.3.2 Monitoring signal record no. (MT_RC) 70
2. FAULT + EVENT RECORD 71

2.1 Fault, event counters 71
2.1.1 General counters (MAIN) 71
2.1.2 Operating data recording counter (OP_RC) 71

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-3
2.1.3 Monitoring signal recording counter (MT_RC) 71
2.1.4 Overload recording counter (OL_RC) 72
2.1.5 Disturbance recording counter (MT_RC) 72
2.1.6 Definite time overcurrent counter (DTOC) 72
2.1.7 Inverse time overcurrent counter (IDMT) 73
2.2 Fault, oload records 73
2.2.1 Overload data acquisition (OL_DA) 73
2.2.2 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA) 75
2.2.3 Frequency acquisition limits (f<>) 79
2.3 Disturbance oscillo 79
2.3.1 Overload recording acquisition (OL_RC) 79
2.3.2 Disturbance recording acquisition (OSCIL) 80
MR
(MR) 7-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MR
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-5
1. MEASUREMENTS + TESTS
1.1 Measurements
1.1.1 Analog readings
1.1.1.1 Temperature & DC monitoring measurements (RTDmA)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings
RTDmA: Current IDC 0.00 mA 24.00 mA 0.01 mA
OP Fig.
004 134 Read only
102
Display of the input current.
0.00 1.20 0.01
RTDmA: Current IDC p.u.
IDC,nom IDC,nom IDC,nom
OP Fig.
004 135 Read only
102
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
0.00 1.20 0.01
RTDmA: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
IDC,nom IDC,nom IDC,nom
OP Fig.
004 136 Read only
102
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom. MR
RTDmA: Scaled Value IDC,lin -32000 32000 1
OP Fig.
004 180 Read only
103
Display of the scaled linearized value.
RTDmA: Temperature -40.0 °C 215.0 °C 0.1 °C
OP Fig.
004 133 Read only
104
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.
RTDmA: Temperature p.u. -0.40 2.15 0.01
OP Fig.
004 221 Read only
104
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer as a per unit value.
(MR) 7-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.1.2 Analog output channel measurements (mA_OP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
mA_OP: Current A-1 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
OP Fig.
005 100 Read only
112
mA_OP: Current A-2 0.00 mA 20.00 mA 0.01 mA
OP Fig.
005 099 Read only
112
Display of the output current for analog measured value output (A-1: channel 1, A-2:
channel 2)
1.1.1.3 General measurements (MAIN)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Date - - dd.mm.yy
OP Fig.
003 090
138
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.

MR
MAIN: Time - - hh:mm:ss
OP Fig.
003 091
138
Display of the time of day.
Note: The time can also be set here.
Standard Time
MAIN: Time Switching -
Daylight Saving Time
OP Fig.
003 095
138
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times assigned to signals
and event data that can be read out through the PC or communication interfaces.
MAIN: Frequency f 40.00 Hz 70.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
OP Fig.
004 040 Read only
125
Display of system frequency.
MAIN: Iph, Max now, a prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 101 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph, Max now, b prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 102 Read only
119
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-7
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Iph, Max now, c prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 103 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph, Max now, d prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 115 Read only
119
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity for each end.
MAIN: Iph Therm dem a prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 162 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem b prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 162 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem c prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
007 162 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem d prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
008 162 Read only
119
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary
quantity. Alternatively known as a “thermal ammeter”.
MAIN: Iph Therm pk a prim 0A 25000 A 1A MR
OP Fig.
005 161 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm pk b prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 161 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm pk c prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
007 161 Read only
119
MAIN: Iph Therm pk d prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
008 161 Read only
119
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a
primary quantity (thermal maximum demand).
MAIN: Current Imin,a prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 104 Read only
119
MAIN: Current Imin,b prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 105 Read only
119
MAIN: Current Imin,c prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 106 Read only
119
(MR) 7-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Current Imin,d prim 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 117 Read only
119
Display of the minimum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary
quantity.
MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 021 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 021 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
007 021 Read only
119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end a.
MAIN: Current IA,b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 022 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 022 Read only
119
MR MAIN: Current IC,b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A

OP Fig.
007 022 Read only
119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end b.
MAIN: Current IA,c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 023 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 023 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
007 023 Read only
119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end c.
MAIN: Current IA,d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 024 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
006 024 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
007 024 Read only
119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end d.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-9
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Current I2 a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 125 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 129 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 136 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 140 Read only
Display of negative sequence currents as a primary quantity for each end.
MAIN: Current I1 a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 127 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 134 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 138 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
005 146 Read only
Display of positive sequence currents as a primary quantity for each end.
MAIN: Current IN,a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
MR
OP Fig.
005 121 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 122 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 123 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,d prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 124 Read only
122
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents
as a primary quantity for each end.
MAIN: Current IY,a prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 131 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IY,b prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 132 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IY,c prim. 0A 25000 A 1A
OP Fig.
005 133 Read only
121
Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14 as a primary quantity for
each end.
(MR) 7-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Voltage V prim. 0.0 kV 2500.0 kV 0.1 kV
OP Fig.
005 118 Read only
124
Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,apu 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 111 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,bpu 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 112 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,cpu 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 113 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,dpu 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 116 Read only
119, 120
Display of the maximum phase current for each end as referred to In, or per unit.
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.a 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 163 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.b 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
MR OP Fig.
006 163 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.c 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 163 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.d 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
008 163 Read only
119, 120
Display of the delayed maximum phase current for each end as referred to In.
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peaka 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 160 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakb 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
006 160 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakc 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 160 Read only
119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakd 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
008 160 Read only
119, 120
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current for each end as referred to In.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-11
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Current Imin,a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 107 Read only
119
MAIN: Current Imin,b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 108 Read only
119
MAIN: Current Imin,c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 109 Read only
119
MAIN: Current Imin,d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 118 Read only
119
Display of the minimum phase current for each end as referred to In.
MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 031 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
006 031 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 031 Read only
119 MR
Display of phase currents, end a, as referred to In.
MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 032 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
006 032 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 032 Read only
119
Display of phase currents, end b, as referred to In.
MAIN: Current IA,c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 033 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IB,c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
006 033 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 033 Read only
119
Display of phase currents, end c, as referred to In.
MAIN: Current IA,d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 039 Read only
119
(MR) 7-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Current IB,d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
006 034 Read only
119
MAIN: Current IC,d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 034 Read only
119
Display of phase currents, end d, as referred to In.
MAIN: Current I2 a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 126 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 130 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 137 Read only
MAIN: Current I2 d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 145 Read only
Display of negative sequence currents for each end in per unit.
MAIN: Current I1 a p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 128 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 b p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
MR 005 135 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 c p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 139 Read only
MAIN: Current I1 d p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 147 Read only
Display of positive sequence currents for each end in per unit.
MAIN: Current IN,a p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 141 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,b p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 142 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,c p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 143 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IN,d p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 144 Read only
122
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents
for each end as referred to In.
MAIN: Current IY,a p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 151 Read only
121
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-13
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Current IY,b p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 152 Read only
121
MAIN: Current IY,c p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 153 Read only
121
Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14 for each end as referred to
In.
MAIN: Iph,max,add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 114 Read only
123
Display of the maximum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end
is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation.
MAIN: Iph,min,add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 110 Read only
123
Display of the minimum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end
MAIN: Current IA,add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
005 038 Read only
123
MAIN: Current IB,add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
MR
OP Fig.
006 038 Read only
123
MAIN: Current IC,add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
OP Fig.
007 038 Read only
123
Display of phase currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed
according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation.
MAIN: Curr. I2, add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 149 Read only
Display of negative sequence currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end
MAIN: Curr. I1, add p.u. 0.00 In 25.00 In 0.01 In
005 150 Read only
Display of positive sequence currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end
MAIN: Current IN,add p.u. 0.000 In 25.000 In 0.001 In
OP Fig.
005 155 Read only
123
Display of residual current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed
according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation.
MAIN: Voltage V p.u. 0.00 Vn 25.00 Vn 0.01 Vn
OP Fig.
005 019 Read only
123
Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as referred to Vn.
(MR) 7-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 089 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 089 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 089 Read only
126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end a.
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 092 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 092 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 092 Read only
126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end b.
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end c -180 ° 180 ° 1°
MR OP Fig.
005 093 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end c -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 093 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end c -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 093 Read only
126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end c.
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end d -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 095 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end d -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 095 Read only
126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end d -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 095 Read only
126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end d.
MAIN: Angle phi A, end b-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 090 Read only
127
MAIN: Angle phi A, end c-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 091 Read only
127
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-15
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Angle phi A, end d-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 094 Read only
127
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase A.
MAIN: Angle phi B, end b-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 090 Read only
127
MAIN: Angle phi B, end c-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 091 Read only
127
MAIN: Angle phi B, end d-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
006 094 Read only
127
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase B.
MAIN: Angle phi C, end b-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 090 Read only
127
MAIN: Angle phi C, end c-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
007 091 Read only
127
MAIN: Angle phi C, end d-a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig. MR
007 094 Read only
127
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase C.
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 077 Read only
128
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 078 Read only
128
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end c -180 ° 180 ° 1°
OP Fig.
005 079 Read only
128
Display of the phase shift between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the
sum of the phase currents at each end and the current measured at transformer T14.
1.1.1.4 Differential protection measurements (DIFF)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DIFF: Diff Current 1 0.000 Iref 40.000 Iref 0.001 Iref
(MR) 7-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Display of the differential current for each measuring system, as referred to Iref.
DIFF: Restrain Current 1 0.000 Iref 40.000 Iref 0.001 Iref
Display of the restraining current for each measuring system, as referred to Iref.
1.1.1.5 Restricted earth fault protection measurements (REF_)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
REF_1: Diff. Current, REF_1 0.00 Iref 20.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
REF_2: Diff. Current, REF_2 0.00 Iref 20.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
MR REF_3: Diff. Current, REF_3 0.00 Iref 20.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
Display of the differential current, as referred to Iref.
REF_1: Restrain Curr.,REF_1 0.00 Iref 20.00 Iref 0.01 Iref
Display of the restraining current, as referred to Iref.
1.1.1.6 Thermal overload protection measurements (THRM)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
THRM1: Status Replica, TH1 -25000 % 25000 % 1%
THRM2: Status Replica, TH2 -25000 % 25000 % 1%
THRM1: Object Temperat.,TH1 -40 °C 300 °C 1 °C

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-17
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
THRM2: Object Temperat.,TH2 -40 °C 300 °C 1 °C
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1.
THRM1: Coolant Temp. TH1 -40 °C 200 °C 1 °C
THRM2: Coolant Temp. TH2 -40 °C 200 °C 1 °C

Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at THRM1: Select CT
Ambient SGx for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be
displayed:
• Setting Default Temp. Value: Display of the set temperature value.
• Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the

resistance thermometer.
• Setting From 20 mA Input: Display of the temperature measured via the

20 mA input.
THRM1: Pre-Trip t. Left,TH1 0.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min

THRM2: Pre-Trip t. Left,TH2 0.0 min 1000.0 min 0.1 min
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function will reach the MR
tripping threshold.
THRM1: Therm. Repl. p.u.TH1 -25.00 25.00 0.01
THRM2: Therm. Repl. p.u.TH2 -25.00 25.00 0.01
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
THRM1: Object Temp. p.u. 1 -0.04 100°C 0.30 100°C 0.01 100°C
THRM2: Object Temp. p.u. 2 -0.04 100°C 0.30 100°C 0.01 100°C
THRM1: Coolant Temp. p.u. 1 -0.04 100°C 0.20 100°C 0.01 100°C
THRM2: Coolant Temp. p.u. 2 -0.04 100°C 0.20 100°C 0.01 100°C
THRM1: Temp. Offset Repl. 1 -25000 % 25000 % 1%
(MR) 7-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
THRM2: Temp. Offset Repl. 2 -25000 % 25000 % 1%
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This
display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted
downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant
temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken
into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve
amounts to 0 in this case.
1.1.1.7 Overfluxing protection measurements (V/f)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
V/f: Excitation V/f p.u. 0.00 10.00 0.01
V/f: Status Replica in % 0% 100 % 1%
V/f: Status Replica p.u. 0.00 1.00 0.01
MR 1.1.2 I.O. status monitor
1.1.2.1 Ethernet GOOSE I/O status signals (GOOSE)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor
GOOSE: Out 1 (…32) State 0 1 1
See table below for status addresses. Read only
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
Menu Text Address Menu Text Address Menu Text Address
GOOSE Out 1 State 106 010 GOOSE Out 12 State 106 032 GOOSE Out 23 State 106 054
GOOSE Out 11 State 106 030 GOOSE Out 22 State 106 052
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-19
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
GOOSE: Inp 1 (…16) State 0 1 1
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
Menu Text Address Menu Text Address
GOOSE Inp 1 State 106 200 GOOSE Inp 12 State 106 211
GOOSE Inp 6 State 106 205
1.1.2.2 Ethernet GSSE I/O status signals (GSSE)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor MR
GSSE: Out 1 (…32) State 0 1 1
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
GSSE Out 1 State 104 100 GSSE Out 12 State 104 133 GSSE Out 23 State 104 166
GSSE Out 11 State 104 130 GSSE Out 22 State 104 163
(MR) 7-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
GSSE: Inp 1 (…32) State 0 1 1
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
GSSE Inp 1 State 105 000 GSSE Inp 12 State 105 055 GSSE Inp 23 State 105 110
GSSE Inp 11 State 105 050 GSSE Inp 22 State 105 105
MR
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-21
1.1.2.3 Opto input status signals (INP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Disabled
INP: State U 701 (…2004) Low -
High
See table below for status addresses. Read only OP Fig. 98
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
Disabled: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input
Low: Not energized
High: Energized
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
State U 701 152 108 State U 821 184 081 State U 1409 190 033
MR
(MR) 7-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.2.4 Output relay status signals (OUTP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Disabled
OUTP: State K 701 (…2008) -
Enabled
OP Fig.
105
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
Disabled: No functions are assigned to the output relay
Low: The output relay is not energized
High: The output relay is energized
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
State K 701 150 144 State K 908 150 213 State K 1607 171 025
MR State K 801 150 168 State K 1008 150 237 State K 2001 151 200
State K 907 150 210 State K 1606 171 021

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-23
1.1.2.5 LED status signals (LED)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Disabled
LED: State H 2 (…16) -
Enabled
OP Fig.
113
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
Disabled: The LED indicator is not energized
Enabled: The LED indicator is energized
State H 2 085 000 State H 7 085 015 State H 12 085 030
1.1.3 Log. state signals
1.1.3.1 Local control panel status signals (HMI)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MR
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals
HMI: Illumination on EXT No Yes -
037 101 Read only
Binary input/other logic is asserting switch-on of the LCD backlight.
1.1.3.2 Rear port communication status signals (COMM1)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
COMM1: Command Block. EXT No Yes -
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on all command (remote) operations for COMM
port 1. Prevents remote control via COMM1.
COMM1: Sig/meas. Block EXT No Yes -
OP Fig. 88,
037 074 Read only
89, 90
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on all transmission of data/measurements via
COMM1.
COMM1: Command Blocking No Yes -
(MR) 7-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
COMM1: Sig/meas. val.Block No Yes -
OP Fig. 88,
037 075 Read only
89, 90
The two addresses above indicate the overall status of read (signal/measured value) and
write (command) permission via protocol, for COMM1.
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 No Yes -
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 No Yes -
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS No Yes -
COMM1: MODBUS No Yes -
COMM1: DNP3 No Yes -
COMM1: COURIER No Yes -
Addresses to indicate the protocol in operation for COMMS port 1.
1.1.3.3 Ethernet communication status signals (IEC/GOOSE/GSSE)

MR Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IEC: Comm. Link Faulty No Yes -
105 180 Read only
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing, or there is a non-plausible setting combination applied.
GOOSE: IED Link Faulty No Yes -
107 250 Read only
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED
situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE
the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE
will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
GSSE: IED Link Faulty No Yes -
105 181 Read only
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED
situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the
GSSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be
carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-25
1.1.3.4 IRIG-B time synchronization status signals (IRIGB)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IRIGB: Enabled No Yes -
IRIGB: Synchron. Ready No Yes -
IRIG-B time synchronizing signals are being received correctly.
1.1.3.5 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (RTDmA)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
RTDmA: Enabled No Yes -
RTDmA: PT100 Faulty No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 190 Read only
104
RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 191 Read only
102
MR
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp. No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 192 Read only
102
1.1.3.6 Output relay status signals (OUTP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OUTP: Block Outp.Rel. EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 014 Read only
105
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on operation of output contacts possibly as
required for a commissioning/test operation.
OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 015 Read only
105
Binary input/other logic is acting to reset latched output contacts.
OUTP: Outp. Relays Blocked No Yes -
OP Fig.
021 015 Read only
105
(MR) 7-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OUTP: Latching Reset No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 088 Read only
105
The two addresses above indicate the global status of relay contact blocking, and the
command to reset latched contacts.
1.1.3.7 Analog output channel status signals (mA_OP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
mA_OP: Enabled No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 102 Read only
107
mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 085 Read only
108
mA_OP: Reset Output EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 087 Read only
109
mA_OP: Output Reset No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 117 Read only
MR 109
mA_OP: Valid BCD Value No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 050 Read only
110
mA_OP: 1-digit Bit 0 (BCD) No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 051 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 052 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 053 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 054 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 055 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 056 Read only
110
OP Fig.
037 057 Read only
110
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-27
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OP Fig.
037 058 Read only
110
mA_OP: 100-dig. Bit 0 (BCD) No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 059 Read only
110
mA_OP: 100-dig. Bit 1 (BCD) No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 060 Read only
110
Previous addresses indicate the current loop output of units, tens and hundreds for
binary-coded decimal.
mA_OP: Value A-1 Valid No Yes -
OP Fig.
069 014 Read only
112
mA_OP: Value A-2 Valid No Yes -
OP Fig.
069 015 Read only
112
mA_OP: Value A-1 Output No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 118 Read only
112
mA_OP: Value A-2 Output No Yes -
037 119 Read only

OP Fig.
112
MR
1.1.3.8 General status signals (MAIN)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2 No Yes -
Trip signals for application of REF on auto-transformers.
MAIN: Phase Reversal Activ No Yes -
036 220 Read only
Indicates whether phase swapping for CTs is in force.
No
MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT Yes -
Not Configured
OP Fig.
003 027 Read only
129
(MR) 7-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
No
MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT Yes -
Not Configured
OP Fig.
003 026 Read only
129
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 060 Read only
131
OP Fig.
040 061 Read only
131
OP Fig.
040 116 Read only
131
OP Fig.
040 117 Read only
131
MAIN: Reset Latch.Trip EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 138 Read only
135
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Block. EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
135
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT No Yes -
OP Fig. 47,
004 061 Read only
53
An auxiliary contact from an external MCB indicates that the VT input may be unreliable.
MAIN: Switch Dyn Param.EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 033 Read only
130
MAIN: Man. Trip Cmd. EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 018 Read only
135
MAIN: Test Mode EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 070 Read only
141
Binary input/other logic is being used to signal via IEC-60870-5-103 protocol that the relay
is undergoing some kind of testing operation, and the remote operator’s need to be
notified.
MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
065 001 Read only
140
MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
060 060 Read only
138
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-29
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Enabled No Yes -
OP Fig.
003 028 Read only
129
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Disabled No Yes -
OP Fig.
038 046 Read only
129
MAIN: Protect. Not Ready No Yes -
OP Fig.
004 060 Read only
132
MAIN: Test Mode No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 071 Read only
141
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty No Yes -
OP Fig.
004 065 Read only
132
MAIN: CT Fail Alarm No Yes -
036 155 Read only
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked No Yes -
OP Fig.
021 013 Read only
135
MAIN: Latch. Trip c Reset No Yes -
OP Fig. MR
040 139 Read only
135
MAIN: Manual Trip Signal No Yes -
OP Fig.
034 017 Read only
135
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 251 Read only
135
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1 No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 005 Read only
135
OP Fig.
036 023 Read only
135
OP Fig.
036 108 Read only
135
OP Fig.
036 109 Read only
135
MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 1 No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 071 Read only
135
(MR) 7-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OP Fig.
036 022 Read only
135
OP Fig.
036 113 Read only
135
OP Fig.
036 114 Read only
135
MAIN: General Start No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 000 Read only
133
MAIN: Dynam. Setts. Active No Yes -
OP Fig.
040 090 Read only
130
MAIN: Disabled No Yes -
060 000 Read only
MAIN: Disabled No Yes -
061 000 Read only
Unused.
MAIN: Auxiliary Address No Yes -
MR
038 000 Read only
1.1.3.9 Setting group selection status signals (GROUP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
GROUP: Control Via User EXT No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 101 Read only
142
No
GROUP: Activate Grp 1 EXT Yes -
Not Configured
OP Fig.
065 002 Read only
142
No
Not Configured
OP Fig.
065 003 Read only
142
No
Not Configured
OP Fig.
065 004 Read only
142
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-31
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
No
Not Configured
OP Fig.
065 005 Read only
142
GROUP: Control Via user No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 102 Read only
142
No Set Grp Selected
Setting Group SG1
GROUP: Ext.sel. Settg. Grp Setting Group SG2 -
Setting Group SG3
Setting Group SG4
OP Fig.
003 061 Read only
142
GROUP: Grp1 Activated Ext. No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 094 Read only
142
OP Fig.
036 095 Read only
142
OP Fig.
036 096 Read only
142 MR
OP Fig.
036 097 Read only
142
Setting Group SG1
Setting Group SG2
GROUP: Actual Setting Group -
Setting Group SG3
Setting Group SG4
OP Fig.
003 062 Read only
142
GROUP: Group 1 Active No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 090 Read only
142
OP Fig.
036 091 Read only
142
OP Fig.
036 092 Read only
142
OP Fig.
036 093 Read only
142
(MR) 7-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.3.10 Self testing and diagnostics status signals (CHECK)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: Faulty DSP No Yes -
093 127 Read only
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. DSP No Yes -
093 128 Read only
CHECK: Alarm (LED) No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 070 Read only
143
Alarm configured for LED H3.
CHECK: Alarm (Relay) No Yes -
OP Fig.
036 100 Read only
143
Alarm configured for an output relay.
CHECK: Warm Restart Exec. No Yes -
041 202 Read only
CHECK: Cold Restart Exec. No Yes -
041 201 Read only
CHECK: Cold Restart No Yes -
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the memory
(NOVRAM).
CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update No Yes -
093 025 Read only
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure No Yes -
090 019 Read only
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty No Yes -
041 200 Read only
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail No Yes -
093 040 Read only
The hardware clock has failed.
CHECK: Battery Failure No Yes -
090 010 Read only
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery inside power supply module “V”.
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded No Yes -
096 121 Read only
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-33
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty No Yes -
093 081 Read only
The + 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
CHECK: +24V Supply Faulty No Yes -
093 082 Read only
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty No Yes -
093 080 Read only
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 (…21) No Yes -
See table below for measurement
Read only
addresses.
Module in wrong slot.
Wrong Module Slot 1 096 100 Wrong Module Slot 8 096 107 Wrong Module Slot 15 096 114
MR
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 (…21) No Yes -

Read only
addresses.
Defective module in slot x.
Defect.Module Slot 1 097 000 Defect.Module Slot 8 097 007 Defect.Module Slot15 097 014
Defect.Module Slot 2 097 001 Defect.Module Slot 9 097 008 Defect.Module Slot16 097 015
Defect.Module Slot 3 097 002 Defect.Module Slot10 097 009 Defect.Module Slot17 097 016
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty No Yes -

093 070 Read only
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected during device
startup.
CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty No Yes -
093 071 Read only
RAM fault on communication module A.
(MR) 7-34 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty No Yes -
093 110 Read only
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data transmission
of the Dual-Port-RAM.
CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty No Yes -
093 111 Read only
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
CHECK: Error K 701 (…2008) No Yes -
Read only
addresses.
Self checking error indication of output relays. Output relay K xxx defective.
Error K 701 097 078 Error K 908 097 101 Error K 1607 097 156
MR Error K 801 097 086 Error K 1008 097 109 Error K 2001 097 182
Error K 907 097 100 Error K 1606 097 155
CHECK: Undefined Op Code No Yes -

093 010 Read only
Undefined operation code, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Invalid Op No Yes -
093 011 Read only
Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt No Yes -
093 012 Read only
Undefined Interrupt, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. No Yes -
093 013 Read only
Interrupt of the operating system.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-35
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: Protection Failure No Yes -
090 021 Read only
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routine. It has detected an error.
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error No Yes -
090 003 Read only
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been detected.
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error No Yes -
093 041 Read only
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the time of day
given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than 10 ms.
CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM No Yes -
093 026 Read only
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor module or the
power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital). This fault is only detected
during device startup. After the fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This
means that all records are deleted.
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC No Yes -
OP Fig.
090 012 Read only
145
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block. No Yes - MR
093 015 Read only
Software overload.
CHECK: Inval. SW vers.comm. No Yes -
093 075 Read only
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y No Yes -
093 113 Read only
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module has been downloaded.
CHECK: Time-out Module Y No Yes -
093 112 Read only
CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V No Yes -
098 000 Read only
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm No Yes -
091 018 Read only
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end a No Yes -
091 026 Read only
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end b No Yes -
091 027 Read only
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end c No Yes -
091 028 Read only
(MR) 7-36 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end d No Yes -
091 029 Read only
CHECK: Invalid Charact. V/f No Yes -
091 011 Read only
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1 No Yes -
OP Fig.
093 114 Read only
112
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2 No Yes -
OP Fig.
093 115 Read only
112
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of analog I/O
module Y.
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC No Yes -
OP Fig.
093 116 Read only
102
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O module Y.
CHECK: PT100 open Circuit No Yes -
OP Fig.
098 024 Read only
104
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance thermometer.
MR CHECK: Overload 20 mA input No Yes -

OP Fig.
098 025 Read only
102
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp. No Yes -
OP Fig.
098 026 Read only
102
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
CHECK: Setting Error f<> No Yes -
The over/underfrequency protection function has been set to "overfrequency" (by way of
the settings for operate threshold and nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f
with Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
CHECK: Iref, a Inval. Range No Yes -
CHECK: Iref, b Inval. Range No Yes -
CHECK: Iref, c Inval. Range No Yes -
CHECK: Iref, d Inval. Range No Yes -
The reference current determined by the P63x for differential protection is not within the
permissible range.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-37
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: Output 30 No Yes -
098 053 Read only
098 055 Read only
098 057 Read only
CHECK: Output 30 (t) No Yes -
098 054 Read only
098 056 Read only
098 058 Read only
CHECK: Matching Fail. end a No Yes -
CHECK: Matching Fail. end b No Yes -
CHECK: Matching Fail. end c No Yes -
CHECK: Matching Fail. end d No Yes -
MR
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is outside
the permissible range.
CHECK: Ratio mtch.Fact.inv. No Yes -
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the differential protection function is above
the permissible range.
CHECK: 2nd Match.Fact. inv. No Yes -
The medium amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is lower than
permitted.
CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_1 No Yes -
The reference current determined by the P63x for restricted earth fault protection is not
within the permissible range.
CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 No Yes -
(MR) 7-38 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is
outside the permissible range.
CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 No Yes -
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is
outside the permissible range.
CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_1 No Yes -
MR 091 123 Read only OP Fig. 15
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the restricted earth fault protection function is
above the permissible range.
CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_1 No Yes -
The lowest amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is
lower than permitted.
CHECK: CTA Error THRM1 No Yes -
CHECK: CTA Error THRM2 No Yes -
Faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
CHECK: Setting Error THRM1 No Yes -
CHECK: Setting Error THRM2 No Yes -
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible coolant
temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-39
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync No Yes -
093 120 Read only
Function MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT has been configured to a binary input of analog I/O
module Y.
1.1.3.11 Overload recording status signals (OL_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OL_RC: Record. in Progress No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 003 Read only
148
OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 007 Read only
149
1.1.3.12 Disturbance recorder status signals (OSCIL)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OSCIL: Trigger EXT No Yes - MR
OP Fig.
036 089 Read only
155
OSCIL: Trigger No Yes -
OP Fig.
037 076 Read only
155
OSCIL: Id> Triggered No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 018 Read only
155
OSCIL: IR> Triggered No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 019 Read only
155
OSCIL: Record. in Progress No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 000 Read only
155
OSCIL: System Disturb. Runn No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 004 Read only
155
OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 001 Read only
156
OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag No Yes -
OP Fig.
035 002 Read only
149
(MR) 7-40 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.3.13 Differential protection status signals (DIFF)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DIFF: Enabled No Yes -
DIFF: Starting No Yes -
041 106 Read only
Instantaneous start indication of the differential protection.
DIFF: Meas System 1 Trigg. No Yes -
DIFF: Id>> Triggered No Yes -
DIFF: Id>>> Triggered No Yes -
DIFF: Harm. Block 1 Trigg. No Yes -
MR 041 118 Read only OP Fig. 10
DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 Trigg. No Yes -
DIFF: Sat.Discr. 1 Trigg. No Yes -
DIFF: Trip Signal No Yes -
DIFF: Trip Signal 1 No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-41
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
1.1.3.14 Restricted earth fault protection status signals (REF_)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
REF_1: Enabled No Yes -
REF_1: Trip Signal No Yes -
OP Fig.
041 016 Read only
133 MR
OP Fig.
041 067 Read only
133
1.1.3.15 Definite time overcurrent protection status signals (DTOC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT No Yes -
(MR) 7-42 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tI2> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tI2>> EXT No Yes -
MR DTOC1: Block. tI2>>> EXT No Yes -

DTOC2: Block. tI2>>> EXT No Yes -
DTOC3: Block. tI2>>> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT No Yes -
DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-43
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Enabled No Yes -
DTOC1: General Start No Yes -
DTOC1: tGS Elapsed No Yes -
MR
DTOC1: Starting A No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting B No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting C No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting N No Yes -
(MR) 7-44 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Starting I> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting I>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting I>>> No Yes -
MR DTOC2: Starting I>>> No Yes -

DTOC3: Starting I>>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>>> No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-45
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Starting I2 No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting I2> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting I2>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting I2>>> No Yes -
MR
DTOC1: tI2> Elapsed No Yes -
DTOC1: tI2>> Elapsed No Yes -
DTOC1: tI2>>> Elapsed No Yes -
(MR) 7-46 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2>>> No Yes -
DTOC2: Trip Signal tI2>>> No Yes -
MR DTOC3: Trip Signal tI2>>> No Yes -

DTOC1: Starting IN> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting IN>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Starting IN>>> No Yes -
DTOC1: tIN> Elapsed No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-47
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
DTOC1: tIN>> Elapsed No Yes -
DTOC1: tIN>>> Elapsed No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN> No Yes -
MR
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN>> No Yes -
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN>>> No Yes -
(MR) 7-48 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.1.3.16 Inverse time overcurrent protection status signals (IDMT)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Block. tIref,Ph> EXT No Yes -
IDMT1: Block. tIref,I2> EXT No Yes -
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT No Yes -
IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT No Yes -
MR IDMT3: Block. tIref,N> EXT No Yes -
IDMT1: Enabled No Yes -
IDMT1: General Start No Yes -
IDMT1: tGS Elapsed No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-49
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Starting Iref,Ph> No Yes -
IDMT1: Starting Iref,A> No Yes -
IDMT1: Starting Iref,B> No Yes -
IDMT1: Starting Iref,C> No Yes -
MR
IDMT1: tIref, Ph> Elapsed No Yes -
IDMT1: Hold Time Ph Running No Yes -
IDMT1: Memory Ph Clear No Yes -
(MR) 7-50 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Starting Iref, I2> No Yes -
IDMT1: tIref, I2> Elapsed No Yes -
IDMT1: Trip Sig. tIref, I2> No Yes -
IDMT2: Trip Sig. tIref, I2> No Yes -
MR IDMT3: Trip Sig. tIref, I2> No Yes -

IDMT1: Hold Time I2 Runn. No Yes -
IDMT1: Memory I2 Clear No Yes -
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N> No Yes -
IDMT1: tIref,N> Elapsed No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-51
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
IDMT1: Trip Signal tIref,N> No Yes -
IDMT1: Hold Time N Running No Yes -
IDMT1: Memory N Clear No Yes -
MR
1.1.3.17 Thermal overload protection status signals (THRM)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
THRM1: Replica Block EXT No Yes -
THRM2: Replica Block EXT No Yes -
THRM1: CTA Error EXT No Yes -
THRM2: CTA Error EXT No Yes -
THRM1: Reset Replica EXT No Yes -
THRM2: Reset Replica EXT No Yes -
(MR) 7-52 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
THRM1: Enabled No Yes -
THRM2: Enabled No Yes -
THRM1: Not Ready No Yes -
THRM2: Not Ready No Yes -
THRM1: Reset Replica No Yes -
THRM2: Reset Replica No Yes -
THRM1: Buffer Empty No Yes -
THRM2: Buffer Empty No Yes -
THRM1: CTA Error No Yes -
MR THRM2: CTA Error No Yes -

THRM1: Starting k*Iref> No Yes -
THRM2: Starting k*Iref> No Yes -
THRM1: Within Pre-trip Time No Yes -
THRM2: Within Pre-trip Time No Yes -
THRM1: Alarm No Yes -
THRM2: Alarm No Yes -
THRM1: Trip Signal No Yes -
THRM2: Trip Signal No Yes -
THRM1: Setting Error,Block. No Yes -
THRM2: Setting Error,Block. No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-53
1.1.3.18 Under/overvoltage protection status signals (V<>)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
V<>: Blocking tV> EXT No Yes -
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT No Yes -
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT No Yes -
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT No Yes -
V<>: Enabled No Yes -
V<>: Ready No Yes -
V<>: Not Ready No Yes -
V<>: Starting V> No Yes -
V<>: Starting V>> No Yes - MR
V<>: tV> Elapsed No Yes -
V<>: tV>> Elapsed No Yes -
V<>: Starting V< No Yes -
V<>: Starting V<< No Yes -
V<>: tV< Elapsed No Yes -
V<>: tV< Elapsed & Vmin> No Yes -
V<>: tV< Elaps. Transient No Yes -
V<>: Fault V< No Yes -
V<>: tV<< Elapsed No Yes -
V<>: tV<< Elapsed & Vmin> No Yes -
(MR) 7-54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
V<>: tV<< Elapsed Trans. No Yes -
V<>: Fault V<< No Yes -
V<>: tV</<< Elaps. Trans. No Yes -
1.1.3.19 Frequency protection status signals (f<>)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
f<>: Blocking f1 EXT No Yes -
MR f<>: Enabled No Yes -
f<>: Ready No Yes -
f<>: Not Ready No Yes -
f<>: Blocked by V< No Yes -
f<>: Starting f1 No Yes -
f<>: Starting f1/df1 No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-55
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
f<>: Delta f1 Triggered No Yes -
f<>: Delta t1 Elapsed No Yes -
MR
f<>: Trip Signal f1 No Yes -
1.1.3.20 Overfluxing protection status signals (V/f)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
V/f: Block. tV/f> EXT No Yes -
V/f: Block. Replica EXT No Yes -
V/f: Block. tV/f>> EXT No Yes -
(MR) 7-56 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
V/f: Reset Replica EXT No Yes -
V/f: Enabled No Yes -
V/f: Reset Replica No Yes -
V/f: Starting V/f> No Yes -
V/f: tV/f> Elapsed No Yes -
V/f: Starting V/f(t) No Yes -
V/f: Trip Signal tV/f(t) No Yes -
V/f: Starting V/f>> No Yes -
V/f: tV/f>> Elapsed No Yes -
MR V/f: Buffer Empty No Yes -

1.1.3.21 Current transformer supervision status signals (CTS)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CTS: Blocking EXT No Yes -
CTS: Reset Latching EXT No Yes -
CTS: Enabled No Yes -
CTS: Reset Latching No Yes -
CTS: Operated (Updating) No Yes -
CTS: Operated (Latched) No Yes -
CTS: Idiff> (CTS) Active No Yes -
Indication of whether the pick-up threshold of the differential has been moved from Idiff> to
Idiff> (CTS), upon detection of a CT failure.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-57
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
CTS: Alarm End a (Updat.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End b (Updat.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End c (Updat.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End d (Updat.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End a (Latch.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End b (Latch.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End c (Latch.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End d (Latch.) No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End a No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End b No Yes -
MR
CTS: Alarm End c No Yes -
CTS: Alarm End d No Yes -
1.1.3.22 Broken conductor detection status signals (BC_)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
BC_1: Blocking EXT No Yes -
BC_1: Enabled No Yes -
(MR) 7-58 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
BC_1: CT Fail Alarm No Yes -
BC_1: Starting No Yes -
MR BC_3: Starting No Yes -

1.1.3.23 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (LIMIT)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LIMIT: Enabled No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> No Yes -
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< No Yes -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-59
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< No Yes -
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting T> No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting T>> No Yes -
LIMIT: tT> Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: tT>> Elapsed No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting T< No Yes -
LIMIT: Starting T<< No Yes -
LIMIT: tT< Elapsed No Yes -
MR
LIMIT: tT<< Elapsed No Yes -
1.1.3.24 Phase current monitoring status signals (LIM_)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LIM_1: Enabled No Yes -
LIM_1: tI> Elapsed No Yes -
(MR) 7-60 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LIM_1: tI>> Elapsed No Yes -
LIM_1: tI< Elapsed No Yes -
LIM_1: tI<< Elapsed No Yes -
MR 1.1.3.25 Programmable logic status signals (LOGIC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LOGIC: Input 1 (…40) EXT No Yes -
Input 1 EXT 034 000 Input 15 EXT 034 014 Input 29 EXT 034 098
Input 13 EXT 034 012 Input 27 EXT 034 096
Input 14 EXT 034 013 Input 28 EXT 034 097

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-61
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
No
LOGIC: Set 1 (…8) EXT Yes -
Not Configured
Set 1 EXT 034 051 Set 4 EXT 034 054 Set 7 EXT 034 057
Set 2 EXT 034 052 Set 5 EXT 034 055 Set 8 EXT 034 058
Set 3 EXT 034 053 Set 6 EXT 034 056
No
LOGIC: Reset 1 (…8) EXT Yes -
Not Configured
Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Reset 4 EXT 034 062 Reset 7 EXT 034 065
Reset 2 EXT 034 060 Reset 5 EXT 034 063 Reset 8 EXT 034 066
Reset 3 EXT 034 061 Reset 6 EXT 034 064
LOGIC: 1 (…8) has been set No Yes -

1 has been set 034 067 4 has been set 034 070 7 has been set 034 073
2 has been set 034 068 5 has been set 034 071 8 has been set 034 074
MR
3 has been set 034 069 6 has been set 034 072
LOGIC: 1 (…8) set Externally No Yes -

1 set Externally 034 075 4 set Externally 034 078 7 set Externally 034 081
2 set Externally 034 076 5 set Externally 034 079 8 set Externally 034 082
3 set Externally 034 077 6 set Externally 034 080
LOGIC: Enabled No Yes -

(MR) 7-62 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
LOGIC: Output 1 (…32) No Yes -
Output 1 042 032 Output 12 042 054 Output 23 042 076
Output 11 042 052 Output 22 042 074
LOGIC: Output 1 (…32) (t) No Yes -

Output 1 (t) 042 033 Output 12 (t) 042 055 Output 23 (t) 042 077
MR Output 4 (t) 042 039 Output 15 (t) 042 061 Output 26 (t) 042 083
Output 11 (t) 042 053 Output 22 (t) 042 075
1.2 Control and testing
1.2.1 Local control panel settings enable (HMI)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing
HMI: Param. Change Enabl. No Yes -
003 010
Setting the permission for changing values from the HMI.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-63
1.2.2 Main rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM1)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
COMM1: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test dependent upon relay -
configuration
003 180
Don’t Execute
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig.Start -
Execute
003 184
Don’t Execute
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig. End -
Execute
003 186
1.2.3 2nd rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM2)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
COMM2: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test dependent upon relay -
configuration
103 180 OP Fig. 94
Don’t Execute
MR
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig.Start -
Execute
103 184 OP Fig. 94
Don’t Execute
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig. End -
Execute
103 186 OP Fig. 94
1.2.4 Ethernet communication control and testing commands (GSSE)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
GSSE: Reset Statistics -
Execute
105 171
Not
GSSE: GSSE Enroll.Flags L 65535 1
Measured/0
105 160 Read only
Not
GSSE: GSSE Enroll. Flags H 65535 1
Measured/0
105 161 Read only
Not
GSSE: GSSE Tx Msg Counter 65535 1
Measured/0
105 162 Read only
(MR) 7-64 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
GSSE: GSSE Rx Msg Counter 65535 1
Measured/0
105 163 Read only
Not
GSSE: No. Bin State Chang. 65535 1
Measured/0
105 164 Read only
Not
GSSE: Tx Last Sequence 65535 1
Measured/0
105 165 Read only
Not
GSSE: Tx Last Message 65535 1
Measured/0
105 166 Read only
Not
GSSE: No. Reject. Messages 65535 1
Measured/0
105 167 Read only
GSSE: IED View Selection Remote IED -
105 170
Not
GSSE: GSSE IED Recvd Msgs 65535 1
Measured/0
105 172 Read only
Not
MR GSSE: GSSE IED Last SeqRx
Measured/0
65535 1
105 173 Read only

Not
GSSE: GSSE IED Last MsgRx 65535 1
Measured/0
105 174 Read only
Not
GSSE: GSSE IED MissedMsgs 65535 1
Measured/0
105 175 Read only
Not
GSSE: GSSE IED Missed Changes 65535 1
Measured/0
105 176 Read only
Not
GSSE: GSSE IED Timeouts 65535 1
Measured/0
105 177 Read only
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-65
1.2.5 Output relay control and testing commands (OUTP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
OUTP: Reset Latch. USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
021 009
105
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.
OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test dependent upon relay -
configuration
OP Fig.
003 042
106
Selection of the relay to be tested.
Don’t Execute
OUTP: Relay Test -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 043
106
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P: Ho ld -T im e for Tes t).
OUTP: Hold-Time for Test 1s 10 s 1s
OP Fig.
003 044
106
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for functional
testing.
MR
1.2.6 Analog output channel control and testing commands (mA_OP)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
mA_OP: Reset Output USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
037 116
109
Resetting the measured data output function.
(MR) 7-66 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.7 General control and testing commands (MAIN)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: General Reset -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 002
140
Reset of the following memories:
All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Measured overload data
Fault, OLoad records
Recorded fault values
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
021 010
140
Reset of the following displays:
MR LED indicators
Fault, OLoad Records
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Rset Latch Trip USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
021 005
135
Reset latched trip commands using the local control panel.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Reset c. cl./Trip c. -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 007
136
The counters for close and trip commands are reset.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Reset IPh,Max Demand -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 033
119, 120
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current, ends a to d, are reset.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Man. Trip Cmd. USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 040
135
A trip command is issued from the local control panel for 100 ms.
Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command is included in the
configuration of trip commands.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-67
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Warm Restart -
Execute
003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power supply is
turned on.
Don’t Execute
MAIN: Cold Restart -
Execute
000 085 Password Protected
A cold restart is executed. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings are
cleared. The values with which the device operates after a cold restart are the default
settings given in the Settings - ST section. They are selected so as to block the device
after a cold restart.
1.2.8 Operating data control and testing commands (OP_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
OP_RC: Reset Recording -
Execute
OP Fig.
100 001
144
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
MR
1.2.9 Monitoring signal control and testing commands (MT_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
MT_RC: Reset Recording -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 008
145
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
1.2.10 Overload recording control and testing commands (OL_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
OL_RC: Reset Recording -
Execute
OP Fig.
100 003
148
Reset of the overload memory.
(MR) 7-68 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.2.11 Disturbance recorder control and testing commands (OSCIL)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
OSCIL: Trigger USER -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 041
155
Fault recording and fault value recording are triggered from the local control panel for
500 ms.
Don’t Execute
OSCIL: Reset Recording -
Execute
OP Fig.
003 006
156
Reset of the following memories:
LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault, OLoad Records
Recorded fault values
1.2.12 Thermal overload control and testing commands (THRM)
Measurement Range
MR Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
THRM1: Reset Replica USER -
Execute
039 120 OP Fig. 46
Don’t Execute
THRM2: Reset Replica USER -
Execute
039 180
Thermal overload memory reset.
1.2.13 Frequency protection control and testing commands (f<>)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER -
Execute
003 080
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-69
1.2.14 Overfluxing protection control and testing commands (V/f)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
V/f: Reset Replica USER -
Execute
035 183
1.2.15 Current transformer supervision control and testing commands (CTS)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
CTS: Reset Latch. USER -
Execute
036 157
1.2.16 Programmable logic control and testing commands (LOGIC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Don’t Execute
LOGIC: Trigger 1 (…8) -
Execute
See table below for command addresses. OP Fig. 76
MR
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
Trigger 1 034 038 Trigger 4 034 041 Trigger 7 034 044
Trigger 2 034 039 Trigger 5 034 042 Trigger 8 034 045
Trigger 3 034 040 Trigger 6 034 043
1.3 Operating data rec.
1.3.1 Operating data record no. (OP_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Operating Data Rec.
OP_RC: Operat. Data Record. 0 100 1
OP Fig.
003 024 Read only
144
Point of entry into the operating data log.
(MR) 7-70 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.3.2 Monitoring signal record no. (MT_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Measurements + Tests\Operating Data Rec.
MT_RC: Mon. Signal Record. 0 30 1
OP Fig.
003 001 Read only
145
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
MR
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-71
2. FAULT + EVENT RECORD
2.1 Fault, event counters
2.1.1 General counters (MAIN)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters
9999/
MAIN: No. General Start. 0 1
Overflow
OP Fig.
004 000
134
Number of general starting signals.
9999/
MAIN: No. Gen. Trip Cmds.1 0 1
Overflow
OP Fig.
004 006
136
9999/
Overflow
OP Fig.
009 050
136
9999/
Overflow
OP Fig.
009 056
136 MR
9999/
Overflow
OP Fig.
009 057
136
Number of general trip commands 1 to 4.
2.1.2 Operating data recording counter (OP_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OP_RC: No. Oper. Data Sig. 0 100 1
OP Fig.
100 002 Read only
144
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
2.1.3 Monitoring signal recording counter (MT_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals 0 30 1
OP Fig.
004 019 Read only
145
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
(MR) 7-72 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.1.4 Overload recording counter (OL_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OL_RC: No. Overload 0 9999 1
OP Fig.
004 101 Read only
148
Number of overload states.
2.1.5 Disturbance recording counter (MT_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
OSCIL: No. of Faults 0 9999 1
Number of faults.
OSCIL: No. System Disturb. 0 9999 1
Number of system disturbances (trips, plus starts which may not have resulted in trips).
2.1.6 Definite time overcurrent counter (DTOC)
Measurement Range
MR Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
9999/
DTOC1: No. General Start. 0 1
Overflow
9999/
Overflow
9999/
Overflow
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-73
2.1.7 Inverse time overcurrent counter (IDMT)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
9999/
IDMT1: No. General Start. 0 1
Overflow
9999/
Overflow
9999/
Overflow
2.2 Fault, oload records
2.2.1 Overload data acquisition (OL_DA)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Fault + Event Record\Fault, OLoad Records
Not
6500.0 s/
OL_DA: Overload Duration Measured/ 0.1 s
0.0 s
Overflow MR
OP Fig.
004 102 Read only
146
Duration of the overload event.
Not
250%/
OL_DA: Status THRM1 Replica Measured/ 1%
Overflow
0%
OP Fig.
004 155 Read only
147
Not
250%/
OL_DA: Status THRM2 Replica Measured/ 1%
Overflow
0%
OP Fig.
004 185 Read only
147
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or THRM2,
respectively.
Not
3.00 In/
OL_DA: Load Current THRM1 Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
004 159 Read only
147
(MR) 7-74 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
3.00 In/
OL_DA: Load Current THRM2 Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
004 189 Read only
147
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to calculate the
tripping time.
Not
300 °C/
OL_DA: Object Temp. THRM1 Measured/ 1 °C
Overflow
-40 °C
OP Fig.
004 156 Read only
147
Not
300 °C/
OL_DA: Object Temp. THRM2 Measured/ 1 °C
Overflow
-40 °C
OP Fig.
004 186 Read only
147
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1 or
THRM2, respectively.
Not
215 °C/
OL_DA: Coolant Temp.THRM1 Measured/ 1 °C
Overflow
-40 °C
OP Fig.
004 157 Read only
MR 147
Not
215 °C/
OL_DA: Coolant Temp.THRM2 Measured/ 1 °C
Overflow
-40 °C
OP Fig.
004 187 Read only
147
Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at THR M1 : Se lec t CT
Am bi en t or at T HRM 2 : Se lec t C T Am bi en t, respectively, for the coolant
temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed:
• Setting Default Temp. Value: Display of the set temperature value
• Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the

resistance thermometer
• Setting From 20 mA Input: Display of the temperature measured via the

20 mA input
Not
1000.0 min/
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1 Measured/ 0.1 min
Overflow
0.0 min
OP Fig.
004 158 Read only
147
Not
1000.0 min/
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2 Measured/ 0.1 min
Overflow
0.0 min
OP Fig.
004 188 Read only
147
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or
THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-75
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
25000%/
OL_DA: Offset THRM1 Replica Measured/ 1%
Overflow
-25000 %
OP Fig.
004 191 Read only
147
Not
25000%/
OL_DA: Offset THRM2 Replica Measured/ 1%
Overflow
-25000 %
OP Fig.
004 192 Read only
147
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This
display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted
downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant
temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken
into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve
amounts to 0 in this case.
2.2.2 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
6500.0 s/
MR
FT_DA: Fault Duration Measured/ 0.1 s
Overflow
0.0 s
OP Fig.
008 010 Read only
150
Display of the fault duration.
Not
65.00 s/
FT_DA: Running Time Measured/ 0.01 s
Overflow
0.00 s
OP Fig.
004 021 Read only
150
Display of the running time.
No Fault
Max. diff. Current
Max. Idiff, REF_1
FT_DA: Fault Determ. With Max. Idiff, REF_2 -
Max. Idiff, REF_3
Max Restrain Current
Other Trigger
OP Fig.
004 198 Read only
151
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
(MR) 7-76 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
65.000 s/
FT_DA: Run Time to Meas. Measured/ 0.001 s
Overflow
0.000 s
OP Fig.
004 199 Read only
151
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,a p.u Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
025 086 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,b p.u Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
026 086 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,c p.u Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
027 086 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,d p.u Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
MR 0.00 In
OP Fig.
028 086 Read only
152
Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time for each end, referred to
In.
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,a p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
025 087 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,b p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
026 087 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,c p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
027 087 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,d p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
028 087 Read only
152
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on
the sum of the phase currents for each end, referred to In.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-77
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,a p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
025 088 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,b p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
026 088 Read only
152
Not
99.00 In/
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,c p.u. Measured/ 0.01 In
Overflow
0.00 In
OP Fig.
027 088 Read only
152
Display of the residual current measured at the T14 transformer by the P63x at the data
acquisition time, referred to In.
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Diff Current 1 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
005 082 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Diff Current 2 Measured/
0.00 Iref
Overflow
0.01 Iref
MR
OP Fig.
006 082 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Diff Current 3 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
007 082 Read only
153
Display of the differential current for each measuring system, referred to Iref.
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Diff Current 1(2*fn) Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
005 084 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
006 084 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
007 084 Read only
153
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for each measuring
system, referred to Iref.
(MR) 7-78 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
005 085 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
006 085 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
007 085 Read only
153
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for each measuring
system, referred to Iref.
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Restrain Current 1 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
005 083 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
MR FT_DA: Restrain Current 2 Measured/
0.00 Iref
Overflow
0.01 Iref
OP Fig.
006 083 Read only
153
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Restrain Current 3 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
007 083 Read only
153
Display of the restraining current for each measuring system, referred to Iref.
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Diff Current REF_1 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
025 082 Read only
154
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
026 082 Read only
154
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
027 082 Read only
154
Display of the differential current, determined by the restricted earth fault protection
function (REF_1), referred to Iref.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MR) 7-79
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Not
99.00 Iref/
FT_DA: Restrain. Curr. REF_1 Measured/ 0.01 Iref
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
025 083 Read only
154
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
026 083 Read only
154
Not
99.00 Iref/
Overflow
0.00 Iref
OP Fig.
027 083 Read only
154
Display of the restraining current, determined by the restricted earth fault protection
function (REF_1), referred to Iref.
2.2.3 Frequency acquisition limits (f<>)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>

Not
Measured/
70.00 Hz/
0.01 Hz
MR
Overflow
12.00 Hz
005 002 Read only
Maximum frequency attained in the event of overfrequency.
Not
70.00 Hz/
f<>: Min. frequ. for f< Measured/ 0.01 Hz
Overflow
12.00 Hz
005 001 Read only
Minimum frequency attained in the event of underfrequency.
2.3 Disturbance oscillo
2.3.1 Overload recording acquisition (OL_RC)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Fault + Event Record\Disturbance Oscillo.
OL_RC: Overload Recording 1 (…8) 0 9999 1
Point of entry into the overload log.
Overload Recording 1 003 020 Overload Recording 4 003 023 Overload Recording 7 003 026
Overload Recording 2 003 021 Overload Recording 5 003 024 Overload Recording 8 003 027
Overload Recording 3 003 022 Overload Recording 6 003 025

(MR) 7-80 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.3.2 Disturbance recording acquisition (OSCIL)
Measurement Range
Menu Text Step Size
Min. Max.
Fault + Event Record\Disturbance Oscillo.
OSCIL: Fault Recording 1 (…8) 0 9999 1
Point of entry into the fault log.
Fault Recording 1 003 000 Fault Recording 4 033 003 Fault Recording 7 033 006
Fault Recording 2 033 001 Fault Recording 5 033 004 Fault Recording 8 033 007
Fault Recording 3 033 002 Fault Recording 6 033 005
MR
Firmware Design P63x/UK FD/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIRMWARE DESIGN
FD

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK FD/A54 Firmware Design
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FD
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (FD) 8-1
CONTENTS
(FD) 8-
1. FIRMWARE DESIGN 3
1.1 Relay structure overview 3
1.2 Software overview 3
1.2.1 Settings and measurements 3
1.2.2 Programmable scheme logic 4
1.3 Hardware overview 4
1.3.1 Transformer module T 5
1.3.2 Processor module P 5
1.3.3 Local control module L 5
1.3.4 Communication module A 5
1.3.5 Bus modules B 5
1.3.6 Binary modules X 5
1.3.7 Analogue module Y 5
1.3.8 Power supply module V 5
1.3.9 Ethernet module 5
1.4 Self testing & diagnostics 5 FD

1.4.1 System alarms and errors 6
1.4.2 Monitoring signal memory 6
1.4.3 Device response 7
FIGURES
Figure 1: Relay modules and information flow 3

Figure 2: LOGIC structure 4
(FD) 8-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FD
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (FD) 8-3
1. FIRMWARE DESIGN
1.1 Relay structure overview
P1952ENa
Figure 1: Relay modules and information flow

The external analog and binary quantities, electrically isolated, are converted to the internal
processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y and X. Commands and signals generated
by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via floating contacts through
the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply
module V which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data are always transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus FD
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements
necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and
analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y are
transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to
the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor
handles the processing of digitized measured variables and of binary signals, generates the
protective trip and signals and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus
module. Moreover, the entire device communication is handled by the processor module.
As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide
communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated PC
interface are housed on control module L.
1.2 Software overview
1.2.1 Settings and measurements

All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the Px3x
device family. The main branches are:
‘Settings’ branch
This branch carries all settings, including the device identification data, the configuration
settings for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function settings for
adapting the device functions to the protected plant. All values in this group are stored in
non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply
fails.
(FD) 8-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
‘Measurements + Tests’ branch

This branch carries all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data
and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not
stored. In addition, various control parameters are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Fault + Event Record’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. Therefore all information contained
in this group is stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault records are stored here and can be read out at a later time.
1.2.2 Programmable scheme logic

The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (LOGIC) is to allow the relay user to
configure an individual protection scheme to suit a particular application. This is achieved
through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
User-configurable logic enables the user to set up logic operations on binary signals within a
framework of Boolean equations. By means of a straightforward configuration procedure,
any of the signals of the protection device can be linked by logic ‘OR’ or ‘AND’ operations
with the possibility of additional negation operations.
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order equation as an input
signal, thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations. The output signal of each
equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer elements each and a choice of
operating modes. Thus the output signal of each equation can be assigned a freely
configurable time characteristic.
The two output signals of each equation can be configured to each available input signal
after logic OR linking. The user-configurable logic function is then able to influence the
individual functions without external wiring (block, reset, trigger, for example). Via
non-storable continuous signals, monostable trigger signals and bistable setting/resetting
signals, the Boolean equations can be controlled externally via any of the device’s interfaces.
FD
Fixed Logic:
Configuration: Configuration:
DTOC, IDMT, DIFF, ...
INP OUTP
HMI LED
PC HMI
COMM1 PC
COMM2 COMM1
GOOSE Programmable Logic: COMM2
GSSE GOOSE
LOGIC GSSE
P1953ENa
Figure 2: LOGIC structure
1.3 Hardware overview

The modular hardware structure of the devices is shown in Figure 1. The plug-in modules
can be combined to suit individual requirements. The device itself can identify the fitted
modules. During each startup, the number and type of fitted modules are identified and
checked for compliance with the permissible configurations. As a function of the
components actually fitted, the corresponding configuration parameters are then enabled for
application.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (FD) 8-5
1.3.1 Transformer module T

The transformer modules convert the measured currents and voltages to the internal
processing levels and provides for electrical isolation.
1.3.2 Processor module P

The processor module performs the analogue/digital conversion of the measured variables
as well as all digital processing tasks.
1.3.3 Local control module L

The local control module encompasses all control and display elements as well as a PC
interface. The local control module is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable.
1.3.4 Communication module A

The optional communication module provides one or two serial information interfaces for the
integration of the protection device into a substation control system and for remote access.
The communication module is plugged into the processor module.
1.3.5 Bus modules B

Bus modules are printed circuit boards (PCBs), providing the electrical connection between
the other modules. Two types of bus modules are used, namely the analogue and
digital-bus PCB.
1.3.6 Binary modules X

The binary modules are equipped with opto inputs and/or output relays for the output of
signals and commands.
1.3.7 Analogue module Y

The analogue module is fitted with a PT 100 input, a 20 mA input and two 20 mA outputs. FD
One output relay each is assigned to two 20 mA outputs. Additionally, four opto inputs are
available.
1.3.8 Power supply module V

The power supply module ensures the electrical isolation of the device as well as providing
the power supply. Depending on the chosen design version, optical coupler inputs and
output relays are provided in addition.
1.3.9 Ethernet module

The optional communication module provides an Ethernet interface (one copper, one fiber)
for the integration of the protection device into a substation control system and for remote
access. The medium is selected via settings. This module also includes an additional
EIA(RS)485 port. The Ethernet module is plugged into the processor module.
1.4 Self testing & diagnostics

The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its
hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault
occurs within the relay’s hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the
problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves the relay being out
of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the
relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to
resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will
be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact.
(FD) 8-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a

maintenance record in the monitoring signal memory to allow the nature of the problem to be
notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which
is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a continuous
self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relay’s critical functions whilst it is
in service.
1.4.1 System alarms and errors

Self monitoring distinguishes between system alarms and system errors.
• System alarms
System alarms do not affect the protection and control tasks and therefore the device
remains in operation. As an example, overflow of communication buffers or a low voltage of
the internal battery result in an alarm only.
• System errors
System errors affect the protection and control function and require further processing. At
the first instance the device will perform a warm restart to recover from the error. If the error
already present before (i.e. already entered in the monitoring signal memory), then the
device will become blocked (004.065 MAIN: Blocked/Faulty = Yes). Examples for system
errors are checksum errors, defective module errors etc.
Both, alarms and errors, could be either spontaneous (which means that only the occurrence
of the alarm/error could be detected, e.g. any checksum error) or testable (which means start
and end of the alarm/error condition could be detected, e.g. defective output relay).
Peripheral faults like fuse failure are always “testable alarms”.
1.4.2 Monitoring signal memory

In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in
a non-volatile memory - the monitoring signal memory. Peripheral faults are only stored if
FD selected by the user (setting 021.030 CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm).
The monitoring signal memory can store up to 30 signals. The 30th entry is always the
overflow signal (090.012 CHECK: Overflow MT_RC = Yes). If 30 entries are present, no
further “new” signals could be stored, where “new” means that this signal is not yet entered
in the memory. If a monitoring signal is already entered in the monitoring signal memory,
then just the counter of the entry is incremented (e.g. transient errors on the transmission
channel of the protective signaling thus would cause only one signal entry).
Each entry contains the following information:
• Address and description text of the warning signal
• Date and time of the first occurrence of the error
• Counter of detection of the error
• Flag “updated”
= Yes: the error is still present;
= No: the error is no longer present. Spontaneous alarms/errors are always indicated
as “updated = yes”.
• Flag “acknowledged”
= Yes: the warning was already acknowledged but the error is still present;
= No: the warning was not yet acknowledged.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (FD) 8-7
1.4.3 Device response

The response of the Px3x is a function of the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
• Signaling only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal (= upon system alarms), then
only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for
example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow or if the internal battery voltage
is low.
• Selective blocking
If a system error is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a
fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface or if an individual output
relay is faulty.
• Warm restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a system error that might be eliminated by a system
restart - such as a hardware error, e.g. DPRAM read error, or a software error, e.g. zero
division error, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this
procedure, as with any startup, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm
restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no settings are
affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by a control
action. During a warm restart sequence, both the protective functions and communication
through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same system error is detected after a warm
restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions
remain blocked, but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible
again.
• Cold restart
If corrupted settings are diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of the
self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the
unit cannot identify which setting in the group is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal
FD
memories to be reset to predefined default values. This means that all device settings are
also erased after a cold restart. In order for a safe initial state to be established, the default
values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring
signal that triggered the cold restart and the signal indicating parameter loss are entered in
the monitoring signal memory. Beside corrupted settings, a cold restart is initiated only after
a software download procedure (either download of a new firmware version or download of a
customized data model) or manually (as a means to get the device in a predefined
condition). Manual cold restart can only be initiated from the local HMI. The device must be
in offline mode. The initiation is password protected.
Refer to Troubleshooting - TS section of this manual, which lists possible warning signals
and the device response/reaction upon detection of each alarm/error.
(FD) 8-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FD
Commissioning P63x/UK CM/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
COMMISSIONING
CM

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK CM/A54 Commissioning
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
CM
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-1
CONTENTS
(CM) 9-
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. PRODUCT FAMILIARISATION 4
2.1 Settings 4
2.2 Reference to menu addresses 4
2.3 Module positions 4
2.4 Terminal references 4
3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING 5

3.1 Minimum equipment required 5
3.2 Optional equipment 5
4. PRODUCT CHECKS 6
4.1 With the relay de-energized 6
4.1.1 Visual inspection 6
4.1.2 Insulation resistance 6
4.1.3 External wiring 7
4.1.4 Auxiliary supply 7
4.2 With the relay energized 7
4.2.1 Power-up verification 8

CM
4.2.2 Date and time 8
4.2.3 With an IRIG-B signal 8
4.2.4 Without an IRIG-B signal 8
4.2.5 Light emitting diodes (LEDs) 9
4.2.6 Opto inputs 9
4.2.7 Output relays 9
4.2.8 Rear communications port(s): COMM1 and COMM2 (if used) 10
4.2.8.1 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM1 10
4.2.8.2 MODBUS communications COMM1 10
4.2.8.3 DNP3.0 interface COMM1 10
4.2.8.4 Courier interface COMM1 10
4.2.8.5 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM2 10
4.2.9 PT100 temperature RTD probe (where fitted) 11

(CM) 9-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4.2.10 Apply application-specific settings 11
4.2.11 Current inputs 11
4.2.12 Voltage input (where fitted) 12
5. SETTING CHECKS 13
5.1 Demonstrate correct relay operation 13
5.2 Differential protection setting checks 13
5.2.1 Checking differential sensitivity 13
5.2.2 Checking differential through stability by primary injection 14
5.2.3 Checking differential through stability by secondary injection 14
5.2.4 Yy transformers, autotransformer and busbar applications 14
5.2.5 Dy and Yd applications 15
5.2.6 Dd applications 16
5.2.7 Differential stability - summary 17
5.2.8 Verifying the trip output contact mapping 17
5.3 Restricted earth fault setting checks 18
5.3.1 Checking REF sensitivity 18
5.3.2 Checking REF through stability by primary injection 18
5.3.3 Verifying the trip output contact mapping (secondary injection) 19
5.4 Check application settings 19
5.4.1 Checking that the correct settings group is active 19
CM 5.4.2 Checking that the protection is switched on 19
5.4.3 Checking that no blocking of output relays is inadvertently left applied 19
5.4.4 Checking that the primary protection function (differential) is enabled 20
5.4.5 Ensuring that all records and memories have been reset 20
5.5 Check correct display of status LEDs 20
6. ON-LOAD CHECKS 21
6.1 Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring 21
6.1.1 Voltage connection 21
6.1.2 Current connections 21
7. FINAL CHECKS 21
8. P63x COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD 22
9. “AS-FITTED” SETTINGS RECORD 28

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-3
1. INTRODUCTION
MiCOM P63x transformer protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing
all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of
self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the
commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or
electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is
considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified
by one of the following methods:
• Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (preferred
method - using MiCOM S1)
• Via the operator interface

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining
the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic
applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relay’s internal programmable scheme
logic.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/C11) or later issue, or the Safety and
Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the
equipment’s rating label.
The MiCOM P63x relay must not be disassembled in any way during commissioning.
CM
(CM) 9-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2. PRODUCT FAMILIARISATION
2.1 Settings
When commissioning a MiCOM P63x relay for the first time, sufficient time should be
allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the ENTER key are accessible. With
the cover fitted, no protection or configuration settings can be changed.
Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be
changed, LED’s and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, for setting
and configuration cells, the appropriate password has to be entered before changes can be
made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and
text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk
for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to
become familiar with its operation.
2.2 Reference to menu addresses

To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions, they
will be given in the form [menu address: FUNCTION GROUP, Cell Description].
When using MiCOM S1 software, the toolbar command Edit… Find… can be used to jump
directly to a chosen address.
2.3 Module positions

Each internal circuit board/module has its connections terminated at a block on the rear of
the relay. The slot position of each module is numbered from 01 to 20, with slot 01 on the
left, and slot 20 at the right (viewed from rear), for 84TE case size relays. For 40TE cases,
slots run from 01 to 10. Each module also has a generic alpha identifier: A, T, V, X, Y used
in documentation, used to abbreviate its purpose (e.g. V denotes a power supply module).
CM 2.4 Terminal references

All terminals are prefixed by identifier X, and then a numeric location. The first two digits of
the location denote the module slot position as described above. Thus, X20nn would be
connection number “nn” for the terminal block in slot 20.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-5
3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
3.1 Minimum equipment required

Multifunctional current and voltage injection test set.
Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0 - 300V.
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
3.2 Optional equipment

Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using MMLG
blocks)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance testing when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate MiCOM S1 software (this enables the rear communications
port to be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during
commissioning).
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter, if rear communications ports COMM1 and COMM2
are to be tested. Example converter is AREVA type CK222.
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
CM
(CM) 9-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4. PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that
it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all
input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be
done by:
• Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PC with
appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay)
• Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with
appropriate setting software)
4.1 With the relay de-energised

The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied
to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these
checks. If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be
achieved by inserting test plug type P992/MMLB which effectively open-circuits all wiring
routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to
ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test
block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the
sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are
shorted. In the case of an MMLB test plug, the user must make the shorts manually on the
plug BEFORE it is inserted into the MMLG test block.
Danger: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since
the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
Danger: For pin terminal relays, never disconnect the T module terminal block -
it is NOT a shorting block, and CT connections will be open circuited.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be isolated
CM by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be
short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the
auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these
should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be
disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety
hazard.
4.1.1 Visual inspection

Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be
checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connection, is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar
using a conductor of minimum cross-sectional area 2.5mm2. The case earth should be
verified, made tight to the side of the case by nut/bolt.
4.1.2 Insulation resistance

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them
to be done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless
insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should
be temporarily connected together.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-7
The main groups of relay terminals are:
• Voltage transformer circuits (situated on module(s) T)
• Current transformer circuits (situated on module(s) T)
• Power supply (situated on module V)
• Opto-isolated binary inputs, situated on V and X/Y (populated slots)
• Relay output contacts, situated on V and X/Y (populated slots). Also, milliamp current
loop measured inputs and outputs, situated on module Y.
• EIA(RS)485 COMM1 and COMM2 ports, situated on module A (slot 02)
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly
reconnected to the relay.
4.1.3 External wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme diagram.
The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the
front of the relay, written in the form P63x.4xx.
If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the
scheme (wiring) diagram. Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the
installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s normal practice.
4.1.4 Auxiliary supply

The P63x relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending
on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating
range specified in Table 9-1.
Without energizing the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating
range.
Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC rms] DC Operating Range AC Operating Range

24V [N/A] 19.2 to 26.4V - CM
48 - 250V [100 - 230V] 38 to 275V 80 to 254V
Table 1: Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx

It should be noted that the P63x relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper
rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energise the relay using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as
this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply circuitry.
Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges, and
also the power supply protective earth/ground connection is connected. The ground
conductor is connected to V module terminal X__27 (ring terminal relay) or X__39 (pin
terminal relay), and the minimum wire cross section is 1.5mm2. If a test block is provided, it
may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to
the relay.
4.2 With the relay energised

The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
(CM) 9-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for
these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of
the associated circuit breaker.
4.2.1 Power-up verification

On application of the supply voltage, the P63x will start-up. During start-up LEDs will flash,
and the display will show a sequence of arrows on the LCD display >>>>>. After
approximately 15s the display will stabilize showing “P63x”, and the relay is ready. Verify
that the “HEALTHY” LED is illuminated.
If no settings have previously been applied to the relay, the “OUT OF SERVICE” LED may
also be showing.
4.2.2 Date and time

The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will
depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range
Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.
4.2.3 With an IRIG-B signal

If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the optional
IRIG-B port fitted at slot 02, the satellite clock equipment should be energized.
To allow the relay’s time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell
[056.072: Settings/Configuration/IRIGB, IRIG-B Time Sync] must be set to ‘Enabled’ and
[023.200: .../Configuration/IRIGB, General Enable USER] must be set to ‘Yes’.
Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [023.202: Measurements
+ Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/IRIGB, Synchron. Ready] reads ‘Yes’.
Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time
(satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed.
Check the time is correct in cell [003.091: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Analog
Readings/MAIN, Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need
to be set manually in the date cell. Set the year in cell [003.090: …/MAIN, Date], and verify
the date shown is correct.
CM In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore,
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set
again.
To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay.
Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the date
and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct.
Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
4.2.4 Without an IRIG-B signal

If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell [056.072] is
set to ‘Disabled’
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cells [003.091: Measurements
+ Tests/Measurements/Analog Readings/MAIN, Time] and [003.090: …/MAIN, Date].
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore,
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set
again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On
re-energisation, the date and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-9
4.2.5 Light emitting diodes (LEDs)

On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay
is HEALTHY. (The Out of Service LED will also be lit if no settings have yet been applied to
the relay). Any LEDs still illuminated from previous faults or injection tests should be reset
by pressing the CLEAR (“C”) key.
Check that on pressing the “C” key ALL LED indicators momentarily light and then
extinguish.
Check and record that the HEALTHY LED remains lit.
4.2.6 Opto inputs

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time, as per the external wiring
diagram. Ensure correct polarity, with the positive battery voltage applied to the lowest
numbered terminal, and negative to the highest number for the input concerned (e.g. Opto
input U2001 for the ring terminal relay should be energized at terminals X2018 (+ve) and
X2019 (-ve)).
If possible, the voltage applied to the opto should be generated by operation of the item of
plant which that opto normally monitors e.g. if an opto input is assigned to 52b (circuit
breaker open), then correct wire routing and indication is best ascertained by movement of
the real contacts, or a test short connected across them.
Opto inputs are polarity sensitive, and DC rated only. Do not energise from an
alternating current supply.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed in the Measurements + Tests
subheading in the menu, under Measurements/I.O Status Monitor, example cell for opto
input U2001 [153.086: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP, State
U 2001]. A de-energized input is indicated by the display ‘Low’, and when an input is
energized the display should read ‘High’.
4.2.7 Output relays

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. It can also be used to
verify that output contact wiring is routed to the correct location, via the panel/cubicle wiring. CM
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to the output relay being
tested, as given in the external connection diagram.
Output contacts will be operated by manual commands - ensure that contact
operation is permitted, without dangerous/unwanted consequences. For example,
operation of contacts assigned to trip or close duties should only be undertaken if the
CB is locked for no operation, or if operation is permitted.
The output relays should be energized one at a time. The means of operating contacts is
within the Control and Testing sub-heading in the menu, via the heading Measurements +
Tests. The user first selects which contact should be operated, at cell [003.042:
Measurements + Tests/Control + Testing/OUTP, Relay Assign. f.Test]. The contact to be
operated is selected by scrolling down the list and selecting Configure.
Once configured, stepping down to the next cell in the menu [003.043: …/OUTP, Relay Test]
allows the user to apply the test by selecting ‘Execute’. With default settings, the selected
contact will be operated for 1 second. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester
operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact.
Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the

output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the
associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore
advised that the time between application and removal of contact test
is kept to the minimum.
(CM) 9-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4.2.8 Rear communications port(s): COMM1 and COMM2 (if used)

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay
to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.
4.2.8.1 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM1

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate IEC60870-5-103 Master Station software to
the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. It is
strongly recommended that MiCOM S1 software is used for this test, as it uses the - 103
protocol for its communication.
Where the communication is - 103 protocol over fiber optic, the appropriate fiber link will
need to be made and tested.
Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the
COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
4.2.8.2 MODBUS communications COMM1

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to the
relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor.
4.2.8.3 DNP3.0 interface COMM1

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate DNP3 Master Station software to the relay’s
EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor.
CM COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up.
4.2.8.4 Courier interface COMM1

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Courier Master Station software to the relay’s
EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor.
4.2.8.5 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM2

This test is only valid for relays having a second communications port fitted, COMM2.
Connect a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software to the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via a
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. If the second port is being used for
an off-site MODEM link, remote access can be tested at this stage.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-11
4.2.9 PT100 temperature RTD probe (where fitted)

This tests that where ambient temperature compensation of the thermal protection is applied,
the RTD probe is connected/measuring correctly, and that the correct ambient temperature
is being measured.
To check correct RTD fitting:
[039.127 and 039.187: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/THRM1
and …/THRM2, CTA Error]
• Must show “No” error, and…

[004.154 and 004.174: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Analog Readings/THRM1 and
…/THRM2, Coolant Temp. THx]
• Must show an ambient air temperature as expected
4.2.10 Apply application-specific settings

There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:
• Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC
running the appropriate software via the relay’s front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the
bottom access cover, or rear communications port. This method is preferred for
transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error.
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette,
this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where
application-specific programmable scheme logic is to be applied to the relay.
• Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface
4.2.11 Current inputs

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If
operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [010.030: Settings/Function
Settings/Global/MAIN, Frequency fn]. CM
To avoid spurious operation of protection elements during injection testing, ensure
that the Protection is disabled via cell [003.030: Settings/Function Settings
/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled].
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each current
transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding
reading can then be checked under Communication… Cyclic Readout of Data… in the
S&R-103 menu. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant
reading should be 1 (unity).
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Next, to check that all three phase CTs associated with one winding are of the same polarity,
the same current should be applied to phases A, B, and C - phase displaced as per a
balanced 3 phase set. This will be for phase angles ∠A = 0o, ∠B = -120o, ∠C = 120o, for a
standard ABC phase rotation system.
Starting for end “a“ CTs, apply the balanced current, and check the measured residual
current for the winding - address [005.141; Current IN,a p.u.]. The residual current
measured should be less than 0.05 p.u.
(CM) 9-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
• Repeat for end b
• For P633 and P634 - repeat for end c
• For P634 - repeat for end d

If high residual current is measured, one or more of the CT circuits for the end concerned
may have a problem (for example - an inverted connection).
4.2.12 Voltage input (where fitted)

Apply voltage equal to the line voltage transformer secondary winding rating to the VT input,
checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked
under in the relay menu. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of voltage, the
relevant reading should be 1 (unity).
The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±0.5%. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
CM
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-13
5. SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the
relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have
been correctly applied to the relay.
Note (1): The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Note (2): If the user wishes the relay to be incapable of tripping the circuit
breaker by means of inhibiting the trip output contact(s), this can be
set at:
• [021.012: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd.Block USER]. Set to “Yes”

to inhibit trip output contacts.
5.1 Demonstrate correct relay operation

The current and voltage tests have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration,
thus the purpose of these tests is as follows:
• To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, differential protection, can
trip according to the correct application settings
• To verify correct setting of any restricted earth fault (REF) protection
• To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a

selection of fault injections
• The customer’s desired setting group to be left in-service after testing is used. This is
generally Setting Group SG1, and verification that the relay has the correct group
applied should be done by reading cell [003.062: Measurements +
Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/GROUP, Actual Setting Group]
To enable the protection elements, ensure that the Protection is “Yes (Enabled)” at
cell [003.030: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled]
5.2 Differential protection setting checks

CM
5.2.1 Checking differential sensitivity
For single-side infeeding to an in-zone fault, the fault current characteristic crosses the first
knee of the tripping characteristic of the P63x, so that an injection test will find the Idiff>
setting [072.142] (for Setting Group SG1).
The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feeding is calculated as follows:
I diff > ⋅I nom , z

I=
kz
z: Ends a or b
Idiff>: Set differential minimum sensitivity
Inom,z: Nominal CT current of the P63x for the winding concerned
kz: Amplitude matching factor for winding [address 004.105 for HV]
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed as measured
operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P63x to the system
current transformers is correct. The display of differential and restraining currents is
prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
Connect the test equipment to the relay via the test block(s) taking care not to open-circuit
any CT secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of the test plug must be
provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block.
(CM) 9-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Apply balanced three-phase current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the HV side CT
inputs only (these CTs are usually the input designated as “End a“). Observe that no trip
should occur, and the red Trip LED remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/-
10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%).
5.2.2 Checking differential through stability by primary injection

To check for through stability, it is preferable, especially for a new transformer installation to
simulate a through-fed external fault, by a real primary fault simulation. This is achieved by
placing a three phase bolted short circuit on the downstream side of the LV CTs, and
energizing the HV winding from a three phase medium voltage supply. Typically, the HV
winding is energized only from a voltage rated within the range 400 to 440V, to limit the
through fault current. In such a through fault scenario, the relay should not trip.
The procedure for primary testing is not covered here, as it must respect utility safety
rules, permits to work, sanctions for testing, etc.
5.2.3 Checking differential through stability by secondary injection

If primary injection to verify correct settings, vector group correction, and CT orientation is
not possible, secondary injection testing should be performed. For a two-winding
transformer, a fault current is simulated flowing out of the LV side, with a balancing set of
currents on one or two phases flowing into the HV side. If all settings and CT orientations
are correct, no trip should occur, and minimal differential current will be measured by the
relay. For a relay with more than two bias inputs (P633 and P634 models), the external fault
injection must be repeated for each additional set of CT inputs. For example, in a P633
there should be an injection for a through fed fault winding a to b, and then afterwards for
winding a to c.
During these tests, unbalanced faults will be simulated, which could cause restricted
earth fault, residual current, and negative sequence protection elements to operate.
As these elements are not being tested at this stage, they should be disabled in the
“Common Settings” section of the menu. For example, to temporarily disable REF_1
set [019.050: Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/REF_1, General Enable
USER] = “No”.
CM Make a note of all functions whose General Enable USER setting must be restored to “Yes”
after the testing is completed.
5.2.4 Yy transformers, autotransformer and busbar applications

This test simulates current flowing through the transformer to an out-of-zone external fault.
In such applications, it is simple to inject a fault current flowing out of the A phase at end “b”.
Because the same zero sequence filtering setting is applied for the end a and end b inputs,
then if the current simulated is 1 per unit (1 p.u.) out of end b, the input current to balance at
end a is easy to determine.
For ease of injection, a single phase current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is
simulated to flow OUT on phase A, end b. On an automatic test set, use INOM ∠-180o.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-15
To balance, a current is applied to one phase input at end a (the HV winding, in a

transformer application). The magnitude should be a current equal to Kb / Ka x INOM, and at a
phase angle as shown below:
End b Current End a Current

Injected Phase (End b = LV) Injected Phase (End a - HV)
Yy0,
Autotrafo. and A INOM ∠-180o A INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Busbar
Yy2 A INOM ∠-180o C INOM . Kb / Ka ∠-180o
Yy4 A INOM ∠-180o B INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Yy6 A INOM ∠-180o A INOM . Kb / Ka ∠-180o
Yy8 A INOM ∠-180o C INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Yy10 A INOM ∠-180o B INOM . Kb / Ka ∠-180o
Table 2: Through fault stability for Yy ends

The amplitude matching factors Ka and Kb can be found in the menu, at addresses
[004.105] and [004.106]. Note that in each case, Inom relates to the CT rating of the end
being injected.
Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. It should be observed that if end a
and end b CTs are in the correct orientation that no trip should occur. It is important too to
read the displayed “Diff. Current“ 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that
these measurements are low. These measurements must show less than 0.1 p.u. (10%), to
prove that a balance is achieved.
(The reason that the differential currents must be read is that in certain busbar applications
the Idiff> trip threshold may be set higher than Inom, so that even an incorrect CT
connection would not cause a trip). The differential current measurement displays are found
in cell [005.080] and onwards.
It is not necessary to repeat the injection for other phases, because their orientation has
already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the “Current Inputs”
were checked).
CM
5.2.5 Dy and Yd applications
In such applications, it is necessary to inject a fault current flowing out of the A phase on
whichever winding is the star (wye) end. For a Dy configuration it will be the LV side (end b),
for a Yd configuration it will be the HV side (end a). The star winding phase A shares the
same power transformer limb as two phases on the opposite side, such that a two phase
current loop will need to be injected to achieve a balance.
For ease of injection, a single phase current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is
simulated to flow OUT on phase A. On an automatic test set, use INOM ∠-180o.
(CM) 9-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
To balance, a current is applied to two phase CT inputs (delta side). The magnitude should
be a current equal to Kb / (√3.Ka) x INOM, and at the phase angles as shown below:
Star End
Current Delta Side
Injected Current
(Star) Injected Loop
Phase
IA = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
Dy1 or Yd11 A INOM ∠-180o A-B
IB = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
IC = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
Dy3 or Yd9 A INOM ∠-180 o
C-B
IB = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
IC = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
C-A
IA = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
IB = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
Dy7 or Yd5 A INOM ∠-180o B-A
IA = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
IB = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
Dy9 or Yd3 A INOM ∠-180o B-C
IC = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
IA = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠0o
A-C
IC = INOM . Kb / √3Ka ∠-180o
Table 3: Through fault stability for delta-star ends

being injected.
The delta side loop current may be applied as two separate current outputs from a test set,
or one current looped out through the first phase specified, and returning back through the
latter phase input.
CM read the displayed “Diff. Current“ 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that
The differential current measurement displays are found in cell [005.080] and onwards.
already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the “Current Inputs“
were checked).
5.2.6 Dd applications
In many such applications, there may be in-zone earthing transformers, so it easiest to
simulate an external phase-phase fault, to avoid simulating a zero sequence current. If the
current simulated is 1 per unit (1 p.u.) out of end b, the input current to balance at end a is
easy to determine. In the simplest application of a Dd0 transformer, an A-B fault is simulated
flowing out of the LV side, fed by an A-B loop input on the HV side.
For ease of injection, a loop current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is simulated
to flow OUT on phase A, end b, and looping back through phase B, end b. On an automatic
test set, use INOM ∠-180o. Because four phase CT inputs to the relay will be energized at
once, it is necessary that the test set output current for this LV side is set as a single phase
but looping through two phase CT inputs.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-17
To balance, a loop current is applied at end a (the HV winding). The magnitude should be a
current equal to Kb/Ka x INOM, and at a phase angle as shown below. Again, the test set is
configured to generate only one single phase output for this winding, looped through two
phase CT inputs - thus in total the output requirements can be satisfied by a test set typically
having only up to 3 current outputs.
End b Current End a Current

Injected Phase (End b - LV) Injected Phase (End a - HV)
Dd0 A-B INOM ∠-180o A-B INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Dd2 A-B INOM ∠-180o C-B INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Dd4 A-B INOM ∠-180o C-A INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Dd6 A-B INOM ∠-180o B-A INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Dd8 A-B INOM ∠-180o B-C INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Dd10 A-B INOM ∠-180o A-C INOM . Kb / Ka ∠0o
Table 4: Through fault stability for Dd ends

being injected.
read the displayed “Diff. Current“ 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that
The differential current measurement displays are found in cell [005.080] and onwards.
already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the “Current Inputs“
were checked).
5.2.7 Differential stability - summary

It must be ensured that each winding has been covered during the external fault simulations.
For example:
CM
• For a P634 used in a mesh/busbar protection scheme, the stability test should be
performed 3 times: (1) End a-b, (2) End a-c, (3) End a-d. The Yy injection test case
would be used for each test
• For a P633 protecting a Yd transformer with an HV winding fed from two ring-bus CT
inputs (summated HV from end a + end b), the stability test would be performed 2 times:
(1) End a-b, (2) End a-c. The Yy test would be used for (1), and the Yd test for (2)
5.2.8 Verifying the trip output contact mapping

At the test set, retain the same injection currents as per the last stability test, but invert the
LV side (end b) current(s) to simulate an internal fault. This effectively simulates a double
end fed fault. To verify correct mapping feed the trip contacts that would be expected to trip
the circuit breaker into the injection test set, to observe that the contact closes correctly.
Apply the fault current for 100ms - check and record the tripping time.
At this stage, make sure that any protection elements which were disabled by a USER
command to permit differential testing, are now restored to “Enabled”.
(CM) 9-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
5.3 Restricted earth fault setting checks
5.3.1 Checking REF sensitivity

These tests are performed on a per winding basis, for all elements (REF_1, REF_2, REF_3)
that are used in the application. The tripping sensitivity for the REF differential protection of
one winding with a single end infeed is given by:
I diff > ⋅I nom , z

I=
kz
z: REF_1, 2 or 3
Idiff>: Set REF minimum sensitivity
Inom,z: Nominal phase CT current of the P63x for the winding concerned
kz: Amplitude matching factor for Y CT input [address 004.163 for REF_1]
First start with REF_1 if enabled. Apply a current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the IY
CT input for that winding only. Observe that no trip should occur, and the red Trip LED
remains extinguished.
Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates.
Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/-
10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%).
Note: If the REF is providing low-impedance balanced earth fault protection

for a delta winding, there will be no IY input connected. In such
cases, inject instead into the A phase CT input for the winding
concerned, and take the Kz matching factor from address [004.160].
In such cases it may be necessary to temporarily disable other
protection elements that may trip, in order to view only REF operation.
In high impedance REF applications, take care that the injection test set is able to
support the connected burden of the stabilising resistor. If not, the test injection may
need to be made directly into the relay IY input terminals.
CM Remember to repeat the REF tests for each winding where it is implemented.
5.3.2 Checking REF through stability by primary injection

Where REF is providing low-impedance balanced earth fault protection for delta windings,
then no additional testing is required. This is because no IY CT input is connected, and all
phase CT orientations have already been proven to be in the same sense.
In all high impedance applications, and all applications to protect grounded star (wye)
windings, it will not be possible to prove that all input CTs have the correct directionality,
without a primary injection test.
To check for through stability, it is important, especially for a new transformer installation to
simulate a through-fed external earth fault, by a primary fault simulation. This is achieved by
temporarily shorting the entire A-phase winding to the star point, and then circulating fault
current in a loop through the A-phase CT primary, the short, and the IY CT primary. In such
a through fault scenario, the relay should not trip.
The procedure for primary testing is not covered here, as it must respect utility safety rules,
permits to work, sanctions for testing, etc.
It is important that the primary injection test is undertaken for the REF function,
because even stability with loadflow cannot be used as a test of REF stability. Whilst
balanced load is flowing, there is no way of knowing whether the star point-ground CT
is correctly oriented. Thus, an installation might falsely appear correct on-load - until
such time as an external earth fault happens on the system, and a maloperation could
occur.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-19
5.3.3 Verifying the trip output contact mapping (secondary injection)

At the test set, make the same connections and settings as per the REF sensitivity test,
however the current injection should be set to Inom (1A or 5A). To verify correct mapping
feed the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker into the injection test
set, to observe that the contact closes correctly.
Apply the fault current for 100ms - check and record the tripping time.
Repeat the REF tests for other windings, as appropriate.
5.4 Check application settings

Upon completion of the tests any protection or supervision elements which were
disabled for testing purposes must have their application settings restored. It is not
essential to injection test non-differential elements, as the basic integrity of the
setting file, and relay calibration have already been verified.
The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific
settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during the
injection test.
There are two methods of checking the settings:
• Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software via
the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear
communications port. Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original
written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only
provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available)
• Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare them with the
original application-specific setting record
It is very important that the key settings below are investigated:
5.4.1 Checking that the correct settings group is active

Ensure that the active setting group left applied is as expected. In the menu, navigate to:
• [003.062: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/GROUP, Actual

Setting Group] CM
• Read out and record the setting group shown, Setting Group SGx
5.4.2 Checking that the protection is switched on

Ensure that this is set to “Yes (Enabled)”. In the menu, navigate to:
• [003.030: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled]
• Read out and record that this shows “Yes (Enabled)”
5.4.3 Checking that no blocking of output relays is inadvertently left applied

In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to check that no User
programmable inhibits (blocks) on contact operation remain. All should show “No”.
• [021.014: Settings/Function Settings/Global/OUTP, USER Outp rel Block]
• [021.012: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd.Block USER]

(CM) 9-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
5.4.4 Checking that the primary protection function (differential) is enabled

In the menu, navigate to all of the following addresses to check that the display reads
“Enabled” or “Yes” in each instance:
• [056.027: Settings/Configuration/DIFF, Differential PR (87)]
• [019.080: Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF, General Enable USER]
• [07y.152: Settings/Function Settings/Setting Group SGx/DIFF, Enable]

Note that address “y” is the required setting group “x”, plus one.
5.4.5 Ensuring that all records and memories have been reset
In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to execute resetting. The general
reset is password protected… (Input the password, which by default is a press of the four
arrow keys <>∧∨, left-right-up-down in sequence. Press ENTER, and if the password has
been accepted the EDIT mode LED will light. The up or down key can now be used to
toggle the setting to “Execute”, then press ENTER.)
• [003.002: Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/MAIN, General Reset]
• [003.008: Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/MT_RC, Reset Recording]
5.5 Check correct display of status LEDs

The status of the 5 LED indicators on the left hand-side of the relay front panel should be
checked.
• The TRIP LED should not be showing
• The ALARM LED should not be showing
• The OUT OF SERVICE LED should not be showing
• The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated
• The ENTER/edit mode LED should not be showing
CM
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-21
6. ON-LOAD CHECKS
The objectives of the on-load checks are to:
• Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
energisation of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that
has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in
order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections
are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
When advised by the system operator that it is permitted to energise the primary
circuit, arrange for the protected transformer to be made live by closing the circuit
breaker. This will make VT and CT circuits live.
6.1 Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring
6.1.1 Voltage connection

For the voltage input to the relay, verify that the analog reading is as expected. When
reading the per unit (p.u.) measurement of voltage, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity)
when the line voltage is equal to the [010.002: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Vn
V.T. prim.] setting in kV.
6.1.2 Current connections

For each current input to the relay, verify that the analog reading is as expected. When
reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity)
when the line current is equal to the [In C.T. prim.] setting in A.
7. FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to CM
disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the
cover so that the protection is put into service.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated
(CM) 9-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
8. P63x COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date: Engineer:
Substation: Circuit:
System Frequency:
Front Plate Information
Model No. P63

Variant P63 - -3 -4 -6 - - - -
Serial Number/MM/YY
(includes month and year of / /
manufacture)
Front Plate Station Rating Used
Rated Current In 1A 5A A
Rated Voltage Vn 50 - 130V V
Auxiliary Voltage Vx V
Test Equipment Used
This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been
commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or incompatible but may not be
detected during the commissioning procedure.
Model:
Injection test set
Serial No:
CM Model:
Multimeter
Serial No:
Model:
Insulation tester
Serial No:
Type: MiCOM S1
Setting software
Version:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-23
*Tick as appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions
Yes* No*
been followed?
Product Checks
With the Relay De-Energized
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Relay damaged? Yes* No*
Rating information correct for installation? Yes* No*
Case earth installed? Yes* No*
Insulation resistance >100MΩ at 500V dc Yes* No* Not Tested*
External Wiring
Wiring checked against diagram? Yes* No*
Test block connections checked? Yes* No* N/A*
Measured auxiliary supply V ac* V dc*

Power supply protective earth installed? Yes* No*
With the Relay Energized

Healthy LED illuminated after power-up? Yes* No*
Date and Time

Clock set to local time? Yes* No*
Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes* No*
CM
Light Emitting Diodes

All LEDs illuminate on press of “C” key? Yes* No*
Input Opto-Isolators (Starting from Right Side)

Opto input U___ working? Yes* No*
Opto input U___ working? Yes* No* N/A*
(CM) 9-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Output Relays (Starting from Right Hand Side)

Relay K___ Working? Yes* No*
Relay K___ Working? Yes* No* N/A*
CM
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-25
COMM1 Communication Standard Courier* MODBUS*

IEC60870-5-103* DNP3.0*
UCA2.0*
Communications established? Yes* No*
Protocol converter tested? Yes* No* N/A*
COMM2 communications established? Yes* No*
MODEM tested? Yes* No* N/A*
UCA2 communications established? Yes* No* N/A*

RTD probe working? (where fitted) Yes* No* N/A*
Ambient temperature shown ˚C
Setting Checks
Application-specific function settings applied? Yes* No*
Current Inputs
In end a CT Ratio (HV winding) / (prim/sec)
In end b CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
In end c CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
In end d CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
End a neutral CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
End b neutral CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
End c neutral CT Ratio / (prim/sec)
Input VT Applied Value Displayed Value

CM
ΙA, a (HV DIFF A phase input) A p.u.
ΙB, a (HV DIFF B phase input) A p.u.
ΙC, a (HV DIFF C phase input) A p.u.
ΙA, b A p.u.
ΙB, b A p.u.
ΙC, b A p.u.
ΙA, c A p.u. N/A*
ΙB, c A p.u. N/A*
ΙC, c A p.u. N/A*
ΙA, d A p.u. N/A*
ΙB, d A p.u. N/A*
ΙC, d A p.u. N/A*
ΙY, a (REF) A p.u. N/A*
ΙY, b (REF) A p.u. N/A*
ΙY, c (REF) A p.u. N/A*
(CM) 9-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Voltage Input
VT Ratio N/A* / (prim/sec)
Input VT Applied Value Displayed Value

V V p.u. N/A*
Differential Element Tests

DIFF Idiff> pickup sensitivity OK Yes* No*
DIFF through fault stability (end a to b) OK Yes* No*
DIFF through fault stability (end a to c) OK Yes* No* N/A*
DIFF through fault stability (end a to d) OK Yes* No* N/A*
DIFF protection trip contact routing OK? Yes* No*
DIFF trip time s
REF_1 pickup sensitivity OK Yes* No* N/A*
REF_1 through fault stability OK Yes* No* N/A*
REF_1 protection trip contact routing OK? Yes* No* N/A*
REF_1 trip time s
REF_2 trip time s
REF_3 trip time s
CM
Application-Specific Function Settings Verified? Yes* No* N/A*
Settings extracted and stored as filename….? .x3v N/A*
Active setting group left applied SG
Protection switched on? Yes* No*
Any user blocking of contacts? Yes* No*
Differential protection enabled Yes* No*
Records and memories reset Yes* No*
HEALTHY LED lit, and no alarms? Yes* No*
On-Load Checks
Test wiring removed? Yes* No* N/A*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes* No* N/A*
Per unit voltage reading as expected? Yes* No* N/A*
Per unit current readings as expected? Yes* No*
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (CM) 9-27
Final Checks
Test wiring removed? Yes* No* N/A*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes* No* N/A*
HEALTHY LED still showing? Yes* No*
Secondary front cover replaced? Yes* No* N/A*
CM
Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness
Date: Date:
(CM) 9-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
9. “AS-FITTED” SETTINGS RECORD

It is recommended that either a MiCOM S1 print-out of settings applied is attached to the
commissioning record here, or preferably the file is stored electronically. The setting file
must be saved and stored securely, for example held on a CDROM kept within the
substation.
Safe electronic storage, under the control of the customer’s quality system, will permit easy
re-use and/or modification of settings in the future.
CM
Maintenance P63x/UK MT/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MAINTENANCE
MT

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK MT/A54 Maintenance
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MT
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MT) 10-1
CONTENTS
(MT) 10-
1. MAINTENANCE 3
1.1 Maintenance period 3
1.2 Maintenance checks 3
1.2.1 Alarms 3
1.2.2 Opto-isolators 3
1.2.3 Output relays 3
1.2.4 Measurement accuracy 4
1.3 Method of repair 4
1.3.1 MiCOM P63x relay 4
1.3.1.1 Replacing the complete relay 4
1.3.1.2 Replacing a module 5
1.4 Power supply module 5
1.4.1 Internal battery 5
1.4.1.1 Instructions for replacing the battery 5
1.4.1.2 Post modification tests 6
1.4.1.3 Battery disposal 6
1.4.2 Electrolytic capacitors 6
1.5 Cleaning 7
MT
FIGURES
Figure 1: Component drawing for power supply module V 6

(MT) 10-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MT
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MT) 10-3
1. MAINTENANCE
1.1 Maintenance period

It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive periodic monitoring after
installation. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it
is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
AREVA T&D protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of
relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However,
some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the
external wiring is intact.
1.2 Maintenance checks

The P63x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely checked for proper
operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months after
commissioning. Additional functional tests should performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years - 4
years at the maximum.
The P63x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for hardware
and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that communication within the
processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of functions that cannot be checked by the self-monitoring
feature without running a test from the device terminals. The respective device-specific
properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
1.2.1 Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so,
examine the “Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/CHECK” folder to
determine if any internal self-monitoring faults have been detected. Details of all alarm
conditions can be obtained by a “Readout of Logs” from the Communication menu in
MT
S&R-103.
Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
1.2.2 Opto-isolators
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read out
(‘Measurements + Tests/Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP’ folder). This check should
be performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
1.2.3 Output relays

With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even
two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the all-or-nothing relays. There is no monitoring
function for the external contact circuit. In this case the all-or-nothing relays must be
triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/OUTP’ folder).
(MT) 10-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Before testing, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent
switching operations will take place.
1.2.4 Measurement accuracy

The analog measured variables are fed through an analog preprocessing feature
(anti-aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In order to make sure that
the analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly, it is necessary to test from the device
terminals.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a suitable
testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such as 0.5 Inom) and a “large” measured
value (such as 4 Inom) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter.
This makes it possible to check the entire control range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating
device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
A dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few less
passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that only one
component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is
completely numerical and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values.
Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
1.3 Method of repair
1.3.1 MiCOM P63x relay

If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the
watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the
extensive use of surface-mount components faulty modules should be replaced, as it is not
possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the
faulty modules, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about
identifying the faulty module can be found in the Troubleshooting section (P63x/UK TS).
The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry
is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes
the possibility of incompatibility between replacement modules. However, it may be difficult
MT to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of the cubicle and rigidity of the
scheme wiring.
Replacing modules can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and
higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed
by an approved service center, the warranty will be invalidated.
contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s
rating label. This should ensure that no damage is caused by incorrect handling of
the electronic components.
1.3.1.1 Replacing the complete relay

The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete
relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the
scheme wiring.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay.
Note: The MiCOM P63x range of relays with ring-terminals have integral
current transformer shorting switches which will close when the heavy
duty terminal block is removed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MT) 10-5
Disconnect the relay earth, IRIG-B and fiber optic connections, as appropriate, from the rear
of the relay.
There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty, which are
fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws.
Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to

minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks
away from their internal connectors.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws
with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are fitted and
open.
Withdraw the relay carefully from the panel, rack, etc. because it will be heavy due to the
internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse,
ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth,
IRIG-B and fiber optic connections are replaced. Terminal blocks are labeled to facilitate
easy identification.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be re-commissioned using the instructions in
the Commissioning section (P63x/UK CM), inclusive of this section.
1.3.1.2 Replacing a module

Replacing printed circuit boards and other internal components of protective relays must be
undertaken only by Service Centers approved by AREVA T&D. Failure to obtain the
authorization of AREVA T&D After Sales Engineers prior to commencing work may
invalidate the product warranty.
Before removing any modules the auxiliary supply must be removed. Wait 5s for
capacitors to discharge. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current
transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated.
AREVA T&D Automation Support teams are available world-wide, and it is strongly
recommended that any repairs be entrusted to those trained personnel. For this reason,
details on product disassembly and re-assembly are not included here.
1.4 Power supply module

MT
1.4.1 Internal battery
The P63x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. Loss
of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over a
period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually constant until
capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual capacity is reached.
With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only a few μA during device
storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device operation, the result is a
correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended that the lithium battery only
be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above.
contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment's
rating label.
1.4.1.1 Instructions for replacing the battery

Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible without
soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the auxiliary
voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
(MT) 10-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
• Electrolytic capacitor:
On power supply module V
• Lithium battery:
On power supply module V
Note: Only AREVA-approved components may be used.

Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
P1843ENa
Figure 1: Component drawing for power supply module V
MT 1.4.1.2 Post modification tests

To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the auxiliary
supply fails, check cell [090.010, Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State
Signals/CHECK, Battery Failure] reads ‘No’.
Additionally, if further confirmation that the replacement battery is installed correctly is
required, the commissioning test described in section 5.2.3 of the Commissioning section
(P63x/UK CM), ‘Date and Time’, can be performed.
1.4.1.3 Battery disposal

The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal
procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
1.4.2 Electrolytic capacitors

Electrolytic capacitors are installed on the power supply module because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components is
80,000 hours or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the electrolytic
capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 years. The useful life is doubled for each
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (MT) 10-7
10 K reduction in temperature, thus for substation ambients ≤ 40˚C no capacitor

maintenance will be necessary during the relay service life.
1.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all ac and dc supplies, current transformer and
voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock
whilst cleaning.
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth moistened with clean water. The use
of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may damage the
relay’s surface and leave a conductive residue.
MT
(MT) 10-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
MT
Troubleshooting P63x/UK TS/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TROUBLESHOOTING
TS

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK TS/A54 Troubleshooting
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TS
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-1
CONTENTS
(TS) 11-
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION 3
3. POWER UP ERRORS 3
4. ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP 4

4.1 Error code identification 4
5. OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP 5
6. ERROR DURING OPERATION 6

6.1 ALARM LED indication 6
7. MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING 9

7.1 Failure of output contacts 9
7.2 Failure of opto inputs 9
7.3 Incorrect analog signals 9
8. REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE 10
TS
(TS) 11-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
TS
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-3
1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this section of the service manual is to allow an error condition on the relay
to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken.
Should the relay have developed a fault, it should be possible in most cases to identify which
relay module requires attention. The Maintenance section (P63x/UK MT), advises on the
recommended method of repair where faulty modules need replacing. It is not possible to
perform an on-site repair to a faulted module.
In cases where a faulty relay/module is being returned to the manufacturer or one of their
approved service centers, completed copy of the Repair/Modification Return Authorization
Form located at the end of this section should be included.
2. INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION

Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem experienced,
and then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis of the problem.
Symptom Refer To
Relay fails to power up Section 3
Relay powers up - but indicates error and halts during
Section 4
power-up sequence
Relay powers up but Out of Service LED is illuminated Section 5
Error during normal operation Section 6
Mal-operation of the relay during testing Section 7
Table 1: Problem identification
3. POWER UP ERRORS
If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to
determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power supply module of
the relay or the relay front panel.
Test Check Action

Check that the magnitude of the
supply voltage at the auxiliary
If auxiliary voltage is present and correct,
then proceed to test 2. Otherwise the wiring
TS
1 voltage input is correct. The P63x and fuses/MCBs in auxiliary supply should
is protected against damage be checked.
resulting from polarity reversal.
Note: Before checking further, If the fuse is defective, it should not be
disconnect the P63x from replaced before determining the cause of the
the power supply. failure. If a fuse is replaced without
eliminating the problem, there is a danger
Check to ensure fuse F1 on power
2 that the damage will spread.
supply module V is undamaged.
Required fuses:
Vaux = 24V dc, Type M3.5
Vaux = 48-250V dc/100-230V ac, Type M2
Table 2: Failure of relay to power up

If the cause of failure of the relay to power up can not be determined it should be returned to
the manufacturer or one of their approved service centers, accompanied with a completed
copy of the Repair/Modification Return Authorization Form located at the end of this section.
(TS) 11-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4. ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP

After the auxiliary supply voltage has been applied, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P63x.
• Check memories (RAM write/read test)
• Checksum test (calculate actual ROM checksum and compare with stored checksum)
• Check hardware (test real time clock, test counters, test A/D converter)
• Check bus and fitted modules (identify device type, verify correct modules fitted:
type/version/location)
• Check “intelligent” devices on fitted modules (if applicable) (write/read DPRAM on comm
module or transient ground fault module)
• Check software (compare compatibility of device type, data model information, processor
operating system and protection and control software)
4.1 Error code identification

If the Px3x detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is terminated. The display shows
which test was running when termination occurred and (if applicable) the address of the
faulty memory area, e.g. “ERROR 9 - 03C80000H”.
Error number (nn) Description

1 RAM error (with HW address)
5 Static RAM error (with HW address)
Non-volatile RAM (NOVRAM) error of setting parameters (with
6
HW address)
Flash-Eprom checksum error of device firmware (with HW
9
address)
17 Error of timer/clock 82C54
18 Error of A/D-converter
Flash-EPROM checksum error of bay templates (only OBS &
19
Cx3x devices; with HW address)
30 Wrong data model version
31 Wrong version of operating system iRMX386
Wrong software versions (combination) of protection, local
32
operation (HMI) and communication (COMM1/2)
TS 33 Wrong control software version (only OBS & Cx3x devices)
Table 3: Power-up self-test error
No control actions can be carried out. A new attempt to start up the Px3x can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-5
5. OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP

The yellow OUT OF SERVICE LED indicates that the device is out of operation (all
protection and control functions are blocked) and therefore should be used for high priority
alarming of operational personnel to take immediate/urgent corrective actions.
This LED is active if:
• The device is determined blocked/faulty by the internal self-monitoring due to a system

error;
• The protection is disabled (003.030 MAIN: Protection Enabled = No (Disabled);
• The output relays are blocked (021.014 OUTP: USER Outp rel Block = Yes);
• The trip command is blocked (021.012 MAIN: Trip Cmd.Block. USER = Yes).
Furthermore the setting (021.031 MAIN: Fct Assign Fault) may be used to allocate additional
internal alarms/errors to raise the blocked/faulty signal for high prior alarming of operational
personnel. A typical example is to configure the system alarm “CHECK: Error Kxx” with Kxx
being the output relay on which the trip command is configured. Please note that the
configuration of any signal to 021.031 only raises the “blocked/faulty” signal but does not
cause any blocking of protection or control functions.
Test Check Action

Check setting MAIN: Protection If set to No (Disabled), set to Yes (Enabled).
1 Enabled [003.030] is set to Yes Verify that the OUT OF SERVICE LED is
(Enabled). If so, proceed to test 2. extinguished.
Check setting OUTP: USER Outp If set to Yes, set to No. Verify that the OUT
2 rel Block [021.014] is set to No. If OF SERVICE LED is extinguished.
so, proceed to test 3.
Check setting MAIN: Trip If set to Yes, set to No. Verify that the OUT
3 Cmd.Block. USER [021.012] is set OF SERVICE LED is extinguished.
to No. If so, proceed to test 4.
Check setting MAIN: Fct Assign Check the current status of these signals to
Fault [021.031] to determine any determine if any are causing the LED to
user configured signals that may remain on. Reset these signals by correcting
4
be set to indicate via the OUT OF the problem indicated. Proceed to step 5 if
SERVICE LED. the LED can not be extinguished by resetting
these signals.
It is probable that the device has View the extracted log file to determine the
detected an internal fault. Extract cause of the fault.
the Monitoring Signal log via the
5
S&R-103 Communications/ TS
Readout of Logs…/Monitoring
Signal Recording command.
Table 4: Out of Service LED illuminated

(TS) 11-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
6. ERROR DURING OPERATION

After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during
normal operation with a cycle time of 10 seconds. These tests comprise:
• Timeout check of protection task
• Check of internal battery voltage
• Checksum test of recording buffers
• Checksum test of setting parameters
• Checksum test of monitoring buffer
• Continuity tests of output relay coils

In addition, errors (exceptions) detected by the main processor are immediately/directly
handled by the operating system, e.g. “zero division error” or “undefined op.code”.
Tests of external signals/wiring are done as part of the protection tasks, e.g. monitoring of
VT and CT measuring circuits.
6.1 ALARM LED indication

Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory via the S&R-103
Communications/Readout of Logs…/Monitoring Signal Recording command. The log will
contain monitoring or warning indications currently active in the device.
The status of the monitoring or warning indications can also be checked in the device in the
Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/CHECK menu group. The table
below details the device reaction when the internal signal listed occurs. Further explanation
of the signals is contained in section 8 - Measurements and Recording.
Device Action
Menu Text
On First Instance Subsequent Action
CHECK: Faulty DSP
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. DSP
CHECK: Warm Restart Exec.
CHECK: Cold Restart Exec.
CHECK: Cold Restart Warm restart Device blocking
TS CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure - -
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty - -
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail - -
CHECK: Battery Failure - -
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: +24V Supply Faulty Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 (…21) Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 (…21) - -
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty - -
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-7
Device Action
Menu Text
CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty - -
CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty - -
CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty - -
CHECK: Error K 1201 (…2008) - -
CHECK: Undefined Op Code Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Invalid Op Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Protection Failure Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error - -
CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM Warm restart Device blocking
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC - -
CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block - -
CHECK: Inval. SW vers.comm. - -
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y - -
CHECK: Time-out Module Y
CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V Blocking of f<> and V<> protection
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end a
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end b
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end c
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end d
CHECK: Invalid Charact. V/f
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1 Fault dependent
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2 Fault dependent
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC Fault dependent TS
CHECK: PT100 open Circuit Fault dependent
CHECK: Overload 20 mA input Fault dependent
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp. Fault dependent
CHECK: Setting Error f<> Blocking of f<> protection
CHECK: Iref, a Inval. Range Device blocking
CHECK: Output 30 - -
CHECK: Output 30 (t) - -
CHECK: Iref, b Inval. Range Device blocking
(TS) 11-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Device Action
Menu Text
CHECK: Iref, c Inval. Range Device blocking
CHECK: Iref, d Inval. Range Device blocking
CHECK: Matching Fail. end a Device blocking
CHECK: Matching Fail. end b Device blocking
CHECK: Matching Fail. end c Device blocking
CHECK: Matching Fail. end d Device blocking
CHECK: Ratio mtch.Fact.inv. Device blocking
CHECK: 2nd Match.Fact. inv. Device blocking
CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_1 Device blocking
CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 Device blocking
CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 Device blocking
CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_1 Device blocking
CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_1 Device blocking
CHECK: CTA Error THRM1 - -
CHECK: CTA Error THRM2 - -
CHECK: Setting Error THRM1 Blocking of THRM1 protection
TS CHECK: Setting Error THRM2 Blocking of THRM2 protection
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync Clock synchronization failure
Table 5: Device response to self monitoring errors

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-9
7. MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING
7.1 Failure of output contacts

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at [003.044 OUTP: Hold-Time for Test]) in the Measurements + Tests/Control and
Testing/OUTP menu group.
First select the output relay to be tested [003.042 OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test]. The output
relay to be tested can only be selected if the device has been set to off-line at (003.030)
MAIN: Protection Enabled ('Set/Func/Glob/' menu group). Test triggering then occurs via
OUTP: Relay Test. It is password protected (see Getting Started - GS ‘Password-Protected
Control Operations’).
7.2 Failure of opto inputs

By selecting the corresponding state signal within the Measurements + Tests/
Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP, it is possible to determine whether the signal that is
present is recognized correctly by the P63x. The values displayed have the following
meanings:
• Low: Not energized
• High: Energized
• Disabled: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input

This display appears regardless of the opto input mode selected.
7.3 Incorrect analog signals

If it is suspected that the analog quantities being measured by the relay are not correct then
the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the nature of the problem. The
measured values displayed by the relay should be compared with the actual magnitudes at
the relay terminals. Verify that the correct terminals are being used and that the CT and VT
ratios set on the relay are correct. The correct 120 degree displacement of the phase
measurements can be used to confirm that the inputs have been correctly connected.
TS
(TS) 11-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
8. REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE

Please follow these 5 steps to return an Automation product to us:
1. Get the Repair and Modification Authorization Form (RMA)
Find a copy of the RMA form at the end of this section.
¾ To obtain an electronic version of the RMA form for e-mailing, please visit the
following URL:
http://www.areva-td.com/automationrepair
2. Fill in RMA form

Fill in only the white part of the form.
Please ensure that all fields marked (M) are completed such as:
¾ Equipment model
¾ Model No. and Serial No.
¾ Description of failure or modification required (please be specific)
¾ Value for customs (in case the product requires export)
¾ Delivery and invoice addresses
¾ Contact details
3. Send RMA form to your local contact

Find enclosed a list of local service contacts, worldwide.
4. Receive from local service contact, the information required to ship the product
Your local service contact will provide you with all the information:
¾ Pricing details
¾ RMA n°
¾ Repair center address
If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to next stage.
TS
5. Send the product to the repair center
¾ Address the shipment to the repair center specified by your local contact
¾ Ensure all items are protected by appropriate packaging: anti-static bag and foam
protection
¾ Ensure a copy of the import invoice is attached with the unit being returned
¾ Ensure a copy of the RMA form is attached with the unit being returned
¾ E-mail or fax a copy of the import invoice and airway bill document to your local
contact
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (TS) 11-11
LOCAL CONTACT LIST
Automation Telephone and Fax

Country E-Mail
Support Manager Numbers
NORTH AMERICA
Tel: (1) 450 923 7084
Canada CANADA : Brossard
Fax: (1) 450 923 9571
USA (Products), Virgin Tel: (1) 610 997 5100

USA : Bethlehem automationrepair.us@areva-td.com
Islands Fax: (1) 610 997 5450
CENTRAL AMERICA
Anguilla, Antigua &
Barbuda, Aruba,
Barbados, Belize,
Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica,
Cuba, Dominica,
Dominican Republic,
El Salvador, Grenada,
Guatemala, Guyana,
Honduras, Jamaica, Tel: (52) 55 5387 4309
Kiribati, Mexico, MEXICO : support.automation-mexico@areva-td.com
Montserrat, Netherlands Fax: (52) 55 5387 4317
Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Republic of
Haiti, Saint Kitts & Nevis,
Santa Lucia, Saint
Vincent and the
Grenadines, Suriname,
Trinidad and Tobago,
Turks and Caicos Islands,
Venezuela.
SOUTH AMERICA
Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil,
Chile, Ecuador, Falkland Tel: (55) 11 3491 7271
BRAZIL : Sao Paulo automationrepair.southamerica@areva-td.com
Islands, Paraguay, Peru, Fax: (55) 11 3491 7256
Uruguay.
EUROPE
(MEDITERRANEAN)
Albania, Andorra,
Belgium, Bulgaria, Bosnia
and Herzegovinia,
Croatia, Cyprus, France, Tel: (33) 4 67 20 55 55
French DOM-TOM, FRANCE : Lattes automationrepair.medaf@areva-td.com
Greece, Israel, Fax: (33) 4 67 20 56 00
Macedonia, Malta,
Mauritius, Romania,
Yugoslavia.
EUROPE (EAST)
Austria, Czech Republic,

Germany, Hungary, Tel: (49) 69 66 32 11 36
Liechtenstein, Slovakia, GERMANY : Dresden Service-afs@areva-td.com
Svalbard Islands,
Switzerland, Turkey.
Fax: (49) 69 66 32 28 10
TS
Armenia, Azerbaijan,
Belarus, Estonia, Georgia, Tel: (48) 748 548 410
POLAND : Swiebodzice automationrepair.nce2@areva-td.com
Latvia, Moldova, Poland, Fax: (48) 748 548 548
Ukraine.
EUROPE (NORTH)
Denmark, Finland, Tel: (44) 1785 272 156

Iceland, Norway, UK : Stafford automationrepair.uk@areva-td.com
Netherlands, Sweden. Fax: (44) 1785 227 729
UNITED KINGDOM
Tel: (44) 1785 272 156

Faroe Islands, Ireland, UK UK : Stafford automationrepair.uk@areva-td.com
Fax: (44) 1785 227 729
(TS) 11-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Automation Telephone and Fax

Country E-Mail
Support Manager Numbers
EUROPE (OTHER)
Tel: (39) 0345 28 111
Italy ITALY : Bergamo automationrepair.italy@areva-td.com
Fax: (39) 0345 22 590
Tel: (7) 095 231 29 49

Russian Federation RUSSIA : Moscow
Fax: (7) 095 231 29 45
Tel: (34) 91 655 9043

Spain, Gibralter SPAIN : Madrid
Fax: (34) 91 305 9200
AFRICA
Tel: (33) 4 67 20 55 55
All African countries FRANCE : Lattes automationrepair.medaf@areva-td.com
Fax: (33) 4 67 20 56 00
MIDDLE EAST
Bahrain, Iran, Iraq,

Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Tel: (971) 6556 0559
Oman, Qatar, Saudi UAE : Dubai automationrepair.middleeast@areva-td.com
Arabia, Syria, United Arab Fax: (971) 6556 1082
Emirates, Yemen.
ASIA
Tel: (971) 6556 0559
Afghanistan, Pakistan UAE : Dubai automationrepair.middleeast@areva-td.com
Fax: (971) 6556 1082
Kazakhstan, Kyrghyzstan, Tel: (48) 748 548 410

Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, POLAND : Swiebodzice automationrepair.nce2@areva-td.com
Uzbekistan. Fax: (48) 748 548 548
Bhutan, India, Maldives, Tel: (91) 44 226 40 921

INDIA : Chennai automationsupport.india@areva-td.com
Nepal, Sri Lanka Fax: (91) 44 226 40 657
EASTERN ASIA
Bangladesh, British Indian
Ocean Territory, Brunei,
Cambodia, Cocos Islands,
Democratic People’s
Republic of Korea, East
Timor, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Japan, Laos, Tel: (65) 6749 0777
SINGAPORE : automationrepair.seasia@areva-td.com
Macau, Malaysia, Fax: (65) 6846 1796
Myanmar, Palau, Papua
New Guinea, Philippines,
Singapore, Solomon
Islands, South Korea,
Taiwan, Thailand,
Tokelau, Tuvalu, Vietnam.
Tel: (86) 21 5812 8822

China, Mongolia. CHINA : Shanghai automationrepair.shanghai@areva-td.com
Fax: (86) 21 5812 8833
OCEANIA
TS American Samoa,
Australia, Christmas
Islands, Cook Islands, Fiji,
Guam, Heard and Mac
Donalds Islands, Marshall Tel: (61) 2 9739 3071
AUSTRALIA : Sydney automationrepair.pacific@areva-td.com
Islands, Micronesia, Fax: (61) 2 9739 3092
Nauru, New Zealand,
Niue, Norfolk Island,
Northern Mariana Islands,
Pitcairn, Samoa, Vanuatu.
REPAIR/MODIFICATION RETURN AUTHORIZATION FORM
FIELDS IN GREY TO BE FILLED IN BY AREVA T&D PERSONNEL ONLY
Reference RMA: Date:
Repair Center Address (for shipping) Service Type LSC PO No.:
Retrofit
Warranty
Paid service
Under repair contract
Wrong supply
AREVA T&D - Local Contact Details
Name:
Telephone No.:
Fax No.:
E-mail:
IDENTIFICATION OF UNIT
Fields marked (M) are mandatory, delays in return will occur if not completed.
Model No./Part No.: (M) Site Name/Project:
Manufacturer Reference: (M) Commissioning Date:
Serial No.: (M)

Under Warranty: Yes No
Additional Information:
Software Version:
Customer P.O (if paid):
Quantity:
FAULT INFORMATION
Type of Failure Found Defective
Hardware fail During FAT/inspection
Mechanical fail/visible defect On receipt
Software fail During installation/commissioning
Other: During operation
Other:
Fault Reproducibility
Fault persists after removing, checking on test bench
Fault persists after re-energization
Intermittent fault
Description of Failure Observed or Modification Required - Please be specific (M)
FOR REPAIRS ONLY
Would you like us to install an updated firmware version after repair? Yes No
CUSTOMS & INVOICING INFORMATION
Required to allow return of repaired items
Value for Customs (M)
Customer Invoice Address ((M) if paid) Customer Return Delivery Address

(full street address) (M)
Part shipment accepted Yes No

OR Full shipment required Yes No
Contact Name: Contact Name:
Telephone No.: Telephone No.:
Fax No.: Fax No.:
E-mail: E-mail:
REPAIR TERMS
1. Please ensure that a copy of the import invoice is attached with the returned unit, together with the
airway bill document. Please fax/e-mail a copy of the appropriate documentation (M).
2. Please ensure the Purchase Order is released, for paid service, to allow the unit to be shipped.
3. Submission of equipment to AREVA T&D is deemed as authorization to repair and acceptance of quote.
4. Please ensure all items returned are marked as Returned for ‘Repair/Modification’ and protected by
appropriate packaging (anti-static bag for each board and foam protection).
SCADA Communications P63x/UK SC/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
SC

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK SC/A54 SCADA Communications
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-1
CONTENTS
(SC) 12-
1. COURIER INTERFACE 5
1.1 Courier communication settings 5
1.2 Relay courier database 7
1.3 Courier message structure 8
1.3.1 Information field 9
1.4 Supported command set 9
1.5 Setting changes 10
1.6 Event extraction 10
1.7 Disturbance record extraction 10
2. MODBUS INTERFACE 11
2.1 MODBUS communication settings 11
2.2 MODBUS transactions 13
2.3 Serial transmission modes 13
2.3.1 RTU mode 14
2.3.2 RTU framing 14
2.4 MODBUS functions 14
2.5 Error handling 14
2.5.1 Exception codes 15
2.6 Procedures 15
2.6.1 Time synchronization 15
2.6.2 Event handling 15
2.6.2.1 Event handling for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM” 15
2.6.2.2 Event handling for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM D” 19 SC

2.7 Transmission of disturbances and long-time recorded data 20
2.7.1 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM” 20
2.7.2 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM D” 29
3. IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE 31

3.1 IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings 31
3.2 Physical connection and link layer 32
3.3 Initialization 33
3.4 Time synchronization 33

(SC) 12-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
3.5 Spontaneous events 33
3.6 General interrogation 33
3.7 Cyclic measurements 33
3.8 Commands 33
3.9 Test mode 34
3.10 Disturbance records 34
3.11 Blocking of monitor direction and/or command direction 34
4. DNP3.0 INTERFACE 35
4.1 DNP3.0 communication settings 35
4.2 DNP3.0 layer model 37
4.2.1 Physical layer 37
4.2.2 Data link layer 37
4.2.3 Transport layer 37
4.2.4 Application layer 38
4.3 Data objects 38
4.3.1 General 38
4.3.2 Data objects supported 39
4.3.2.1 Data object 1 - binary input 39
4.3.2.2 Data object 10 - binary output 39
4.3.2.3 Data object 12 - control relay output block 40
4.3.2.4 Data object 20 - binary counters 41
4.3.2.5 Data object 21 - frozen counters 41
4.3.2.6 Data object 30 - analog inputs 41
4.3.2.7 Data object 34 - analog input reporting deadband 42
4.3.2.8 Data object 40 - analog output status 42
4.3.2.9 Data object 41 - analog output block 42

SC
4.3.2.10 Data object 80 - internal indications 42
4.4 Function codes 43
4.4.1 Function codes implemented 43
4.4.1.1 Request function codes - master to slave 43
4.4.1.2 Response function codes - slave to master 44
4.4.2 Function 1 - read 44
4.4.3 Function 2 - write 44
4.4.3.1 Analog input reporting deadband 44
4.4.3.2 Time and date/time synchronization 44

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-3
4.4.3.3 Internal indications 44
4.4.4 Function 3, 4, 5, 6 - select, operate, direct operate, direct operate no ack. 44
4.4.5 Functions 7, 8, 9, 10 - immediate freeze (with/without acknowledge), freeze and clear

(with/without Acknowledge) (*) 45
4.4.6 Function 13 - cold start 45
4.4.7 Function 14 - warm start 45
4.4.8 Function 22 - assign class 45
4.4.9 Function 23 - delay measurement 45
4.5 Notes on communication functions 45
4.5.1 Startup 45
4.5.2 Time and date handling 45
4.5.3 Event handling 46
4.5.3.1 Binary events 46
4.5.3.2 Analog events 46
4.5.4 Data class handling 46
4.5.5 File transfer 47
5. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE IEC 61850 (FUNCTION GROUP IEC) 48

5.1 Ethernet module 48
5.2 Activating and enabling 49
5.3 Client log-on 49
5.4 Clock synchronization 49
5.5 Fault transmission 49
5.6 Transmission of "GOOSE messages" 49
5.7 Communication with the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface 50
6. GENERIC OBJECT ORIENTED SUBSTATION EVENT (FUNCTION

GROUP GOOSE) 51
6.1 Activating and enabling 51 SC
6.2 Sending GOOSE 51
6.3 Receiving GOOSE 52
7. GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GSSE) 53

7.1 Activating and enabling 53
7.2 Sending GSSE 53
7.3 Receiving GSSE 53

(SC) 12-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Logic for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement 16

Figure 2: Logic for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement 18
Figure 3: Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode ‘upload by column’ 21
Figure 4: Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode ‘file upload’ 25
Figure 5: Basic structure of sent GOOSE 52
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-5
1. COURIER INTERFACE
A general description of the Courier protocol can be found in the Courier specification.
The Px30 series supports Courier over EIA(RS)485 connection (d.c., polarity-sensitive), not
the K-BUS format which is a transformer-coupled "a.c." connection.
1.1 Courier communication settings

Enabling and configuration of the Courier protocol for P63x devices must be done via the
local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead the user
may configure the data items which are to be made available to the Courier master by
selecting items from “m out of n” selection tables.
The protocol is available on the “logical” communications interface 1 (COMM1) only.
Configuration is done in the menu tree branch:
Settings\Configuration\COMM1
The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the Courier protocol to be used:
Set/Conf/COMM1
Remote Comms Port1
Address: 056 026
Enabled
Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is
cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
Set/Conf/COMM1
General Enable USER
Address: 003 170
Yes
Set/Conf/COMM1
COURIER Enable
Address: 103 040
Yes
Enabling settings relevant for the Courier protocol.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Communicat Protocol
Address: 003 167
COMM1
COURIER
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. SC
Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the Courier
protocol. The following settings are used to configure the Courier
protocol and will be dependant upon the system within which the
device will be communicating.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Baud Rate
Address: 003 071
19.2 kBaud
Set the baud rate of the communication interface.

(SC) 12-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Set/Conf/COMM1
Parity Bit
Address: 003 171
Even
Set/Conf/COMM1
Octet Comm. Address
Address: 003 072
1
The unique communication address used to identify the device over communications via the
rear port.
Values in the P63x device data model which are to be made available to the Courier protocol
must be configured using the following settings:
Set/Conf/COMM1
Command Selection
Address: 103 042
↓
The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary
commands (read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ‘Device
online’).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Signal Selection
Address: 103 043
↓
The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary signals
(read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ’Starting I>’).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Meas. val. Selection
Address: 103 044
↓
The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the analog
measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g.
’Running time’).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Parameter Selection
Address: 103 045
↓
SC The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the analog settings
(read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. ’tI>’).
The selected data items are written to four lists in the order in which they have been selected
and the Courier master can access any of the information which has been configured in this
way. In the Courier protocol these lists are referred to as “columns”. The entries in the lists
are numbered consecutively. In the Courier protocol these numbers are referred to as
“rows”.
In the Courier protocol each data item is called a “cell”. It is addressed by its column and
row. The first cell in each list (row 0) is called a “heading” and it contains only the text of the
corresponding P63x device data model configuration setting.
Some system data information is always accessible to the Courier master but cannot be
changed.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-7
The numbering of the columns and rows is as below:
Column 0 Column 10 Column 20 Column 30 Column 40

(System Data) (Commands) (Signals) (Measurements) (Settings)
cell 00.00 cell 10.00 cell 20.00 cell 30.00 cell 40.00
… cell 10.01 cell 20.01 cell 30.01 …
… … … … …
… … … … …
cell 00.08 … … … cell 40.nn
… … …
cell 10.nn … cell 30.nn
…
cell 20.nn
System data cells have fixed Courier addresses (column, row). In the Courier
implementation for P63x devices the data has been simulated because the data does not
exist in the required format in the P63x device data model. The implemented data items are
as follows:
Column Row Description Format

00 00 System Data ASCII string
00 04 Description ASCII string
00 05 Plant Reference ASCII string
00 06 Model Number ASCII string
00 08 Serial Number ASCII string
1.2 Relay courier database

The Courier data model is generated from the complete P63x device data model when a
device starts up. The Courier data model contains only the description texts of the system
data column, and the command, signal, measurement and setting cells which have been
configured to be accessible to the Courier master. In addition the Courier data model
contains all the setting strings for cells whose contents are displayed as a text rather than a
value, e.g. “Yes”, “No”, “On”, “Off”. Normally there is no Courier data model on the Courier
master station, and the Courier master first reads the Courier data model from a device
using the ‘Get Column Headings’ and ’Get Column Texts’ commands. When the Courier
master wants to write to a cell which uses a text rather than a value in the display, the
master sends a ’Get Strings’ command to retrieve the setting strings from the device.
Each cell text in the Courier data model has a description text. This is 36 characters long,
including a field which contains formatting information which the Courier master uses for
displaying the cell contents. This formatting information is similar to that used by the C
SC
programming language (e.g. .%s. for a string, .%u. for an unsigned integer).
If the cell is not a heading cell, then the cell contains a value. The value is either a numerical
value or a text. Here are some examples:
(SC) 12-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Cell description text for a cell which contains a value:
Field Contents, (e.g.)

5 character function group “HMI ”
1 space ““
20 character text “Auto Return Time “
5 formatting characters “%u “
5 character unit “s “
The Courier master displays the value according to the formatting information (number of
decimal places, sign etc.).
Cell description text for a cell which contains a text:

5 character function group “COMM1”
1 space ““
20 character text “Baud Rate “
5 formatting characters “%s “
5 character unit (empty) “ “
Note: The unit in the P63x device data model is up to 10 characters long.
However, the Courier master program PAS&T cannot handle texts of
this length and so the last 5 characters of the unit field are truncated.
A text which is used as the contents of a cell is 26 characters long. Space has been
reserved for future use for the function group:

5 character function group (empty) “ “
1 space ““
20 character text “Yes “
1.3 Courier message structure

The framing of messages between the Courier master and P63x slave devices conforms to
the IEC870 standard:
Field Value (hex)

Start Byte 1 68
SC Length Byte 1 xx
Length Byte 2 xx
Start Byte 2 68
Information Field Byte 1 xx
… …
Information Field Byte n xx
Checksum xx
End Byte 16
The length is the number of bytes in the information field. The checksum is the byte sum of
all bytes in the information field.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-9
1.3.1 Information field

The contents of the information field are as below:
Information Field Value (hex)

Control Byte xx
Unit Address xx
Network Address 00
Data Field Byte 1 xx
… …
Data Field Byte n xx
The control byte in a message from the Courier master to a P63x slave device has either the
value “7B” (hex) or “5B” (hex). The FCB (frame check bit, bit 5) is set to “1” in the first
message from the master (‘Reset Remote Link’ command) and is toggled in each
subsequent message, meaning that the control byte alternates between “7B” and “5B”. By
evaluating this byte it is possible for a P63x slave device to detect that a message has been
lost. In response messages to the Courier master the control byte is always set to “08”.
1.4 Supported command set

The following Courier commands have been implemented in P63x devices:
Code
Command Description
(hex)
.. Reset Remote Link Reset/start communication in slave device
10 Poll Buffer Poll for last command while device busy
11 Poll Status Poll for status only
12 Get Text Get text for menu location
14 Get Value Read the value of a menu location
15 Enter Setting Mode Get setting limits and enter setting mode
16 Get Column Headings Read all column headings
17 Get Column Text Read all texts for a menu column
18 Get Column Values Read all values for a menu column
19 Get Strings Get setting strings for a menu location
21 Send Block Send next block in a blocked transaction
23 Send Event Send and event
24 Accept Event Acknowledge receipt of event SC
40 Preload Setting Preload a new value before setting
45 Set Real Time Set the devices real time clock
4A Abort Setting Abort the current setting
4E Execute Setting Execute the preloaded setting
Using these commands it is possible to read any information from a P63x device data model
which has been configured to be accessible to the Courier master. Courier events (i.e.
changes in the value of a cell or stored fault values) can be read out from a slave device.
The data and time can be changed so that timestamps in messages from slave devices are
synchronized.
(SC) 12-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
1.5 Setting changes

In the Courier implementation for P63x devices, settings are done using the Courier
commands ‘Enter Setting Mode’, ‘Preload Setting’, ‘Execute Setting’, ‘Abort Setting’, and (if a
cell uses strings instead of numeric values for display purposes) the ‘Get Strings’ command.
The ‘Enter Setting Mode’ command causes a slave device to start a 2 minute timeout.
During this period the Courier master should attempt to change the specified cell. No other
cell may be written to during this time. The slave device responds with the cells current
value, lower and upper limit, and increment. These values depend on the data type of the
cell. If the value has decimal places, the data type is floating point. If the value is a whole
number, the data type is unsigned or signed integer. If the value is not to be displayed
numerically but as a text (e.g. “No” and “Yes” instead of ‘0’ and ‘1’), the data type is ‘indexed
string’. In this case the Courier master must send a ‘Get Strings’ command to the slave
device to retrieve the valid setting strings for the cell. The strings correspond to the values in
the range ‘0’ to ‘n-1’, where ‘n’ is the number of setting strings.
The Courier master subsequently sends a ‘Preload Setting’ command to the slave device.
The command message contains a setting data packet. The slave device echoes the setting
data packet in a response message.
If an error occurs, the Courier master sends an ‘Abort Setting’ command to the slave device
which causes the slave to leave setting mode and reset the timeout. If no error occurs the
Courier master sends an ‘Execute Setting’ command to the slave device. While the slave
device is busy executing the setting, the Courier master sends ‘Poll Buffer’ commands. The
slave device answers these commands with messages containing no data (i.e. only a
timestamp and status byte) but sets the BUSY bit in the status byte. When the setting is
complete or if an error occurs during setting, the slave device responds to the ‘Poll Buffer’
command with a message containing a reply code (successful or an error code).
1.6 Event extraction

Courier events are either changes in the value of a cell or fault measurements stored by a
device. Events are generated only for values which have been configured to be accessible
to the Courier master.
P63x devices have an event ring buffer in which up to 100 Courier events may be stored.
Embedded in the cell text is formatting information for displaying the value, e.g. “%.1f”
(floating point, 1 decimal place) or “%s” (string.). The timestamp is the time at which the
event occurred.
If a slave device has events available for reading, it sets the EVENT bit in the status byte of
response messages. If this bit is not set, the Courier master should not attempt to request
events from the slave device.
If the Courier master sends a ‘Send Event’ command to a slave device, the device responds
with the oldest event in the event buffer. The format of an event in a response message
depends on the data type of the value.
SC Each event must be acknowledged by the Courier master with an ‘Accept Event’ command,
otherwise the event remains in the event buffer until a subsequent ‘Send Event’ command
followed by an ‘Accept Event’ command is received.
1.7 Disturbance record extraction

Courier has no explicit commands for reading disturbances.
Disturbance reading is not supported in the Courier implementation for P63x devices.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-11
2. MODBUS INTERFACE
The MODBUS interface is a master/slave protocol and it is defined by MODBUS.org: See
www.modbus.org
MODBUS Serial Protocol Reference Guide: PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
2.1 MODBUS communication settings

Enabling and configuration of the MODBUS protocol for P63x devices must be done via the
may configure the data items which are to be made available to the MODBUS master by
MODBUS register allocation depends on the MODBUS variant selected. The register
allocation for the two variants is as described in Appendix A and B of the “MODBUS Protocol
for MiCOM 30 Series” document.
The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the MODBUS protocol to be
used.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Remote Comms Port1
Address: 056 026
Enabled
setting.
Set/Conf/COMM1
General Enable USER
Address: 003 170
Yes
Set/Conf/COMM1
MODBUS Enable
Address: 003 220
Yes
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

SC
Set/Conf/COMM1
Communicat Protocol
Address: 003 167
COMM1
MODBUS
Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the MODBUS
protocol. The following settings are used to configure the MODBUS
(SC) 12-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Set/Conf/COMM1
Baud Rate
Address: 003 071
19.2 kBaud
Set/Conf/COMM1
Parity Bit
Address: 003 171
Even
Set/Conf/COMM1
Octet Comm. Address
Address: 003 072
1
rear port.
The following device setting is used to select which MODBUS variant is to be used.
Set/Conf/COMM1
MODBUS Variant
Address: 003 214
ALSTOM D
There are two MODBUS variants:
• ALSTOM
• ALSTOM D
The main difference between the two variants is the allocation of the MODBUS registers.
MODBUS register on protocol variant

Description
ALSTOM ALSTOM D
COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds 06153 … 06216 00301 … 00400
COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Sig. 06028 … 06091 10301 … 10400
COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. m.val. 18369 … 18432 30301 … 30400
COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. Param. 18433 … 18496 40301 … 40400
The first command in the actual configured list of “Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds” is addressable by
the “ALSTOM D” MODBUS register 00301, the second by 00302, etc. The first measurement
SC value by 30301, etc.
MODBUS register areas are defined contiguously so that more than one item of information
may be accessed in a single query.
Values in the device data model which are to be made available to the MODBUS protocol
Set/Conf/COMM1
Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds
Address: 003 210
↓
This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary commands
(read/write) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-13
Set/Conf/COMM1
Reg.asg. Selec. Sig.
Address: 003 211
↓
only) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Reg.asg. Sel. m.val.
Address: 003 212
↓
measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Reg.asg. Sel. Param.
Address: 003 213
↓
(read/write) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master.
In the case of MODBUS variant “ALSTOM”, the following setting is used to define whether
automatic event acknowledgement is to be used.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Autom Event Confirm.
Address: 003 249
Disabled
The following setting is used to configure the behavior of the device when refreshing
measurement values:
Set/Conf/COMM1
Delta t (MODBUS)
Address: 003 152
5 s
This setting defines the time in seconds after which measurement values are refreshed by
the protection software in the device. The value of this setting should be chosen carefully
because changes in the value of a measurement within the configured time period are not
registered.
2.2 MODBUS transactions

MODBUS controllers communicate using a master-slave mechanism in which only one
device (the master) can initiate transactions (called queries). The other devices (the slaves)
respond by supplying the requested data to the master, or by taking the action requested in SC
the query.
The master can address individual slaves, or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves.
Slaves return a message (called a response) to queries that are addressed to them
individually. No response is made to broadcast queries from the master.
2.3 Serial transmission modes

MODBUS can communicate using either of two transmission modes:
• ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)
• RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)

In the P63x implementation only RTU mode is supported.
(SC) 12-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
2.3.1 RTU mode
Coding system 8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0-9, A-F

Two hexadecimal characters in each 8-bit field of the message
Bits per byte 1 start bit
8 data bits, least significant bit sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity
2.3.2 RTU framing
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END

T1-T2-T3-T4 8 BITS 8 BITS n x 8 BITS 16 BITS T1-T2-T3-T4
START Silent interval of at least 3.5 character times

Address field, slave device addresses 1 - 247, address 0 is used for
ADDRESS
broadcast
FUNCTION Function code
DATA Data field, sets of RTU characters, can be non-existent
CRC CHECK CRC value, 16 bit
END Silent interval of at least 3.5 character times
2.4 MODBUS functions

The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the relay:
01 Read Coil Status
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
06 Preset Single Register
08 Diagnostics
16 Preset Multiple Registers
SC 2.5 Error handling

One of four possible events can occur as a result of a query from the master:
• If the slave device receives the query without a communication error and can handle the
query normally, it returns a normal response
• If the slave does not receive the query due to a communication error, no response is
returned
• If the slave receives the query but detects a communication error (parity or CRC), no
response is returned
• If the slave receives the query without a communication error, but cannot handle it (for
example if the request is to a non-existent coil or register), the slave returns an exception
response informing the master of the nature of the error. In exception responses, the
slave sets the most-significant bit of the function code to 1
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-15
2.5.1 Exception codes
Code
Name Meaning
(dec)
The function code received in the query is not
01 Illegal Function
an allowable action for the slave
The data address received in the query is not
02 Illegal Data Address
an allowable address for the slave
A value contained in the query is not an
03 Illegal Data Value
allowable value for the slave
04 Slave Device Failure The slave has an internal communication error
The slave is processing a long duration
06 Slave Device Busy
command
2.6 Procedures
2.6.1 Time synchronization

The time is kept in four registers in IEC 870-5 CP56Time2a format in reverse order.
Byte Position and Register Contents Register (dec)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALSTOM ALSTOM D
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Year 02049 40001
0 0 0 0 Month DOW Day of Month 02050 40002
SU 0 0 Hours IV 0 Minutes 02051 40003
Millisecond High Millisecond Low 02052 40004
Note: DOW - Day of week (1: Monday)

SU - Summer time (0: standard time, 1: daylight saving time)
IV - Invalid (0: valid, 1: invalid)
Time synchronization is done according to IEC 60870-5-103.
The MODBUS master sends the time to the slave(s) using function code 16 (‘Preset Multiple
Registers’). A slave adjusts the time taken from the message (taking into account the
elapsed communication and internal processing time) and sets its internal clock. The newly
set time is written to the time synchronization registers so that the master can check that
time synchronization was successful.
Note: All fields must be provided in a time synchronization message.
2.6.2 Event handling SC

All P63x devices have a ring buffer for storing the most recent 100 state changes (referred to
as events). Event transmission is handled differently depending on the configured MODBUS
variant.
2.6.2.1 Event handling for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM”

If more events occur than can fit in the ring buffer, the oldest event is overwritten by the new
event. In addition, bit 13 of the system information register is set, and an additional event
‘buffer overflow start’ is generated with the register number and contents of the system
information register. When an event has been read and acknowledged, the event is deleted
from the ring buffer, bit 13 of the system information register is reset and an additional event
‘buffer overflow end’ is generated with the register number and contents of the system
information register.
(SC) 12-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
For this MODBUS variant there are two possible modes for event transmission:
• Event transmission without automatic event acknowledgement
• Event transmission with automatic event acknowledgement

The mode can be selected under COMM1 : Autom Event Confirm. (003 249).
2.6.2.1.1 Event transmission without automatic acknowledgement
In this mode the MODBUS master sends a message with function code 03 or 04 to read
register 13825 (dec). The MODBUS slave device returns the oldest event. If the master
receives the event successfully, it sends a message with function code 06 to write to register
01025 (dec), acknowledging receipt of the event. The slave responds by echoing the
message, deletes the event from the ring buffer, and may reset bit 2 of the device status
register and bit 13 of the system information register where appropriate. If the master
detects an error during reception of the event, the master may read register 13825 (dec)
again to retrieve the same event. If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond
with an exception response code 04.
The following figure shows the basic logic for event transmission without automatic
acknowledgement:
MODUS MODUS
Master Slave
Read Device Status
Send Device Status, bit 2 = 1 optional
Read Event
Send Event
Send Event Acknowledgement
Confirm Event Acknowledgement
P1927ENa
Figure 1: Logic for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement

The following tables show the contents of the messages for event transmission without
automatic acknowledgement:
Reading and Sending the Device Status (Event Present)
QUERY RESPONSE
SC Slave Address xx Slave Address xx

Function Code 07 Function Code 07
CRC Lo xx Coil Data Bit 2 = 1
CRC Hi xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-17
Reading and Sending an Event
QUERY RESPONSE
Slave Address xx Slave Address xx
Function Code 03 or 04 Function Code 03 or 04
Starting Address Hi 36 (hex) Byte Count (Data) 12 (hex)
Starting Address Lo 00 (hex) Data 1 Hi Event
No. of Points Hi 00 (hex) Data 1 Lo
No. of Points Lo 09 (hex) …
CRC Lo xx Data 9 Hi
CRC Hi xx Data 9 Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Acknowledging an Event
QUERY RESPONSE
Register Address Hi 04 (hex) Register Address Hi 04 (hex)
Register Address Lo 00 (hex) Register Address Lo 00 (hex)
Preset Data Hi 20 (hex) Preset Data Hi 20 (hex)
Preset Data Lo 00 (hex) Preset Data Lo 00 (hex)
CRC Lo xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx CRC Hi xx
Event Structure
Data 1 Reserved
Data 2 Value
Data 3 Register
Data 4 Reserved
Data 5 Time stamp (inverted CP56Time2a)
Data 6
Data 7
SC
Data 8
Data 9 Reserved
2.6.2.1.2 Event transmission with automatic acknowledgement

In this mode the MODBUS master sends a message with function code 03 or 04 to read
register 13825 (dec). The MODBUS slave device returns the oldest event. The slave
deletes the event from the ring buffer and may reset bit 2 of the device status register and bit
13 of the system information register where appropriate. If the master detects an error
during reception of the event, the master may read register 13826 (dec) to retrieve the same
event. If the slave device has no events to send, or if the master reads register 13286 (dec)
without first reading register 13825 (dec), the slave will respond with an exception response
code 04.
(SC) 12-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
The following figure shows the basic logic for event transmission with automatic
acknowledgement:
MODUS MODUS
Master Slave
Read Device Status
Read Event
Send Event
P1928ENa
Figure 2: Logic for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement

The following tables show the contents of the messages for event transmission with
automatic acknowledgement:
Reading and Sending the Device Status (Event Present)
QUERY RESPONSE
CRC Hi xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Reading and Sending an Event
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Lo 00 / 01 (hex) Data 1 Hi Event
CRC Lo xx Data 9 Hi
SC CRC Hi xx Data 9 Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-19
Event Structure
Data 1 Reserved
Data 2 Value
Data 3 Register
Data 4 Reserved
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
Data 9 Reserved
2.6.2.2 Event handling for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM D”

MODBUS registers are updated when state changes occur. In addition, event messages are
generated for all registers in the 0xxxx range, for external device registers, and for
disturbance measurements.
Each event is stored in a ring buffer along with a time stamp. If the ring buffer is full, the
oldest event is overwritten by the new event and the ring buffer overflow is flagged. Event
handling is done using the event command register and the event message registers.
Event Message Registers
Register
Register Content Meaning
(dec)
Number of Events 30101 Number of events in ring buffer
Hi: default = 0, buffer overflow = FF (hex)
Function Code 30102
Lo: function code depending on register range
Event Register Number 30103 Register or bit address of the event
Binary: bit 0 = value, bit 1 to 15 = 0
Event Data 30104
Analog: register contents
Year 30105 Event time stamp
Month/Day 30106
Hour/Minute 30107
Milliseconds 30108
Event Command Register
Register SC
(dec)
Event command register
0000 (hex) - Read next event
Event command 40005
0001 (hex) - Reread last event
FFFF (hex) - Delete ring buffer
The ‘number of events’ register 30101 (dec) contains the number of event messages
currently stored in the ring buffer. The master can cyclically poll this register to check for
events. Registers 30102 (dec) to 30108 (dec) contain the data from the last event which
was read.
The event command is initialized to 0.
(SC) 12-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
When registers 30101 (dec) to 30108 (dec) have been read and there is at least one event
present in the ring buffer, the oldest event is copied to these registers and the number of
events is decremented.
The master can reread the previous event by setting the event command register to 0001
(hex). This is useful when a transmission error has occurred.
The master can also reread registers outside the range 30101 (dec) to 30108 (dec).
2.7 Transmission of disturbances and long-time recorded data

Transmission of recorded data is handled differently depending on the configured MODBUS
variant.
2.7.1 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM”

All P63x devices have memory for storing analog samples for a maximum of eight
recordings.
There are two possible modes for transmission of recorded data:
• Recorded data upload by column
• File upload
Recorded Data Upload by Column
The following figure shows the basic logic for mode ‘upload by column’:
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-21
MODUS MODUS
Master Slave
Read Device Status
Read Recording Information
Send Recording Information
Read Channel 1 Data
Send Channel 1 Data
Read First Block of Samples for Channel 1
Send First Block of Samples for Channel 1
...
...
Read Last Block of Samples for Channel 1
Send Last Block of Samples for Channel 1
...
...
Read Channel 8 Data
Send Channel 8 Data
...
...
Read Last Block of Samples for Channel 8
Send Last Block of Samples for Channel 8
Read Recording Index
Send Recording Index
Send Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
Confirm Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
P1929ENa
SC
Figure 3: Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode ‘upload by column’
The following tables show the contents of the messages for mode ‘upload by column’:
Reading and Sending the Device Status (Recorded Data Present)
QUERY RESPONSE
CRC Hi xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
(SC) 12-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Reading and Sending of Recorded Data
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Hi 60 (hex) Byte Count (Data) 0C (hex)
Starting Address Lo 00 (hex) Data 1 Hi
CRC Lo xx Data 6 Hi
CRC Hi xx Data 6 Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Structure of Recorded Data
Data 1 Channel information register for channel 1: 24833 (dec)

Data 2 Recording read acknowledgement register: 01024 (dec)
Data 3 Number of channels
Data 4 Maximum number of samples per block: 100 (dec)
Data 5 Register of first block: 25089 (dec)
Data 6 Register of last block
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04
(see 2.5.1 Exception codes).
Reading and Sending of the Data for a Channel
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Hi Channel inf. Byte Count (Data) 1C (hex)
Starting Address Lo register Data 1 Hi Channel data
No. of Points Lo 0E (hex) …
SC CRC Lo xx Data 14 Hi
CRC Hi xx Data 14 Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-23
Structure of Recorded Data
Data 1 Number of samples

Data 2 Number of samples in the pre-fault time
Data 3 Number of samples in the post-fault time
Data 4 Transformation ratio, primary voltage
Data 5 Transformation ratio, secondary voltage
Data 6 Transformation ratio, primary current
Data 7 Transformation ratio, secondary current
Data 8 Internal voltage scaling factor
Data 9 Internal current scaling factor
Data 10 Register of first block of samples
Data 11 Register of last block of samples
Data 12 Number of samples in the last block
Data 13 Sampling frequency
Data 14 Channel type
Contents of the ‘Channel Type’ Field (Channel Information Data Item 14)
Value Meaning
1 IA
2 IB
3 IC
4 IN
5 VA-G
6 VB-G
7 VC-G
8 VN-G
Reading and Sending a Block of Samples for a Channel
QUERY RESPONSE
Slave Address xx Slave Address xx SC
Starting Address Hi Byte Count (Data) xx
Block register
Starting Address Lo Data 1 Hi
Value of sample 1
No. of Points Hi No. of samples Data 1 Lo
No. of Points Lo in block …
CRC Lo xx Data n Hi
Value of sample n
CRC Hi xx Data n Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
(SC) 12-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
When a block of samples for a channel is read, all samples must be read. This means that
the number of samples is always 100. For the last block, the number of samples is the value
in the field ‘number of samples in last block’ (channel information data item 12).
A primary measurement value is calculated by multiplying the value of the sample by the
internal scaling factor of the voltage or current.
Reading and Sending the Recording Index
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Lo 80 (hex) Data 1 Hi
Recording index
CRC Lo xx Data 9 Hi
CRC Hi xx Data 9 Lo
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Structure of Recording Index
Data 1 Recording number

Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6 Cause
Data 8 Version number of the conversion tool
Data 9 Revision number of the conversion tool
SC Sending and Confirming Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
QUERY RESPONSE
CRC Lo xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx CRC Hi xx
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-25
File Upload
The following figure shows the basic logic for mode ‘file upload’:
MODUS MODUS
Master Slave
Read Device Status
Read Header
Send Header
Read Channel Information
Send Channel Information
Read First Block of Samples
Send First Block of Samples
...
...
Read Last Block of Samples
Send Last Block of Samples
Send Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
Confirm Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
P1930ENa
Figure 4: Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode ‘file upload’

The following tables show the contents of the messages for transmission of recorded data in
mode ‘file upload’:
Reading and Sending the Device Status (Recorded Data Present)
QUERY RESPONSE
SC
CRC Hi xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
(SC) 12-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Reading and Sending of the Header
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Lo 90 (hex) Data 1 Hi Header
CRC Lo xx Data 24 Hi
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Structure of the Header
Data 1 Data transmission type: 00000

Data 2 Number of channel information data items: 36 (dec)
Data 3
Data 4 Number of samples per channel
Data 5
Data 6 Manufacturer
Data 7 Product designation
Data 8
Data 9 Version number of the transmission mechanism
Data 10 Device serial number
Data 11
Data 12
Data 13
Data 14 Type of transmission: 0003 (hex) = recorded data transmission
Data 16
SC Data 17
Data 18
Data 19 Reserved
Data 20
Data 21
Data 22
Data 23
Data 24
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-27
Reading and Sending of the Channel Information
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Lo B0 (hex) Data 1 Hi Channel inf.
CRC Lo xx Data 36 Hi
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
Structure of the Channel Information
Data 1 Number of channels

Data 2 Type of channel 1
Data 3 Transformation ratio, primary
Data 4 Transformation ratio, secondary
Data 5 Internal scaling factor
SC
(SC) 12-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Data 35 Recording number
Data 36 Number of samples per channel
Contents of the ‘Channel Type’ Field (Channel Information Data Items 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22,
26, 30)
Value Meaning
1 IA
2 IB
3 IC
4 IN
5 VA-G
6 VB-G
7 VC-G
8 VN-G
Reading and Sending a Block of Samples
QUERY RESPONSE
Starting Address Hi Byte Count (Data) xx
Block register
Starting Address Lo Data 1 Hi Value of sample
No. of Points Hi Data 1 Lo 1
No. of samples
No. of Points Lo in block …
SC CRC Lo xx Data n Hi Value of sample
CRC Hi xx Data n Lo n
CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx
When a block of samples for a channel is read, all samples must be read. This means that
the number of samples is always 100, with the exception of the last block which may have
fewer samples.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-29
Sending and Confirming Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
QUERY RESPONSE
CRC Lo xx CRC Lo xx
CRC Hi xx CRC Hi xx
2.7.2 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant “ALSTOM D”

All P63x devices have memory for storing a maximum of eight recordings with the following
data which can be read if MODBUS variant “ALSTOM D” is configured:
• Binary data
• Disturbance measurements
• Analog samples
Transmission of recorded data is done by reading the disturbance or long-time recording
information from the recorded data registers and by writing the command or
acknowledgement messages to the recorded data command registers.
The following registers are used for the transmission of recorded data:
Recorded Data Message Registers
Register content Register (dec)

Number of messages 30110
Type ID Variable structure ID 30111
Cause of transmission Device address 30112
Function type Information number 30113
30114
Data structure according to ASDU 23, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 as per IEC
…
60870-5-103
30132 SC
Recorded Data Command Register
Register
(dec)
Transfer command register
0000 (hex) - Read next message
Command 40006
0001 (hex) - Reread previous message
FFFF (hex) - Initialize transfer
(SC) 12-30 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Recorded Data Order Registers
Register Content Register (dec)

Type ID Variable structure ID 40007
Cause of transmission Device address 40008
Function type Information number 40009
Type of order Type of recorded data 40010
Recording number Lo Recording number Hi 40011
Channel number 00 40012
The messages for information transfer are kept in a ring buffer. The number of messages
can be read from register 30110 (dec). After initialization, the message ‘list of recordings’ is
present in the ring buffer.
The procedures for reading from the recorded data message registers use the same
mechanisms as the event handling logic, depending on the contents of the recorded data
command register. The next message can be read by writing a read command to registers
30110 (dec) to 30132 (dec).
The MODBUS master writes ASDU 24 (‘recorded data transfer order’) and ASDU 25
(‘recorded data transfer acknowledgement’) commands to the recorded data order registers
in IEC 60870-5-103 format.
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-31
3. IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device.
The relay conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.
Refer to the following document for more information:
• “AREVA Communication Architecture (ACA) Part 5, Communication for the Subsystem

Control and Monitoring for MiCOM 30 Series based on IEC 60870-5-101/103”
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
− Initialization (reset)
− Time synchronization
− Event record extraction
− General interrogation
− Cyclic measurements
− General commands
− Disturbance record extraction
− Private codes
3.1 IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings

Enabling and configuration of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol for P63x devices must be done
via the local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead
the user may configure the data items which are to be made available to the
IEC 60870-5-103 master by selecting items from “m out of n” selection tables.
The protocol is available on the “logical” communications interface 1 (COMM1) when
selected via settings. IEC 60870-5-103 is the fixed protocol on “logical” communications
interface 2 (COMM2).
The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol to
be used.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Remote Comms Port1
Address: 056 026
Enabled
SC
setting.
Set/Conf/COMM1
General Enable USER
Address: 003 170
Yes
Set/Conf/COMM1
IEC870-5 Enabled
Address: 003 215
Yes
Enabling settings relevant for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

(SC) 12-32 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Set/Conf/COMM1
Communicat Protocol
Address: 003 167
COMM1
IEC 870-5-103
Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The following settings are used to
configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and will be dependant upon
the system within which the device will be communicating.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Baud Rate
Address: 003 071
19.2 kBaud
Set/Conf/COMM1
Parity Bit
Address: 003 171
Even
Set/Conf/COMM1
Octet Comm. Address
Address: 003 072
1
rear port.
Values in the P63x device data model which are to be made available to the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol must be configured using the following settings:
Set/Conf/COMM1
Address: 003 179
↓
The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary signals
(read only) which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 master (e.g. ’Starting I>’).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
Address: 003 175
SC ↓
The above setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the analog
measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 master
(e.g. ’Running time’).
3.2 Physical connection and link layer

Two connection options are available for IEC 60870-5-103, either the rear EIA(RS)485 port
or an optional rear fiber optic port.
For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay address and
baud rate using the local HMI or over the PC interface. Following a change of these settings
a reset command is required to re-establish communications, see reset command
description below.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-33
3.3 Initialization
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication settings have been
changed a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The relay will
respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being
that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the
Cause of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is described in the
IEC 60870-5-103 section of the “ACA” document noted above.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also
produce a power up event.
3.4 Time synchronization

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in
IEC 60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message
then the relay will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
Class 1 event will be generated/produced.
The time synchronization source is selected from the setting below:
Set/Conf/MAIN
Prim.Source TimeSync
Address: 103 210
3.5 Spontaneous events

Events are categorized using the following information:
− Function type
− Information number
The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Telegram documentation contains a complete listing of all
events produced by the relay.
3.6 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and
information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. These are indicated in the IEC
60870-5-103 profile in the Telegram documentation.
3.7 Cyclic measurements

Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in
SC
IEC 60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the
rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measurand.
3.8 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the Telegram documentation. The relay
will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a Cause of Transmission (COT)
indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.
(SC) 12-34 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
3.9 Test mode

It is possible using either the HMI menu or the front communication port to enable ‘test
mode’ as specified by the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. An event will be produced to indicate
both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data
transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of ‘test mode’.
3.10 Disturbance records

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103.
Note: IEC 60870-5-103 only supports up to 8 records.
3.11 Blocking of monitor direction and/or command direction

The relay supports a facility to block messages in the monitor direction and also in the
command direction. Messages can be blocked in the monitor and command directions using
the menu commands “Set/Func/Glob/COMM1: USER Sig/meas Block” (003.076) and
“…COMM1: USER Command Block” (003.172) or via an opto input or write command from
the IEC 60870-5-103 master.
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-35
4. DNP3.0 INTERFACE
The DNP3.0 protocol is not described in its entirety here, please refer to the documentation
available from the user group. The device profile document specifies the full details of the
DNP3.0 implementation for the relay. This is the standard format DNP3.0 document that
specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported. The device profile document
also specifies what data is available from the relay via DNP3.0. The relay operates as a
DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol.
4.1 DNP3.0 communication settings

Enabling and configuration of the DNP3.0 protocol for P63x devices must be done via the
may configure the data items which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master by
The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the DNP3.0 protocol to be used.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Remote Comms Port1
Address: 056 026
Enabled
setting.
Set/Conf/COMM1
General Enable USER
Address: 003 170
Yes
Set/Conf/COMM1
DNP3 Enable
Address: 003 231
Yes
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP3.0 protocol.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Communicat Protocol
Address: 003 167
COMM1 SC
DNP3
Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the DNP3.0
protocol. The following settings are used to configure the DNP 3.0
Set/Conf/COMM1
Baud Rate
Address: 003 071
19.2 kBaud

(SC) 12-36 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Set/Conf/COMM1
Parity Bit
Address: 003 171
Even
Set/Conf/COMM1
Octet Comm. Address
Address: 003 072
1
rear port.
All values in the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 protocol
Set/Conf/COMM1
Ind./cl. bin. Inputs
Address: 003 232
↓
only) which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master. A data class may be assigned
to each selected item (no class, or class 0 to 3).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Ind./cl. bin.Outputs
Address: 003 233
↓
This setting is used to select from an “m out of n” selection table all the binary commands
(read/write) from the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0
master. Since all “m out of n” settings use the same software mechanism, a data class may
be assigned to each selected item, but data classes 1 to 3 are not evaluated.
Set/Conf/COMM1
Ind./cl. Analog Inp.
Address: 003 235
↓
measurements (read only) from the device data model which are to be made available to the
DNP3.0 master. A data class may be assigned to each selected item (no class, or class 0 to
3).
Set/Conf/COMM1
Ind./cl. Analog Outp
SC Address: 003 236
↓
(read/write) from the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0
master. Since all “m out of n” settings use the same software mechanism, a data class may
be assigned to each selected item, but data classes 1 to 3 are not evaluated.
The data class defines the event reporting behavior and allows the user to retrieve data by
class as well as by data type.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-37
Two settings are used to configure the behavior of the device when refreshing measurement
values:
Set/Conf/COMM1
Ph-Ph Meas v.(DNP3)
Address: 003 250
16
The value of this setting is used as the default reporting deadband for all measurements.
The master can change the reporting deadband value for each measurement individually. A
measurement is reported only when its value changes by a magnitude greater than the
configured value.
Set/Conf/COMM1
PhasePhase t (DNP3)
Address: 003 248
5 s
This setting defines the time in seconds after which measurement values are refreshed by
the device. The value of this setting should be chosen carefully because changes to a
measurement within the configured time period are not registered.
4.2 DNP3.0 layer model

The DNP3.0 protocol layer model has the following structure:
User Layer
Application Layer
Transport Layer
Data Link Layer
Physical Layer
In order to guarantee as far as possible that P63x devices conform to the DNP3.0 standard,
a library from Triangle MicroWorks Inc. has been used in the implementation of the software.
This library supports DNP 3.0 Level 2.
4.2.1 Physical layer

The physical layer is either:
• Fiber optic
• EIA(RS)485 bus, two-wire or four-wire
4.2.2 Data link layer

The data link layer is responsible for message framing. SC
The data link layer uses the FT3 message format as defined in the IEC 870-5-1 specification.
Messages have a secure hamming distance of 6.
This document describes the specifics of the DNP 3.0 implementation for P63x devices. The
document “DNP V3.00 Data Link Layer Protocol Description” and the IEC 870-5-1
specification contain a detailed description of the data link layer and message framing.
4.2.3 Transport layer

The transport layer is responsible for fragmentation of data over multiple messages.
This layer is responsible for disassembling one Transport Service Data Unit (TSDU) into
multiple Transport Protocol Data Units (TPDUs), or frames, and assembling multiple (more
than one) TPDUs into one TSDU.
(SC) 12-38 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
This document describes the specifics of the DNP3.0 implementation for P63x devices. The
document “DNP V3.00 Transport Functions” contains a detailed description of the transport
layer.
4.2.4 Application layer

The master sends ‘Application Layer Requests’ to the slave device. The device replies with
‘Application Layer Responses’.
The application layer is responsible for decoding the command and data information from
request messages (from the master) and writing data to response messages (from the slave
device).
Each request message contains a header and optionally data fields (information objects).
The header contains an application control byte, and a function code defining the action to
be taken by the slave device.
The header in a response message contains an application control byte, a response function
code and a field containing internal indications from the slave device.
Each item of data in a message is prefixed by an object header which defines the data type
(e.g. binary input) and data variation (e.g. binary input with status) contained in the data field
(see section ’Data Objects’). Qualifier and range fields in the object header specify how the
data objects are packed in the message – range, quantity, index size.
The document “DNP V3.00 Application Layer Protocol Description” contains a detailed
description of the application layer.
4.3 Data objects
4.3.1 General
DNP3.0 uses the concept of data objects as an interface for devices which support the
DNP3.0 protocol. These objects have been defined in such a way that any device should be
able to map the data which it wants to make available to a DNP3.0 master to the data
objects which are defined in the protocol specification.
The master specifies variations when handling data objects (see the Device Profile
Document for a complete list of implemented data objects, variations, and function and
qualifier codes which use these objects).
The document “DNP V3:00 Data Object Library” contains a detailed description of the data
objects and their variations.
In the implementation for P63x devices only 2 types of data objects are supported:
• Static objects
Static objects reflect the current value of data items.
•
SC Event objects
Event objects are generated as a result of a data change, e.g. a signal or fault measurement.
Event data reflects the value of data at some time in the past, and is stored in a queue in the
device.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-39
4.3.2 Data objects supported

The following table lists the data objects which are supported in P63x devices, the data
object type, and which functions use the data objects.
Object Functions Using

Description Type
No. (dec) this Object (dec)
1 Binary Input static 1
2 Binary Input Change event 1
10 Binary Output static 1
12 Control relay Output Block static 3, 4, 5, 6
20 Binary Counter static 1, 7, 8, 9, 10
21 Frozen Counter static 1
30 Analog Input static 1
32 Analog Change Event event 1
34 Analog Input Reporting Deadband static 1, 2
40 Analog Output static 1
41 Analog Output Block static 3, 4, 5, 6
50 Time and Date static 1, 2
52 Time Delay Fine static
60 Class 0, 1, 2, 3 Data event 1
80 Internal Indications static 2
4.3.2.1 Data object 1 - binary input

All binary signals which are generated by protection and control functions which are to be
mapped to data object 1 are available in “m out of n” selection tables instead of a fixed place
being reserved. The index of each signal is the position in the list of selected signals, i.e. the
order in which the signals are selected from the selection list implicitly assigns the index to
the signal.
Data object 1 is allocated as follows:
Index (dec) Index (hex) Description

0 - 63 00 - 3F “m out of n” selection of binary signals
The software reduces the size of data object 1 to the number of values selected from the “m
out of n” selection tables.
Every value can be assigned data class 0 (static) and data classes 1, 2 or 3 for the SC
corresponding event message. Assigning of the data class is done in the “m out of n”
selection list. If an event data class (1, 2 or 3) is selected, data class 0 is set implicitly. The
master can change the data class using the ‘Assign Class’ function.
4.3.2.2 Data object 10 - binary output

The number of binary outputs depends on the device type and design version. The number
of signals may be anything from 2 up to over 150.
There are two types of binary outputs:
• binary outputs to coils

These outputs may be controlled by pulses. The state of the output is therefore not
represented in the binary output object.
• logical binary outputs

(SC) 12-40 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
These outputs represent binary settings (e.g. MAIN: Protection Enabled). The state of these
signals can be read in the binary output object.

0 - 31 00 - 1F “m out of n” selection of binary commands
The software reduces the size of data object 10 to the number of values selected from the
“m out of n” selection tables.
Data class assignment is not relevant for data object 10.
4.3.2.3 Data object 12 - control relay output block

The following table shows the structure of data object 12 and the use of the individual fields:
Field Description Use/Comments

Control Code 8 bit control code
Bits 0-3 (code):
0 - NULL operation Response only
1 - Pulse On Pulse ON
2 - Pulse Off Not implemented
3 - Latch On Latch the output ON
4 - Latch Off Latch the output OFF
Bit 4 - Queued Not implemented, 0
Bit 5 - Clear Not implemented, 0
Bit 6/7 - Trip/Close:
1 - Close/Lower Close/lower tap changer
2 - Trip/Raise Trip/raise tap changer
Count No. of control executions 1
On Time Duration of ON state 2000 - short command time
20000 - long command time
Off Time Duration of OFF state Not implemented, 0
Status Control operation status:
0 - Request accepted
1 - Operate too late after select
SC 2 - No matching select before operate
3 - Format error in request
4 - Control operation not supported
5 - Queue full or already active
6 - Hardware error
7 - Device in local mode (*)
8 - Too many operations (*)
9 - Not authorized (*)
10 to 126 - Reserved (*)
127 - Unspecified error (*)
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-41
(*) Note: These codes are currently only documented in a recommendation by the technical
committee.
The control relay output block information object offers a wide variety of possibilities for
controlling outputs. Among DNP vendors there are discussions about the interpretation of
control operations. The technical committee of the DNP Users Group has published a
number of recommendations in an attempt to improve compatibility.
The discussions have made clear that DNP masters on the market differ greatly in their
implementation of the control relay output block. An attempt has therefore been made to
offer as many possibilities as possible in order to achieve compatibility to as many masters
as possible.
Destination of Operation
2-pole OFF- 2-pole ON-
Operation Single Pole Logical Output contact/ contact/
Device (e.g. setting) transformer transformer
raise lower
set persistent
Pulse ON pulse on switch off/raise switch on/lower
logical 1
Pulse OFF not supported not supported not supported not supported
persistent output set persistent
Latch ON switch off/raise switch on/lower
on logical 1
persistent output set persistent
Latch OFF not supported not supported
off logical 0
Trip/Raise not supported not supported switch off/raise switch off/raise
Close/Low
not supported not supported switch on/lower switch on/lower
er
4.3.2.4 Data object 20 - binary counters


0 - 15 00 - F “m out of n” selection of counters
The method of data class assignment is the same as for data object 1, except that only static
data class 0 may be assigned. This is because counter events are not supported.
4.3.2.5 Data object 21 - frozen counters

Frozen counters are counter values which have been frozen at a definite point in time so SC
they can be read at a later time. The method of data class assignment is the same as for
data object 1, except that only static data class 0 may be assigned. This is because frozen
counter events are not supported.
4.3.2.6 Data object 30 - analog inputs


0 - 31 00 - 1F “m out of n” selection of analog inputs
The method of data class assignment is the same as for data object 1.
(SC) 12-42 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Event Handling
• Normal measurements
Event handling is done using CURRENT mode, i.e. for each measurement only one entry
per change is made in the queue and identical entries are overwritten. An analog event has
the current value and timestamp at the time of the request.
• Fault measurements (function groups FT_DA, OL_DA, 103 protocol ID 4)

For measurements generated by a fault, SOE mode is used, i.e. all events are stored in a
queue and overwriting of identical entries does not take place.
Two settings are available allowing the user to configure a simple smoothing of all
measurement values and a refresh rate for all the measurement values.
In addition, the master can define a reporting deadband for each individual measurement.
4.3.2.7 Data object 34 - analog input reporting deadband

Each individual measurement has its own deadband. In CURRENT mode, an event
message is generated when a deadband is exceeded.
Deadband values can be read and written by the master. The values are lost when a device
is restarted and must be reconfigured by the master. This is in keeping with the DNP
philosophy.
4.3.2.8 Data object 40 - analog output status

0 - 15 00 - F “m out of n” selection of analog outputs
The software reduces the size of data object 40 to the number of selected data points.
Data class assignment is not relevant to data object 40.
4.3.2.9 Data object 41 - analog output block

Data object 41 can be sent as 32 bit or 16 bit and has the following structure:
Field Description Use/Comments

Value 32/16 bit analog value
Status Status Identical to control relay output block
The analog output block is used for changing settings in a device. This is done in a similar
way to the control of a logical binary output, i.e. the command is echoed with status code set.
4.3.2.10 Data object 80 - internal indications

SC
Internal indications are reported in every response message. The master can write to the
internal indications to reset the restart bit. No other bits may be written to. The following
table describes the meaning of each bit:
Bit Description and Conditions

All Stations - set after a broadcast message (any message using a
0 IIN1-0
destination address of 0xFFF0 or above) has been received
1 IIN1-1 Class 1 event data available
4 IIN1-4 Time synchronization required
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-43
Bit Description and Conditions

Local mode. Set when control is in local mode or command direction
5 IIN1-5
is blocked
6 IIN1-6 Device Trouble. Set when the group alarm condition is active
7 IIN1-7 Device restart. Set after device restart
Function Unknown. Generally means that the function code (octet 2
8 IIN2-0
of the request header) cannot be processed
Object Unknown. Generally means that the function code could be
9 IIN2-1
processed but the object group/variation could not be processed
Setting Error. Generally indicates that the function code and object
10 IIN2-2 group/variation could be processed but that the qualifier/range field is
in error
Buffer Overflow. Indicates that an event buffer has overflowed, and
11 IIN2-3
that change events, of at least one type, have been lost
12 IIN2-4 Already Executing - not supported, always 0
13 IIN2-5 Bad Configuration - not supported, always 0
14 IIN2-6 Reserved. Always 0
15 IIN2-7 Reserved. Always 0
4.4 Function codes
4.4.1 Function codes implemented
4.4.1.1 Request function codes - master to slave

The following function codes are sent by the master to the slave device:
Code (dec) Function

1 Read
2 Write
3 Select
4 Operate
5 Direct Operate
6 Direct Operate No Acknowledgement
7 Immediate Freeze
8 Immediate Freeze No Acknowledgement
9 Freeze and Clear (*)
SC
10 Freeze and Clear No Acknowledgement (*)
13 Cold Start
14 Warm Start
22 Assign Class
23 Delay Measurement
(*) Note: Freeze and clear functions are currently not implemented.
(SC) 12-44 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4.4.1.2 Response function codes - slave to master

The following function codes are sent by the slave device to the master:
Code (dec) Function

129 Response
4.4.2 Function 1 - read

Reading of the following data objects is implemented:
Object No. (dec) Description

1 Binary Input
10 Binary Output
20 Binary Counter
21 Frozen Counter
30 Analog Input
34 Analog Input Reporting Deadband
40 Analog Output
Any read errors are flagged in the internal indications in the response.
4.4.3 Function 2 - write

Writing of the following data objects is implemented:

34 Analog Input Reporting Deadband
50 Time and Date
80 Internal Indications
4.4.3.1 Analog input reporting deadband

Deadband values may be written for each individual measurement.
4.4.3.2 Time and date/time synchronization

The transmission time from the master (depending on the baud rate) is taken into
consideration before setting the date and time in the device.
4.4.3.3 Internal indications

SC In data object 80 it is possible to introduce additional internal indications. This functionality
has not been implemented. The master can write to the internal indications to reset the
restart bit. No other bits may be written to.
4.4.4 Function 3, 4, 5, 6 - select, operate, direct operate, direct operate no ack.

These commands may be used with the following data objects:

12 Control Relay Output Block
41 Analog Output Block
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-45
The following functionality is implemented:
• Select a combination of bits which indicate the operations supported by a binary output
• Select a binary output for control
• Execute a control operation for a binary output
• Select a combination of bits which indicate the operations supported by an analog output
• Select an analog output for control
4.4.5 Functions 7, 8, 9, 10 - immediate freeze (with/without acknowledge), freeze and clear

(with/without Acknowledge) (*)
(*) Implementation of freeze and clear functions planned but not yet implemented.
These functions can be used with data object 20 (binary counters).
4.4.6 Function 13 - cold start

DNP defines a cold start as a restart of the application as occurs when a device is switched
on. This corresponds to a warm start in MiCOM terminology.
A warm start can only be performed if the device is in offline mode.
The device informs the master in a response message what period of time will elapse before
the device is available again.
4.4.7 Function 14 - warm start

DNP defines a warm start as a restart of the DNP protocol, i.e. clearing of buffers and
queues.
The device informs the master in a response message what period of time will elapse before
the device is available again.
4.4.8 Function 22 - assign class

The master can use function 22 to change the data class of event messages. This has been
implemented for data objects 1 (binary inputs) and 30 (analog inputs).
The data class setting values are lost when a device is restarted and must be reconfigured
by the master. This is in keeping with the DNP philosophy.
4.4.9 Function 23 - delay measurement

The master uses function 23 to calculate the path delay for a device. This is done by
sending the command to the device and measuring the elapsed time until a response is
received. The elapsed time can be used to adjust the time of day when setting the device
time. SC
4.5 Notes on communication functions
4.5.1 Startup
It is important to note that changes in the “m out of n” selection tables will result in the
initialization of the communications module of a device.
4.5.2 Time and date handling

The transmission time from the master (depending on the baud rate) is taken into
consideration before setting the date and time in the device. Conversion from DNP time and
date to the device’s native format is done.
(SC) 12-46 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
4.5.3 Event handling
4.5.3.1 Binary events

Binary events are queued in the device. An event message is generated only if the data is
configured in one of the data classes 1 to 3. The allocation of data classes is done during
configuration of the signals in the “m out of n” selection lists.
4.5.3.2 Analog events

In P63x devices there are 3 different types of analog values:
• Constant values (e.g. device characteristics)

This data does not change and there are therefore no events.
• Normal measurements, which can change at any time

The master can define a reporting deadband for each individual measurement.
Event handling is done using CURRENT mode, i.e. for each measurement only one entry
per change is made in the queue and identical entries are overwritten. An analog event has
the current value and timestamp at the time of the request.
• Fault measurements
These are measurements which are calculated when a fault occurs (e.g. fault duration).
SOE mode is used, i.e. all events are stored in the queue.
An event message is generated only if the data is configured in one of the data classes 1 to
3. The allocation of data classes is done during configuration of the signals in the “m out of
n” selection lists.
4.5.4 Data class handling

The DNP3.0 protocol defines the following data classes:
• Class 0 - static data
• Class 1 - high priority events
• Class 2 - medium priority events
• Class 3 - low priority events

Data classes can be assigned to signals in two ways:
• By configuring the class of a configured signal in the “m out of n” selection lists
• By the master sending the ‘Assign Class’ command (function code 22)
SC Assignment of classes 1, 2 and 3 (used for event messages) is mutually exclusive. All data
which is assigned a class 1, 2 or 3 is also implicitly assigned class 0.
The possible data classes are ‘No Class’, ‘Class 0’, ‘Class 1’, ‘Class 2’ or ‘Class 3’.
Below is a list of the default configuration and valid values for each data object:
Object No. (dec) Description Default Data Class Valid Data Classes
1 Binary Input 1 none, 0, 1, 2, 3
10 Binary Output none none
20 Binary Counter none none, 0
21 Frozen Counter none none, 0
30 Analog Input 2 none, 0, 1, 2, 3
40 Analog Output none none
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-47
4.5.5 File transfer

The DNP3.0 protocol specifies data object 70 (file identifier) for transferring files.
File transfer support (required for fault data transfer) is currently not implemented in P63x
devices.
SC
(SC) 12-48 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
5. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE IEC 61850 (FUNCTION GROUP IEC)

IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers and implemented as a worldwide
applicable and accepted standard. The main target of the IEC 61850 is interoperability of
devices. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange information and to
apply such in a compliant joint operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
communication basis, from the process control level down to the network control level, with
which signals, data, measuring values and commands are exchanged.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and
all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based
on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed
further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This
makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with the
P63x, is available:
• ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with
a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are to be
imported into the system configurator
• PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
• PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of

available services
• MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available

object types
• ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter

addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the
device data model as per IEC 61850
5.1 Ethernet module

The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where
an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be
used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter IEC:
Ethernet media. The ordering variants available are:
For fiber:
The ST connector supports 100 Mbit/s over 1300 nm multimode fiber.
SC
For copper:
The RJ45 connector supports 10/100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides a EIA(RS)485 interface for remote
access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P63x may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as
an alternative to the other optional communication modules.
Therefore the Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is
only available as an alternative to function group COMM1.
The Ethernet module can be applied in conjunction with all processor
modules P for P63x. The item numbers of these processor modules
are:
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-49
0337 875 (P631 and P632 without DSP) and

9650 135 (P633 and P634 without DSP)
9651 428 (all P631…P634 variants with DSP)
5.2 Activating and enabling

The function group IEC can be activated by setting the parameter IEC: IEC 61850
Communic. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is
fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated to this function group
(setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be
enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER.
The settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically
activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable configuration is
executed or automatically when the device is switched online.
5.3 Client log-on

Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A
client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a
network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic information.
In its function as a server the P63x can supply up to 16 clients with information.
5.4 Clock synchronization

With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for
Ethernet. Here the P63x functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. In the former operating mode synchronization occurs
by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network, and in the
second operating mode the P63x requests the device specific time signal following a settable
polling cycle.
5.5 Fault transmission

Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
5.6 Transmission of "GOOSE messages"

The so-called "GOOSE Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas normal
server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "GOOSE Message"
is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority. Furthermore,
these "GOOSE Messages" can be received by all participants in the respective sub-network,
independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850 "GOOSE Messages" are applied
for the accelerated transmission of information between two or more devices. Application SC
areas are, for example, reverse interlocking, transfer tripping or a decentralized substation
interlock. In future the "GOOSE Message" will therefore replace hardwiring and local
fieldbus inter-relay communications.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "GOOSE Messages", the GSSE and the
IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration
by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However the IEC-GOOSE enables
transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information,
integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive
configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit with which the P63x
corresponds. With the IEC-GOOSE the P63x at this time supports sending and receiving of
binary information or two-pole external device states.
(SC) 12-50 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
5.7 Communication with the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the device
may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet
Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating program MiCOM
S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same
hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication and "GOOSE
Messages". Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM
S1 such as reading/writing of settings or retrieving stored data.
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-51
6. GENERIC OBJECT ORIENTED SUBSTATION EVENT (FUNCTION

GROUP GOOSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P63x provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for reverse
interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact
position signals and other signals.
"GOOSE Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "GOOSE
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.

The function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter GOOSE:
Gen.ObjOr.SubstEvent. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet
communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all data points
associated to this function group (settings, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The
function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER.
The settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically
activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable configuration is
executed or automatically when the device is switched online. In addition the function group
IEC must be configured and enabled.
6.2 Sending GOOSE

With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of state signals is
made by setting GOOSE: Output n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object
indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment
to GOOSE outputs.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state signal.
There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms,
50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state
change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2-second intervals.
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
GOOSE ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered.
Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' with the fixed value "100" as
well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up of the IED name (setting in function group
IEC) and the fixed string "System/LLNO$GooseST".
SC
(SC) 12-52 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 5: Basic structure of sent GOOSE
6.3 Receiving GOOSE

With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic
state signals received (GOOSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 16)) is made on the basis of the
selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received from an external device the "GOOSE Message" must be
selected that includes the information wanted by setting the GOOSE ID, the Application ID
and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the data
attribute index, the selection of the information wanted from the chosen GOOSE will occur.
The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset
Configuration Revision’ that are also included in the GOOSE received.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This
corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of
validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in
communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default
value GOOSE: Input n default (n = 1 to 16). The default value of 0 or 1 is chosen to be a
failsafe "fallback".
SC
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SC) 12-53
7. GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GSSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P63x provides, as an additional functionality, the function
group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse
interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.

The Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter GSSE:
Gen.Subst.Stat.Event. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function
can then be enabled or disabled by setting GSSE: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable
configuration is executed or automatically when the device is switched online.
7.2 Sending GSSE

With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of state signals is
made by setting GSSE: Output n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (GSSE: Output n bit pair (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this
state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will be
multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the
given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Min. cycle. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter
GSSE: Increment. Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum
cycle time has elapsed (GSSE: Max. cycle), then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as
set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
7.3 Receiving GSSE

With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic
binary state signals received (GSSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32)) is made on the basis of
the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the information
wanted, must be selected by setting the IED name (GSSE: Input n IED name (n = 1 to 32)).
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(GSSE: Input n bit pair (n = 1 to 32)).
Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This SC
corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration of validity
has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a fault in
communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default
value (GSSE: Input n default (n = 1 to 32)). The default value of 0 or 1 is chosen to be a
failsafe "fallback".
(SC) 12-54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SC
Symbols and Glossary P63x/UK SG/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY
Date: 16th June 2006 SG

-406 (P633)
P63x/UK SG/A54 Symbols and Glossary
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SG
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SG) 13-1
Logic Symbols
Symbols Explanation
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I Complex current
Z Complex impedance
|Z| Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
δ Temperature in °C
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
Phase angle. With subscripts indicates a specific angle between a defined current
ϕ
and a defined voltage.
τ Time constant
ΔT Temperature difference in K
Logic Gates and Timers

Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements according to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: amended 1991
Analogue information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981
To document the linking of analogue and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken
from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions
are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on
the right side.
SG
(SG) 13-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Symbol Explanation
To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements,

contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if the following
rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common

contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction.
=
Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with
two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a
control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements whose

common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or
more qualifiers.
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to several
symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger
elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common to several
symbols.
Settable control block

The four digits represent the address under which the function shown
in the text after the colon may be set via the local control panel.
SG Settable control block with function blocks

The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible at
this address.
The text below the symbol shows the setting and the corresponding
unit or meaning.
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SG) 13-3
Symbol Explanation
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if

the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay
of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay
of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or

strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to 1.
The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, independent of the SG
duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block the monostable flip-flop is

retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any

other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
(SG) 13-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Symbol Explanation
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the two input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus
sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a
specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input
signal drops below the threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated
at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with
the input variable transition (synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the
ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.
Band pass filter

The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals.
All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted
and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1
resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
In general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter

SG With electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1= device identifier
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (SG) 13-5
Symbol Explanation
Input transformer with phase and item identifiers

(according to DIN EN 60445)
Phase identifiers for current inputs:

for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs

via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Item identifiers for current transformers:

for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
With item identifier.
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (‘closed-circuit
operation’).
PC interface
With pin connections.
SG
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input
variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of the two input
variables.
(SG) 13-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Symbol Explanation
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal
to the function in the function block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the
equation in the function block.
SG
Installation P63x/UK IN/A54
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
INSTALLATION

Software Version: -610 IN
-406 (P633)
P63x/UK IN/A54 Installation
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-1
CONTENTS
(IN) 14-
1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS 3
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3
3. STORAGE 4
4. UNPACKING 4
5. RELAY MOUNTING 5
5.1 Rack mounting 5
5.2 Panel mounting 6
6. RELAY WIRING 12
6.1 Medium and heavy duty ring terminal block connections 12
6.2 EIA(RS)485 port 13
6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) 13
6.4 EIA(RS)232 front port 13
6.5 Ethernet port (if applicable) 13
6.6 Earth connection (case protective ground) 14
7. P63x CASE DIMENSIONS 15

7.1 40TE case dimensions 15
7.2 84TE case dimensions 16
8. STANDARD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR THE P63x 17
9. P63x EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 19
IN
(IN) 14-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Rack mounting of 40TE case relays 5

Figure 2: Rack mounting of 84TE case relays 6
Figure 3: Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle
brackets and frame) 6
Figure 4: Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle
Figure 5: Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle
Figure 6: Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle
Figure 7: Installation of the 40TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1) 9
Figure 8: Installation of the 84TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1) 10
Figure 9: Mounting the angle brackets 10
Figure 10: Installation of the 40TE case with cover frame (panel mount method 2) 11
Figure 11: Installing the case earth connection 14
Figure 12: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) 15
Figure 13: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 2 (using angle brackets and frame) 15
Figure 14: Case dimensions for 84TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) 16
Figure 15: Standard schematic diagram for the P63x 17
Figure 16: P631 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) 19
Figure 17: P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 1 of 2 20
Figure 18: P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 2 of 2 21
Figure 19: P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 1 of 2 22
Figure 20: P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 2 of 2 23
Figure 21: P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2 24
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-3
1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has
been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the
transport contractor and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be
returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of P63x/UK IN
gives more information about the storage of relays.
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling
electronic circuits can cause serious damage that, although not always immediately
apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. The relay’s electronic circuits are protected
from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk by
removing the front panel or printed circuit boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit board,
the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for
which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic
potential as the equipment by touching the case.
Handle analog input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the circuit boards.
Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges. Avoid touching the electronic
components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface that is at the same
potential as you.
If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the case, place
them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of
a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ to 10MΩ. If a wrist
strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up
of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements
should also be earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS EN 100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on
electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such
as described in the British Standard document.
IN
(IN) 14-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
3. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place
free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been
included in the packing they should be retained.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust, which has collected on the
carton, does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may
become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25˚C to +70˚C
(-13˚F to +158˚F).
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be reformed every 4 years. Reform the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P63x for approximately 10 minutes.
4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are
damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Ensure
that any User’s CDROM or technical documentation is NOT discarded - this should
accompany the relay to its destination substation.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust
and excessive vibration.
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-5
5. RELAY MOUNTING
The P63x has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. It is important when choosing the
installation location to ensure that it provides suitable conditions as specified in the Technical
Data - TD section, in particular the sections detailing environmental, mechanical and
electromagnetic conditions.
MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for
panel cutouts and hole centers.
Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorized
changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in size 40TE (GN0181 001)
suitable to fit the 40TE case model, or 84TE (GN0183 001) to fit the 84TE case model.
The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only
accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are
closed.
If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from
the front, it be positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is
associated. This minimizes the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the
correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.
5.1 Rack mounting

A rack mounting kit can be used to combine the 40TE case with a second subrack to form a
19” mounting rack (see Figure 1). The extra subrack can be another device or an empty
subrack with blanking plate. Fit the 19” mounting rack as shown in Figure 2.
IN
Figure 1: Rack mounting of 40TE case relays

(IN) 14-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 2: Rack mounting of 84TE case relays
5.2 Panel mounting

The panel (or flush) mounted case is designed to be mounted in a control panel. The
dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in section 7 P63x Case Dimensions. When
the P63x is mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide
the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 3 to 6 show the required
panel cutouts for panel mounted cases of different case widths.
IN
Figure 3: Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1
(without the angle brackets and frame)
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-7
(using the angle brackets and frame)
(without the angle brackets and frame)
IN
(IN) 14-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
(using the angle brackets and frame)
Prior to flush panel mounting of the P63x using panel mount method 1, the local control
panel needs to be removed in the following manner:
• Remove the upper and lower covering flap. (Turn the upper/lower flap by 180° up/down.
Take hold of the middle part and bend the flap. The side fastenings can now be
unhinged.)
• Undo the M3 bolts (see Figure 7 and 8).
• Take off the local control panel.

The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Note the correct position of the connector. Do not bend the connecting cable.
• Next, undo the lower M4 bolts completely and loosen the upper M4 bolts (see Figures 7
and 8). Now hang the P63x into the panel cutout from behind supported by the upper
M4 bolts. Tighten all M4 bolts. Mount the local control panel.
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-9
Figure 7: Installation of the 40TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1)
IN
(IN) 14-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Figure 8: Installation of the 84TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1)
Panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) is only an option for the 40TE
case width. When installing units in accordance with panel mount method 2, proceed as
follows:
• Remove the bolts shown in Figure 9, c, and mount the enclosed angle bracket using
these bolts
• Slide the unit into the panel opening from the front
• Fasten the unit to the control panel using the enclosed M6 bolts (see Figure 10)
• Assemble the cover frame and snap it onto the mounting bolts
IN
Figure 9: Mounting the angle brackets

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-11
P1842ENa
Figure 10: Installation of the 40TE case with cover frame (panel mount method 2)
IN
(IN) 14-12 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
6. RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for
each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
6.1 Medium and heavy duty ring terminal block connections

Key:
Heavy duty terminal block: CT and VT circuits, type T modules
Medium duty: All other terminal blocks (27-pin, grey color)
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear
mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring
terminals per relay terminal.
If required, AREVA T&D can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in three different sizes
depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100.
Part Number Wire Size Insulation Color

ZB9124 901 0.25 - 1.65mm2 (22 - 16AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 - 2.63mm2 (16 - 14AWG) Blue
ZB9124 904 2.53 - 6.64mm2 (12 - 10AWG) Un-insulated*
Table 3: M4 90° crimp ring terminals

* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve
should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:
Current Transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5mm2
EIA(RS)485 Port See separate section
Other Circuits 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of
the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not
pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire
size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is
required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at
the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the
EIA(RS)485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring is protected by fuses of standard ratings
between 6A and 16A. Low voltage fuse-links rated for 250V minimum and compliant with
IEC60269-1 general application type gG with high rupturing capacity are acceptable. This
gives equivalent characteristics to HRC "Red Spot" fuse types NIT/TIA often specified
historically.
IN Where only one or two relays are wired as a fused spur, it is acceptable to use a 6A rating.
Generally, five relays could be connected on a spur protected at 10A, and ten relays for a
15A/16A fuse.
Alternatively, miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply
circuits.
For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should
be appropriately fused to protect the wire used.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-13
6.2 EIA(RS)485 port

Connections to the EIA(RS)485 port are made using a modular 5-terminal cabling connector.
It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of
1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
Each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors
PVC insulated
Nominal conductor area: 0.5mm2 per core
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
See SCADA Communications (P63x/UK CT) for detailed discussion on setting up an
EIA(RS)485 bus.
6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is
recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made
using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
6.4 EIA(RS)232 front port

Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can
be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total
capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal
shelled, D-type male plug. The pin allocations are detailed in section 1.8 of Getting Started
(P63x/UK GS).
6.5 Ethernet port (if applicable)

Fiber Optic Port
The relays can have an optional 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet port. FO connection is
recommended for use in permanent connections in a substation environment. The 10Mbit
port uses type ST connector and the 100Mbit port uses type SC connector, both compatible
with 850nm multi-mode fiber-optic cable.
RJ-45 Metallic Port
The user can connect to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX Ethernet hub; the port will
automatically sense which type of hub is connected. Due to possibility of noise and
interference on this part, it is recommended that this connection type be used for short-term
connections and over short distance. Ideally where the relays and hubs are located in the
same cubicle.
The connector for the Ethernet port is a shielded RJ-45. The table shows the signals and
pins on the connector.
Pin Signal Name Signal Definition

1 TXP Transmit (positive)
2 TXN Transmit (negative)
3 RXP Receive (positive)
4 - Not used IN
5 - Not used
6 RXN Receive (negative)
7 - Not used
8 - Not used
Table 4: Signals on the Ethernet connector

(IN) 14-14 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
6.6 Earth connection (case protective ground)

The unit must be reliably earthed to meet protective equipment earthing requirements. The
rack or panel mounted case must be earthed in the area of the rear sidepieces at the
location provided. The cross-sectional area of this earth conductor must also conform to
applicable national standards. A minimum conductor cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required
(3.3mm2 or 11AWG recommended in North America).
In addition, a protective earth connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module
(identified by the letters “PE” on the external connection diagram) is also required for proper
operation of the unit. The cross-sectional area of this earth conductor must also conform to
applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required.
The earthing connection at both locations must be low-inductance, therefore as short as
possible.
P1842ENa
Figure 11: Installing the case earth connection
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-15
7. P63x CASE DIMENSIONS
7.1 40TE case dimensions
Figure 12: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle
brackets and frame)
IN
P1933ENa
Figure 13: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 2 (using angle brackets
and frame)
(IN) 14-16 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
7.2 84TE case dimensions
Figure 14: Case dimensions for 84TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle
brackets and frame)
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-17
8. STANDARD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR THE P63x
P1951ENa
Figure 15: Standard schematic diagram for the P63x
Note: "Dot" convention for winding polarities shown. When using P1-P2,
S1-S2 standard notation. IN
• Dot on CT primary signifies P1 terminal
• Dot on CT secondary signifies S1 terminal
• Dot on VT primary signifies AN, BN, CN, YN polarity
• Dot on VT secondary signifies an, bn, cn, yn polarity

(IN) 14-18 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Blank Page
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-19
9. P63x EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P1739ENa
IN
Figure 16: P631 ring terminal connections (with all options shown)
(IN) 14-20 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1740ENa
IN
Figure 17: P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 1 of 2
Note 1: Slot 8 may contain either 24I type X input module or 4I type Y input
module. See Fig. 18 for type Y connections.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-21
P1742ENa
IN
Figure 18: P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 2 of 2
(IN) 14-22 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IN P1741ENa
Figure 19: P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 1 of 2
Note 1: Slot 8 may contain either 24I type X input module or 4I type Y input
module. See Fig. 16 for type X connections.
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-23
P1742ENa
IN
Figure 20: P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 2 of 2
(IN) 14-24 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1743ENa
Figure 21: P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2
IN
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-25
P1744ENa
Figure 22: P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 2 of 2
IN
(IN) 14-26 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P1745ENa
IN Figure 23: P634 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IN) 14-27
P1746ENa
Figure 24: P634 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 2 of 2 IN
(IN) 14-28 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
IN
Firmware and Service Manual P63x/UK VH/A54
Version History
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIRMWARE AND SERVICE

MANUAL
VERSION HISTORY

-406 (P633)
VH
P63x/UK VH/A54 Firmware and Service Manual
Version History
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
VH
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Version History
Firmware and Service Manual
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
- 15 Jan 2001 9 Original Issue
9 COMM1 software integration with switchable protocol
- 701 3 Apr 2001 9 Analog module software integration
9 Improved IRIG-B software
-601 -301 P634 only P63x/EN M/C11

- 702 17 May 2001
9 Original issue
- 703 2 Aug 2001 9 Improved calibration algorithm
Project specific introduction only
- 704 17 Dec 2001 9 Software support for ring terminal connection version
hardware
9 Ring terminal connection version hardware and software
option for all P63x
9 Optional thyristor switched output relay module available
9 COMM1 Courier protocol available
9 COMM2 software integration with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
9 Separate settings for secondary nominal current of phase and Previous
-602 - -302 25 Jan 2002 star point CTs Documents +
P63x/EN AD/B22
9 Signals for Id>> Triggered and Id>>> Triggered added
9
P63x/UK VH/A54
THRM1 and THRM2 p.u. measured values added
9 Signal for THRMx: Not Ready added
(VH) 15-1
9 Broken conductor detection function BC_x added
9 Overfluxing protection function V/f added
VH
VH
(VH) 15-2
P63x/UK VH/A54
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634
Software
Major Minor
- 25 Jan 2002 9 External logic input signals increased from 16 to 40
-602 Previous
- 705 -302 22 Feb 2002 9 Improved disturbance recording handler Documents +
Cont. P63x/EN AD/B22
- 706 6 Jun 2002 9 Russian character font correction
9 Order extension number entry correction
9 DIFF and REF_x amplitude matching factor restrictions
relaxed
9 DIFF zero sequence current filtering for odd numbered vector
groups is improved
9 DIFF setting ranges for tripping characteristic and
unrestrained element increased
9 DIFF setting to allow disabling of hysteresis for tripping
characteristic
- 27 Nov 2002 9 DIFF definite time delay trip added Previous

-603 -302 Documents +
9 REF operating modes for low impedance biased by maximum
P63x/EN AD/C32
phase current or high impedance added
9 REF setting range of the unrestrained element increased
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

9 Tripping signals for the application of low impedance REF on
autotransformers added
9 Accuracy of IDMT tripping times improved
9 Underfrequency minimum value and overfrequency maximum
Version History
values added to measured fault data
9 Setting range of V/f>> increased
-707 25 Mar 2003 9 Improved DTOC with faster trip command
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Version History
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634
Software
Major Minor
-603 9 Trip characteristic correction
-708 16 May 2003
Cont. 9 Improved saturation discriminator
P634 only
Previous
-604 - -303 9 Oct 2003 9 UCA2 software integration with Ethernet hardware documents +
P63x/EN AD/A43
9 Optional increased voltage thresholds for opto-inputs
9 Extended UCA2 software integration with Ethernet hardware
for all P63x Previous
-605 - -303 30 Apr 2004 documents +
9 Optional increased voltage thresholds for opto-inputs
P63x/EN AD/A43
9 Improved sensitivity in saturation stabilization
9 CTS function added
9 Disturbance recording maximum timer added
9 COMM1 software enhancement of clock time message from
4bit to 7bit
9 Optional new voltage thresholds for opto-inputs Previous
-606 - -304 20 May 2005 9 Positive and negative sequence p.u. current measurements documents +
added P63x/EN AD/A54
9 Clock synchronization priority setting added

9 Current summation for virtual ends extended to include
difference of two ends and sum of three ends
P63x/UK VH/A54
9 Setting range of m1 and m2 increased to 0.10 - 1.50
(VH) 15-3
VH
VH
(VH) 15-4
P63x/UK VH/A54
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634
Software
Major Minor
9 Regional English language data model with modified setting
texts similar to Px40 platform English texts (-800 option)
9 Implementation of new substation communication protocol
IEC 61850
9 IEC 61850 introduces function groups “IEC”, “GOOSE” and
“GSSE”
P63x/UK M/A54
-610 - -305 Jun 2006
9 MAIN: Phase reversal logic now available, for phase swapping (Regional English)
where generator/motor sets may operate bi-directionally
9 MAIN: Vector group numbers are now settable in each setting
group, allowing use for phase angle regulating transformers
9 IDMTn: Trip time accuracy improved
9 UCA2 protocol no longer supported
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Version History
MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Version History
Relay Software Version
-601 -602 -603 -604 -605 -606 -610
-601 9
-602 9
-603 9
-604 9
-605 9
-606 9
9
Setting File Software Version *
-610
P63x/UK VH/A54
* Incompatible settings files should be converted to the required relay software version prior to sending to the relay. This can be achieved using the
(VH) 15-5
Tools\Convert Settings File… command in S&R-103.
VH
P63x/UK VH/A54 Firmware and Service Manual
Version History
(VH) 15-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
VH
INDEX
A Cold restart
(OP) 5-136
Address mode (FD) 8-7
(GS) 3-14 (TS) 11-6
Alarms Commissioning
(GS) 3-4 (CM) 9-3
(OP) 5-135 Commissioning test record
(FD) 8-5
(CM) 9-22
(TS) 11-6
Communications
Amplitude matching
Courier interface
(OP) 5-12, 27
(AP) 6-13 (SC) 12-5
Analog output DNP3.0 interface
(ST) 4-40 (SC) 12-35

(OP) 5-103 Ethernet port
(MR) 7-6, 26, 65 (IN) 14-13
Analog readings GOOSE
(MR) 7-5 (ST) 4-26
Application notes (MR) 7-18, 24
(AP) 6-5 (SC) 12-51
Application overview GSSE
(IT) 1-8 (ST) 4-31

(MR) 7-19, 24, 63
Auto-transformer protection
(SC) 12-53
(AP) 6-26
IEC60870-5-103 interface
Auxiliary supply
(SC) 12-31
(TD) 2-4
IEC61850 interface
(SC) 12-48
B MODBUS interface
BCD-coded measured data (SC) 12-11
(OP) 5-104 Rear port
Bias characteristic (SC) 12-11
(AP) 6-11 SCADA
Binary inputs (see Opto inputs) (SC) 12-5

Connection diagrams
Boolean equations
(IN) 14-19
(OP) 5-78
(FD) 8-4 Control and testing
Broken conductor (MR) 7-62
(ST) 4-50, 69, 106 Coolant temperature acquisition

(OP) 5-68 (OP) 5-53
(MR) 7-57 (MR) 7-17
Busbar/mesh corner differential Courier interface (see Communications)
(AP) 6-31 Current summation
(ST) 4-62
C (OP) 5-117
Current transformer requirements
Case dimensions (AP) 6-35
(IN) 14-15 Current transformer supervision
Clock notation (ST) 4-50, 69, 105
(AP) 6-17 (OP) 5-70
Clock synchronization via opto-inputs (MR) 7-56, 69
(OP) 5-131
Index
D Frequency protection
(see also Underfrequency protection)
DC monitoring
(ST) 4-49, 68, 101
(ST) 4-37, 70 (OP) 5-58
(OP) 5-74, 96 (MR) 7-54, 68
(MR) 7-5, 25
Front port connection
Definite time overcurrent
(GS) 3-25
(ST) 4-48, 66, 83
Front view
(OP) 5-33
(MR) 7-41 (GS) 3-3
Differential high set Fuse rating
(AP) 5-18 (AP) 6-38
Differential protection
(ST) 4-47, 62, 78 G
(OP) 5-11
(AP) 6-10 Getting started
(MR) 7-15 (GS) 3-3
(CM) 9-13 Glossary
Dimensions (SG) 13-1
(IN) 14-15 GOOSE (see Communications)
Display and keypad Ground overcurrent (see Definite time overcurrent and
(GS) 3-8 Inverse time overcurrent)
Disturbance recorder GSSE (see Communications)
(ST) 4-60
(MR) 7-79
H
Disturbance recording
(OP) 5-145 Hardware overview
DNP3.0 interface (see Communications) (FD) 8-4
Dynamic settings Harmonic restraint
(ST) 4-85, 87, 89 (ST) 4-80
(OP) 5-22
High impedance
E
(ST) 4-81
Earth fault (see Definite time overcurrent and Inverse time (OP) 5-31
overcurrent) (AP) 6-20, 36
Environmental conditions (EMC) (CM) 9-18
(TD) 2-3 High-set differential
Error code (OP) 5-20
(TS) 11-4
Ethernet port (see Communications) I
External connection diagrams IDMT (see Inverse time overcurrent)
(IN) 14-19
IEC60870-5-103 interface (see Communications)
IEC61850 interface (see Communications)
F
Installation
Fault data acquisition (Fault records) (GS) 3-7
(OP) 5-140 (IN) 14-3
(MR) 7-75 Introduction
Fault panel (IT) 1-5
(ST) 4-9 Inverse time overcurrent
(OP) 5-84 (ST) 4-48, 66, 90
Firmware design (OP) 5-39
(FD) 8-3 (MR) 7-48
Firmware history IRIG-B time synchronization
(VH) 15-1 (ST) 4-34
Index (OP) 5-94
Frequency gradient monitoring
(MR) 7-24
(OP) 5-60
K O
Knee point voltage On-load checks

(AP) 6-35 (CM) 9-21
Operation
L (OP) 5-11
Operation panel
Language (Regional English language)
(ST) 4-9
(GS) 3-30 (OP) 5-84
LED indications Opto input assignment
(GS) 3-4 (ST) 4-35
LED indicators Opto inputs
(ST) 4-43 (OP) 5-95
(OP) 5-110 (FD) 8-5
(MR) 7-23 (CM) 9-9
Limit value monitoring Ordering options
(ST) 4-51, 70 (IT) 1-9
(OP) 5-74
Output relays
Local contact list
(OP) 5-100
(TS) 11-11
Overfluxing protection
Local control panel
(ST) 4-50, 69, 101
(ST) 4-9 (OP) 5-62
(OP) 5-83 (AP) 6-24
(MR) 7-23, 62 (MR) 7-18, 55, 69
Logic (see Programmable logic) Overload panel
(ST) 4-9
M (OP) 5-85
Overvoltage protection
Magnetizing inrush current (ST) 4-49, 68, 100
(OP) 5-22 (OP) 5-56
(AP) 6-18 (MR) 7-53
Maintenance
(MT) 10-3 P
Maintenance checks
(MT) 10-3 Panel mounting
Maintenance period (IN) 14-6
(MT) 10-3 Password protection
Measurements (GS) 3-22
(MR) 7-5 Phase current monitoring
Menu tree (ST) 4-51, 72

(OP) 5-76
(GS) 3-10
Phase overcurrent (see Definite time overcurrent and
METROSIL non-linear resistors Inverse time overcurrent)
(AP) 6-21
Phase reversal
MiCOM S1
(ST) 4-78
(GS) 3-26 (OP) 5-115
MODBUS interface Phase rotation
(SC) 12-11 (ST) 4-53
Module positions Plain text mode
(CM) 9-4 (GS) 3-14
Power supply
N (TD) 2-4
Problem identification
Negative sequence overcurrent (see Definite time
overcurrent and Inverse time overcurrent) (TS) 11-3
Programmable logic
Index
(ST) 4-51, 74
(OP) 5-78
(MR) 7-60
(FD) 8-4
R Setting group selection
(ST) 4-77
Rack mounting (OP) 5-133
(IN) 14-5 (MR) 7-30
Ratings Setting recommendations
(TD) 2-3 (AP) 6-33
Ratio correction Settings
(AP) 6-13 (ST) 4-5
Rear port communication (see Communications) Software overview
Rear view (FD) 8-3
(GS) 3-6 Software version
Records (VH) 15-1
(MR) 7-71 Status signals
Reference power (MR) 7-18
(ST) 4-62 Symbols and glossary
(OP) 5-12, 27 (SG) 13-1
(AP) 6-13
Regional language T
(GS) 3-30
Relay outputs Technical data
(CM) 9-9 (TD) 2-1
Relay structure Temperature monitoring
(FD) 8-3 (ST) 4-70
(OP) 5-74, 96
Repair and modification authorization form (RMA)
(MR) 7-5, 25
(TS) 11-10
Terminal block connections
Repair and modification procedure
(IN) 14-12
(TS) 11-10
Terminal references
Restricted earth fault
(CM) 9-4
(ST) 4-48, 63, 81
Thermal ammeter
(OP) 5-26
(AP) 6-19 (OP) 5-118
(MR) 7-16, 41 (MR) 7-7
(CM) 9-18 Thermal max. demand
Ring terminals (OP) 5-118
(IN) 14-12 Thermal overload
RTD (ST) 4-49, 67, 97
(ST) 4-37 (OP) 5-50
(OP) 5-96 (MR) 7-16, 51, 68
(MR) 7-5, 25 Time dependent characteristics
(CM) 9-11 (OP) 5-41
Timers
S (OP) 5-81
Troubleshooting
Safety section
(TS) 11-3
(SS) - 3
Type tests
SCADA communications (see Communications)
(TD) 2-1
Schematic diagram
(IN) 14-17
U
Secondary injection
(CM) 9-11 Underfrequency protection
Self testing & diagnostics (ST) 4-49, 68, 101
(OP) 5-134 (OP) 5-58
(FD) 8-5 (MR) 7-54, 68
Setting checks Undervoltage protection
Index (CM) 9-13 (ST) 4-49, 68, 100
(OP) 5-56
(MR) 7-53
Unpacking
(IN) 14-4
Vector group
(ST) 4-78
(OP) 5-15
(AP) 6-14
Version history
(VH) 15-1
Virtual winding
(ST) 4-62
(OP) 5-117
Voltage protection
(ST) 4-49, 68, 100
(OP) 5-56
(MR) 7-53
Warm restart
(OP) 5-135
(FD) 8-7
(TS) 11-6
Weight
(TD) 2-1
Zero sequence current filtering

(OP) 5-17
(AP) 6-14
Index
Index
Publication: P63x/UK M/A54
AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Micom P631, P632, P633, P634: Transformer Differential Protection

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P631, P632, P633, P634: Transformer Differential Protection

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM

P631, P632, P633,

Language Version -800

© 2006, AREVA. All rights reserved.

Safety Section P63x/EN SS/D11 SS

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

6.2 Protective class 7

6.3 Installation category 7

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment operating conditions

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

6.1 Protective fuse rating

6.2 Protective class

6.3 Installation category

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Date: 16th June 2006

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-1

1. MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE 3

3.2 Ordering options 9

Figure 1: Functional diagram 8

(IT) 1-2 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-3

1. MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE

(IT) 1-4 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

P63x/UK SC SCADA Communications

IT Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-5

− P range protection relays;

− M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;

− S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.

(IT) 1-6 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

3.1 Functional overview

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW P631 P632 P633 P634

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-7

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW P631 P632 P633 P634

* - Optional communications items specified at time of order.

• Setting group selection

• Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging)

• Overload data acquisition

• Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)

• Fault data acquisition

(IT) 1-8 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Functions overview P631 P632 P633 P634

IT 24 V/f Overexcitation protection - 1 1 1

Figure 1: Functional diagram

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 (IT) 1-9

3.2 Ordering options

(IT) 1-10 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Information Required with Order - P632

Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1